3 9000 670 PDF

DanLoad 6000
REFERENCE MANUAL
__________________________________________
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.

AN EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT COMPANY
HOUSTON, TEXAS
Part Number: 3-9000-670

Revision 6.A
Supporting Software Version 6.00
SEPTEMBER 2006
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
DANIEL
DANLOAD 6000
REFERENCE MANUAL
NOTICE
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC. ("DANIEL") SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR
EDITORIAL ERRORS IN THIS MANUAL OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL. DANIEL M AKES NO
W ARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IM PLIED, INCLUDING THE IM PLIED WARRANTIES OF
M ERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO SE W ITH RESPECT TO THIS
M ANUAL A ND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL DANIEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM AGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM ITED TO, LOSS OF
PRODUCTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE OR USE AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING
W ITHOUT LIM ITATION FOR CAPITAL, FUEL AND POW ER, AND CLAIM S OF THIRD PARTIES.
PRODUCT NAM ES USED HEREIN ARE FOR M ANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION ONLY
AND M AY BE TRADEM ARKS/REGISTERED TRADEM ARKS OF THESE COM PANIES.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION ARE PRESENTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY, AND
W HILE EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THEIR ACCURACY, THEY ARE NOT TO BE
CONSTRUED AS W ARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
PRODUCTS OR SERVICES DESCRIBED HEREIN OR THEIR USE OR APPLICABILITY. ALL SALES ARE
GOVERNED BY DANIELS TERMS AND CONDITIONS, W HICH ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. W E
RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR IMPROVE THE DESIGNS OR SPECIFICATIONS OF SUCH PRODUCTS
AT ANY TIME.
DANIEL DOES NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION, USE OR MAINTENANCE OF ANY
PRODUCT . RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROPER SELECTION, USE AND M AINTENANCE OF ANY DANIEL
PRODUCT REMAINS SOLELY W ITH THE PURCHASER AND END-USER.
DANIEL AND THE DANIEL LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC. THE
EMERSON LOGO IS A TRADEMARK AND SERVICE MARK OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO.
COPYRIGHT 2006
BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.
HOUSTON, TEXAS, U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or
copied in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic or
mechanical - without first receiving the written permission of
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., Houston, Texas, U.S.A.
Preface
_________________________________________________________
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
WARRANTY
1. LIM ITED W ARRANTY: Subject to the limitations contained in Section 2 herein and except as otherwise expressly
provided herein, Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. ("Daniel") warrants that the firmware will execute the
programming instructions provided by Daniel, and that the Goods manufactured or Services provided by Daniel will be
free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and care until the expiration of the applicable warranty
period. Goods are warranted for twelve (12) months from the date of initial installation or eighteen (18) months from
the date of shipment by Daniel, whichever period expires first. Consumables and Services are warranted for a period
of 90 days from the date of shipment or completion of the Services. Products purchased by Daniel from a third party for
resale to Buyer ("Resale Products") shall carry only the warranty extended by the original manufacturer. Buyer agrees
that Daniel has no liability for Resale Products beyond making a reasonable commercial effort to arrange for procurement
and shipping of the Resale Products. If Buyer discovers any warranty defects and notifies Daniel thereof in writing during
the applicable warranty period, Daniel shall, at its option, promptly correct any errors that are found by Daniel in the
firmware or Services, or repair or replace F.O.B. point of manufacture that portion of the Goods or firmware found by
Daniel to be defective, or refund the purchase price of the defective portion of the Goods/Services. All replacements or
repairs necessitated by inadequate maintenance, normal wear and usage, unsuitable power sources, unsuitable
environmental conditions, accident, misuse, improper installation, modification, repair, storage or handling, or any other
cause not the fault of Daniel are not covered by this limited warranty, and shall be at Buyer's expense. Daniel shall not
be obligated to pay any costs or charges incurred by Buyer or any other party except as may be agreed upon in writing
in advance by an authorized Daniel representative. All costs of dismantling, reinstallation and freight and the time and
expenses of Daniel's personnel for site travel and diagnosis under this warranty clause shall be borne by Buyer unless
accepted in writing by Daniel. Goods repaired and parts replaced during the warranty period shall be in warranty for the
remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. This limited warranty is the only
warranty made by Daniel and can be amended only in a writing signed by an authorized representative of Daniel. Except
as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR W ARRANTIES OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
Buyer acknowledges
and agrees that corrosion or erosion of materials is not covered by this warranty.
OR ANY OTHER MATTER W ITH RESPECT TO ANY OF THE GOODS OR SERVICES.
2. LIM ITATION OF REM EDY AND LIABILITY: DANIEL SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
CAUSED BY DELAY IN PERFORMANCE. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF
W ARRANTY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR, CORRECTION, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND
OF PURCHASE PRICE UNDER THE LIMITED W ARRANTY CLAUSE IN SECTION 1 HEREIN. IN NO EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION (W HETHER BASED IN CONTRACT,
INFRINGEMENT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OTHER TORT OR OTHERW ISE), SHALL DANIEL'S
LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS CUSTOMERS EXCEED THE PRICE TO BUYER OF THE SPECIFIC
GOODS MANUFACTURED OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY DANIEL GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM OR CAUSE
OF ACTION. BUYER AGREES THAT IN NO EVENT SHALL DANIEL'S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS
CUSTOMERS EXTEND TO INCLUDE INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES. THE
TERM "CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
ANTICIPATED PROFITS, REVENUE OR USE, AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING W ITHOUT LIMITATION
FOR CAPITAL, FUEL AND POW ER, AND CLAIM S OF BUYERS CUSTOMERS.
ii
Preface
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
Page
INTRODUCTION
Functional Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
General Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
INSTALLATION
2.1
DanLoad 6000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Card Cage Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
DanLoad 6000 Board Description and Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.2.1
2.4.2.2
2.4.3
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection/Installation of Electrical Wire / Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input / Output Field Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection/Installation of Wire Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-41
2-41
2-43
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hardware Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-45
3.0
SETUP
3.1
Overview of DanLoad 6000 Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2
3.2.1
Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Data Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Table of Contents
iii
_________________________________________________________
3.2.2
Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3
3.3.1
Initial Setup Procedure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4
Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
Process I/O Signal Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Physical I/O Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Inverted Discrete Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
Product Delivery and Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70

Sequential Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
In-Line Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.7
3.7.1
Temperature and Pressure Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

Temperature Correction to a Non-Standard
Reference Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.8
Mass Loading Using a Mass Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.9
Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.10.5
Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additive Injection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additive Injection Configuration (Typical Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additive Meter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Stream Injection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Rate Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-88
3-92
3-99
3-109
3-112
3-119
3.11
3.11.1
3-121
3.11.6
3.11.7
3.11.8
Transaction Storage Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transaction Storage / Transaction Ticket
Setup Procedure (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Ticket Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relation Between Batch Storage and
Transaction Storage Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relation Between Transaction Storage Codes /
Batch Storage Codes / Program Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Ticket Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Ticket Layout Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm BitMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12
Compartment Size Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
3.13
Cutoff (End of Day Processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.11.4
3.11.5
iv
3-122
3-134
3-136
3-148
3-149
3-151
3-152
3-156
Table of Contents
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.14
3.15
Set Contrast / Backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166

CALMON - Turbine Meter Calibration Monitoring for the
DanLoad 6000 Electronic Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
3.16
Configuration Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
4.0
OPERATION
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.1.1
4.1.1.2
4.1.1.3
Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Alpha-Numeric / Graphic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2
4.2.1
Batch Delivery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Controlling the Batch Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3
Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.4
4.4.1
Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Example Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
Alarm Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
5.0
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-5
4-6
FLOW METER PROVING
5.1
5.1.1
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
Tank Prover Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-24
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-31
5-31
Table of Contents
_________________________________________________________
6.0
vi
PROGRAM CODE DESCRIPTIONS
6.1
Program Code Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2
Program Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.3
Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4
Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.5
Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.6
Meter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.7
Component Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.8
Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.9
Digital Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6.10
Pulse Per Unit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.11
Additive Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6.12
Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
6.13
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.14
I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
6.15
Additive I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144
6.16
Component I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148
6.17
Temperature / Pressure / Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158
6.18
Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180
6.19
Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186
6.20
6.20.1
Dynamic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190

Dynamic Data Display Data Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195
6.21
Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202
Table of Contents
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

6.22
Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208
6.23
Additive Pumps / Block Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-228
6.24
LPG / Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-230
6.25
Transaction Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-239
6.26
Transaction Ticket Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-248
6.27
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-254
6.28
CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-257
APPENDICES
A
Installation Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
A.7
A.8
A.9
A.10
A.11
A.12
A.13
A.14
A.15
A.16
A.17
A.18
A.19
A.20
Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Configuration Parameters Setup (Table A-11) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Meter Parameters Setup (Table A-12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Control Valve Parameters Setup (Table A-13) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Parameters Setup (Table A-14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Block Valve / Pump Parameters Setup (Table A-15) . . . .
Delivery Parameters Setup (Table A-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blending Parameters Setup (Table A-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Compensation Parameters Setup (Table A-18) . . . . . . . .
Pressure Compensation Parameters Setup (Table A-19) . . . . . . . . . . .
Density Compensation Parameters Setup (Table A-20) . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters Setup (Table A-21) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additive Parameters Setup (Table A-22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Setup (Table A-23) . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Data Display Parameters Setup (Table A-24) . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications / Data Logging Parameters Setup (Table A-25) . . .
Transaction Storage Parameters Setup (Table A-26) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaction Ticket Parameters Setup (Table A-27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Parameters Setup (Table A-28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
A-7
A-19
A-22
A-24
A-26
A-28
A-30
A-33
A-35
A-37
A-38
A-40
A-41
A-44
A-46
A-54
A-56
A-61
A-65
Configuration Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
D-1
vii
_________________________________________________________
Field Wiring Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Other Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
FIGURES
1-1
Typical Load Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
Standard Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shallow Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Cage Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Supply Voltage Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Input Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Board - Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU and Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Analog Inputs Program Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUART Board Address Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-Ch. Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-Ch. Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPMC Version Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . .
Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secondary Keypad / Display Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-17
2-22
2-24
2-26
2-26
2-29
2-31
2-33
2-46
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Code View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alpha-Numeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Action Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (w/o Stem Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-12
3-18
3-24
3-30
3-47
3-75
3-76
3-12
Transaction Ticket (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
viii
Table of Contents
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DanLoad Default Ticket Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Contrast / Backlighting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
Keypad Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Functions (Batch Delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recipe Selection Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additive Selection Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input / Outputs Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUART Ports Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAN Port Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-7
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-50
4-52
4-54
4-54
5-1
5-2
5-3
Prover / Meter Volume Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meter Proving Report For Tank Prover Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meter Proving Report For Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Meter Meter-Factors Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
5-39
5-40
5-41
6-1
6-2
6-3
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Parameters List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
CPU v2 Analog Calibration Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-262
Table of Contents
3-127
3-128
3-135
3-166
ix
_________________________________________________________
This page intentionally left blank.
Table of Contents
Section 1
Introduction
Functional Characteristics
Hardware Configuration
General Terminology
_________________________________________________________
This manual contains information on the installation, setup, and operation of the DanLoad 6000.
The DanLoad 6000 is a versatile microcomputer based batch delivery controller and liquid flow
computer. This type of instrument is commonly referred to as a Preset in the tanker vehicle loading
industry. The DanLoad 6000 is easy to setup on-site for utilization in virtually any application that
requires precise flow measurement and control of liquid batch deliveries. Batch delivery operations
are easily conducted in a logical manner. A batch delivery can be setup and started with several
intuitive commands. The instrument provides a graphic display of the progress of the batch delivery.
Notes
This manual covers the DanLoad 6000 software version 5.74 released in July, 2001. The
DanLoad 6000 software version number is displayed during the startup sequence after power is
applied to the instrument and in the diagnostics menu. This software version is compatible
with both the original CPU board and the new version 2 CPU (CPU v2) board.
How to use the Manual

The information contained in this manual is intended for use by operators, shift supervisors,
instrument technicians, process engineers, and terminal / plant managers. To the extent that is
practical, each section of the manual is designed as a stand alone document. The last section,
Section 6, contains a reference for the function of all program codes (parameters) that define the
operation of the DanLoad 6000. Each program code is identified by a three-digit number between
001 and 991. Program codes are shown in the following forms in this text.
#
001 Passcode
Unique program code.
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve to be controlled
Sequence of four similar three-digit

program codes. Each three-digit
number applies to one flow meter.
Program code sequence is in flow
meter sequence in numerical order (1
to 4).
Introduction
____________________________________________________________ 1 - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
481 / ... / 655 Name
Sequence of similar three-digit program code

numbers is too long to list all numbers. The
ellipsis (...) is a place holder for additional
program code numbers. In this example, the
ellipsis represent 28 additional recipe name
program code numbers.
Information applicable to new installations is located in the following sections.

#
#
#
#
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 6
Introduction
Installation
Setup
Program Code Definitions
Information applicable to operation of an existing system is located in the following sections.

#
#
Section 4 - Operation
Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving
The individual sections contain the following information.

#
Section 1 - Introduction (this section)

This section contains an overview of the capabilities of the DanLoad 6000. A glossary of
terms used throughout the manual is located at the rear of this section.
Section 2 - Installation
This section contains information on installation planning, mechanical installation, and
electrical installation of the DanLoad 6000. Design considerations for on-site placement,
mounting, and wiring methods are included in this section. Also read Section 3, Section 6,
Appendix A, Appendix B, and Appendix C before installing the instrument.
Section 3 - Setup
This section contains information on the initial setup (functional configuration) and
modification of setup parameters stored in the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 retains
setup information in non-volatile memory. Therefore, the initial setup can be performed in
a shop or office, before on-site physical installation of the instrument. Also read Section 2,
Section 6, Appendix A, Appendix B, and Appendix C before installing the instrument.
1-2
____________________________________________________________ Introduction
_________________________________________________________
#
Section 4 - Operation
This section contains detailed information on local operation of the DanLoad 6000. Single
product delivery, multi-component blending, and additive injection procedures are covered.
Information on data logs and fault analysis and correction is also located in this section.
Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving

This section contains information on operator directed, manual flow meter proving using the
DanLoad 6000. The instrument can monitor and perform flow meter proofs using tank meter
provers, master flow meters, or mechanical displacement pipe provers.
Section 6 - Program Code Definitions

This section contains reference information for all program codes (parameters) which
determine the functional configuration of the DanLoad 6000.
Appendix A - Parameter Configuration

This appendix contains several tables that can be photocopied and used as an aid in
configuration of the DanLoad 6000 and interconnect wiring. The information in this
appendix is related to the information in Section 2 - Installation and Section 3 - Setup.
Appendix B - Configuration Record

This appendix contains a table that can be copied to provide a place to document the
configuration of an installation.
Appendix C - LPG Loading Configuration Checklist

This appendix contains instructions and listings that can be copied to provide a place to
document LPG loading configurations.
Appendix D - Spare Parts

This appendix contains lists of recommended DanLoad 6000 spare parts.
Appendix E - Field Wiring Drawings

This appendix contains drawings that are relevant to the set up and operation of the DanLoad
6000 installation in the field.
Appendix F - Other Drawings

This appendix contains other drawings that may be helpful for configuring and operating the
DanLoad 6000.
Introduction
____________________________________________________________ 1 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Overview
The DanLoad 6000 can be operated in an independent stand-alone mode with batch delivery
operations monitored and controlled from the operator control panel located on front of the DanLoad
6000. The DanLoad 6000 can also function as a slave unit in a terminal automation system network.
The information contained in this manual covers local operation of the DanLoad 6000 in the Standalone Mode. The DanLoad 6000 accepts process input signals from and provides process control
signals to the common instruments and devices used in liquid batch delivery systems. These
instruments / devices include: liquid flow meters (turbine and positive displacement type), solenoid
controlled digital flow control valves, additive injectors, security devices for verifying electrical
ground connections and compartment overfills, electric motor driven pumps, and motor operated
block valves. The DanLoad 6000 can be easily setup (configured) to deliver single component
liquids or to blend up to four liquid components in precise ratios, with or without additive injection.
The various possible delivery and blending functions of the DanLoad 6000 are controlled by operator
selectable recipes (predefined delivery control procedures). Additive injection is controlled by
manual selection, recipe selection, or automatic selection from a terminal automation system. These
features allow one DanLoad 6000 and the associated liquid delivery equipment to deliver many
different combinations of liquid products, based on requirements of the client or receiver of the
delivered product.
One common application for a DanLoad 6000 is as an on-site controller for delivering refined
hydrocarbon liquid products from loading terminal storage tanks to mobile tanks, such as tanker
trucks, rail tank cars, and tank barges. Some other applications include liquid component blending
and / or additive injection in refinery or chemical plant processes. In addition, liquid components
can be blended with or without additive injection into flowing pipelines or into storage tanks. A
typical load rack installation with a DanLoad 6000 and associated equipment is shown in Figure 1 1.
1-4
____________________________________________________________ Introduction
_________________________________________________________
Figure 1-1
Introduction
____________________________________________________________ 1 - 5
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

1.1
Functional Characteristics
The functional characteristics and capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 are presented in this section.
These functional characteristics and capabilities are closely related to the hardware configuration of
the instrument. Section 1.2 - Hardware Configuration, contains general information on the
hardware configuration of the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 is delivered from the factory with
several basic electronic modules and other optional modules to accommodate process input / output
signals. The required process input / output signal boards are determined by the loading system
configuration and should be specified when the DanLoad 6000 is purchased. The mix of process
input / output signal boards and communications modules is field reconfigurable. The hardware
configuration determines the input / output process signal handling capacity and the data logging /
data communications capability of the instrument. The flow measurement and logical functions
listed below are available in all hardware configurations of the DanLoad 6000. However, each
unique installation requires a specific complement of process input / output signal boards, based on
the actual devices that are monitored and controlled in the system.
The DanLoad 6000 can monitor and control operation of up to four flow meters, up to four flow
control valves, delivery of up to four products, and up to six additive injectors and additive meters
simultaneously. The minimum configuration consists of one flow meter measuring one component
(liquid product). Two high resolution pulse per unit volume outputs are provided for use by external
equipment, such as meter prover counters. Product deliveries and component blending deliveries
are selected by up to thirty configurable recipes (batch delivery / blending control procedures) and
automatic or manual selection of additive injection. Any additive(s) can be associated with any
recipe(s). The actual implementation of the various possible process operations are covered in detail
in other sections of this manual.
#
Batch Delivery
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control quantity-based preset batch delivery of
one product or a blend of two to four liquid components. During blending operations, one to four
flow meter streams are controlled independently from the other flow meter streams. Any
combination of pulse output type flow meters of different sizes and flow handling capacities can be
monitored and controlled by one DanLoad 6000. Each flow meter stream can have unique
characteristics for the liquid component. For accounting and tracking purposes a batch delivery or
group of consecutive batch deliveries can be combined to form one transaction.
In addition, the DanLoad 6000 can control batch loading of up to four independent loading arms,
if only one loading arm is in use at any one time.
1-6
____________________________________________________________ Introduction
_________________________________________________________
#
Blending
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control gross or standard quantity based blending
of several liquid components. Component blending can be performed by one of the following
selectable methods.
#
Sequential, automatic block valve control
Sequential, manual block valve control
In-line, proportional
In-line, non-proportional
Side Stream Blending
Sequential blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components or transfers, one component
at a time to the receiving tank by using block valves, either automatically or manually controlled.
Components are delivered in a time sequence through one flow meter / flow control valve stream.
In-line blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components simultaneously measured by
individual flow meters / flow control valves, into one composite delivery stream. The blend ratio
is precisely maintained during in-line proportional blending. The blend ratio is roughly maintained
during in-line non-proportional blending. However, the blend ratio of a completed batch load is
precise after the batch has been completely loaded.
"Side" stream blending is similar to in-line blending except one product component is delivered
upstream to another product component. "Side" stream blending is typically used to inject ethanol
into gasoline. Ethanol is injected into the gasoline stream and the blend is measured by the custody
transfer meter.
The DanLoad 6000, Version 6.0 provides the ability of ethanol blending with gasoline. To
accomplish this, an ethanol meter can be added and ethanol will be injected upstream into the
gasoline product stream. When ethanol is injected into the gasoline stream the gasoline meter now
will measure the blended product and cannot account for just the gasoline component. Also when
ethanol is blended with gasoline, the gross volume of the blend changes due to the expansion of the
mix. To accurately measure the gasoline-ethanol blend it is important to measure the blended
product. This configuration provides the ability of ethanol blending with gasoline. This type of
mixing is termed as "Side" Stream Blending.
Introduction
____________________________________________________________ 1 - 7
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Additive Injection
The DanLoad 6000's additive control functionality is designed with the following objectives:
#
Allows direct control of additive injection (for up to 6 physical additives) via an

"additive panel" (additive meter and on/off valve), thus making so-called "smart"
additive injectors obsolete. This also makes the DanLoad 6000 a more attractive
economical solution for load rack automation when additive injection is required.
Allows different injection methods (additive injector types) for each logical additive
so that old and new additive injection equipment can be mixed on a single loading
arm, e.g. mix other units and additive panels on the same loading arm.
Provides multiple injection rates (concentrations) per additive via the "Multi Rate"
additive selection method.
Provides recipe gross and standard running totalizers and additive running totalizers
to facilitate product and additive inventory management.
Provides (functional) backward compatibility with previous DanLoad 6000 versions,

though actual program codes may be different.
Provides reporting (data logging) capabilities to facilitate product and additive

inventory management and configuration.
Additive volume is measured via a K-factor per additive which is used for both authorized and
unauthorized additive flow. The Multi Rate additive selection method allows multiple additive
ratios (concentrations of additive) to be configured per additive by configuring an additive ratio per
recipe. The DanLoad 6000 runs a cutoff (end of day processing) every 24 hours based on the
configured cutoff hour. The totalizer and throughput data logs can be reprinted using the Reprint
cutoff option in the program mode menu. Recipe and additive running totalizers allow product and
additive throughput for a particular customer to be monitored. The configuration summary data log
can be printed from the diagnostics menu in the manual operating mode.
#
Meter Proving
The DanLoad 6000 can be used to perform manual flow meter proofs. Tank provers, master meters,
or mechanical displacement meter proves can be used for flow meter proving.
Transaction Storage / User Defined Transaction Ticket
Various data accumulated during each batch delivery and groups of batch deliveries (transaction)
can be selected for storage in non-volatile memory. This data can be acquired by a terminal
automation system and / or printed on user defined pre-printed transaction tickets. Ticket formats
can be designed to meet the user's requirements.
1-8
____________________________________________________________ Introduction
_________________________________________________________
#
LPG / Pressure Control
LPG (liquid petroleum gas) can be measured (temperature and pressure corrected) and the flow
control valve can be automatically controlled to maintain the minimum back pressure. Other
features include Mercaptan vessel fill and display of external faults. Appendix C provides a LPG
Loading Configuration Checklist.
#
Calibration Monitoring
Preliminary support of calibration monitoring is provided in the form of a Calibration failure alarm
per meter and a CALMON status screen in the program mode. Section 3.9.3 Additive Meter
Calibration and CALMON provides a brief summary of the CALMON program codes.
1.2
Hardware Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 contains electronic modules in the form of plug-in printed circuit boards. The
basic hardware configuration of the instrument is required for normal operation. In many cases, the
instrument in the basic hardware configuration has the capacity to monitor and control the batch
delivery installation. In other cases, additional process input / output signal expansion printed
circuit boards and / or data communications modules may be required. Flow calculations and logical
control capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 in the basic hardware configuration and the fully expanded
configuration are identical. Hardware expansion of the instrument only increases the process signal
handling capacity and / or provides data signal handling capability. Information on hardware
configuration is contained in Section 2 - Installation. The basic configuration of a DanLoad 6000
is described below.
#
Integral text / graphics display and operator keypad mounted in a rugged weatherproof case,
designed for outside installation in NEC Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardous
atmosphere environments.
One DC Voltage power supply with factory selectable power input of 115 Vac or 230 Vac,
47 to 63 Hertz.
One main processor (CPU version 1) board with two micro-controllers, shared memory,
non-volatile memory, and other related logic and process signal circuitry. Two swing arm
status inputs. And optionally (requires addition of a module to the version 1 main processor
board):
#
One RS-485 port and one RS-232 port OR two RS-485 ports.
One flow meter pulse input board, able to process two flow meter pulse inputs (two flow
meters or IP-252 pulse integrity from one flow meter) and provide two discrete DC Voltage
control outputs.
One discrete AC input / output board, able to process two status inputs and eight control
outputs (90 to 230 Vac).
Introduction
____________________________________________________________ 1 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

1.3
General Terminology
The terminology used throughout this manual is defined in the table below. Section 6 - Program
Code Definitions contains additional information which helps clarify these terms. Some of the
definitions are based on information contained in American Petroleum Institute (API) standards and
industry accepted use. Other national standards use similar terminology.
Term
Definition
additive
A liquid that is injected into a primary liquid component in relatively small

quantities, usually less than four percent of the delivered volume total.
Additives are injected into the primary liquid component by an injector
mechanism which places a known, fixed volume of the additive into the
primary liquid component stream for each injector pulse received from the
DanLoad 6000.
arm
(also: swing arm, loading arm) A movable pipe / hose assembly used at a
tanker truck loading island. The arm can be designed for either top loading
or bottom loading to the tanker compartments. A swing arm can be
positioned to load at either side of the loading island or the parked state.
batch
A preset, quantity-based product delivery or blended component delivery of

a single recipe.
blend stream
Blend stream is the blended product stream and is a mix of both gasoline and
ethanol.
blending
The process of mixing two or more liquid components to form a composite

delivered stream. The DanLoad 6000 can control blending based on a
predetermined recipe by the sequential (automatic or manual) or the in-line
(proportional or non-proportional) methods. The quantity of each component
in a blend is typically greater than two to four percent of the blended product.
Injection of very small quantities of liquids, less than four percent of the
blended product, is usually controlled by the additive injection process.
component
Any liquid metered and controlled by the DanLoad 6000. Liquid

hydrocarbons refined from crude oil and LPGs (such as propane) are usually
referred to as products. Components are base products or tank products
stored at a distribution terminal. The component is measured before being
blended with other components. Additives may be injected before (upstream
of) or after (downstream of) the component meter.
1 - 10 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
_________________________________________________________
Term
Definition
gross quantity
The indicated quantity times the meter factor derived from a meter proving
of the flow meter at a specific flow rate.
Calculation: gross quantity = indicated quantity times meter factor
indicated quantity
The change in the flow meter reading that occurs during a product flow
measurement operation. (Not displayed by the DanLoad 6000)
Calculation: indicated quantity = end reading minus start reading
IP-252
Institute of Petroleum standard 252. A British standard for pulse fidelity and
security for pulse output type flow meters. Program codes 233 and 234
define the operation of this function. (Note: Equivalent standard is API
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards / Chapter 5 - Metering /
Section 5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow Measurement Pulsed-Data
Transmission Systems.)
K-factor (system factor)

The pulses per unit quantity generated by a pulse output type flow meter. The
K-factor is also called the system factor. The nominal value is determined by
flow meter design and factory water flow calibration. The average Kfactors for the flow meters are usually indicated on the flow meter
nameplates.
load
[Sequential blending] In multi-component blending, a load is the completed

delivery of one component of a batch. The completion of loading all
components in the batch completes the batch delivery. If the recipe only
loads one component, a load corresponds to a batch delivery.
[In-line blending] Each component of the blend is loaded simultaneously.
Depending on the blend ratio, the low-proportion components are loaded
completely during the time that the high proportion component(s) are being
loaded. After loading of the highest proportion component has been
terminated, all component loads and the batch delivery are complete.
loading island
(also loading rack) An installation of one or more loading arms or risers

used to deliver liquid components to a tanker vehicle located on one or both
sides of the island, depending on the design of the island.
loading riser
The related instruments and devices, located in a meter stream, that provide
the liquid component loading capability to a mobile tanker vehicle. (Note:
The flow meter piping can also be installed horizontally, if desired.)
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 11
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Term
Definition
load spot
(also bay, lane) One side of a loading island, a position where a tanker
vehicle parks for a loading operation. One load spot can have one or more
loading arms.
meter factor
A number obtained by dividing the actual volume of liquid passed through

a flow meter during a meter proving operation by the volume registered by
the flow meter. The meter factor is used in flow calculations to correct the
indicated volume (end flow meter registration minus start flow meter
registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter throughput at
operating conditions)
Meter factor
Meter prover volume corrected to standard conditions

----------------------------------------------------Flow meter indicated vol corrected to std conditions
meter proving
A procedure used to determine the meter factor for a flow meter. The Kfactor (exact number of pulses per a volume unit that are generated by a flow
meter) is determined at the factory. The K-factor is used to derive a
mathematical factor, known as meter factor, that is used to adjust results of
the internal flow calculations performed by the DanLoad 6000. (Note: The
flow meter is not re-calibrated; determination of the meter factor allows the
operator to manually re-calibrate the DanLoad 6000 so that the nonadjustable calibration characteristic [pulses per volume unit (K-factor)]
of the flow meter is incorporated into the flow calculations.)
permissive
A discrete signal from a device that is input to a discrete input in the

DanLoad 6000. The signal is used by the DanLoad 6000 to allow a product
delivery to be initiated or allow a product delivery to continue. Permissive
contacts are CLOSED in the normal or safe state and OPEN in the abnormal
or unsafe state.
preset
A generic term that describes the functional instrument group of the DanLoad
6000. The term originated from mechanical and electrical preset counters.
The DanLoad 6000 provides much more versatility and capability compared
to a simple mechanical or electrical preset counter.
primary blend stream component

A blended product measured by a primary blend stream meter is called a
primary blend stream component.
1 - 12 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
_________________________________________________________
Term
Definition
primary blend stream meter (sales meter)

A meter measuring the gasoline-ethanol blend is called a primary blend
stream meter.
program code
One of approximately 1000 parameters that define the operation of the

DanLoad 6000. All program codes are defined in Section 6.
quantity (example: gross standard quantity)

The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operational
temperature and pressure, indicated in one of the following corrected units:
cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.
recipe
A pre-entered delivery / blending / control description that allows the

DanLoad 6000 to automatically control the product quantity or total quantity
based on percentages of multiple components during a batch delivery
operation. Up to thirty recipes can be defined in the DanLoad 6000.
side stream
Side stream is the controlled stream and is a term referred to the ethanol
product. The ethanol product is metered and can be controlled and measured.
side stream component

A mix component measured by both a side stream meter and a primary blend
stream meter is called a side stream component. Ethanol is referred as a side
stream component.
side stream meter
A meter measuring the side component (ethanol) is called a side stream

meter.
standard quantity
The gross quantity corrected to standard temperature and/or pressure. This
is a quantity measurement.
Calculation: standard quantity = gross quantity times CTLM (correction
factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the meter)
times CPLM (correction factor for the effect of pressure on the
liquid in the meter)
transaction
Group of one or more consecutive batch deliveries for accounting purposes.

The batches that comprise a transaction always use one recipe, one additive
selection, and one loading side. An example of a transaction is the delivery
of multiple batches to different compartments in a single tanker vehicle.
Introduction ____________________________________________________________ 1 - 13
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Term
Definition
volume (example: indicated volume; gross volume)

The actual space occupied by the product measured, indicated in one of the
following actual units: cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.
wild stream
Wild stream is the uncontrolled stream and is a term referred to the gasoline
product. This is because the gasoline product cannot be exclusively metered,
controlled or measured.
wild stream component

A product component measured as part of (Primary Blend Stream Component
Side Stream Component) a primary blend stream component by a primary
blend stream meter is called a wild stream component. Gasoline is referred
as wild stream component.
1 - 14 ____________________________________________________________ Introduction
Section 2
Installation
Specifications
Installation Planning
Mechanical Installation
Electrical Installation
_________________________________________________________
Note
Appendix A contains several tables with data on the physical and functional configuration of
the DanLoad 6000. These tables can be photocopied and unique configuration data can be
manually entered to provide a record of specific DanLoad 6000 installations.
This section contains DanLoad 6000 specifications and information on installation of the DanLoad
6000. Installation tasks should be performed in the following order.
#
#
#
#
Installation planning
Initial setup (described in Section 3 - Setup)
Mechanical (physical) installation
Electrical installation
The initial setup, described in Section 3 - Setup, must be performed before the DanLoad 6000 is
placed in-service. The initial setup can be performed with only a 115 or 230 Vac power source
connected to the instrument.
Mechanical and electrical installation recommendations for the DanLoad 6000 adhere to general
industry standards for this type equipment and are covered in Section 2.3 - Mechanical Installation
and Section 2.4 - Electrical Installation. The remaining part of Section 2 contains information on
installation planning for the DanLoad 6000.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

2.1
#
DanLoad 6000 Specifications
Dimensions (approximate):
Standard
The standard enclosure for the DanLoad 6000.
Remote / Secondary
The short enclosure contains the front panel display and keypad only. This enclosure is
usually used as a remote operator station in a two side loading island.
Item
Standard
Remote / Secondary
Height
13-inches (330 mm)
13-inches (330 mm)
Width
14-inches (355 mm)
14-inches (355 mm)
Depth
14-inches (355 mm)
8-inches (200 mm)
Weight
75-pounds (34 kg)
45-pounds (20,5 kg)
Power requirements:
Standard Power Supply:
115 Vac (+ 10% / - 15%), 47 to 63 Hz, 1-phase
230 Vac (+/_ 15%), 47 to 63 Hertz, 1-phase
25 VA nominal
CE-Mark Power Supply - AC Line Input:
90-140 VAC, or 198-270 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase
Factory Selected with a single jumper (28 VA nominal)
Cable entry (USA version):

Center 2-inch female NPT, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse, RTD, analog,
status / control) cables
Left
1-inch female NPT, normally used for AC power input and AC status /
control signals
Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):
1-inch female NPT, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog
signals when separate signal routing is required
2 - 2 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
#
Cable entry (metric version):

Center M50 x 1.5 mm, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse, RTD, analog, status
/ control) cables
Left
M25 x 1.5 mm, normally used for AC power input and AC status / control
signals
Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):
M25 x 1.5 mm, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog signals
when separate signal routing is required
#
Environment:
Temperature [operating with case heater installed]:
-40 to +140 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to +60 degrees Celsius)
Temperature [storage (non-operating)]:
-4 to +158 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to +70 degrees Celsius)
(Note: Storage temperature lower limit is due to fluid in the liquid crystal
display (LCD) unit.)
Relative humidity:
5 to 95 percent (non-condensing)
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC):

Optionally CE-Mark Compliant
FCC Method - (CFR-47) Part 15 - Digital Devices
CCA LMB-EG-08 section 3.6.3.4
CISPR Methods: Radiated emissions from 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
Conducted emissions (mains disturbance) from 150 kHz to 30 MHz
Susceptibility - 10 volts/meter over the frequency range 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
Fast transients - Line power and I/O
Electrostatic Discharge
Mechanical shock:
Per S.A.M.A. PMC 31.1-1980, Section 5.3
Enclosure:
NEMA 4X weatherproof, corrosion resistant
NEMA 7 for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D areas
EEx d IIB T6, IP65
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Fasteners:
Front cover hex drive bolts and case mounting bolts: M10 - 1.5 (metric)
Two front cover bolts are longer than the other front cover bolts. These two long
bolts have holes near the end of the threaded end to allow placement of a Weight and
Measures seal wires. The seal wires prevent undetected access to the DanLoad 6000
electronic / field wiring compartment.
Depth of tapped mounting bolt holes: 0.50 inches (13 mm)
Front cover hex bolt wrench: 8-mm (or 5/16-inch) Allen wrench
Torque specification (all bolts):
18 to 21 foot-pounds-force
(24 to 29 Newton-meters)
2 - 4 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Standard Enclosure Dimensions

Figure 2 - 1
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 5
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Standard Enclosure Field Mounting

Figure 2 - 2
2 - 6 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Shallow Enclosure Dimensions

Figure 2 - 3
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 7
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting

Figure 2 - 4
2 - 8 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
2.2
Installation Planning
Installation planning is very important due to the physical and functional reconfigurable capabilities
of the instrument. Several worksheets are provided in Appendix A to aid in installation planning and
system design. These worksheets are used in conjunction with the Setup Procedure described in
Section 3. Installation planning consists of the following three major tasks.
#
Assure that the DanLoad 6000 contains the required number and type of process input /
output signal boards for monitoring and controlling the other devices in the product delivery
system.
Determine the functions to be performed by the DanLoad 6000. These functions are
selectively enabled during the setup procedure (logical configuration) of the instrument.
Design the mechanical / electrical installation considering the safety and ease of use by the
operator. Also consider the safety and ease of access to instruments and devices for
maintenance technicians.
2.2.1
Card Cage Description
The DanLoad 6000 is constructed in a modular electronic and functional form. An electronic card
cage is located inside the cast enclosure. The layout of the card cage is shown in Figure 2-5. The
card cage contains a passive backplane with sockets for installation of a main processor board, a
DC power supply board, and one to seven process input / output signal boards. The function of each
board is described in Section 2.2.2.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Card Cage Layout

Figure 2 - 5
NOTE:
Placement of I/O boards in card cage determines I/O assignments

during start up. Please see section 3.5.1 for details.
2 - 10 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
2.2.2
DanLoad 6000 Board Description and Jumper Settings
Note
Several of the electronic circuit boards contain jumpers that must be verified for correct
configuration before installation of the instrument. Jumper configuration should be verified
before the setup procedure is executed. Verify the following jumper configurations before
applying any power or connecting any process input / output signals to the instrument. To
identify pin 1 on any of the jumper selections, find the location on the back of the board where
the jumper pins are soldered into place. The square solder pad will always be pin 1.
#
Power Supply (DC Voltage)

Installed in the leftward vertical slot (J0) with component side facing right (toward the I/O
card slots).
The DC power supply generates the following voltages for the following uses;
Voltage
Use
+ 5 Vdc
digital logic
+ 5 Vdc unregulated
LCD display unit
+ 15 Vdc / - 15 Vdc
analog inputs
+ 12 to + 15 Vdc
meter pulse transmitter power supply (100 mA dc version)
+ 24 Vdc
DC status / analog transmitters

DC Power Supply Voltage Use
Figure 2 - 6
Two field-wiring connectors are located on the front edge of the power supply board. TB1
accepts AC power input (either 115 or 230 Vac) and provides a fused output for an optional
internal space heater. TB2 accepts AC Voltage input and provides fused AC Voltage output
to the permissive circuits.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 11
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12692) Standard Supply
Jumper
Function
JO1-1 to JO1-2
JO2-1 to JO2-2
115 Vac power input
JO1-2 to JO2-2
230 Vac power input
AC Power Input Jumpers

Figure 2 - 7
The AC power jumpers are soldered wire jumpers located on the DC power supply board.
AC power input should be specified at order time so that the jumpers are installed correctly
at the factory.
For the CE-Mark supply using AC power input, install jumper JP2 for 155 VAC operation,
or remove jumper JP2 for 230 VAC operation.
2 - 12 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
#
CPU Board (version 1)

Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.
The main processor board has two CPU's (central processing units). One CPU processes the
control panel and communications functions and the other CPU performs flow measurement
and process input / output signal handling. Dual port RAM (random access memory) is
used by both CPU's to transfer data. Data is maintained in a non-volatile state for ten years
by an on-board battery. The CPU board also contains one 3-terminal connector which is
dedicated to one or two dry contact closure inputs used for sensing the position of a swingarm switch. Communications is via a plug-in DUART board that mounts on top of CPU
version 1. See DUART.
CPU Board Jumper Settings
Jumper
Function
E16 to E17
4Mbit EPROM with firmware

3.00 & up
E7 to E8
4Mbit EPROM with firmware

2.00 & up
E2 to E3
Enable display failure /internal

temp alarm LED (yellow LED)
CPU Board Jumpers
Figure 2 - 8
CPU Board and Analog Inputs Board Combinations - Jumper Settings

The DanLoad 6000 can be configured without an analog inputs board or with a 2-channel
analog inputs or an 8-channel analog inputs board. Jumpers are provided for configuration
of analog ground and digital ground. These jumpers should be set as follows.
Jumper
Function
E12 to E13 on the CPU Board
No Analog Inputs
Board installed
Remove E12 to E13 on CPU

Analog Inputs Board is
board and install JP1 on Analog
installed
Inputs Board
CPU & Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers
Figure 2 - 9
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 13
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
CPU Board (version 2)

Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.
On-board communications ports and the RS232 - RS485 option is jumper selectable.
The address for the communication port is software selectable.
Dual Display connector (P2):
The primary display wires to the top position and the secondary display wires to the bottom
position.
On-board Analog inputs include one 4-20 mA and one 100 ohm RTD input. The on-board
swing-arm switches have been removed; standard discrete inputs can be used instead.
Communications - One RS485 and 1 RS232 OR two RS485 ports (jumper selectable).
Channel 1 is always RS485. Channel 2 is RS232 or RS485 as shown.
Jumper
RS232
RS485
JP1
1&2 closed
2&3 closed
JP2
1&2 closed
2&3 closed
JP3
1&2 closed
2&3 closed
JP4
1&2 closed
2&3 closed
CPU Board Jumpers - Comm Ch 2
Figure 2 - 10
Analog Inputs - Calibration Values

Calibration values are required for the analog inputs. These values are printed on a label
located on top of U40. The label has the program codes and four values for each type of
input. These values must be entered into the program codes when using the analog inputs,
in particular, after the unit has been cold started.
PC
4-20 mA
PC
RTD
984
LL (low low)
988
LL (low low)
985
LH (low high)
989
LH (low high)
986
HL (high low)
990
HL (high low)
987
HH (high high)
991
HH (high high)
CPU Analog Inputs Program Codes
Figure 2 - 11
2 - 14 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
#
DUART (used with CPU Version 1)

(Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) Communications Board
Optional DUART module can be installed, with the component side down, on top of the
main processor board.
One dual serial communications port module (DUART module) with 1 RS-485 and 1 RS232 OR 2 RS-485 ports is optional. The communications module is not required for standalone operation of the DanLoad 6000. However, the DUART is required if the data logging
feature is used or if communication to an Automation System is required.
Switch Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12693)

The address of the DanLoad 6000 serial port is set by an eight position DIP switch located
on the optional DUART board. Each address must be unique for data access by a terminal
automation system.
Switch SW1 6
Address
Decimal weight 6
16
32
64
128
<reserved>
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
255
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
DUART Board Address Switch

Figure 2 - 12
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 15
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
2-Ch Meter Pulse Board (MPB)

Recommended card cage locations are slots J5 and / or J6, component side faces left
(toward the power supply). The recommended location for a single meter pulse board is slot
J5.
The two-channel meter pulse board provides 8 to 15 Vdc or 24 Vdc power for two meter
pulse preamplifiers and accepts meter pulse inputs from two meter preamplifiers or dual
inputs from one meter. The 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board can be used with 1 single pulse meter,
1 dual pulse meter or 2 single pulse meters. The meter preamps or pulsers can be powered
with any one of three options. Options 1 and 2 are implemented by installing a plug-on
piggyback power supply module. These modules are adjustable 8-15 VDC power supplies
with either 15 ma (Daniel P/N 3-6000-002) or 100 mA (Daniel P/N 3-6000-022) outputs.
Option 3 uses 24 VDC supplied from the power-supply board. The DC power source for
each meter preamplifier is jumper selectable. Two optically isolated raw meter pulse outputs
(prover outputs) are provided. These outputs are for meter proving and are duplicates of the
raw meter pulse stream. Two DC Voltage control outputs are provided. These control
outputs are assignable to various functions. One common use for these outputs is to drive
external pulse per unit quantity totalizers.
#
Power Down Pulse Counting

Should power failure shut the system down, power to the pulsers and preamps will
be sustained long enough to accumulate pulses until the flow control valve closes.
This is available with the 15 mA P/S option only (P/N 3-6000-002).
Dual Pulse Security for a Single Flow Meter

Dual pulse security is available per the IP252 Level-B standard. This is
accomplished by monitoring two meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90 degrees
out of phase. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section 6.13 of this manual.
Note
The 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board has been replaced by the 4-Ch Meter Pulse Board and is
no longer manufactured. The 4-Ch Meter Pulse Board is a direct replacement for the
2-Ch board. Depending on your configuration, wiring changes may be necessary.
Please review the 2-Ch and 4-Ch wiring diagrams carefully.
2 - 16 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12694)

P/N 3-6000-022, 100 mA P/S - P/N 3-6000-002, 15 mA P/S
Jumper
Connection
Function
JP1
JP5
1 to 2
in
meter 1 preamp power = 24 Vdc
JP1
JP5
2 to 3
in
meter 1 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS1)
JP1
JP3
JP3
JP5
1-to-2
1-to-2
3-to-4
out
meter 1 input optically isolated and floating,

requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP3
JP3
1 to 2
3-to-4
meter 1 input optically isolated
JP3
2-to-3
meter 1 input direct
JP8
out
meter 1 standard input filtering

( 5 kHz. low pass filter)
in
meter 1 additional high frequency filtering

( 50 Hz. low pass filter)
JP2
JP4
1-to-2
in
meter 2 preamp power = 24 Vdc
JP2
JP4
2-to-3
in
meter 2 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS2)
JP2
JP7
JP7
JP4
1-to-2
1-to-2
3-to-4
out
meter 2 input optically isolated and floating,

requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP7
JP7
1-to-2
3-to-4
meter 2 input optically isolated
JP7
2-to-3
meter 2 input direct
JP6
out
meter 2 normal input filtering

(5 kHz. low pass filter)
in
meter 2 additional high frequency filtering

(50 Hz. low pass filter)
2-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers
Figure 2 - 13
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 17
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
4-Ch Meter Pulse Board (MPB)

Recommended locations are slots J5 and / or J6, component side faces left (toward the
power supply). The recommended location for a single 4-Ch meter pulse board is slot J5.
See Figure 2-14 for 4-Ch meter pulse board jumper settings.
The 4-Channel meter pulse board provides 5, 15 or 24 volts, which may be jumper selected
(JP17, 18, 19,20) for flow meter pulse preamplifiers. The meter pulse board is able to supply
power at 24 volts at 200 mA when used with Daniels enhanced line-powered switcher
power supply. When using Daniels standard power supply, the load capacity is lower. The
4-Ch meter pulse board accepts inputs from up to two physical meters. Each physical meter
can have pulse security independently of any others. Pulse security identification is IP 252
level B using dual pulse stream, electrically out of phase. Two DC voltage control outputs
are provided. These are assignable to various functions. One common use for these outputs
is to drive an electrical pulse-per-unit quantity totalizer.
MPB
Input Signal
3-6000-042
+12 V square wave (nominal)
3-6000-132
+4 V square wave (nominal)
2 - 18 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
#
Dual Pulse Security for a Single Flow Meter

Dual pulse security is available per the IP252 Level-B standard. This is
accomplished by monitoring two meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90 89 out
of phase. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section 6.13 of this manual.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 19
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 20 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Identification between board 1 and board 2 for P/N 3-6000-042, -132.

4-Channel Meter pulse board
3-6000-042 - For dual pulse (IP252 level B) or single Preamp operation:
First board
Meter 1A, short jumper JP1
Open JP3 and JP4
Second board
Open JP1 and JP2
3-6000-132 - (Euro version) For dual pulse (IP252 level B) operation:
First board
Meter 1A, short 1&2 on jumper JP1
Open JP3 and JP4
Second board
Open JP1 and JP2
3-6000-132 - (Euro version) For one preamplifier per meter (no pulse security):
1 through 4 meters
Please note that 1 board can handle 4 meters.
First Meter:
Second Meter:
Meter 1B, short 2&3 on jumper JP2
Third Meter:
Fourth Meter: Meter 2B, short 2&3 on jumper JP4
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 21
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-15532 - P/N 3-6000-042, -132)

Meter
Connection
Function
JP4
in
Enable meter input X
JP13
JP14
JP16
JP6
JP5
1-to-2
3-to-4
out
meter input optically isolated and

floating, requires external
5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP11
JP12
JP13
JP14
meter input optically isolated
JP15
JP16
JP6
JP5
1-to-2
3-to-4
in
JP11
JP15
JP12
JP16
JP13
JP6
JP14
JP5
2-to-3
in
meter input direct

local ground
JP9
JP10
JP8
JP7
out
meter standard input filtering

( 5 kHz. low pass filter)
in
meter additional high frequency

filtering
( 50 Hz. low pass filter)
1A
1B
2A
2B
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP11
JP12
JP15
local ground
4-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 14
Notes
Meter Channels 1A and 2A are the primary meter inputs.
Meter Channels 1B and 2B are used as the second input for dual pulse meter inputs.
2 - 22 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
The voltage levels factory setting is for 15 VDC when using the Linear P/S 3-6000-027, -031.
4-Channel Meter Pulse Board 3-6000-042, -132
Meter Pulse Preamp or Pulser Voltage Output -- Jumper Schedule
Factory Setting: 15 Volts
When using Linear P/S 3-6000-027, -031
Maximum Current 100 mA
Jumper options:
For 5 VDC or 12-15 VDC @ 100 mA

Close JP17 1 and 2
Close JP18 2 and 3
For 5 Volts adjustable: Close Jumper JP19 and JP20
For 15 Volts adjustable: Close Jumper JP19, Open JP20
Jumper options:
For 24 VDC @ 100 mA

Close JP17 2 and 3, Open JP18,
JP19 and JP20 dont care
When using the CE-Mark Line Switcher P/S 3-6000-067, -068

On the Line Switcher P/S:
Close JP3 2 and 3 (Soldered)

Maximum Current 400 mA (200 mA per MPB)
4 channel meter pulse board (P/N 3-6000-047, -132)

Factory adjustment:
Jumper options:
12.5 VDC
For 5 VDC, 12-15 VDC or 24 VDC @ 200 mA
Close JP17 1 and 2
Close JP18 1 and 2
For 5 Volts Adjustable:

Close Jumper JP19 and JP20

Close Jumper JP19, Open JP20
Open Jumpers JP19 and JP20
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 23
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
MPMC (Meter Pulse Microcontroller) Board (P/N 3-6000-044)

The MPMC Board is a plug-on piggyback board to the 4-Ch meter pulse board.
The 4-Ch meter pulse board is known as the smart meter pulse board when fitted with a
Meter Pulse Microcontroller (MPMC) Board (P/N 3-6000-044). With a smart 4-Ch meter
pulse board installed, the DanLoad 6000 can be configured to make use of the following
features provided by the MPMC. The plug-on board is shown as part of the main board
noted in the previous section.
MPMC Version
Features Provided
1.00
Factored pulse outputs
2.00
Factored pulse outputs

and turbine meter
calibration monitoring
MPMC Version Comparisons
Figure 2 - 15
2 - 24 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
#
AC Discrete Input / Output Board (AC I/O)

power supply). The recommended location for a single AC I/O board is slot J1.
[Note: There are two different versions of the AC I/O board (Ver. 1 & Ver. 2). Terminal
connections are the same on each version of the board. However, the on-board jumper
configuration is different for each version of the board. Note drawing CE-12695 in
Appendix E and information in Figures 2-14 and 2-15.]
The AC I/O board accepts two discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and provides eight discrete
(ON/OFF) control outputs. Note Figures 2-14 and 2-15 for jumper settings to set the
discrete input voltage level selection options (24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 90-240 Vac or Vdc). Internal
series resistors in each input circuit should be jumpered (bypassed) if 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
signals are used. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each output circuit is rated
to switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay or solenoid coil.
Status inputs are processed as indicated:
Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)
Inputs are externally powered by 120/240 volts AC/DC or 24 volts AC/DC by
installing a jumper. This voltage should be applied through a contact closure only,
as a solid-state relay may not drop below the input voltage threshold when
deenergized.
The status input is ON when the contact is closed or the voltage is present on the
input.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open or the voltage is removed.
Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)
All functions are the same as the Version 1 AC I/O Board except that each voltage
range has a jumper selection (24 VAC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC and 240 VAC), and the
inputs will function with either contact closures or solid-state relays.
Note: Version 2 board will not work with 120/240 VDC.
Note
Ganging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of AC
triac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is required,
the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper isolation.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 25
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Jumper Settings - Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)
(Assembly Drawing CE-12693 - P/N 3-6000-005)
Jumper
Connection
Function
W1
out
Input 2 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc
in
Input 2 24 Vac / Vdc
out
Input 1 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc
in
Input 1 24 Vac / Vdc
W2
Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 16
Jumper Settings - Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

(Assembly Drawing CE-12722 - P/N 3-6000-045)
Jumper
Connection
Function
JP1
pins 1 to 2
Input 2 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
JP2
pins 1 to 2
Input 1 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
JP1
pins 2 to 3
Input 2 is 120 Vac
JP2
pins 2 to 3
Input 1 is 120 Vac
JP1
out
Input 2 is 240 Vac
JP2
out
Input 1 is 240 Vac
Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 17
2 - 26 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
#
Enhanced I/O Board and Additive Injector I/O Board

power supply). The recommended location for a single Enhanced I/O board is slot J1.
[Note: There are two different versions of the Enhanced I/O board. The Ver. 1 style board
is shown in drawing CE-12697 in Appendix E as the Additive Injector (I/O) Board. The
Additive Injector Board will be recognized as an Enhanced I/O Board when the DanLoad
6000 displays the identity and location of the boards in the card cage. The Ver. 2 style board
is shown in drawing CE-19027 in Appendix E as the Enhanced (I/O) Board. Terminal
connections are the same on each version of the board. However, the on-board jumper
configuration is different for each version of the board.]
The Enhanced (or Additive Injector) I/O board accepts six discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs
(24 Vac or 24 Vdc maximum voltage) and provides six discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs.
Note Figures 2-16 and 2-17 for jumper settings to select discrete input voltage levels for the
two board styles. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each output circuit is rated
to switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay or solenoid coil. Inputs
are available as high-speed (130 Hz maximum with a minimum pulse width of 3 ms), low
speed (10 Hz maximum with a minimum pulse width of 50 ms) or a mixture of both. Be
sure to specify the correct part number.
#
Version 1 (Additive Injector) I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697)

Internally powered status input (Note Reverse Logic):
The status input is ON when the contact is open.
The status input is OFF when the contact is closed.
Externally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed and the voltage is present
on the input.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is removed.
Notes
Ganging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of AC
triac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is required,
the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper isolation.
Inputs can be configured ON = open or ON = closed.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 27
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027)

Internally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open.
Externally powered status input or solid-state relays:
There are three voltage ranges which are jumper selectable (24 VAC,
24VDC, 120 VAC or 240 VAC). When using DC voltage, the positive
voltage must be on the common input to two-channel inputs.
2 - 28 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Jumper Settings - Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board

(Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697) - P/N 3-6000-010 (low speed), -060 (high speed), -059
(combination low and high speed)
Input
Jumper
Internal Power
External Power
1&2
W3
SHORT PINS
1&2, 3&4, 5&6
OPEN
NO JUMPERS
3&4
W2
SHORT PINS
1&2, 3&4, 5&6
OPEN
NO JUMPERS
5&6
W1
SHORT PINS
1&2, 3&4, 5&6
OPEN
NO JUMPERS
Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 18
Note
The maximum voltage for discrete inputs on the Additive Injector Board is 24 Vac or
24 Vdc.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 29
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
2 - 30 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Jumper Settings - Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board

(Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027) - P/N 3-6000-036 (low speed), -048 (high speed), -049
(combination low and high speed)
Note
When using a Linear Power Supply P/N 3-6000-027, -031 JP10 needs to have pin 2-3.
When using the Switching Power Supply P/N 3-6000-067, -068 JP10 needs to have
pins 1 to 2.
Jumper Schedule
Select Internal Power
JP10 pins 2 to 3
Input
Channel
External Power
24 Vdc
Internal Power
20 to 30
Vac or Vdc
102 to 140
Vac
204 to 260
Vac
1 and 2
JP9 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6
JP8 1 to 2
JP7 1 to 2
JP9 all out

JP8 1 to 2
JP7 1 to 2
JP9 all out

JP8 2 to 3
JP7 2 to 3
JP9 all out

JP8 all out
JP7 all out
3 and 4
JP6 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6
JP5 1 to 2
JP4 1 to 2
JP6 all out

JP5 1 to 2
JP4 1 to 2
JP6 all out

JP5 2 to 3
JP4 2 to 3
JP6 all out

JP5 all out
JP4 all out
5 and 6
JP3 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6
JP2 1 to 2
JP1 1 to 2
JP3 all out

JP2 1 to 2
JP1 1 to 2
JP3 all out

JP2 2 to 3
JP1 2 to 3
JP3 all out

JP2 all out
JP1 all out
Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 19
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 31
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
DC Discrete Input / Output board (DC I/O) (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696)
power supply). The recommended location for a single DC I/O board is slot J3.
The DC I/O board accepts six 24 Vdc or 24 Vac discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and
provides four discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs. The nominal input level is 24 Vdc or 24
Vac, either dry contact closures or externally powered, depending on internal jumper
configuration. See Figure 2-18. Control output circuits are 24 Vdc only. Each output circuit
is rated to switch a non-inductive load of 250 mA dc maximum. Inputs are available as high
speed (130 Hz maximum with a minimum pulse width of 3 ms), low speed (10 Hz maximum
with a minimum pulse width of 50 ms) or a combination of both. Be sure to specify the
correct part number.
Internally powered status input:
Externally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed and voltage is present on the input.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is removed.
Note
Inputs can be configured ON = open or ON = closed.
2 - 32 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Jumper Settings - DC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696) - P/N 3-6000-006
(low speed), -058 (high speed), -057 (combination of low and high speed)
Jumper
Connection
Function
W1 2-to-3
in
Input 6 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W1 1-to-2
W1 3-to-4
in
Input 6 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W2 2-to-3
in
W2 1-to-2
W2 3-to-4
in
W3 2-to-3
in
W3 1-to-2
W3 3-to-4
in
W4 2-to-3
in
W4 1-to-2
W4 3-to-4
in
W5 2-to-3
in
W5 1-to-2
W5 3-to-4
in
W6 2-to-3
in
W6 1-to-2
W6 3-to-4
in
DC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 20
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 33
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
2-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram BE-12707) - P/N 3-6000-061
(standard, -40 to 110 oC), -062 (high range, 50 to 200 oC), -063 (low range, -50 to -200
o
C)
Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).
The 2-channel analog input board accepts one 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)
input and one 4 to 20 mA dc current loop input. The RTD input must be a platinum RTD,
100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha is
0.003850 S/S/oC (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 oC. A common current source
and Vref is provided for the RTD. The 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an internal 225
Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load is 975 Ohms. Analog
transmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a standard range
(-40 to 110 oC), high range (50 to 200 oC), and a low range (-50 to -200 oC). Be sure to
specify the correct part number.
Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.
8-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12698) - P/N 3-6000-064
(standard, -40 to 110 oC), -065 (high range, 50 to 200 oC), -066 (low range, -50 to -200
o
C)
Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).
The 8-channel analog input board accepts four 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)
inputs and four 4 to 20 mA dc current loop inputs. RTD inputs must be platinum RTD's,
100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha is
0.003850 S/S/oC (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 oC. A common current source
and Vref is provided for the RTD's. Each 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an internal
225 Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load in 975 Ohms. Analog
transmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a standard range
(-40 to 110 oC), high range (50 to 200 oC), and a low range (-50 to -200 oC). Be sure to
specify the correct part number.
Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.
2 - 34 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
2.3
Mechanical Installation
In planning the physical installation of the DanLoad 6000, consider ease of use of the instrument
with the operator in a safe and comfortable position. Consideration must also be given to
performance of maintenance tasks without disrupting ongoing product delivery operations in close
proximity. It may be helpful to draw rough diagrams of the normal actions of the operator during
the different possible batch delivery related tasks. Be especially mindful of the location of the
operator in relation to the location of one or two tanker vehicles and their related loading arm /
bottom loading hose connections. Some location / position restrictions may be present when a
DanLoad 6000 is used as a retrofit or upgrade in an existing installation. However, mechanical
installation planning should still be performed. It may be possible to correct an inconvenient
controller mounting location that exists in a current loading rack installation when a DanLoad 6000
is retrofit at the installation.
The major steps performed during installation are listed below.
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Plan the installation

Fabricate device supports and lay electrical conduit
Mount the DanLoad 6000 and other load rack devices
Run and connect all wiring
Verify and tag each wire
Seal conduit within 18-inches (450 mm) of each device
Secure cases and covers of all devices
Apply electric power
Setup (configure) DanLoad 6000 and any other devices as required
Disable product block valves and additive block valves to prevent any product or
additive flow - then verify system monitor and control functions with dry piping
Enable one product block valve at a time and one additive injection system at a time
- then verify the piping integrity and system operation in increments for each product and
each additive handling system
Perform meter proofs to determine DanLoad 6000 meter calibration
Consider the points listed below during installation planning for a DanLoad 6000.
#
Maintenance access:
The operator panel is hinged at the bottom side and opens down for ease of maintenance
access. All conduit routing should be to the rear, sides, or down. No object should be
located under the DanLoad 6000 and in front of the conduit connections for a distance of
approximately 15-inches (380 mm) below the instrument.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 35
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Mounting height:
Recommended mounting height is approximately 45 to 50 inches (1.14 to 1.27 meters)
above grade to the bottom of the DanLoad 6000 case. Mounting height determines the ease
of viewing the display panel and ease of use of the keypad.
Mounting position:
North / south / east / west orientation of the operator control panel is somewhat
predetermined by the loading facility design. Consider the location of the user / operator in
relation to one or two tanker vehicles present and connected at the loading island.
Mounting fixtures:
Mounting fixtures must be fabricated for the DanLoad 6000. Four M10-1.5 metric thread
bolts for mounting are provided with each DanLoad 6000. The instrument can be bottom
mounted or rear mounted. Bottom mounting is preferable due to the weight of the device.
The mounting attachment should be a 1/8-inch (3 mm) (minimum) thick mild steel member
with four 7/16-inch (11.5 mm) diameter holes that match the bolting pattern being used.
The steel member may be sheet, angle, channel, or other shape.
The forward pair of mounting screw holes in bottom mount fixtures must be centered no
more than 3/4-inch (19 mm) from the edge. The case has a 2-degree taper to the rear. The
standard case may need a shim as much as 0.170-inch (4.3 mm) thick at the rear pair of
screws to level the instrument. Leveling the case will allow for best conduit alignment.
Fixtures for rear mounting may need additional bracing to ensure rigidity.
Special installation considerations:

The DanLoad 6000 is designed for installation in an outdoor environment. The instrument
is weather proof and explosion proof per applicable standards. Some of the following
installation suggestions concerning environmental protection describe accepted engineering
practices and should not be considered to be limitations on the utility of the instrument.
#
If the loading rack / island area is covered, the DanLoad 6000 should be located so
that the user / operator is protected or partially protected from direct rainfall.
2 - 36 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Tropical climates: It is advisable to place sunshades above the DanLoad 6000 and
other electronic instruments, such as process transmitters. Sunshades should be
located to prevent direct sunlight on the instruments during the hottest part of the day
(10:00 to 15:00). Sunshades can be constructed of metal, fiberglass, or other
suitable materials. They should be rear sloping to direct rain to the rear of the
instrument, away from the user / operator. Avoid sharp edges or corners on
sunshades to prevent injuries.
Desert areas / blowing sand: In areas where blowing sand in common, it is

advisable to install a cover to protect the operator control panel during idle time.
Continuous blowing sand over an extended time period can affect the readability of
the key legends and the display panel due to the sandblasting effect. A cover can be
fabricated from raw materials or may consist of modified NEMA 4 weatherproof
enclosure with a sealed rear cutout for placement over the operator panel. Use care
in the design of any hinged cover so that wind gusts do not move the cover and cause
injuries. Any cover design must allow for maintenance access to the DanLoad 6000.
The operator panel is hinged to open in the down direction for maintenance access.
High humidity: In areas of continuous high humidity, it is advisable to place a 3inch x 3-inch desiccant pack inside the DanLoad 6000 case. Desiccant packs should
be placed so that expansion due to moisture absorption does not interfere with any
of the equipment or wiring inside the case. Two sources of desiccant packs are:
#
Waterguard Desiccants
#
P.O. Box 1079
16023 I-10 East, Suite 30
Channelview, Texas 77530
A+ Corporation
Prairieville, Louisiana 70769
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 37
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

2.4
Electrical Installation
Warning
Shut off all sources of AC and DC power to the loading island site before installing the
DanLoad 6000.
2.4.1
General Considerations
Use two or three cable entries provided on the bottom of the enclosure for wiring access to the
DanLoad 6000.
#
A threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the left side of the
unit (for AC power and control / status signals).
A spare threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the right side
of the unit (may be used for meter pulse wiring if it is desired to segregate meter pulse
wiring from all other signals).
A threaded 2-inch female NPT (or M50 x 1.5 mm) connection for DC cabling and low
voltage level signals in the center.
Note
All cable entries must be sealed within 18-inches (450 mm) of the enclosure with suitable
sealing / potting compound.
Guidelines for field wiring installation:

#
External AC and DC wiring must be routed in separate conduits.
Record cable / wire routing and interconnection information so that as-built documentation
for the system can be generated later.
Provide remote circuit breakers and optional disconnect switches for all AC and DC power
input circuits.
Follow power and signal field wiring grounding standards.
2 - 38 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
Use only stranded copper wire, equal to or larger gauges as indicated on the basic wiring
diagrams located at the rear of this section, do not cut or weaken wire strands during
insulation removal.
All wire ends should be clearly marked with slip-on wire tags or similar devices, the wire
tags should preferably be color coded to indicate the voltage level and marked with the
specific signal name.
Power and signal wires should be cut with an additional length of approximately 2-inches
for service loops to allow terminal board / connector removal.
All wiring should be positioned within the unit to avoid unnecessary crimping and
overcrowding, and to insure proper clearance for the instrument door and hinges.
After completion, thoroughly check the wiring to insure that input AC power and all field
input / output signals are correctly connected at the DanLoad 6000 terminations and at the
terminations located on the corresponding field device.
2.4.2
Selection / Installation of Electrical Wire and Cable
All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code, local state or other jurisdiction, and
company standards and practices. Recommendations for 115 / 230 Vac power wiring:
#
Use multi-strand copper conductor wire and cable for connecting the DanLoad 6000 to the
power source and the field devices.
All wire and cable must be in new condition, and must adhere to the manufacturer's quality
standards with the size, type of insulation, voltage rating.
Recommended wire types and sizes for AC power input to the DanLoad 6000:
#
Power feed should be 115 or 230 Vac, 47 to 63 Hertz, single phase, three wire. A
15 Amp circuit breaker and optionally a power disconnect switch must be located in
a safe area.
Wire size AWG 14 for power feed for distances up to 250 feet.
Wire size AWG 12 for power feed for distances of 250 to 500 feet.
#
#
Wire size AWG 10 for power feed for distances of 500 to 1000 feet.
Contact Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service - Electronics Division, for power
feed distances greater than 1000 feet.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 39
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Single-conductor wiring must be THWN type, which is moisture and heat-resistant

thermoplastic with nylon jacket, approved for dry-and-wet locations, and has a
maximum operating temperature of 75 degrees Celsius (167 degrees Fahrenheit).
The wire or cable jacket must contain the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. mark for
Gasoline and Oil Resistant, II.
Shielded wires and cables for meter pulse signals must have shield-drain wires. The shielddrain wires must not be more than two AWG sizes smaller than the conductors for the cable.
The shield-drain wire must be connected to ground at only one end of the run.
RS-485 serial data signals should be connected via two twisted pairs with overall shield,
AWG 28 to AWG 22. Ideally, the capacitance should not be greater than 16 pF per foot
(Belden 9842 for example). The use of a signal common (ground) conductor connected to
each device is a recommended option. Capacitance greater than 16 pF per foot may be used
at reduced baud rates and/or with shorter data communication cable runs. See typical
communications connection drawings in Appendix E.
RS-232 single ended serial data signals should be AWG 28 to AWG 18 for cable lengths to
15 meters (50 feet). Consult factory for cable lengths greater than 15 meters.
All cables must have either Teflon or PVC exterior jacket.
Insulated wire and cable must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation. Maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum
bending radius must not be exceeded.
Use suitable lubrication during wire pulls in conduit to prevent wire stress.
All cables and individual wires must have cable or wire markers at each termination. Markers
must contain the specific wire or cable codes designated for that particular circuit. The wire
and cable markers must be legible and permanent.
Check all wiring connected to the DanLoad 6000 for continuity, proper size, and proper
classification. Verify the source or destination of each circuit before connection to the
DanLoad 6000 and related devices.
2 - 40 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
2.4.2.1
Input / Output Field Signal Wiring
Recommendations for process signal wiring:

#
Metal conduit must be used for all process signal wiring.
Use separate conduits for AC Voltage and DC Voltage circuits.
All process signal wiring must be a single, continuous length between field devices, and the
DanLoad 6000, unless the length and / or conduit runs require that multiple pulls be made.
In these instances, the individual conductors must be interconnected with suitable terminal
blocks.
2.4.2.2
Electrical Grounds
Recommendations for electrical grounds:

#
A clamp type ground lug (color green) is located on the inside bottom front of the case.
Chassis ground conductors (color code green) inside the DanLoad 6000 enclosure should
be stranded, insulated, copper wire. These device chassis ground conductors should all be
connected to the clamp type ground lug.
A clamp type ground lug is located on the outside of the case at the rear of the lower right
(facing the operator panel) casting rib. This ground point should be connected to a copper
ground rod as described below.
A single-point ground (the outside case ground lug) must be connected to a copper-clad,
ten-foot long, 3/4-inch diameter steel rod, which is buried, full-length, vertically, into the
soil as close to the equipment as is practical. (Grounding rod furnished by others.)
Resistance between the copper-clad steel ground rod and the earth ground must not exceed
25 Ohms. If necessary, additional ground rods may be driven into the ground, while a
spacing of not less than 6 feet is used to separate each of the ground rods. Additionally, the
ground rods must be interconnected with a continuous stranded wire, sized as indicated
below.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 41
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
When several DanLoad 6000 units are located in close proximity, each single point
equipment ground must be inter-connected to the single point grounds of the other DanLoad
units. These inter-enclosure equipment grounding connections must be made in a daisychain fashion with only one point of the grounding daisy-chain being connected to the actual
ground rod.
The equipment-grounding conductors used between DanLoad 6000 units and the copper-clad
steel ground rod, or for inter-enclosure equipment ground connections must be sized
according to the following specifications:
#
Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 8 for distances of less than 15 feet.
Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 6 for distances of 15 to 30 feet.
Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 4 for distances of 30 to 100 feet.
Consult Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service Department - Electronics

Division for distances greater than 100 feet.
All inter-enclosure equipment-grounding conductors must be protected by metallic

conduit.
Shield-drain wires must be connected to ground at only one end of the shielded
conductor run.
External equipment, such as data printers or terminal automation systems, which

are connected to the DanLoad 6000, must be powered via isolation transformers to
minimize the ground loops caused by the internally shared safety and chassis
grounds.
2 - 42 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
2.4.3
Selection / Installation of Wire Conduit
Recommendations for conduit installation:

#
All conduit and the associated assembly and installation materials used for the installation
of the DanLoad 6000 must be in new condition and shall adhere to the manufacturer's quality
standards.
All conduit runs must have an explosion proof sealing (potting) fitting located within 18inches (455 mm) distance from the conduit entrance to the DanLoad 6000.
The conduit installation must be vapor tight, with threaded hub fittings, sealed conduit
joints and gaskets on covers, or other approved vapor-tight conduit fittings.
Conduit cutoffs must be square. Cutoffs must be made by a cold cutting tool, hacksaw, or
by some other approved means that does not deform the conduit ends or leave sharp edges.
All conduit fitting threads, including factory-cut threads, must be coated with a metalbearing conducting grease, such as Crouse-Hinds STL or equivalent, prior to assembly.
Temporarily cap the ends of all conduit runs immediately after installation to prevent
accumulation of water, dirt, or other contaminants. Conduits must be swabbed out prior to
installing the conductors.
Where applicable, explosion proof seals must be installed in the conduit.
Install drain fittings at the lowest point in the conduit run, install seals at the point of entry
to the DanLoad 6000 to prevent vapor passage and accumulation of moisture.
Use liquid tight conduit fittings, such as Myers Scru-tite, or similar, for conduit which is
exposed to moisture.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 43
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

2.5
Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display
2.5.1
Hardware Setup / Configuration
Refer to Figure 2-21 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections.

The primary display/keypad is connected to P2 on the CPU board. The secondary display/keypad
is connected to P3 on the CPU board.
The jumper (W1) on the secondary keypad board is installed to recognize the key codes from the
secondary keypad. The jumper (W1) on the primary keypad board should not be installed.
The weights and measures key (top left of the keyboard) will only function on the primary keypad.
2.5.2
Interface Board
Function
3-6000-034
Remote display
3-6000-147
Remote start/stop
3-6000-149
Remote start/stop and remote

display
Software Setup / Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 auto-configures any connected display/keypad modules at power-up/reset of the
CPU board. The yellow (top) and red (bottom) LED's (located to the right of the display) should
"blink" on/off (once) just before text appears on the display. The displays/keypad modules should
not be powered on/off independently of the CPU board; they should be powered-up prior to or at the
same time as the CPU board.
The primary and secondary keypad/display modules have independently controlled automatic
backlighting and contrast adjustment. The primary LCD type (program code 355) and secondary
LCD type (program code 358) should be configured appropriately for each.
The primary and secondary displays present the same information simultaneously. However, only
one keypad (primary or secondary) is active at a time. The active keypad is controlled by the swingarm switches (SW2 and SW1) on the CPU board and the configured side detect method (program
code 312). A version of the remote display interface also incorporates a remote Start/Stop feature
(assm. 3-6000-149). A second version of the board has only the Start/Stop feature (assm. 3-6000147). The field wiring for both boards is shown in Appendix E.
2 - 44 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
_________________________________________________________
2.5.3
Wiring Details
The cable that connects the 2 interface cards requires 16 conductors, minimum wire size 24 AWG.
The maximum length of the cable should be 2000 feet (610 meters).
2.5.4
Power Requirements
The standard enclosure furnishes a line Power Supply, which can be 120 or 240 VAC, 47 to 63 HZ.
The display/keypad modules power requirement is 7 VDC minimum at 0.5 amperes.
Installation ______________________________________________________________ 2 - 45
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Secondary Keypad / Display Connections

Figure 2-21
2 - 46 ______________________________________________________________ Installation
Section 3
Setup
Operator Interface
Initial Setup Procedure
Signal Handling
_________________________________________________________
Note
Appendix A contains several tables with data on the physical and functional configuration of
the DanLoad 6000. These tables can be photocopied and unique configuration data can be
manually entered to provide a record of specific DanLoad 6000 installations.
This section contains information on the initial setup and configuration of the DanLoad 6000 Preset.
Any combination of up to four flow meters, up to four components, and up to six additives can be
defined and controlled. A minimum of one flow meter and one component must be defined. The
user performs the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000 via the operator control panel by following an
automatic sequence of displayed-prompts and key-press-responses.
The initial setup routine is a general procedure that combines the basic configuration of the
instrument with a tutorial function that familiarizes the user with the methods of changing values of
program codes. The initial setup procedure does not cover all the different types of program codes.
For instance, the basic setup does not cover product blending, additive injection, or transaction
storage definitions.
Section 3.6 contains details on the setup and program codes associated with Product Blending.
Section 3.7 contains details on the setup and program codes associated with Temperature and
Pressure Compensation.
Section 3.8 contains information about Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter.
Section 3.9 contains details on the setup and program codes associated with Additive Injection.
Section 3.10 contains details on Transaction Storage Definition which is applicable if user defined
transaction tickets are printed or the DanLoad 6000 communicates with a terminal automation
system.
The DanLoad 6000 only requires AC power to execute the setup procedure. Therefore, it is possible
to preconfigure the instrument in a shop or office before on-site installation. The DanLoad 6000
retains the setup configuration in non-volatile memory when power is disconnected from the unit.
The DanLoad 6000 should have the correct type and number of process signal input / output boards
installed before initial setup procedure is begun.
The initial setup procedure is performed in any of the following instances.
#
#
Before or during installation of a new DanLoad 6000 that has not been setup previously.
If a new main processor board, that has not been setup, is installed (Note: Spare main
processor boards can be setup for your application in advance. The setup parameters are
retained in non-volatile battery-backed RAM (random access memory).
Note: A configured battery backed RAM module can be moved from one main processor
board to another main processor board without loss of configuration or totalizer data.)
Note: When changing the CPU board, make sure the replacement board has the same
firmware version as the original CPU board. Follow the instructions that come with spare
or replacement boards and be sure to handle the CPU Board carefully so that the components
do not touch the back of the board.
If the integrated RAM / battery module on the main processor board is replaced.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

After the initial setup procedure has been completed, the DanLoad 6000 can be easily reconfigured
to add or change operational features such as product blending, additive injection, new delivery
control recipes, data logging, and communication with a terminal automation system.
3.1
Overview of DanLoad 6000 Capabilities
The DanLoad 6000:

#
Accepts various types and combinations of process input signals, such as flow from pulse
output type flow meters, temperatures (RTD), pressures and / or density (4 to 20 mA dc
analog), and discrete contact closures indicating various status and permissive conditions.
Performs mathematical and logical calculations based on configuration program codes

(setup program codes), user / operator input from the keypad, and the current values and
states of the process inputs.
Generates discrete relay / solenoid control output signals based on the results of the
mathematical and logical calculations performed.
(Optionally) Transmits selected data logs to a logging printer.
(Optionally) Transmits user defined transaction tickets to a logging printer.
(Optionally) Performs bi-directional communication, functioning as a slave processor for

a terminal automation system, distributed processing system, or other host computer. The
DanLoad 6000 Communications Specification, part number 3-9000-674, contains
information for programmers and engineers involved in implementing the DanLoad 6000 as
a node in a communications network.
The DanLoad 6000 can be set up to perform many different tasks based on the requirements of
various load rack applications. Setup is accomplished by physical configuration (installing circuit
boards) and then executing the setup routine. The setup routine or logical configuration is
accomplished by user interaction with the operator control panel which consists of a multi-line /
graphical LCD display panel and a numeric / function keypad.
Information on installation planning, design, and physical configuration of the DanLoad 6000 is
covered in Section 2 - Installation. Therefore, it is assumed at this time that the instrument
contains the process input / output signal boards which provide the physical signal handling capacity
for the intended load rack application. The physical configuration, locations and types of process
input / output boards, can be sensed by the DanLoad 6000 and displayed for verification at the start
of the setup routine.
3-2
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Program Codes
Program codes are all configurable parameters of the DanLoad 6000. Each Program Code consists
of the following four parts. A three-digit identification number, a name, a selection or value (note:
some values are selected from a predefined pick-list, other values are free form entry), and one to
four program code attributes. The selection or value of a program code affects the general or
specific operation of the DanLoad 6000. Each three-digit identification number / name combination
identifies the specific selection or value. Identical names are repeated when the associated function
is required at several places in a series of similar functions. Therefore, the name is the general
identifier of the program code and the three-digit identification number is the specific identifier of
the program code.
Example:
085 Low flow restart volume 50
Item
Description
085
The three-digit program code is in the range of 001 to 991.

Not all numbers in the series are used. The program code
number is a unique identifier of an associated value or
selection.
Low flow restart volume
The name of the program code can be unique or can be

repeated for similar program codes in a series of program
codes. In this example: program code 085 / 091 / 097 / 103
Low flow restart volume where each three-digit identification
number corresponds to one component: 1, 2, 3, or 4.
50
The value of the program code. In this example, the value

can be any number from 0 to 99999.
<attribute> (not shown)
Program codes may have one or more of the following four

attributes set active: Read only, Weights and measures,
Data logging, Value changed. See Section 6.1 for additional
information on program code attributes.
Program codes are divided into twenty-five functional groups. Each functional group is divided into
one or more display pages which can be shown on the display panel. Program codes are accessible
for monitoring or changing when the DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Program Mode. A diagram
of the Program Mode menu tree is shown in Figure 3 - 1. All program codes are accessible via the
Setup selection of the Program Mode Menu. Functional groups of program codes are listed in
Figure 3 - 2. The value part of a program code can be changed by keypad entries.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Operating Modes
The method of user interaction with the DanLoad 6000 is defined by the functional state of the
instrument. Communications and interaction with a terminal automation system is defined by the
state of the Operating Mode.
Functional mode (set by the user via the Display/Keypad):
#
Loading Mode
Normal operation with the instrument controlling batch product

deliveries to a tanker vehicle.
Program Mode
Permits initial setup and modification of the operation of the

instrument. Access to this mode is passcode restricted and can only
be entered while the DanLoad 6000 is not controlling a batch delivery
operation and a delivery transaction is not open.
Operating mode (set by state of program code 025 Operating mode and by the state of program
code 343 auto/manual changeover INPUT):
#
Auto
Remote control operation, by communicating with a terminal

automation system and local validation of configured safety circuits.
Manual
Communicates status to a Terminal Automation System, but without

remote control functions. Performs local validation of configured
safety circuits.
3-4
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Program Mode Menu
Alarm reset
Alarm reset display
Reprint transaction
Reprint transaction display
Setup
Setup menu
Program code attributes
Program code attributes display
Set date and time
Set date and time display
Set contrast/backlighting
Set contrast/backlighting display
Diagnostics
Diagnostics menu _______________________________
Reprint cutoff
Reprint end-of-day processing data
CALMON status
Calibration monitoring
Additive calibration
Additive meter calibration screen
EXIT (ALT+CLEAR)
______________________________________________________
*
*
*
Diagnostics Menu
Firmware versions
RAM tests
Keypad
Display
Inputs/Outputs
DUART
ARCNET
Crash analysis
Show memory
Print configuration
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Setup Menu
Security parameters
Unit parameters
Valve parameters
Meter parameters
Component parameters
Delivery parameters
Digital valve parameters
Pulse per unit outputs
Additive delivery parameters
Factors
Alarms
I/O parameters
Additive I/O parameters
Component I/O parameters
Temperature/pressure/density
Recipes
Data communications
Dynamic data display
Data logging
Blending
Additive pumps/block valves
LPG/pressure
Transaction storage
Transaction ticket
Analog inputs
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
M enu Tree - Figure 3 - 1
3-5 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ Setup
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Parameters
Program Code
Used For
Security parameters
001 to 024
operation security
Unit parameters
025 to 047
global parameters
Valve parameters
048, 049
flow control valves
Meter parameters
050 to 061
flow meters
065 to 077
liquid components
Delivery parameters
078 to 111
batch deliveries
112 to 127
digital flow control valves
128 to 134
quantity pulses to external equipment
135 to 168
additive injection
Factors
169 to 219
flow meter factors and flow rates
Alarms
220 to 279
actions and limits
I/O parameters
280 to 379
input / output signal assignments
380 to 399
additive injection signal assignments
400 to 425
component block valve signal assignments
Temperature / pressure / density
426 to 479
standard quantity calculation
Recipes
480 to 661
product / batch deliveries
Data communications
662 to 672
logging / terminal automation system
679 to 695
operator data view (programmable)
Data logging
696 to 710
reports to printer
Blending
711 to 799
product blending control
800 to 817
additive pump and block valve control
LPG/Pressure
818 to 833
select pressure calculation and control methods
Transaction data storage
834 to 902
allocate memory for transaction data storage
Transaction ticket
920 to 982
user defined transaction ticket format
Analog inputs
983 to 991
v2 CPU board calibration for 4-20 mA RTD
Program Code Groups - Figure 3 - 2
3-6 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.2
Operator Interface
User / operator interaction with a DanLoad 6000 is described below.

#
The user issues a command via a single key press / release action or by simultaneously
pressing / releasing two keys. While operating in the Loading Mode, all operator entries are
single-key press actions. While operating in the Program Mode, some user entries require
simultaneous two-key actuations.
The DanLoad 6000 responds by either executing the command immediately or by prompting
the user, via the display panel, for additional data entry.
If the command is executed immediately, the displayed information will change in some
manner to indicate response to the command.
If the command cannot be completed without additional information from the user, one of
various types of data input prompt displays will be shown. Now the user has the option to
enter the data in response to the displayed prompt or to return the DanLoad 6000 to the
previous state without modifying any internal or external state or configuration.
3.2.1
Data Display Operation
While operating in the Program Mode, data from the DanLoad 6000 is presented to the user on an
8-line by 40-column LCD display panel. Miscellaneous messages and data are displayed in the
format shown in the General Display Format, Figure 3 - 3.
Header line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Message line
General Display Format
Figure 3 - 3
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 7
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

One common format of the general display is the Program Code View display, Figure 3 - 4. The
Program code View display is used throughout the initial setup procedure and in the future for
monitoring and / or changing program code values / selections.
Header line
ccc name
ccc name
ccc name
ccc name
ccc name
ccc name
Message line
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
Program Code View
Figure 3 - 4
The field types displayed in the Program code View, Figure 3 - 4, are described below.
#
Header line
An alpha-numeric field that is used to describe the contents of

the display. Usually a program codes group or sub-group
title, such as:
Meter 1 parameters
ccc
A three-digit field containing the Program Code

identification number that specifics a unique program code.
The range of the program code series is 001 to 991 (several
program code numbers in the series are not assigned). All
program codes / parameters are described in the tables in
Appendix A and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.
name
An alpha-numeric field that contains the name that describes

the function of the program code. Names are up to 34characters long. Identical names are used for functions that
are repeated several times in a series of similar program codes
for different physical or logical items. A typical name is:
Meter ID
3-8
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
vvvvvvvv
A variable length numeric, alpha-numeric, or selection field

that contains the value or selection of the corresponding
parameter (Program Code). The contents of this field can be
changed by the user (unless the program code attribute is
Read-only). The value / selection is changed via key entries.
The key entry sequences are dependent on the type of field
and are described in the following section. The three types of
fields that can be displayed in this area are:
#
Setup
Message line
numeric The field can contain a variable number of

digits (0 thru 9), a decimal separator (defined by
program code 040 Decimal separator), and a minus
sign (-).
alpha-numeric The field consists of a variable
number of alpha-numeric characters (also called a
string).
selection The field consists of one of an internally
defined option selected from a list of possible options
for this field entry.
An alpha-numeric field used to display a message to the user.

Several prompt messages can be user defined in the
applicable sections of the following setup description.
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.2.2
Keypad Operation
The keypad, located on the front panel, provides the method for the local operator to enter
commands and data into the DanLoad 6000. Example of keypad layouts for different languages are
shown below.
Keypad (English Version)
3 - 10
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Keypad (Spanish Version)
Keypad (French Version)
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 11
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Key
Primary Function
Alternate Function
0 thru 9
numeric digits
ALT
used in combination with other

keys to modify the function of
the other keys, see
descriptions in the
ALTERNATE FUNCTION
column
0 digit
view I/O configuration summary
1 digit
toggle minus sign '-'
3 digit
increase display contrast (darken)
6 digit
decrease display contrast

(lighten)
START
STOP/PRINT
start batch delivery

stop batch delivery/print
batch/transaction report
ENTER
accept value or execute option
CLEAR
remove selected value
SELECT
scroll options list
PROGRAM
EXIT
BACKSPACE
8
7
scroll up
scroll left
9
6
scroll down
scroll right
W&M
the Weights and Measures security switch

(round, spring loaded, sealable switch located in the upper left area
of the keypad; this switch is sealable in the depressed (CLOSED)
position)
Key Functions
Figure 3 - 5
3 - 12
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Several keys perform dual functions, dependent on the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000. The
Loading Mode is active if the Loading Display, the Additive Selection Display, or the Recipe
Selection Display is currently showing on the display panel. The Program Mode is active if the
Program Mode Menu or any related sub-menu is currently showing on the display panel. Specific
functions of the keys in the Loading Mode and the Program Mode are described below.
Key
Function
Loading Mode only:

START
Initiate a batch delivery after entry of the preset quantity.
STOP/PRINT
Suspend a batch delivery operation in progress or end transaction in progress.

Print an optional transaction report that may include batch data.
Loading Mode and Program Mode:

W&M
Setup
(spring loaded captive switch located in the upper left area of the keypad)
The Weights and Measures security switch provides global restriction for
modification of all program codes that have the Weights and Measures
attribute set ON. This restriction prevents users / operators from modifying
the values or selections of these program codes. See Section 6.1 Program
Code Attributes for a complete description of program code attributes and the
Weights and Measures security switch.
#
CLOSED Depressed and captive with the slot in the vertical position.
Can be wire sealed in this position. Critical weights and measures
variables cannot be modified.
OPEN Extended with the slot in the horizontal position. Critical

weights and measures variable can be modified (the switch must be
OPEN prior to accessing the Program Mode to enable modification
capability).
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 13
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Key
Function
This key is used in conjunction with several other keys to change the primary
function performed by the other key. The primary function of a dual function
key is indicated on the top of the key face (white letters / black background).
The alternate function of a dual function key is indicated on the bottom of the
key face (black letters / white background). Numeric keys 0, 1, 3, and 6
also have alternate functions as indicated below. The ALT key should be
pressed and maintained in the depressed position while simultaneously
pressing and releasing an alternate function key to execute an alternate
function.
ALT
0 thru 9
(Loading Mode)
(Program Mode)
Numeric keys used for numeric data entry.

Numeric keys used for numeric data entry and selection of alpha
character group for data entry.
ALT+0
Active in Program Mode only, activates display of the physical configuration

of the DanLoad 6000. The first page displayed contains the location of the
process signal input / output boards detected during the power-up sequence.
Successive pages, accessed by the 98 keys, show the currently configured
state of physical input / output to logical input / output assignments in the
following groups: RTD inputs, 4-20 mA inputs, Discrete inputs, Discrete
outputs
ALT+1
Active in Program Mode only. Toggles the minus sign on or off for a
numeric entry. Can be used before, during, or after entry of a numeric
value.
ALT+3
Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Increases the display contrast
(darkens the display).
ALT+6
Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Decreases the display contrast
(lightens the display).
ENTER
(Loading Mode)
(Program Mode)
3 - 14
Accept or bypass data item entry or preset quantity entry and

continue.
Accept the value or selection highlighted by the box cursor.
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Key
Function
PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER)
(Loading Mode)
Change to Program Mode.
(Program Mode)
CLEAR
(Loading Mode)
(Program Mode)
EXIT (ALT+CLEAR)
(Loading Mode)
(Program Mode)
SELECT
(Loading Mode)
(Program Mode)
Ignore any edit made to the current field selected by the box cursor
and restore the original value / selection.
Clear the current data item entry or preset quantity entry.

Remove the Dynamic Data Display window from the loading. display
Clear the current numeric or alphanumeric entry.
Bypass the data item entry sequence. If data item entry is defined
Step to the next higher menu level. Change to Loading Mode when
the Program Mode Menu is displayed.
Display dynamic data window on the loading display.

Scroll through selection options. Step to next character position
when editing an alpha-numeric string entry.
BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT)
(Loading Mode)
No function.
98
(Program Mode)
Step to previous character position when editing an alpha-numeric

string entry. Scroll backward through selection options.
(Loading Mode)
Change Dynamic Data Display page.
(Program Mode)
Step to next or previous program code (parameter) display line.
67 (ALT+9 or ALT+8)
(Loading Mode)
(Program Mode)
Setup
No function.
Step to next or previous character entry when editing an alphanumeric string entry.
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 15
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.3
Initial Setup Procedure Overview
The initial setup procedure guides the user through a sequence of displayed-prompts and key- pressresponses. The user accomplishes the following three tasks while executing the initial setup
procedure.
#
Accept or modify several default program code values / selections that inform the DanLoad
6000 about the physical characteristics of the batch loading system. Section 3.5 contains
information on process input / output channel assignment.
Accept or modify several default program code values / selections that inform the DanLoad
6000 about the type of flow calculations and logical operations to be performed.
Guide the user through interactive verification and / or program code value changes. This
tutorial function familiarizes the user with the display format and the operator interface,
using the keypad.
Read all of this section and review Section 6 - Program Code Definitions prior to performing the
initial setup procedure. In most cases, desired responses to the prompts encountered during the
initial setup procedure can be determined during execution of the setup procedure. However, if the
correct response cannot be determined during the setup procedure, it is permissible to accept any
or all of the default values / selections for the program codes. Any default value or selection that is
accepted or modified can be changed easily at any time in the future.
The initial setup procedure automatically enters default values / selections for some program codes
that are not covered by the procedure. In some cases, these default values / selections require
modification for the intended application. Review the additional information contained in Sections
3.6 to 3.12 after the initial setup procedure is completed. This additional information should be
reviewed to assure that the DanLoad 6000 is properly configured for your installation.
3.3.1
Data Entry
Several key press responses are required during execution of the initial setup procedure. The
responses are a press / release of ENTER or 9 to continue, numeric data entries with the 0 thru 9
numeric keys, option selection scrolling with the SELECT key, or alpha-numeric data entry. The
value or option displayed is accepted and entered by pressing the ENTER key or either the 9 or 8
arrow key. Methods for data entry are described below.
3 - 16
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
Numeric data entry

Place the box cursor over the selected program code with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. Enter the
desired number with the numeric keys 0 through 9. Numeric entries are toggled between
negative and positive values by entering the numeric value in the field and then pressing and
holding the Alt key while pressing the 1 digit key. If an entry error is made, press the
CLEAR key to clear the field and start again, or toggle the +/- sign to the opposite state.
Option data entry

Selection options are contained in short lists permanently stored in the DanLoad 6000. Place
the box cursor over the selected program code with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. If necessary, use
the SELECT key or the BACKSPACE KEY (ALT+SELECT) to scroll the list forward
or backward until the desired option is displayed.
Alpha-numeric data entry

If alpha-numeric data entry is permitted in a field, the message line will display the
following prompt: 0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3=0, 4=#, 5="
This prompt indicates to the user that an alpha-numeric string of characters can be entered.
The numbers 1 through 5 point to a specific location in a continuous string of characters. For
example, the number 1 points to the letter A, a string of upper case letters continue to Z,
the next character is a, a string of lower case letters continue to z, the next character is 0,
a string of numbers continues to 9. In other words, each group of characters is in one
continuous string of all possible characters. The apparent groups of characters do not wrap
around to the start of that group.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 17
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
number/pound
"
double quote
dollars
'
apostrophe
percent
colon
question mark
semicolon
exclamation point
left parenthesis
&
ampersand
right parenthesis
plus
<
less than
minus
>
greater than
asterisk
left bracket
slash
right bracket
equal
left brace
dot
right brace
comma
backslash
underline
circumflex
tilde
a acute
I acute
o acute
u acute
n tilde (ee)
a diaeresis (umlaut)
e diaeresis (umlaut)
I diaeresis (umlaut)
o diaeresis (umlaut)
u diaeresis (umlaut)
space
Alpha-Numeric Characters
Figure 3 - 6
3 - 18
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Figure 3 - 6 contains a list of all available alpha-numeric characters organized into five
groups. The characters in group 5 will vary slightly depending on the language selection
(program code 028). Alpha-numeric characters are entered in the following manner when
the prompt is displayed.
The flashing square cursor is positioned in the leftward field position. The cursor
indicates the current character entry position within the alpha-numeric field.
The cursor is moved one character position right each time the SELECT key is
pressed. The cursor is moved one character position left each time the
BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key is pressed.
To enter an alpha-numeric character in the current character position, press the

number key 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 which indicates the group of characters which
contains the desired entry. Any number group selector can be pressed after the initial
selection, if an error is made. (Note: An easy method to access the Z character is
press 2 to display lower case a then press the 7 (ALT+8) key.)
The first character of the selected group will now be displayed in the active character
position.
To select another character from the specified group of characters, press the RIGHT
ARROW (6 ) which is the (ALT+9) to move to the next character in the selection
string. Or, press the (7) which is the (ALT+ 8) to move to the previous character in
the selection string. The character selections will jog in sequence automatically if
both the ALT key and either one of the arrow keys are simultaneously maintained
depressed. When the desired character is displayed in the active character position,
release the keys.
Use the SELECT or the BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key to step the cursor to
the next or any desired position in the alpha-numeric field. Repeat the entry
sequence described above until the field content is as desired.
Special alpha-numeric data entry

Program codes 129 / 132 Control meters in the Pulse per unit outputs group and 139 / 144
/ 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Control meters in the Additive parameters group select one of the
fixed options G, N, or X in the following manner. Place the box cursor over the selected
program code with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. Maintain the ALT key depressed and select the
desired option with the 9 or 8 arrow keys.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 19
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.4
Initial Setup Procedure
The Weights and Measures switch located in the upper left area of the keypad should be rotated
until the captive pin passes through the slot and releases the switch to the extended (OPEN)
position.
The electrical jumper configuration for individual circuit boards installed at this time is described
in Section 2 - Installation. The electrical jumper configuration should be verified and AC power
should be connected and applied to the instrument.
The sequence of the initial setup procedure is presented below with examples of the displays
presented to the user, an explanation of the contents of the display, and the user response to each
display.
DanLoad 6000
CPU-1 firmware v5.30
CPU-2 firmware v5.30
Message EPROM v5.30
Power failure
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss
The display example above shows the firmware (application software) version of the DanLoad 6000
and the date and time that AC power input was last removed from the instrument.
DanLoad 6000
Running CPU-1 RAM test
Passed
Running CPU-2 RAM test
Passed
3 - 20
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The display example above shows the results of automatic diagnostic tests that check the operation
of the RAM (random access memory). The normal message is Please wait while the test is in
progress and the normal result message is Passed. A Failed message indicates that a hardware
problem exists in the DanLoad 6000.
Slot 1
AC I/O
Slot 2
Empty
Slot 3
Empty
Slot 4
Empty
Slot 5
2-Ch. Meter
Slot 6
Empty
Slot 7
2-Ch. Analog
DUART = 000
Pres ALT+CLEAR to exit
The display example above shows the location of all process input / output signal boards installed
and the serial communications address of the DanLoad 6000. A message DUART = ###, where ###
is 000 to 255, indicates the communications address for the dual universal asynchronous receiver
/ transmitter module that handles RS 232 / RS 485 serial communications.
On the V1 CPU, the DUART is a daughter Board with an address switch. For firmware versions 5.3
and higher the address switch is no longer used to configure the unit address. Program code 662 is
used to identify the address of the unit.
On the V2 CPU, the DUART is built-in and is addressed using Program code 662.
The tables located in Appendix A should be photo-copied at this time and the copies used for entry
of the physical input / output signal assignments for the DanLoad 6000. The individual channel
assignments can be viewed and recorded at this time. While viewing the slot assignment display
above, press any key to continue. The following display will be shown.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 21
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Meter inputs
01 Chan 0 2-Ch Meter in J5
02 Chan 1 2-Ch Meter in J5
ALT+SELECT to reconfigure
The display example above shows one of several similar displays which indicate the automatic input
/ output signal numbering performed by the DanLoad 6000. The 9 and 8 arrows keys are used to
page through this display group. Display types included in this group are:
I/O Signal Type
Maximum Number
Meter inputs (shown above)
4*
RTD inputs
4 * (5 for v2 CPU)
4-20 mA inputs
8 * (9 for v2 CPU)
Discrete inputs (can be more than one display page)
24 *
Discrete outputs (can be more than one display page)
28 *
If circuit board configuration causes additional I/O points of any type to

be present, the additional I/O points cannot be assigned logically. (The
I/O points are not accessible.)
Section 2.4.1 contains additional information on automatic assignment of input / output channels.
The fields located in this display group are described below.
#
Header line
Defines the input / output signal type.
01
Sequential number for this input. The sequence starts at 01 and

continues through the highest input or output channel of that type.
The DanLoad 6000 assigns these numbers automatically by sensing
the type of board in each slot (J1 to J7). Boards are scanned from
left to right. Therefore, similar type channels in leftward located
boards will have lower numbers than similar type channels in
rightward located boards. A minimum of one meter pulse board must
be present. If an analog board is not present, the RTD inputs and 420 mA inputs groups will display the message No points of this type.
3 - 22
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Chan #
Sequential number of the physical input / output channel on the

corresponding board. The sequence starts at 0. The maximum value
for this field is 7, which corresponds to the eighth output on an AC
I/O board (channels 0 to 7). All other boards have fewer channels
than the AC I/O board.
Meter Pulse
This field indicates the board type in the indicated slot. Displays in
this field can be: 2-channel or 4-channel Meter, 2-channel or 8channel Analog, AC I/O, DC I/O, or Enhanced I/O.
J5
This field indicates the physical location of the board. Displays in

this field can be: J1 through J7.
ALT+SELECT to reconfigure
Configuration during the initial setup procedure is automatic and no
response to this prompt is required. If an input / output signal board
is added in slots J1 to J7 in the future, the DanLoad 6000 senses the
presence of the new board and always displays the current
configuration in the Slot # <board type> display. However, the
input / output channels are not renumbered until the manual
command (ALT+SELECT) to reconfigure is issued.
(Note: If the input / output signal board arrangement of a configured
DanLoad 6000 is changed and the ALT+SELECT command is issued,
input / output points may be renumbered. The physical I/O to
internal logical signal may be changed when the channels are
renumbered to correspond to the new configuration.)
Notes
The two swing arm switch inputs on the Main Processor Board and the two / four meter
pulse inputs and two high resolution meter pulse outputs on the Meter Pulse Board are
dedicated functions and are not shown in the Configuration Summary Display.
The v2 CPU (introduced in 1997) has a built-in DUART, but does not have dedicated swingarm inputs. AC or DC discrete inputs on I/O boards are used instead.
Version 5.50 software can be used with v1 CPU boards per the following:
1.
The communications address must be configured via program code 662 since
the DUART boards address switch is ignored.
2.
Either the dedicated swing-arm discrete or inputs are used for side detection
depending on program codes 312, 37 and 377. See note at the beginning of
5.12 in the software specification.
3.
4-20 mA input 01 and RTD input 01 on the CPU board are inaccessible.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 23
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.5
Process Input / Output Signal Handling
All input / output signal board slots (J1 to J7) are electrically identical. However, for electrical
isolation of AC and DC signals, only AC I/O or Enhanced I/O boards should be installed in slots
J1, J2 or J3. It is strongly suggested that board placement follow the recommended layout indicated
in the descriptions of each board in Section 2. The recommended board layout provides electrical
isolation of AC Voltage control and status signals (AC I/O and / or Enhanced I/O boards) by the
vertical metal partition that can be located between slots J2 and J3 or J3 and J4. In addition, if an
analog input signal board is installed, this board is electrically and physically isolated in the
rightward slot J7. A DanLoad 6000 basic configuration contains the following boards.
Capacity
Input
Output
main processor
2 RS-485
or
1 RS-485 and 1 RS-232
2 DC (dedicated
function: swing arm)
N/A
one meter pulse

(2-ch or 4-ch)
2 pulse
- OR 4 pulse
2 pulse (dedicated
function: high
resolution meter pulse
for 2-ch meter pulse
board only)
2 DC control
one AC I/O
or
one Enhanced I/O
2 AC status
8 AC control
6 DC/AC status
6 AC control
I/O Board
Basic Configuration
Figure 3 - 7
For a v2 CPU installation, the base DanLoad 6000 has one 2- or 4-Channel Meter Pulse board and
one AC I/O board. The v2 CPU board (1997) has one 4-20 mA input and one RTD input built-in.
Up to two 2- or 4-Channel Analog Inputs boards can be added for measuring temperatures, pressures
and densities. Note that the DanLoad 6000 cannot correct densities at measured temperatures to
densities at standard temperatures. Up to two meter pulse boards (of the same kind or mixed) can
be used.
3 - 24
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Basic configuration considerations:

#
Serial communications require an RS-485 / RS-232 DUART module. For v1 CPU boards,
a DUART module is required for data logging to a printer or data logging device. The
DUART is integral to the v2 CPU board.
The meter pulse input board can be either 2-channel or 4-channel types. One or two boards
can be installed. If two boards are installed, they can be any combination of 2-channel and
4-channel boards. However, there can be a total of only four flow meters. If two 4-channel
boards are installed, four meters with two pulse signals from each meter can be implemented
for IP-252 level 'B' pulse security. For pulse security verification, pulse input Channel A
is used for flow measurement and pulse input Channel B is used for verification of Channel
A integrity).
The swing arm input on v1 CPU boards is normally from either a single switch or dual
switch swing arm. This input is used for swing arm side detect and keypad side enable and
to indicate the active load rack side to a terminal automation system.
3.5.1
Physical Input and Output Signal Assignment
The DanLoad 6000 automatically assigns physical input and output channel numbers during initial
setup or when manually commanded to do so. The channel assignment is performed as follows. The
instrument scans the input / output signal boards located in slots J1 (leftward) through J7
(rightward) in that order. Each board is identified and the physical channels on the board, indicated
in Appendix A, are assigned a sequential channel number corresponding to the same type channel.
These physical I/O channel assignments can be viewed by pressing the ALT+0 key while operating
in the Program Mode. While viewing the channel assignments, the prompt message ALT+SELECT
to reconfigure is displayed on the message line. Issuing this command causes the DanLoad 6000
to re-number the physical input / output channels if the board complement has been altered in any
manner since the last configuration. There are five different types of input / output signals that can
be handled by the DanLoad 6000. These channel types are listed below.
I/O Channel Type Description
Meter inputs
Setup
Dedicated meter pulse input numbers 01 and 02 if one meter pulse board is
installed. Dedicated meter pulse input numbers 01, 02, 03, 04 if two meter
pulse boards are installed. (Four channel meter pulse boards implement
channels 1A / 1B and 2A / 2B OR 3A / 3B and 4A / 4B depending on board
jumper configuration.)
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 25
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

I/O Channel Type Description
Analog Input Signal Channel Assignment
Analog Board Type
Input Type
1 each 2Ch
2 each 2Ch
1 each
8-Ch
2 each
8-Ch
1 each 2-Ch /
1 each 8-Ch
# of RTD inputs
# of 4-20 mA inputs
Discrete inputs
Assigned discrete input numbers from 01 to the maximum number of discrete

status inputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered by the
configuration scan.
Discrete outputs
Assigned discrete output numbers from 01 to the maximum number of

discrete control outputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered
by the configuration scan.
The physical channel assignments are indicated under each channel type header in the following
format.
cc Chan n <board type> in Jn
where:
cc
Logical (software assigned) input / output number (for this type of point)
assigned to this point. This number is assigned automatically. Discrete Vdc
and Vac status inputs are numbered sequentially in the same series. Each
channel number is dependent on the I/O board location and the physical board
channel. Vdc and Vac control outputs are numbered sequentially in the same
series, dependent on the I/O board location and the physical board channel.
Chan n
Sequential channel number 0 to n that identifies the physical channel on the

I/O board. The maximum range for this number is 0 to 7. (Note: Maximum
of 8 output channels on an AC I/O board.)
Board name: 2-Ch. Meter, 4-Ch. Meter, AC I/O, DC I/O, Enhanced I/O,
2-Ch. Analog, 8-Ch. Analog
<board type>=
Jn
3 - 26
Slot number, J1 through J7, where the board is located.
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The logical input / output number assignments are solely dependent on I/O board locations. This
assignment informs the DanLoad 6000 of the physical input / output signal configuration and assigns
non-duplicated logical channel numbers (leftward column) for identifying each point. The physical
channel assignments cannot be changed. The assignments are determined by the process I/O board
complement and type of boards.
Fail Safe Operation

The operating state of a discrete output is OPEN or deenergized when the controlled device is in a
OFF, CLOSED, NORMAL, or SAFE state. Discrete outputs that control flow control valves, block
valves, or pumps are energized or CLOSED to OPEN the valve or RUN the pump motor so that an
open wire, open coil, or power failure to the DanLoad 6000 will cause the affected valve(s) to
move to their CLOSED positions and pump motors to stop running. This method of handling control
outputs assures that operation of the loading system is inherently fail-safe.
Safety circuits (permissive status inputs) are normally closed switch or relay contacts that indicate
a normal or safe condition from the corresponding device. Common permissive devices are vehicle
ground connection detectors, tank overspill detectors, and fire warning systems. The DanLoad
6000 has the capability of detecting up to eight general purpose safety circuit inputs, six recipe
selection inputs, and four block valve status inputs. Several normally closed contacts for different
safety circuits can be field wired in series. This implementation reduces the number of physical
discrete inputs required, but also generalizes the common safety input. The DanLoad 6000, or
terminal automation system, cannot determine the specific device that has generated the safety
circuit open alarm when several permissive signals are wired in series.
3.5.2
Inverted Discrete Inputs
Inverted discrete inputs. In order to provide greater flexibility with field signals, most discrete input
functions (e.g. safety circuit inputs, see the list below) can be configured to be "open" when power
is applied, "closed" otherwise, by simply adding 50 to the actual discrete input number, i.e.
Discrete input Meaning
number
0
Point not configured
1
First discrete input, closed when power applied
2
Second discrete input, closed when power applied
.
.
.
.
51
52
.
.
Setup
First discrete input, closed when no power applied

Second discrete input, closed when no power applied
.
.
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 27
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Discrete inputs numbers 51 and above are called inverted discrete inputs. The DanLoad 6000
validates inverted discrete inputs based on the actual number of discrete inputs, e.g. if there are 10
discrete inputs (two AC I/O boards and a DC I/O board), discrete inputs 0 thru 10 and 51 through
60 can be configured.
The configuration summary display ("ALT"+"0" in program mode) and the I/O diagnostic use only
real discrete inputs, not inverted state discrete inputs.
In Setup, inverted discrete inputs can be configured for the following:
- Safety circuit inputs
- Recipe selection inputs
- Component block valve inputs
- Auto/manual change-over
- Primary alarm reset switch
- Flow control valve stem switch inputs
- Flow control valve close inputs
- Meter flow inputs
- Additive selection inputs
- Swing 1 and swing 2 inputs
- End input
It is not be meaningful to configure inverted discrete inputs for the following:
- Additive feedback/meter inputs
Logical Signal Processing

The DanLoad 6000 implements logical signal handling techniques at the process signal interface
level by allowing any process input or output signal to be connected to any physical input or output
channel of the same type, such as RTD, status input, or control output. This is accomplished by
assigning each physical input and output channel to an internal logical channel (function) during
the setup procedure via the program codes. This design provides flexibility for the user by allowing
one common physical configuration of the DanLoad 6000 to be adaptable to most applications. In
addition, the spare parts stocking requirements are greatly reduced so that only a minimal number
of different types of electronic signal input / output boards are required.
The actual links (assignments) between
physical input and output channels 76
logical inputs and outputs 76
internal logical processing of these channels
3 - 28
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
are performed automatically during the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000. These assignments can
be manually changed later if required. The current physical channel to logical channel assignments
can be viewed at any time. All physical input / output channel to logical channel assignments are
defined in the following program code groups. Appendix A contains worksheets that identify each
point.
#
#
#
#
#
#
Meter parameters, program codes 050 to 061

I/O parameters, program codes 280 to 360
Recipe I/O parameters, program codes 361 to 379
Component I/O parameters, program codes 400 to 425
Additive I/O parameters, program codes 380 to 399
Additive pumps / block valves, program codes 800 to 833
The channel assignments defined by these program codes are viewable while operating in Program
Mode. The rightward column of the program code display line contains a one or two digit number.
This number is the currently assigned logical channel number in the series of channel numbers
corresponding to the type of channel.
Discrete status inputs and outputs are assigned to default logical channels during setup. During
initial setup, carefully verify that all input and output point assignments match the actual wiring of
your installation. See Appendix A for default channel assignments.
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key to exit the input / output signal configuration display area and
continue with the initial setup.
DanLoad 6000
Unit is not configured
Initial setup required
Enter passcode _________
The display example above shows messages that indicate the initial setup procedure has never been
executed on this DanLoad 6000. Enter the factory default passcode, 6000, with the numeric keys
and then press the ENTER key.
The Set Date and Time display is shown next. This display provides the method the set the current
date and time for the DanLoad 6000 internal calendar / clock. The date and time are maintained by
an on-board battery on the main processor board and do not require external power.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 29
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Set Date and Time

Current date is mm/dd/yy
Enter new date (mm/dd/yy):
Current time is hh:mm:ss
Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):
Set Date and Time Display

Figure 3 - 8
The current date and time are displayed in the formats indicated in the Set Date and Time display.
The date format is always in the form (mm/dd/yy) during the initial setup. After the initial setup
is complete, the date format can be change via program code 038 Date format, if desired. The date
and time default during initial setup and before modification is: 01/01/93 00:00:ss [January 1,
1993, several seconds (ss) after midnight (00:00:00)]. The flashing underline cursor is displayed
right of the Enter new date (mm/dd/yy): prompt line for entry of a different date than the current
date. Use numeric keys 0 to 9 to enter all or part of a new date. If it is desired to leave the value for
any component of the current date unchanged, press the ENTER key. The ENTER key must be
pressed once after each component of the date is entered or to accept the current value in that
component. After the date has been entered or accepted, the flashing underline cursor moves to the
right of the Enter new time (hh:mm:ss) prompt. The time value is entered or accepted in a similar
manner as the date entry. The EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key may be used at any time to step to the
next entry line.
The Set Date and Time display can be accessed at any time after the initial setup procedure is
completed by selecting Set Date and Time from the Program Menu.
Meter totalizers
Meter
1
2
3
4
Gross
0
0
0
0
Std
0
0
0
0
Press any key to continue

The display example above shows the gross and standard values of the flow meter accumulators.
The values may be zeros as indicated or some other values.
3 - 30
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Initial setup
Is this unit a blender
No
The display example above shows the default selection No, which indicates that the application is
single component loading. The default selection sets the number of flow meters, number of flow
control valves, number of components to 1, and unit type to sequential with automatic control of
the block valve.
If the application requires blending of two to four components, press the SELECT key to scroll the
pick list to the Yes option. Press the ENTER or the 9 arrow key to select the next program code.
The Type of blender defaults to Seq.(auto). If another type of blending control is desired, press the
SELECT key to scroll the options list (options are described in Section 6 - 026 Unit type. Press
the 9 arrow key to select the next program code.
If Type of blender is Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual), the next prompt displayed is:
065 Number of components which defaults to 2
If Type of blender is In-line or Off-rack, the next prompt displayed is:
050 Number of meters which defaults to 2
Accept or change the default value as required.
Initial setup
Is this unit a blender
Type of blender
065 Number of components
Setup
Yes
Seq.(auto)
2
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 31
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Note
For the remaining description of the initial setup procedure, it is assumed that:
Is this unit a blender? selection remains the default option No
The following description covers one flow meter, one flow control valve, and one
component. The procedure for defining multiple devices and components is similar except for
the requirement to define additional program codes for the additional devices and components.
3 - 32
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Meter 1 parameters
051 Meter ID
052 Valve to be controlled
M1
1
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="

The display example above shows program codes related to flow meter number 1. The No selection
for blending has set the number of meters to 1, program code 050 indicated below is not displayed
in the initial setup procedure:
050 Number of meters
051 Meter ID
M1
Default string M1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the bottom line to allow
the user to change this string to any five characters.
052 Valve to be controlled
Default value is valve number 1. Assigns a flow control valve to control flow through this meter.
A flow control valve must be assigned to each meter to control the batch loading. More than one
meter be assigned to the same flow control valve.
Note
If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual) multi-component blender,
components are defined at this time. If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as an In-line or Offrack blender, flow meters 2 through 4, as required, are defined at this time.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 33
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Component 1
066 Component ID
067 Meter
068 Mass adjustment
Component #1
1
0.000000
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="

The display example above shows program codes related to component number 1. The No selection
for blending has set the number of components to 1, program code 065 indicated below is not
displayed in the initial setup procedure:
066 Component ID
Component #1
Default string Component #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the message line
to allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters.
067 Meter
Default value 1. This number indicates that flow meter 1 is assigned to measure this component.
Only one flow meter, meter 1, is defined at this time so 1 is the only valid assignment. However,
this assignment can be from 1 to 4 depending on the number of flow meters defined in the
installation. (This program code defines the relation between components (products) and flow
meters.)
068 Mass adjustment
0.000000
Default selection 0.000000. This program code sets the mass computation adjustment factor (1),
such that: Mass = Std volume x (Density - Buoyancy x 1). While the std volume is typically similar
in magnitude to the gross volume, i.e. a similar number of units, the mass may be substantially
different from both.
Note
If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual) multi-component blender,
additional components are defined at this time.
3 - 34
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Delivery parameters
078 Maximum preset qty
079 Minimum preset qty
080 Preset/delivery type
081 Delivery display type
082 Stop key action
083 Fall back qty
3000
50
Gross
Gross
Low flow
1000
The display example above shows global program codes related to the delivery method used to
deliver all defined components. The default delivery program codes should be verified or changed
as required to match the requirements of the installation.
3000
Default value 3000. The entry sets the upper quantity limit, for any batch delivery, that can be
entered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. The value is typically set to the
quantity of the largest compartment to be loaded in any authorized tanker vehicle. Operating
procedures may require loading of a quantity in excess of this number by loading more than one
batch to one compartment.
50
Default value 50. The entry defines the lower quantity limit, for any batch delivery, that can be
entered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. This quantity is referred to as the
flushing quantity at some installations. Refer to Section 6.8 for details on the special value zero (0)
operation.
Gross
Default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the gross quantity calculation is used for
delivery control. The flow control valve always controls ramp up to high flow rate based on gross
delivered quantity. The flow control valve controls ramp down to the low flow rate and terminates
delivery based on the quantity type selection in this field.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 35
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Gross
Default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the Loaded, Remaining, and Transaction
values are displayed in gross quantity.
082 Stop key action
Low flow
Default selection Low flow. This selection indicates the action to take after the STOP key is pressed
during a batch delivery. The flow rate is reduced until the low flow rate is achieved and then the
load is terminated by commanding the flow control valve to close.
083 Fall back qty
1000
Default value 1000. This value is the quantity that flows at a fall back flow rate before the DanLoad
6000 attempts to ramp up to the next higher flow rate.
3 - 36
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Comp 1 delivery parameters

084 Low flow start qty
085 Low flow restart qty
086 Low flow stop qty
087 Line pack delay (s)
088 Pump stop delay (s)
089 Block valve delay (s)
50
20
50
2
30
0
The display example above shows program codes related to the delivery method used to deliver the
component number 1 only. These default delivery program codes should be verified or changed as
required depending on the design of the installation.
50
Default value 50. This value indicates the quantity units that must be loaded at the low flow rate
before issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve. (Sequential unit type only.)
085 Low flow restart qty
20
before issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve. If the quantity specified by program
code 084 Low flow start quantity has been delivered, this quantity is used after restart of a batch
delivery that has been temporarily suspended for any reason. (Sequential unit type only.)
086 Low flow stop qty
50
before issuing the close command to the flow control valve at the end of a batch delivery operation.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 37
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Default value 2. This value indicates that the pump run relay output is energized two seconds before
the command is issued to open the flow control valve to low flow rate setting.
30
Default value 30. This value indicates that the command to close the flow control valve is issued
and 30 seconds later the pump run relay output is de-energized.
Default value 0. This value indicates that the control output to open the component block valve is
issued and 0 seconds later (immediately) the command to open the flow control valve to low flow
rate is issued. The block valve control output is opened (block valve closed) at the termination of
the batch delivery.
Note
If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multi-component blender, additional components are
defined at this time.
3 - 38
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Delivery parameters (cont'd)

108 Ramp clicks
109 Maintenance clicks
110 Additive pump stop (s)
111 Primary component
30
30
10
1
The display example above shows global program codes related to the method used to adjust flow
control valves, additive pump control, and blending.
108 Ramp clicks
30
Default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts to increase the
flow rate to a higher flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and maintaining the fall back
flow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.
30
Default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts to maintain the
current normal flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and falling back to the next lower
flow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.
10
Default value 10. This value is the number of seconds between the end of the load operation and
deenergizing the additive pump control circuits.
Default value 1. This value sets the number of the component to use for calculation of blend ratios
and for clean line flushing. (Only applicable when program code 722 Blend error method set to
Grspctsmpl or Stdpctsmpl .)
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 39
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Meter factors
169 Number of factors/component
170 Meter factor method
2
Fixed
The display example above shows global program codes related to the method used to handle meter
factors for all components / flow meters.
Default value 2. This value indicates that two meter factors for each component at two different flow
rates (low flow start/stop and high flow) will be defined. Up to four flow rates for each component
can be defined.
Fixed
Default selection Fixed. This selection indicates that the exact meter factors are used and no
mathematical interpolation of the meter factor values between associated flow rate points will be
performed.
3 - 40
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Component 1 factors
171 Nominal K-factor
172 Master meter factor
173 Stop rate
23.0
1.0000
120
The display example above shows program codes related to component number 1 only. The
DanLoad 6000 maintains the fixed relationship between each defined component and each flow
meter so that high flow measurement accuracy can be maintained when multiple components are
delivered through one flow meter.
Note
The values of program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor have great affect on
control of the quantity of product delivered and flow measurement accuracy. These program
code values must be set properly before any loading operation is performed.
171 Nominal K-factor
23.0
Default value 23.0. This value indicates the K-factor (system factor) for the flow meter. [NOTE:
The initial K-factor should be the pulses per quantity unit obtained from the flow meter identification
plate or from the manufacturer. This number should be mathematically rounded to one decimal
place (nn.n), if necessary].
172 Master meter factor
1.0000
Default value 1.0000. This value is the base meter factor value used for comparison with all system
meter factor entries. Program code [175 / 177 / 179 / 181] [186 / 188 / 190 / 192] [197 / 199 / 201
/ 203] [208 / 210 / 212 / 214] Comp p meter factor f meter factors are compared to the program code
172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor for the component and are considered invalid if they
deviate more than +/- the percentage value of program code 215 Master MF %. In this example,
assuming that program code 215 Master MF % is the default value of 2.00, acceptable meter factors
must be within the range of 0.9800 to 1.0200 (NOTE: The master meter factor is calculated by the
171 Nominal K-factor divided by the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal
places.)
173 Stop rate
120
Default value is 120. This program code defines the flow rate at which a component is delivered
during the components configured low flow stop quantity at the end of an in-line batch. The overall
flow rate of the blend at the end of a batch is the sum of the stop rates of any flowing components.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 41
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Component 1 factor 1
174 Comp 1 flow rate 1
175 Comp 1 meter factor 1
200
1.0000
The display example above shows program codes related to component 1 and meter factor 1 (low
flow rate) only.
200
Default value 200. This value is the calibration flow rate for meter factor 1 and is also the low flow
start and stop flow rate for sequential unit type. The flow rate is in quantity units per minute (such
as gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of program code 171
Nominal K-factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units for the
flow meter.
Example:
If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this program code are gallons per
minute.
1.0000
Default value 1.0000. This value is the meter factor for flow rate 1 program code 174 Comp 1 flow
rate 1. (NOTE: The meter factor is calculated by the program code 171 Nominal K-factor divided
by the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
3 - 42
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Component 1 factor 2
600
1.0000
The display example above shows program codes related to component 1 and meter factor 2 (which
is the high flow rate for sequential unit type with the number of factors set to 2).
500
Default value 500. This value is the flow rate for meter factor 2 in quantity units per minute (such
as gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of program code 171
Nominal K-factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units for the
flow meter. Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this program code are
gallons per minute.
1.0000
Default value 1.0000. This value is the meter factor for flow rare 2. (NOTE: The initial meter
factor should be 1.0000 until an actual meter factor can be determined from a meter proof. The
initial meter factor is calculated by program code 171 Nominal K-factor divided by the actual Kfactor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
Note
A third and fourth flow rate for component 1 can be defined at this time if desired. If the
component's meter will be proved at more than two flow rates, additional flow rates / meter
factors can be defined at this time.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 43
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
MF
215
216
217
218
219
validation
Master MF %
Adjacent MF %
Passcode per transaction
Product units mnemonic
Use restart qty
2.00
0.25
No
Gal
No
The display example above shows global program codes that set the limits for validation of manually
entered meter factors.
215 Master MF %
2.00
Default value 2.00. This value is the set point for verification of individual component meter factors
with respect to the Master meter factor for the component. Program codes for master meter factors
and components are indicated in the table below.
3 - 44
Components 6
Master Meter Factors 6
172
183
194
205
Comp x meter factor 1
175
186
197
208
177
188
199
210
179
190
201
212
181
192
203
214
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
216 Adjacent MF %
0.25
Default value 0.25. This value is the set point for verification of individual component meter factors
with respect to adjacent meter factors for the component. Program codes for master meter factors
and adjacent meter factors are indicated in the table below. Entering 0.00 disables the validation.
Components
1
172
183
194
205
175
186
197
208
8
9
177
188
199
210
8
9
179
190
201
212
181
192
203
214
Master Meter Factors 6

Adjacent Meter Factors 9
9
8
217 Passcode per transaction
No
Not implemented.
218 Product units mnemonic
Gal
Input a product units name (up to six characters) for display on the loading screen and printing on
data logs. This allows the description to be in any language or local abbreviation.
219 Use restart qty
No
Select either No or Yes. If No is selected, start up each component by loading its low flow
start quantity at its low flow rate. If Yes is selected, start up the first component by loading its low
flow start quantity at its low flow rate. Start up further components by loading their low flow restart
quantities at their low flow rates.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 45
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Alarm parameters
220 Secondary alarm reset (s)
300
The display example above shows a global program code that sets the storage time for secondary
alarm conditions.
300
Default value 300. This value indicates that active alarms designated as Secondary alarms will be
automatically cleared (reset) after 300 seconds has elapsed.
The time limit allows time for the operator to correct a condition that causes a secondary alarm to
occur during loading. The secondary alarm condition terminated the batch delivery. However, if
the cause of the secondary alarm is cleared within the time specified by program code 220
Secondary alarm reset (s), the product delivery can be restarted. If the cause of the alarm is not
cleared within the time specified by program code 220 Secondary alarm reset (s), the batch delivery
is ended and a new batch must be defined before delivery can resume.
3 - 46
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that
alarm. The four possible alarm actions are described below. The alarm actions for several alarms
are limited to less than four selections. The Alarm action for several alarms is pre-determined and
cannot be changed.
Alarm Action
Primary
Description
If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut
and the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot resume
until the alarm is cleared.
RED (lower) LED on operator panel is steady ON
Either or both alarm discrete outputs, program codes 287
Alarm output 1 and 379 Alarm output 2 is maintained
closed (if defined and enabled by the corresponding
mask).
Reset
Keypad in Program Mode.
Alarm reset discrete input, program
code 344 Primary alarm reset (if
defined).
Terminal automation system.
Alarm data is stored in Alarm Storage Memory.

Secondary
If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut

and the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot resume
until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary alarm reset time
has elapsed.
Correct cause of alarm

Automatically reset after time value in
program code 220 Secondary alarm
reset (s) has elapsed.
RED (lower) LED on operator panel is pulsed ON / OFF

Either or both alarm discrete outputs, program codes 287
Alarm output 1 and 379 Alarm output 2 is pulsed (if
defined and enabled by the corresponding mask).
The alarm can be reset by correcting the cause, e.g.
reconnecting a safety circuit, in which case the batch can be
restarted if the remaining quantity is not less than the
minimum preset quantity. The alarm is reset automatically
at the end of a configurable time period (program code
220) , in which case the batch can be restarted (Press
START when ready of STOP to cancel) if the remaining
quantity is not less than the minimum preset quantity.
Info
An event message is displayed on the message line of the

display panel for ten seconds or special processing is
performed. (Example of special processing is issuing a
temperature failure alarm.)
<not applicable>

Off
Disable monitoring of this alarm.
<not applicable>
Alarm Action Summary

Figure 3 - 9
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 47
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
221
222
223
224
225
226
Alarm parameters (cont'd)

Low flow alarm action
Minimum flow rate
Low flow time (s)
High flow alarm action
Maximum flow rate
High flow time (s)
Primary
100
10
Primary
660
10
The display example above shows program codes which define the global method of processing low
and high flow rate conditions for any defined flow meter.
221 Low flow alarm action
Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the Low flow alarm becomes active, the
current delivery operation will be suspended.
222 Minimum flow rate
100
Default value 100. This value is the minimum flow rate (quantity units per time unit) allowed for
the time period indicated by program code 223 Low flow time (s).
223 Low flow time (s)
10
Default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be continuously below
the minimum flow rate specified by program code 222 Minimum flow rate before the alarm is
triggered.
224 High flow alarm action
Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the High flow alarm becomes active, the
3 - 48
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
225 Maximum flow rate
660
Default value 660. This value is the maximum flow rate (quantity units per time unit) allowed for
the time period indicated by program code 226 High flow time (s). This flow rate setting should be
set above and close to the normally expected high flow rate. This setting allows rapid detection of
a loss of control of the flow control valve condition.
226 High flow time (s)
10
Default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be continuously below
the minimum flow rate specified by program code 225 Maximum flow rate before the alarm is
triggered.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 49
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
227
228
229
230
231
232

Overrun limit qty
Underflow alarm action
Underflow limit qty
No flow t-o alarm action
No flow t-o (s)
Unauthorized flow limit qty
2.0
Off
5.0
Primary
5
10.0
The display example above shows program codes which define the method of processing several
flow related error conditions.
227 Overrun limit qty
2.0
Default value 2.0. This value is the quantity units allowed to be delivered which exceed the preset
quantity. The alarm can only occur after the DanLoad 6000 has attempted to stop the delivery in the
normal manner. The alarm priority selection is permanently set to Primary. If the Overrun limit
quantity alarm becomes active, the delivery operation in progress will be suspended. (NOTE: It
may be necessary to temporarily set this value to a significantly larger value while the first several
batches are delivered at a new installation. This is required so that the DanLoad 6000 can calculate
the final trip or closing quantity delivered. The DanLoad 6000 does not calculate the final trip
quantity if the delivery is terminated by an alarm action.)
Warning
Use several small quantity batch deliveries to load a vessel after initial setup. This procedure
permits verification of proper flow control valve operation and prevents overfilling the vessel.
228 Underflow alarm action
Off
Default selection Off. This selection indicates the action taken if the delivered quantity is less than
the value of program code 229 Underflow limit quantity. The Off selection disables the underflow
alarm.
3 - 50
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
229 Underflow limit qty
5.0
Default value 5.0. This value is the number of quantity units allowed for the delivered quantity to
be less than the preset quantity at the end of a batch delivery operation.
230 No flow t-o alarm action
Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the No flow alarm becomes active, the
231 No flow t-o (s)
5.0
Default value 5.0. This value is elapsed time allowed for not receiving any pulses from the flow
meter when the system is in a component flowing configuration.
Example:
The pump is running, the block valve is OPEN, and the flow control valve is OPEN
and no pulses are detected.
232 Unauthorized flow qty
10.0
Default value 10.0. The quantity of unauthorized flow at which an unauthorized flow alarm occurs.
The DanLoad 6000 measures pulses continuously, not just when a batch is in progress. Zero disables
the unauthorized flow alarm. If the unauthorized flow quantity is set to "something point 1", e.g. 0.1,
1.1 or 2.1, then a meter's unauthorized flow counter (the internal one that causes the alarm to be
raised, not the running totalizer seen in the dynamic data display or by the automation system) is
cleared whenever the meter is authorized for a batch; this prevents the "unauthorized flow alarm will
eventually happen" problem. The default value is 10.0.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 51
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
233
234
235
236
237

Error limit (pulses)
Reset count (pulses)
Data logging alarm action
Time-out ch. A (s)
Time-out ch. B (s)
0
10000
Info
10
10
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing pulse security
error conditions. These program codes are only applicable in installations that used IP-252 pulse
security methods and only during batch deliveries. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section
6.13 of this manual and item below.
Note
Pulse security implementation is hardware and software dependent. The value of program
code 233 Error limit (pulses) must be set to 0, to prevent triggering this alarm if the physical
flow meter installation does not provide the required dual pulse train to the DanLoad 6000.
233 Error limit (pulses)
Default value 0. This value is the allowable accumulated error count due to comparison differences
between dual pulse train inputs from one flow meter. The priority selection is internally set to
Primary. If an Error limit alarm becomes active, the current batch delivery operation will be
stopped.
234 Reset count (pulses)
10000
Default value 10000. This value is used reset the accumulated pulse comparison error count from
dual pulse train comparison to be reset to zero after 10000 errors have been accumulated during the
current delivery operation.
Example:
3 - 52
If program code 233 Error limit (pulses) is set to 10 and program code 234 Reset
count (pulses) is set to 1000, the DanLoad 6000 allows no more than 10 pulses errors
for each accumulated 1000 input pulses.
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
235 Data logging alarm action
Info
This selection is used to specify the action taken when a data logging alarm (overwriting an alarm
message in the alarm message storage memory) occurs.
236 Time-out ch. A (s)
10
This value specifies the allowable time between receiving messages from the terminal automation
system before issuing a Comms failure channel A alarm. Zero disables the alarm.
237 Time-out ch. B (s)
10
This value specifies the allowable time between receiving messages from the terminal automation
system before issuing a Comms failure channel B alarm. Zero disables the alarm.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 53
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
238
239
240
241
242
243

Temp fail alarm action
Minimum temperature
Maximum temperature
Density fail alarm action
Minimum density/gravity
Maximum density/gravity
Primary
-40.0
110.0
Primary
0.0000
0.0000
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of RTD temperature input
signal and density input signal error conditions.
238 Temp fail alarm action
Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation will be
suspended if the process temperature input is less than the value of program code 239 Minimum
temperature or greater than the value of program code 240 Maximum temperature. A Primary alarm
must be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary setting
detects temperature input failures. The backup temperature specified by program code 434 / 437 /
440 / 443 Comp x backup temp is not used in the Primary mode.
239 Minimum temperature
-40.0
Default value -40.0. This value is lower limit allowed for a process temperature input before a Temp
fail alarm is issued. (Note: -40 degrees Celsius is the lowest temperature that can be measured by
a standard RTD input.)
240 Maximum temperature
110.0
Default value 110.0. This value is upper limit allowed for a process temperature input before a Temp
fail alarm is issued. (Note: +110 degrees Celsius is the highest temperature that can be measured
by a standard RTD input.)
3 - 54
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
241 Density fail alarm action
Primary
Default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation will be
suspended if the process density/gravity input is less than the value of program code 242 Minimum
density/gravity or greater than the value of program code 243 Maximum density/gravity. A Primary
alarm must be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary
setting detects density/gravity input failures. The backup density/gravity specified by program code
457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Comp x backup density/gravity is not used in the Primary mode.
242 Minimum density/gravity
0.0000
This value is lower limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is triggered.
243 Maximum density/gravity
0.0000
This value is upper limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is triggered.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 55
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
244
245
246
247
248

Minimum pressure
Maximum pressure
Additive error limit
Additive feedback count
Block valve time (s)
0.0
0.0
3
10
10
The display example above shows program codes related to the method of processing the indicated
error conditions.
244 Minimum pressure
0.0
This value is the low pressure set point used for validation of pressure input signals.
245 Maximum pressure
0.0
This value is the high pressure set point used for validation of pressure input signals.
246 Additive error limit
This value sets the error count limit for triggering an Additive error limit alarm. (See Section 3.9
for additional information.)
247 Additive feedback count
The expected number of feedback pulses per additive ratio cycle for the Mech additive injection
method, e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3 confirmation pulse, 2 for Hyrolec injector. The number of seconds
within which the additive feedback input must go on and off again after the additive ratio output has
been energized for the Handshake additive injection method, e.g. 5 (per Mapco).
248 Block valve time (s)
10
This value sets the time allowed for a component block valve to close after the block valve control
output has been deenergized at the end of a loading operation or when a loading operation is
temporarily stopped.
3 - 56
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
249
250
251
252

Circuit 1 alarm action
Secondary
#1 Ground detector open
Primary
#2 Overspill detector open
error conditions.
249 Circuit 1 alarm action
Secondary
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 1 is open during a batch.
250 #1 Ground detector open

This alphanumeric entry is the configurable message that is displayed when safety circuit 1 is open
during a batch.
Primary
252 #2 Overspill detector open

during a batch.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 57
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
253
254
255
256

Secondary
#3 Permissive power failure
Secondary
#4 Additive injection failure
error conditions. Note that safety circuits 3 and 4 alarms have alternate uses as the end and recipe
selection alarms respectively.
Secondary
254 #3 Permissive power failure

during a batch.
Secondary
256 #4 Additive injection failure

during a batch.
3 - 58
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
257
258
259
260

Secondary
#5 Arm down side 1
Secondary
#6 Arm down side 2
error conditions.
Secondary
258 #1 Arm down side 1

during a batch.
Secondary

during a batch.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 59
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
261
262
263
264

Secondary
#7 Walkway down side 1
Secondary
error conditions.
Secondary
262 #7 Walkway down side 1

during a batch.
Secondary

during a batch.
3 - 60
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
265
266
267
268
269
270
Alarm parameters
Circuit 5 type
Circuit 6 type
Circuit 7 type
Circuit 8 type
Alarm o/p 1 mask
Alarm o/p 2 mask
(cont'd)
1
2
1
2
8388607
0
error conditions.
265 Circuit 5 type
This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 5.
266 Circuit 6 type
267 Circuit 7 type
268 Circuit 8 type

269 Alarm o/p 1 mask
8388607
A one in the bit corresponding to the alarm type means that alarms of that type should control the
alarm output according to the alarm action. The default value is 8388607 for all 23 alarm types.
A one in the bit corresponding to the alarm type means that alarms of that type should control the
alarm output according to the alarm action. The default value is 0, i.e. no alarm types.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 61
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The following table indicates the scope of the values of program codes 265 to 268.
Program Code 265 to 268 Circuit x type
Type
Description
Check Safety circuit x while a batch is in progress
Check Safety circuit x while a batch is in progress ONLY at side 1 *
Check Safety circuit x while a batch is in progress ONLY at side 2 *
3 - 62
Determined by the state of the swing arm switch inputs to the CPU board and the configured
side-detect method (program code 312).
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________

271 Unauth additive flow vol
272 Prod/add -%
273 Prod/add +%
0.0000
0
0
error conditions.
0.0000
This selection sets the volume of unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarm
is raised for the Meter and Control injection methods.
272 Prod/add -%
This selection sets the percentage of the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch below
which an additive failure alarm is raised.
273 Prod/add +%
This selection sets the percentage of the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch above
which an additive failure alarm is raised.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 63
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
276
277
278
279

Ramp down alarm action
Primary
Ramp down time (s)
4
Additive per 1000 error limit
1
End time (s)
180
error conditions.
276 Ramp down alarm action
Primary
A ramp down alarm is raised when the alarm is active and the DanLoad 6000 is unable to reduce the
flow rate to a lower, desired flow rate within the time specified. This selection determines if the
ramp down alarm action is enabled (Primary) or disabled (Off).
277 Ramp down time (s)
This selection sets the time in seconds allowed for ramp down before the ramp down alarm is raised.
278 Additive per 1000 error limit
This selection sets the number of ratio quantities worth of additive by which the actual quantity of
additive can differ from the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch before an additive
failure alarm is raised.
279 End time (s)
180
This selection sets the end time in seconds.
3 - 64
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Recipes
480 Number of recipes
Recipe 1
481 Recipe name
Recipe #1
482 Comp 1 %
100.00
483 Comp 2 %
0.00
484 Comp 3 %
0.00
485 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
0.00
486 Sequence or low proportion
1
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3=0 4=#,5="
The display examples above show program codes related to the method defining recipes that control
the delivery of components in blending operations. Validation of recipe component percentages is
performed when a recipe is selected and when a preset quantity is entered. Component percentages
are validated as follows.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 65
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Sequential blending
The sum of the percentages referenced by program code 486 Sequence to load program code
must equal 100.
Example: Sequential Blending
(065 Number of components = 3)
Program Code
Valid
Invalid
482 Comp 1 %
70
70
483 Comp 2 %
20
30
484 Comp 3 %
10
312
320
481 Name
In-line blending
The sum of the percentages of components specified by program code 065 Number of
components must equal 100.
Example: In-line Blending
(065 Number of components = 3)
Program Code
Valid
Invalid
482 Comp 1 %
70
70
483 Comp 2 %
20
20
484 Comp 3 %
10
10
481 Name

Note: For an in-line blender, the sequence or low proportion should normally be filled with
zeros unless one or more low proportion components are required.
3 - 66
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Default value 1. This value causes one set of recipe definition program codes to be available for
configuration. This value can be printed on Transaction Reports.
481 Recipe name
Recipe #1
Default string Recipe #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the message line to
allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters. The name of the currently selected
recipe is shown in the upper left area of the display while operating in the Loading Mode. This value
can be printed on Transaction Reports.
482 Comp 1 %
100.00
Default value 100. This value sets the recipe to define a single component (component #1) for
delivery. This value was set automatically because of the initial selection of No blending (one flow
meter, one flow control valve, and one component)
483 Comp 2 %
0.00
Default value 0. This value indicates that this component is not loaded by this recipe.
484 Comp 3 %
0.00
0.00
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 67
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Default value 1. This value indicates that only component 1 is delivered when this recipe is selected.
If more than one component is defined, the other components can be specified in the sequence to
load by indicating the component number at the desired sequence place in this program code.
For sequential blending:
Indicates the sequence to load the preconfigured components.
Example: Program code 486 Sequence to load set to 142 indicates that during sequential
loading, component 1 is loaded first, component 4 is loaded second, component 2 is loaded
third, then the complete batch is terminated.
For in-line blending:
Sequence positions xxxx correspond to components 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively. For each
preconfigured component, a zero in program code 486 Sequence to load indicates that the
component is a high-proportion component. A one in program code 486 Sequence to load
indicates that the component is a low-proportion component that is loaded during the high
flow time of the batch.
Example: Program code 486 Sequence to load set to 010 indicates that this is a 3-component
blender and during in-line blending, components 1 and 3 are high-proportion components
and component 2 is a low-proportion component, i.e. delivered during the high flow part of
the batch.
3 - 68
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Setup complete
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit

The display example above shows that the initial setup procedure is finished. Press the EXIT
(ALT+CLEAR) key to continue. The DanLoad 6000 is now in the Loading Mode. Additional
program codes, such as those controlling additive injection, that were not covered in the initial setup
procedure should be reviewed and modified if required at this time.
Assuming that only one recipe was defined, the loading display indicated below is displayed.
Gasoline
Loaded
Preset
Remaining
Transaction total
Enter preset qty
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
0%
+)))),
0 Gal
0 Gal
0 Gal
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
.))))-
The Loading Display example above is the normal display that is presented to the user / operator
during presetting batch quantities and batch deliveries. The user / operator is able to define the
delivery quantity and monitor the delivery operation via this display and the keypad. Batch delivery
operations are described in Section 4 - Operation.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 69
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.6
Product Delivery and Blending
From two to four products can be blended into a composite stream and delivered. The Delivery Blending table located in Appendix A contains an overview of all physical input and output signals
and internal control program codes that are related to product delivery / blending equipment and
procedures.
The basic configuration of the type of blending to be performed is controlled by the entry in program
code 026 Unit type. The configurable blender types are described below.
3.6.1
Sequential Blending
Sequential blending is the loading of one product at one time through one flow meter and one flow
control valve. The blend ratio is correct only after all components of the blend have been loaded.
A DanLoad 6000 that controls loading of one product is configured as a sequential blender, although
no component blending action is performed. Block valve control for each component can be
controlled either automatically or manually as described below.
#
Seq.(auto)
The DanLoad 6000 controls the opening and closing of the component block valves
automatically.
Seq.(manual)
The DanLoad 6000 prompts the operator to open and close the component block valves at
the start and end of each batch loading.
Prompt:
Open block valve - press ENTER after a batch delivery has been configured
and the START key is pressed
Prompt:
Close block valve - pres ENTER after delivery of the batch and after the
flow control valve has been closed
The response to either prompt is to press the ENTER key to execute the open or close block
valve operation.
3 - 70
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The loading method for sequential blending is described below.

#
Preset the batch quantity (the total quantity of the components to be loaded) and press the
START key.
Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the first component to the low flow
rate value and maintain the low flow rate for the specified low flow start quantity (program
code 84 for component 1 and other components as required).
Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the component to the high (normal)
flow rate value and maintain the flow rate during the component delivery.
Close the flow control valve to decrease the flow rate of the component to the low flow rate
value and deliver the specified quantity at the low flow shutdown rate.
After the low flow rate quantity has been delivered, shut the flow control valve.
If only one component was specified in the recipe, the batch delivery is complete at this
time, if another component was specified in the recipe, this component is loaded in the
same manner as specified by the steps listed above. The total batch quantity preset in step
1 remains the same. The sequence of component loading is repeated for each component
specified by the recipe and in the sequence to load specified by the recipe. The sequence to
load is program code 486 for recipe number 1.
3.6.2
In-Line Blending
In-line blending is the simultaneous blending and loading of two to four products. Each product has
a dedicated flow meter and flow control valve. In-line blending can be either non-proportional or
proportional as described below.
#
In-line non-proportional
In-line non-proportional blending is accomplished by delivering the low-proportion quantity
component(s) of the blend at their assigned high (normal) flow rate(s) during the first part
of the delivery of the high-proportion component at its high (normal) flow rate. The blending
control is set by program code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load for the active recipe. This
method of delivery is implemented so that the flow meter for each component is operating
near its maximum rated flow rate to assure maximum measurement accuracy for each
component in the blend. After the low-proportion quantity component(s) have been
delivered, the high-proportion quantity component continues delivery until the blend ratio
is attained. The total blend ratio can be in error until the total preset quantity is delivered.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 71
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
In-line proportional
(Note: In-line proportional blending can only be implemented in cases where proportion of
each component in the blend is great enough to permit the component flow meter to operate
above the minimum specified flow rate of the meter during the entire batch loading cycle.)
In-line proportional blending is accomplished by controlling the ratio between all
components at all times during the delivery by controlling the individual flow rate of each
component. The ratio of the delivered blend is correct at all times during the delivery.
Therefore, the delivery can be stopped at any time and the delivered blend will be within
tolerance.
Side Stream Blending

"Side" stream blending is similar to in-line blending except one product component is
delivered upstream to another product component. "Side" Stream blending is typically used
to inject ethanol into gasoline. Ethanol is injected into the gasoline stream and the blend is
measured by the custody transfer meter. The basic control/operation of side Stream Blending
is described below:
Program code 023 Side Stream Blending, allows to enable side stream blending.
Setting program code 024 - Sequential proportional, to Yes allows proportional
blending of side stream component (ethanol) with primary component (gasoline).
( Note: This program code is applicable only when DanLoad 6000 is configured for
sequential blending.)
Set up the Side Stream Meter Program codes 053/056/059/062. These program
codes specify the meter number used as a Side Stream Meter. For example, assume
that meter 1 is the primary premium blend stream meter used for loading Premium
and measures the blend of Premium and Ethanol. Meter 2 is the primary regular
blend stream meter used for loading Regular and measures the blend of Regular and
Ethanol. Meter 3 is the side stream meter for measuring the Ethanol component
volume.
Program code 053, 056, 059, and 062 correspond respectively to preset meters 1, 2,
3, and 4 set in PC 051, 054, 057, and 060 . In the above example meter 1 (PC 051)
measures the combined blend volume of both the Premium component and the
Ethanol component, and meter 2 (PC 054) measures the combined blend volume of
both the Regular component and the Ethanol component, Meter 3 (PC 057) measures
only the Ethanol volume.
As an example, the user sets program code 053 = 3, 056 = 3, and 059=0. This
configuration indicates that the Ethanol measured by Meter 3 is passing through the
Premium meter 1 (053) and through the Regular meter 2 (056). Meter 3 (059) is not
being used to measure a final delivered flow, however the volume being measured
by meter 3 flows though meter 1 or meter 2.
3 - 72
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Set up the Midgrade Primary blend Stream meter (if applicable) Program Code
063.This program code defines the meter number where the side stream (Ethanol
stream) passes through in case of more than two product blending.
(Note: This program code is applicable only when DanLoad 6000 is configured for
inline blending.
For example, meter 1 is for Premium, meter 2 is for Regular and meter 3 is for
Ethanol. Set program code value to 1 if the Premium meter (meter 1) is used to pass
the Ethanol for Midgrade product (Blending of Premium, Regular and Ethanol).
The Block valve operation of Side stream sequential blending is not changed.
The block valve operation of Side stream in-line blending is changed as follows:
Assign an output (Program Code 400/402/404/406) to open a block valve to allow
the side stream component (e.g. Ethanol) to blend with the wild stream component
(e.g. Gasoline). For two component blending (One component must be the side
stream component) the block valve output will be "Closed" when the corresponding
wild stream component is used.
Setup
(Note: Do not assign any output for the side stream component.)
Assign an input (Program code: 401/403/405/407) to monitor the status switch for
the block valve defined in program code 400/402/404/406.
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 73
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Delivery Parameters
Define batch loading control program codes.
Define the pump / block valve / flow control valve timing relationship. The program codes indicated
below set the timing for each component.
open
start
open
BV
PUMP
FCV
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--------LPD-------|
|-----------BVD-------------|
close
stop
FCV BV
PUMP
| |
|
| |
|
|
|
|---PSD---|
where:
BV
FCV
LPD
BVD
PSD
block valve
flow control valve
087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s)
089 / 095 / 101 / 107 Block valve delay (s)
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s)
Startup:
The line pack delay and block valve delay are relative to the opening of the flow control valve at the
start of a loading operation. The diagram indicates the line pack delay time is shorter than block
valve delay time. Both of these delays are independent and only related to the opening of the flow
control valve. Therefore, the delays may be set to open the block valve and start the pump
simultaneously or to start the pump before opening the block valve. If 0 seconds delay is entered for
the line pack delay and the block valve delay, the pump starts, the block valve opens, and the flow
control valve opens simultaneously. The logic does not allow configuration for starting the pump
or opening the block valve after the flow control valve is commanded OPEN.
Shutdown:
The flow control valve is shut to stop the flow. The block valve is automatically closed when no
flow is detected. For a normally terminated delivery, the pump stop delay is from the time that no
flow is detected until the pump output is de-energized.
Program code 248 Block valve time (s) in the Alarms group sets the time period to allow after
sending a block valve CLOSE command (discrete output OPEN) before activating an Unable to
close block valve # alarm, if the block valve fails to respond to the CLOSE command. A zero
indicates redirect to recipe selection inputs for recipes 1 through 6 and not used for recipes 7 and
above.
3 - 74
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
Digital Valve Parameters
Define operation of flow control valves.
This group of program codes define the characteristics for operation of digital flow control valves
(throttling valves) only. Fixed set point stem switch valves do not use these program codes.
However, two-stage valves with one or two stem switches do use the Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2
control outputs to control the valve actuator. The control logic for digital flow control valves is
shown in Figure 3 - 10. And the control and status logic for two-stage valves is shown in Figure
3 - 11 and Figure 3 - 12.
Digital Flow Control Valve Operation

Valve State
Device
Closed
Opening
Static Open
Closing
Solenoid 1 (upstream)
control output
Off
On
On
Off
Upstream pilot valve (cavity fill)
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Solenoid 2 (downstream)
control output
Off
On
Off
Off
Downstream pilot valve (cavity drain)
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Digital Flow Control Valve

Figure 3 - 10
The incremental open / close state of a digital flow control valve, such as a Daniel model 1815 or
Dan-Flo valve, is controlled by two variable duration pulsed control outputs (Solenoid 1 and
Solenoid 2). A digital flow control valve has a sealed variable capacity chamber downstream of the
movable plug. The upstream surface area and cavity surface area of the plug plus pressure exerted
by a closing spring, closes the plug against the seat and stops all flow through the valve when the
upstream process liquid is allowed to enter the cavity (through normally open Solenoid 1). This is
the normal state of the valve with neither solenoid powered.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 75
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The valve is opened to the low flow set point by closing the upstream (cavity fill) pilot and opening
the downstream (cavity drain) pilot. The DanLoad 6000 senses the flow rate from the meter pulse
input and stops the valve from opening when the desired flow rate is attained. The valve open / close
action is stopped at any position by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot and closing the
upstream (cavity fill) pilot. Flow rate through the flow meter is adjusted dynamically. The valve
is closed by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot and opening the upstream (cavity fill)
pilot.
Warning
The Daniel model 1815 flow control valve has an needle valve located in the upstream pilot
circuit that can be used to restrict the flow in this circuit and slow the valve opening speed. A
corresponding needle valve located in the downstream pilot circuit can be used to restrict flow
in that circuit and slow the valve closing speed. These two needle valves are normally set fully
open so that the DanLoad 6000 has maximum possible control of the valve. These needle
valves should only be adjusted by persons familiar with the operation of these valves. Use
caution when delivering a product after one or both of these needle valves have been adjusted.
Mis-adjustment of the needle valves can cause tank overfill and spillage or under delivery.
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches) Operation
Valve State
Closed
Opening to
Low Flow
Start &
Low Flow
Start
Opening to
Full
Open & Full
Open
Closing to
Low Flow
Stop &
Low Flow
Stop
Closed
Solenoid
1
control
output
Off
On
On
On
Off
Solenoid
2
control
output
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Device
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches)

Figure 3 - 11
3 - 76
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2 control outputs are used to control the open / close position of a flow
control valve without stem switches. A flow control valve without stem switches does not control
the flow rate based on rate of flow feedback from the flow meter. The flow rate at low flow start
high flow (normal flow) and low flow stop is controlled by an external flow rate regulator. Control
output Solenoid 1 is closed to open the valve. The valve opens to the low flow start position and
the low flow start quantity is delivered at that rate. After the low flow start quantity has been
delivered, control output Solenoid 2 is closed to open the flow control valve to the high (normal
flow rate) position. When the remaining quantity equals the low flow stop quantity, control output
Solenoid 2 is opened to position the valve at the low flow stop flow rate. After the low flow stop
rate is delivered, control output Solenoid 1 is opened and the flow control valve is fully shut. All
flow through the valve ceases.
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches) Operation
Valve State
Output
Closed/
Closing
Opening
Static
Open
(locked)
Solenoid 1
control
output
Off
On
On
Solenoid 2
control
output
Off
On
Off
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches)

Figure 3 - 11b
The normally closed stem switch (stem switch 1) is monitored during initial opening so that the
valve can be locked at low flow start. The normally open stem switch (stem switch 2) is monitored
while ramping down from high flow so that the valve can be locked at low flow stop.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 77
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.7
Temperature (CTL) and Pressure (CPL) Compensation
Temperature compensation and pressure compensation of the liquid quantity to the quantity at
standard conditions can be used together or independently. One of several standards can be selected
for temperature compensation. One of several standards can be selected for pressure compensation.
Each standard is applicable to a specific density range of hydrocarbon liquids. Each standard is
applicable to a specific temperature or pressure range. Temperature compensation is commonly used
when loading refined hydrocarbon liquids and crude oil, though in some cases it may be performed
by a terminal automation system. Both temperature and pressure compensation are normally used
when loading liquefied petroleum gas (LPG). Tables 3 - 1, 3- 2, and 3 - 3 contain information on
the applicability of the various standards.
Note
Daniel Industries, Inc. and Daniel Measurement and Control Products (Daniel) shall not be
held responsible or liable in any way for loss or damage, including, but not limited to,
consequential damage, resulting from the use of volume correction tables or related
mathematical relationships or for violation of any federal, state, or municipal laws, regulations,
or practices of the United States or of any foreign country.
The DanLoad 6000 can also calculate mass from the quantity at standard condtions. See Section 3.8,
Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter.
3 - 78
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
CTL / CPL Associations Cross Reference (Table 3 -1)

CPL Options
CTL Options 9
Off
Const
API
11.2.1
API
11.2.2
API
11.2.1M
API
11.2.2M
Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Linear
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
API 6A
Yes
Yes
Yes
No1
No2
No1,2
API 6B
Yes
Yes
Yes
No1
No2
No1,2
API 6C
Yes
Yes
Yes
No1
No2
No1,2
API 24A
Yes
Yes
No2
No1
No2
No1,2
API 24B
Yes
Yes
No2
No1
No2
No1,2
API 54A
Yes
Yes
No2
No1,2
Yes
No1
API 54B
Yes
Yes
No2
No1,2
Yes
No1
API 54C
Yes
Yes
No2
No1,2
Yes
No1
IMP/PEMEX
Yes
Yes
No2
No1,2
No2
No1,2
Table 24 (Old)
Yes
Yes
No2
Yes
No2
No2
Table 54 (Old)
Yes
Yes
No2
No2
Yes
Yes
Petrobras
Yes
Yes
No2
Yes3
Yes3
No1,2
TP-16
Yes
Yes
No2
Yes
No2
No2
China
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
API 6D
Yes
Yes
Yes
No1
No2
No1,2
API 54D
Yes
Yes
No2
No1,2
Yes
No1
4311 1
Yes
Yes
No2
Yes
No2
No2
CAN 54B
Yes
Yes
No2
No1,2
Yes
No1
Notes:
Yes = The density ranges for both CTL and CPL overlap and both compensation methods can be used
together.
1 = The density ranges do not overlap.
2 = The density units are not the same for CTL and CPL.
3 = The CTL option enables special processing for the CPL option.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 79
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Density Range Overlaps (Approximate) for CTL and CPL Options (Table 3 - 2)
Option
Density Range
kg/m3
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
CTL
Table 24
0.500 to 1.100 60/60o F (. 500 to 1100 kg/m3)

TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
Table 54
0.500 to 1.100 kg/l (. 500 to 1100 kg/m3)

TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 6A
0 to 100 degrees API (6110 to 1.0760 (610 to 1075 kg/m3)

TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 24A
0.6110 to 1.0760 (610 to 1075 kg/m3)

API 54A
610 to 1075 kg/m3

API 6B
0 to 85 degrees API (653 to 1075 kg/m3)

TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
API 24B
0.6535 to 1.0760 (653 to 1075 kg/m3)

API 54B
653 to 1075 kg/m3

IMP/PEMEX
0.6495 to 1.0730 (. 649 to 1072 kg/m3)

Linear
(User ")
Unlimited density
TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
CP L
API 11.2.2
Relative density 0.350 to 0.637 (density 349.7 to 636.4)

PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
API 11.2.2M
350 to 636 kg/m3

PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
API 11.2.1
0 to 90 degrees API (638 to 1074 kg/m3)

PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
API 11.2.1M
638 to 1074 kg/m3

PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
User F-factor
Unlimited density
PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
CAN 54B
653 TO 1075 kg/m3 T

Notes:
Approximate density range for CTL selection (432 Temperature option)
TTT ...
PPP ... Approximate density range for CPL selection (444 Pressure option)
3 - 80
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The density at 60 degrees Fahrenheit = specific gravity 60/60oF * 999.012 kg/m3.
Program code 445 F-factor X 1000000000 is the components compressibility factor * 109
in quantity units per pressure unit. This entry is only used if program code 444 Pressure
option is set to Const, since the other CPL options calculate the F-factor based on the
temperature and density.
Values of density and gravity are scaled dependent on the setting of program code 046. Set
this carefully since it is also used for mass computation. The density/gravity scale follows.
Setup
046 Density/gravity scale
Format
xxxx.x
xxx.xx
xx.xxx
4 (default)
x.xxxx
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 81
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Density Ranges for CTL Selections (432 Temperature option) (Table 3 -3)
CTL Option
Temp Range
o
API 6A
0 to 300 F
Density Range
API gravity
0 to 40 degrees API
0 to 250o F
40 to 50 degrees API
0 to 200o F
0 to 300o F
API 6B
Density Input / Reference Temperature
API gravity
0 to 250o F
0 to 200 F
API 6C
0 to 300o F
API 24A
None [inputs are "T and t (" at base

temperature and batch temperature)]
430 Reference temperature = 60o F
N/A
Relative density 60/60o F
0.8250 to 1.0760
0 to 250o F
0.7795 to 0.8250
0 to 200 F
0.6110 to 0.7795
0 to 300o F
API 24B
0.7795 to 0.8250
0 to 200o F
0.6535 to 0.7795
Density kg/m3
API 54C
610 to 778 kg/m3
-18 to 125 C
778 to 824 kg/m3
-18 to 150o C
824 to 1075 kg/m3
-18 to 95o C
API 54B
0.8250 to 1.0760
0 to 250o F
-18 to 95o C
API 54A
0 to 40 degrees API
Density kg/m3
653 to 778 kg/m3
-18 to 125o C
778 to 824 kg/m3
-18 to 150o C
824 to 1075 kg/m3
N/A
None
430 Reference temperature = 15o C
IMP/PEMEX
Relative density 20/4o C
0.6495 to 1.0730
Table 24 (Old)
Specific gravity 60/60o F
0.500 to 1.100 (full range).
Table 54 (Old)
Density kg/l
0.500 to 1.100 kg/l (full range).
Petrobras
Relative density 20o C/4o C
Any temperature and relative density.
0.8250 to 1.0760
0 to 300o F
TP-16
CAN 54B
Note:
3 - 82
0 to 250o F
0.7795 to 0.8250
0 to 200o F
0.6110 to 0.7795
-40 to 95 C
Density kg/m3
653 to 778 kg/m3
-40 to 125o C
778 to 824 kg/m3
-40 to 150o C
824 to 1075 kg/m3
Density / gravity inputs are not validated by the DanLoad 6000. The table shows the valid density / gravity ranges for the temperature
compensation selections.
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.7.1
Temperature Correction to a Non-Standard Reference Temperature
Temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature (using existing CTL tables) has been
implemented, in particular temperature correction to 86.0F using API 6B per ESSO Thailand (and
others in South East Asia) is possible.
C TL option
Standard ref.
temp.
Correction to nonstandard ref. temp.
Off
N/A
No
Linear
N/A
No
API 6A
60.0F
Yes
API 6B
60.0F
Yes
API 6C
N/A
No
API 24A
60.0F
Yes
API 24B
60.0F
Yes
API 54A
15.0C
Yes
API 54B
15.0C
Yes
API 54C
N/A
No
IMP
20.0C
Yes
Old 24
60.0F
Yes
Old 54
15.0C
Yes
P'Bras
20.0C
Yes
TP-16
60.0C
Yes
China
20.0C
Yes
6D
60.0F
Yes
54D
15.0C
Yes
4311 1
60.0F
Yes
NH3
60.0F
Yes
CAN 54B
15.0C
Yes
A "Yes" in the right-hand column indicates that the CTL option has a standard reference temperature
and allows temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature. A "No" in the right-hand
column indicates that the CTL option does not have a standard reference temperature.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 83
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

In program mode/setup, if any component's CTL option (program codes 432, 435, etc.) is modified
to one that has a standard reference temperature then the reference temperature (program code 430),
which is used for all components, is automatically modified to the standard reference temperature
for that CTL option (per the table above). If any component's CTL option is modified to one that does
not have a standard reference temperature then the reference temperature is not modified. Thus, if
temperature correction to a non-standard reference temperature using a CTL option that has a standard
reference temperature is required, it is necessary to configure each component's CTL option prior to
configuring the reference temperature (program code 430). (Note: The temperature units (program
code 427) must still be configured manually to the appropriate value for the configured CTL options.)
When a CTL factor is computed for a CTL option that has a standard reference temperature, the
DanLoad 6000 tests whether the configured reference temperature is equal to the standard reference
temperature. If it is equal, the CTL factor is computed in the usual way, i.e. as the CTL for the
component's batch average temperature, otherwise the CTL factor is computed as the ratio of the CTL
for the component's batch average temperature to the CTL for the configured reference temperature
which requires two calls to the CTL option's implementation.
It should be noted that the reference temperature (program code 430) can be modified indirectly, i.e.
by modifying a component's CTL option, and can affect CTL options. Program code 430 is weights
and measures protected by default.
3 - 84
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Note the following examples using test data:
API 6B, PC 427 = F

Ref. temp.
Observed
temp.
Density or
gravity
CTL factor
60.0F
80.9F
35.10
0.9903
60.0F
86.0F
35.10
0.9879
86.0F
80.9F
35.10
1.0024
API 24A, PC 427 = F

Ref. temp.
Observed
temp.
Density or
gravity
CTL factor
60.0F
56.5F
0.8760
1.00160
60.0F
66.5F
0.8760
0.99710
66.5F
56.5F
0.8760
1.00451
API 54A, PC 427 = C

Ref. temp.
Observed
temp.
Density or
gravity
CTL factor
15.0C
22.5C
740.0
0.9916
15.0C
20.0C
740.0
0.9944
20.0C
22.5C
740.0
0.9972
IMP, PC 427 = C
Ref. temp.
Setup
Observed
temp.
Density or
gravity
CTL factor
20.0C
6.0C
0.7210
1.01743
20.0C
17.5C
0.7210
1.00311
17.5C
6.0C
0.7210
1.01428
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 85
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.8
Mass Loading Using a Mass Flow Meter
When the mass of product is required (for display, data logging or delivery control) there are two
options; 1) use a mass meter, e.g. a Coriolis effect flow meter, which reports "pulses per unit mass"
to the DanLoad 6000, or 2) use a volumetric flow meter, e.g. a turbine meter, which reports "pulses
per unit gross volume" to the DanLoad 6000 and have the DanLoad 6000 compute the mass from
the gross volume. Both options are possible with the DanLoad 6000. This section describes the first
option.
The mass flow meter should be interfaced to the DanLoad 6000 via a transmitter (available from the
mass flow meter's vendor) that converts the raw Coriolis frequency to a scaled pulse stream. The
scaling is usually widely adjustable. The particular type of transmitter used determines the electrical
signal interface; the DanLoad 6000's meter pulse board must be strapped appropriately. Refer to
Section 2.2.2 Input/Output Board Description and jumper settings or contact Daniel Customer
Service for proper strapping configuration. The transmitter reports pulses per unit mass to the
DanLoad 6000, i.e. you can think of the mass meter as having a K-factor defined as the number of
pulses per unit of mass flow, e.g. 10 pulses per kilogram. (Some mass flow transmitters can report
pulses per unit of volume, in which case it can be treated, by the DanLoad 6000, as a volumetric flow
meter which is not discussed here.)
The K-factor (number of pulses per unit of mass flow, program code 171, 182, etc. per component)
should be configured on the DanLoad 6000. If the meter's calibration adjustment is via the mass
flow transmitter, all the meter factors on the DanLoad 6000 should typically be set to 1.0000. If the
meter's calibration adjustment is via the DanLoad 6000, the meter factors on the DanLoad 6000
should be adjusted based on the observed error during proving runs until the required accuracy is
achieved. (It is important to understand that the accuracy achieved depends on the mass flow meter's
repeatability.)
The configured K-factor and meter factor at each flow rate are applied to the input pulse stream in
the same way as for gross volume:
Mass = (Ei=1#factors (# pulses at rate i * meter factor for rate i)) / K-factor
Thus, the various gross and standard quantities displayed, printed and reported to an automation
system are, in fact, mass. All batch, meter and component quantities on the DanLoad 6000,
including flow rates, should be interpreted as being in units of mass as determined by the K-factor.
Configure the gross and standard product units mnemonics appropriately (program codes 217 and
218 respectively). When an operator enters a preset quantity and presses "START" the DanLoad
6000 delivers the requested number of mass units of product. The DanLoad 6000 cannot convert
from mass to volume. No temperature options (program code 432, etc. per component) or pressure
options (program code 444, etc. per component) should be configured since the Ctl and Cpl factors
cannot be meaningfully applied to mass. However, it is possible for
3 - 86
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
the DanLoad 6000 to sample (and calculate mass throughput weighted average values for)
temperature (RTD), pressure (4-20 mA) and density (4-20 mA) inputs throughout a batch for display,
printing and reporting to an automation system, by configuring the appropriate inputs (per meter),
the sample quantity (program code 431) and the density option (program code 456, etc. per
component). The DanLoad 6000 does not correct the input density to standard conditions. Density
correction to standard conditions must be done externally, e.g. by a densitometer or the mass flow
transmitter which can send the "live" value to the DanLoad 6000 via a 4-20 mA output.
3.9
Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter
When the mass of product is required (for display, data logging or delivery control) there are two
options; 1) use a mass meter, e.g. a Coriolis effect flow meter, which reports "pulses per unit mass"
to the DanLoad 6000, or 2) use a volumetric flow meter, e.g. a turbine meter or PD meter, which
reports "pulses per unit gross volume" to the DanLoad 6000 and have the DanLoad 6000 compute
the mass from the gross volume. Both options are possible with the DanLoad 6000. This section
describes the second option.
In order to have the DanLoad 6000 compute product mass, the DanLoad 6000 should first be
configured to compute the standard volume (net volume) in the usual way, i.e. specify temperature
units, temperature correction option per component, pressure correction option per component,
temperature input (RTD) per meter or backup temperature per component, density input (4-20 mA)
per meter or backup density per component, etc. See Section 3.7, Temperature and Pressure
Compensation. The temperature and pressure correction options are likely to dictate the density units
used by the DanLoad 6000. If a "live" density input is used, the input density should be corrected
to standard conditions external to the DanLoad 6000.
Mass computation is enabled by entering a mass computation adjustment factor per component,
which causes the standard volume to be recomputed as mass, i.e. for "standard quantity" read "mass".
Thus, batch mass, meter mass totalizers, component mass totalizers, etc. can be displayed in the
dynamic data display, printed on data logs and requested by an automation system. The meter
standard quantities to 2 decimal places (data codes 147, etc.) are not recomputed as mass, and still
show the standard volume even when mass computation is enabled. This allows meters to be proved
volumetrically, if required. If meters are proved by mass, i.e. by comparison with a weighscale, the
following should be considered:
- The weighscale's resolution/accuracy will contribute to overall inaccuracy.
- The meter factor adjustment (program code 175, 177, etc. for component 1)
is still applied to the gross volume measured by the DanLoad 6000.
- Flow rates on the DanLoad 6000 are in gross volume units per minute.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 87
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The mass computation adjustment factor provides the flexibility to compute mass in almost any units
(pounds, kilograms, etc.) from volume and density in almost any units. However, it should be noted
that the DanLoad 6000 displays mass only in (rounded to nearest) whole units, e.g. 0.5 tons if the
mass computation adjustment factor computes tons. See program code 68 for more information and
examples. An adjustment for buoyancy in air can be included in the mass computation. See program
code 426 for more information.
It is also possible to preset by mass, e.g. to preset and load a batch of 10,000 kilograms, by enabling
mass computation (as described above) and then setting the preset/delivery type to "Std" (standard
quantity). See program code 80 in Section 6 for more information.
Care should be exercised when enabling mass computation and, more importantly, when presetting
by mass since the number of mass units can be very different from the number of volume units.
Small batches should be loading in order to verify the configuration and calculations.
3.10
Additive Injection
From one to six additives, or no additives, can be injected into the loaded product stream. Program
code numbers are indicated in the text in the following manner. One three-digit number indicates
that the parameter applies globally to all additive injection. Six three-digit numbers separated by
slashes (/) indicate that a separate parameter applies to each of the six additives injected. The six
three-digit program code numbers are in additive numerical order (additive 1 through 6).
The primary features of the additive injection control system are listed below.
#
Allows direct control of additive injection (for up to 6 physical additives) via an "additive
panel" (additive meter and on/off valve), thus making so-called "smart" additive injector
systems obsolete. This also makes the DanLoad 6000 a more attractive economical solution
for load rack automation when additive injection is required.
Allows different injection methods (additive injector types) for each logical additive so that
old and new additive injection equipment can be mixed on a single loading arm, e.g. mix
additive panels on the same loading arm.
Provides multiple injection rates (concentrations) per additive via the "Multi Rate" additive
selection method.
Provides recipe gross and standard running totalizers and additive running totalizers to
facilitate product and additive inventory management.
3 - 88
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Provides (functional) backward compatibility with previous DanLoad 6000 versions, though
actual program codes may be different.
Provides reporting (data logging) capabilities to facilitate product and additive inventory
management and configuration.
Provides an additive meter calibration screen with a step-by-step procedure for computing
an additive meters K-factor.
Typically, "smart" additive injector systems control the flow of additive into product via an on/off
valve and an additive meter. The "smart" additive injector must be interfaced to an electronic preset
(batch controller), PLC or other automation system via hard-wired signals (flow permissive, pulse
per gallon, feedback and alarm) or communications (RS-232 or RS-485).
The DanLoad 6000 electronic preset controls and meters additive flow directly, and thus combines
the functionality of an advanced electronic preset and multiple "smart" additive injector systems.
This has the following advantages:
#
Overall electronic preset/additive injector system cost is reduced. The saving on "smart"
additive injectors may even cover the cost of the electronic preset!
System installation is simplified due to reduced interfacing requirements. All that is needed
is an output to each additive control valve and an input from each additive meter.
System operation is simplified. The DanLoad 6000 directly controls the flow of product and
additives. Configuration, calibration, alarm processing, diagnostics, etc. all take place at the
DanLoad 6000. Some possible causes of alarms (due to interfacing) are eliminated.
Additive clean line start processing is improved. Unlike existing "smart" additive injector
systems, the DanLoad 6000 knows the preset volume, which allows injection cycles to be
spread over most of the batch and prevents "spurious" over-injection alarms on small
batches.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 89
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The DanLoad 6000 can control up to six physical additives. One additive ratio output (typically a
discrete output on an AC I/O or enhanced I/O board) and one additive meter input (typically a "low
speed" or "high speed" discrete input (depending on the pulse width) on a DC I/O board or enhanced
I/O board) is required per additive. The additive meter and on/off valve are usually mounted on an
"additive panel" which provides additional piping for additive meter calibration. The DanLoad
6000's additive ratio output is wired to the on/off valve. The additive meter is wired to the DanLoad
6000's additive meter (additive feedback) input. The end user must ensure the additive meter output
does not exceed the DanLoad high speed input frequency and minimum pulse width specification.
Additive volume is measured via a K-factor per additive which is used for both authorized and
unauthorized additive flow. "Selected" additives become "authorized" when a batch is started,
remain authorized while the batch is stopped become "unauthorized" when the batch ends, which
allows an authorized additive to be injected manually when a batch stops due to under-injection.
The "Multi Rate" additive selection method allows multiple additive ratios (concentrations of
additive) to be configured per additive by configuring an additive ratio per recipe, and can be used
with any injection method or combination of injection methods. However, since the program code
for a recipe's component 4 percentage is used to configure the recipe's "override" additive ratio
volume, the DanLoad 6000 is limited to a maximum of three components in this configuration.
Recipe and additive running totalizers allow product and additive thruput for a particular customer
to be monitored. (The workability of this scheme depends somewhat on there being no more than
one additive per recipe.) The recipe gross and standard running totalizers (data codes 151 through
218) and the additive running totalizers (data codes 96 through 101) can be displayed in the dynamic
data display, printed on the data logging printer (via the totalizers data log) or requested via
automation system communications (command code 22h).
The configuration summary data log (a report showing all program code values) can be printed from
the diagnostics menu in the manual operating mode. The format is similar to the pages in Setup.
For each setup group, the unit address, current date and time and the setup group name is printed.
(Within the DanLoad 6000, each setup group is generated as a separate data log so that it is possible
to form feed after each setup group is printed.) For each page in each setup group, the page heading
is printed. For each program code in each page in each setup group, the program code, program code
description and program code value are printed (forty columns wide, just like in Setup).
The DanLoad 6000 application program can verify that the volume of additive measured is within
configured limits throughout a batch, and raise an alarm, Additive X failure, where X is the additive
number 1 to 6, and stop the batch loading if the volume of additive measured is not within
configured limits. This provides a low-cost alternative to smart injector systems.
3 - 90
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Additive is typically injected in bursts or doses, so that the actual product to additive ratio varies
widely during a batch, particularly near the start of a batch. This is illustrated in the table on the
following page, which contains data for an injector that injects 100 cm3 (0.0264 gallons) of additive
for every 40 gallons of product delivered.
The DanLoad 6000 is aware of the varying product to additive ratio during loading and does not
trigger erroneous additive injection alarms unless actual ratio errors exist. Additionally, the
following two clean line volume parameters affect the rate of additive injection.
#
Program code 138 Clean line qty sets the quantity of product to deliver at the end of the
batch loading without additive injection. For sequential blending, the value set by program
code 138 Clean line qty applies to each component in the blend. This function prevents
additive contamination in subsequent product deliveries.
Program code 714 Clean line qty sets the quantity of pure primary component, set by
program code 111 Primary component, to deliver at the end of the delivery. This function
prevents product contamination in subsequent product deliveries. If, for a particular batch,
the preset quantity is less than or equal to the clean line quantity, the batch is delivered as if
there were no clean line quantity configured.
Additive in Product
Product
(gallons)
Setup
cm3
gallons
Product/additive ratio
39
40
100
0.0264
1515
79
100
0.0264
2992
80
200
0.0528
1515
119
200
0.0528
2254
120
300
0.0793
1513
159
300
0.0793
2083
160
400
0.1057
1514
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 91
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.10.1
Additive Injection Configuration
"044 Additive units". This identifies the units and format in which additive volumes are displayed
and printed, i.e. the external additive units, and provides a mnemonic for additive units on data logs.
The internal additive units depend on the additive injection method (program codes 141, 146, etc.)
per additive and, for the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods, the product units (program code
29). Select one of the following:
#
"cc". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in cubic centimeters formatted as
9999999.99.
"in3". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in cubic inches formatted as
9999999.99.
"Gal". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in gallons formatted as

99999.9999.
"L". Additive volumes are displayed and printed in liters formatted as 99999.9999.
The default value is "cc".

"136 Selection method". The method by which additives are selected in the manual operating mode.
(In the automatic operating mode the additive selection method is determined by the automation
system. Refer to the Authorize Transaction (06h) command in the DanLoad 6000 Communications
Spec.) Select one of the following:
3 - 92
"External". All configured ("Number of additives") additive ratio outputs are cycled.
An additive can be selected by an external contact, e.g. an automation system relay
or a key-switch.
"Prompt". The operator is prompted to select additives at the start of each

transaction. (Additive selection screen.)
"Inputs". Configured ("Number of additives") additive ratio outputs are cycled only
if their corresponding additive selection inputs are closed during a batch. (Similar
to external, except the DanLoad 6000 knows which additives are being injected.)
"Recipe". The additives specified by the last two characters of the recipe name,
entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent of an additive "bit map" (see below), are
selected automatically. Multiple additives can be selected per recipe.
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
"Multi Rate". The additives specified by the last two characters of the recipe name,
entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent of an additive "bit map" (see below), are
selected automatically, and the recipe's component 4 percentage (truncated from
hundredths to whole units) is interpreted as the additive ratio volume. (This limits
the DanLoad 6000 to a maximum of three components.) Multiple additives can be
selected per recipe.
The default value is "External". The decimal equivalent of the additive "bit map" for the "Recipe"
and "Multi Rate" selection methods is computed by adding together the appropriate values from the
right-hand column of the following table:
Additive #
Value
16
32
For example, in order to select additives 3 and 5 to be injected into the midgrade recipe enter
"Midgrade______20" for the recipe name. (4 + 16 = 20, the underscore character represents a
space.)
The additive "ratio volume" (per additive) is now in whole units of product. However, if the "Multi
Rate" additive selection method is used, the recipe's component 4 percentage (truncated from
hundredths to whole units) is used for the additive ratio volume. (The ratio volume in the additive
delivery parameters setup group must still be configured if verification using the volume of additive
per 1000 of product is to be performed.)
"140 Ratio volume" (1 to 9999). The volume (possibly a combination of gross and/or standard
quantities through multiple component meters) in product units (program code 29) which controls
one additive injection cycle. The default value is 40.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 93
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

"141 Injection method". The first two injection methods ("Mech" and "Handshake") totalize additive
based on a quantity per pulse, and their internal additive units are cm3. The other two injection
methods ("Meter" and "Control") totalize additive using an additive meter K-factor, and their internal
additive units, i.e. for interpreting the K-factor, are the configured product units (program code 29).
For all four injection methods, the DanLoad 6000 converts additive volumes from internal units to
external units (program code 44) for display and printing. Since the injection method is configured
per additive (program codes 141, 146, etc.), one additive can be injected via a simple mechanical
injector ("Mech") while another can be injected and measured via an additive panel ("Control").
Select one of the following:
#
"Mech". Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed dose per ratio cycle)
with feedback. The DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if configured) and
totalizes additive using the quantity per pulse on input (if a feedback input is
configured) or on output (if not). Additive verification is based on the configured
required number of feedback pulses per ratio cycle (program code 247), the
configured additive error limit (program code 246) and the volume of additive per
1000 of product (if configured).
"Handshake". Additive injection via a handshake cycle (mercaptan). The DanLoad

6000 controls the ratio output (if configured) based on the ratio cycle and the
feedback input, and totalizes additive using the volume per pulse on input. Additive
verification is based on a hard-coded one feedback pulse per ratio cycle, the
configured additive error limit (program code 246), the configured additive feedback
count (program code 247, interpreted as a number of seconds) and the volume of
additive per 1000 of product (if configured).
"Meter". Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed dose per ratio cycle)
with additive meter. The DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if configured) and
totalizes additive using the additive K-factor on input (if a feedback input is
configured). Additive verification is based on the volume of additive per 1000 of
product (if configured).
"Control". Additive control via an on/off valve (variable dose per ratio cycle) with
additive meter. The DanLoad 6000 controls (by manipulating the on/off valve) the
volume of additive per ratio cycle (unlike the other injection methods) and totalizes
additive using the additive K-factor on input (if a feedback input is configured).
Additive verification is based on the volume of additive per 1000 of product (if
configured). The volume of additive per 1000 of product must be configured for the
"Control" injection method.
The default value is "Mech".

Note: The "global" totalizing method (program code 137), e.g. "Out", "Out/Sgl", etc., which
combined the totalizing method and the feedback method in previous software versions is
no longer used.
3 - 94
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The ratio cycle "inject %" (program code 137, 0 to 100, default 50) allows the percentage of the
adjusted-for-additive-clean-line-start ratio cycle at which injection begins, i.e. the ratio output is
switched on, to be configured. For the "Mech", "Handshake" and "Meter" injection methods,
injection ends, i.e. the ratio output is switched off, after 50% of the adjusted-for-clean-line-start ratio
volume has been delivered. For the "Control" injection method, injection ends, i.e. the ratio output
is switched off, when the appropriate volume of additive for the ratio cycle has been metered. Note:
Setting the inject percent (program code 137) to 50 and the injection method (program code 141,
etc.) to "Handshake" implements the "inject after ratio volume" control required for mercaptan
injection (per Mapco).
"142 Volume/pulse or K-factor" (0.00 to 9999.99). This is used for totalizing additive (both
authorized and unauthorized additive flow). This is in "internal additive units". For the "Mech" and
"Handshake" injection methods it is the volume per pulse in cm3. For the "Meter" and "Control"
injection methods it is the additive meter's K-factor, i.e. pulses per product unit (product units per
program code 29). Internal additive units can be converted to external additive units via the
configured additive units (program code 44). The default value is 0.00.
"143 Additive per 1000" (0.0000 to 99999.9999). The required volume of additive in external
additive units (program code 44) per 1000 units of product. (If the external additive units are "cc",
the additive per 1000 is truncated to two decimal places internally, e.g. 50.3456 is truncated to
50.34.) When a non-zero value is configured, the DanLoad 6000 verifies that the volume of additive
is within limits (program codes 272, 273 and 278) during a batch and calculates the actual percentage
of the required additive per 1000 continuously throughout a batch (data code 239 for additive 1, etc.).
Thus, "additive volume verification" can be enabled (somewhat) independently of the additive
injection method (program codes 141, 146, etc.). An additive failure alarm is raised if the measured
volume of additive is not within limits during a batch. The default value is 0.0000, i.e. verification
disabled.
"246 Additive error limit" (1 to 99). For the "Mech" and "Handshake" injection methods this is the
maximum number of pulses by which the actual feedback pulse count can differ from the ideal
feedback pulse count before an additive failure alarm is raised. The ideal feedback pulse count is
based on the additive feedback count (program code 247) or is 1 (internal default, independent of
configuration) for the "Handshake" injection method. The default value is 3.
"247 Additive feedback count" (0 to 9999). The expected number of feedback pulses per additive
ratio cycle for the "Mech" additive injection method, e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3 "confirmation pulse",
2 for Hyrolec injector. The number of seconds within which the additive feedback input must go
on and off again after the additive ratio output has been energized for the "Handshake" additive
injection method, e.g. 5. The default value is 0.
"271 Unauth additive flow vol (0.0000 to 99999.9999)". The volume (units determined by additive
K-factor) of unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarm is raised for the "Meter"
and "Control" injection methods (program codes 141, 146, etc.). Unauthorized additive flow is
detected as a feedback error for the "Mech" and "Handshake" injection methods. Zero disables the
alarm. The default value is 0.0000, i.e. disabled.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 95
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

278 Additive per 1000 error limit" (1 to 99). For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods this
is the number of ratio volumes worth of additive by which the actual volume of additive can differ
from the ideal volume of additive at any point in a batch before an additive failure alarm is raised.
The default value is 1.
The last two characters of a recipe's name (program code 481, 487, etc.) specify the additives to be
selected for the "Recipe" and "Multi Rate" additive selection method; the last two character's of the
recipe's name are not displayed in the recipe selection screen when either one of these additive
selection methods is selected. Two digits must be entered in order to select any additives.
"710 Cutoff hour" (0 to 23). The hour (24-hour clock/military time) at which a cutoff (end of day)
processing is run by the DanLoad 6000. Cutoff processing is "postponed" until any batch in progress
is ended. Cutoff processing includes storing and printing meter, component, recipe and additive
totalizers. The default value is 0, i.e. cutoff at midnight.
Once a second, the DanLoad 6000 compares the current hour with configured cutoff hour, the current
day with the last cutoff day and the current hour with the last cutoff hour as follows:
if (CurrentHour IS EQUAL TO ConfiguredCutoffHour)
BEGIN
if (
(CurrentDay IS NOT EQUAL TO LastCutoffDay)
OR (CurrentHour IS GREATER THAN LastCutoffHour))
BEGIN
RunCutoff()
END
END
This allows multiple cutoffs per day to be run per day by increasing the configured cutoff hour
(program code 710).
3 - 96
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Processing
The processing performed for an additive configured for the "Control" (additive panel) injection
method is described below.
Prior to starting a batch, the DanLoad 6000...
#
Computes the volume of additive per 1000 of product based on the configured "additive per
1000" (for the "External", "Prompt", "Inputs" and "Recipe" selection methods) or the
configured "ratio volume", "additive per 1000" and "Comp 4 % or ratio volume" (for the
"Multi Rate" selection method).
Computes the ideal volume of additive per additive ratio cycle.
Compute the adjusted (for clean line start, etc.) additive ratio volume.
Initializes various "per batch" and "per ratio cycle" variables.
When, during delivery of the batch, the additive control volume, i.e. the volume of product through
the configured additive control meters, reaches "inject %" of the adjusted additive ratio volume, the
DanLoad 6000...
#
Computes the number of pulses required to close the additive valve on the previous ratio
cycle. (Only one additive valve closure number of pulses is used.)
Computes the number of pulses required during the current ratio cycle to maintain the ideal
additive batch volume.
Initializes various "per ratio cycle" variables.
Energizes the additive ratio output, allowing additive to flow, and counts pulses from the
additive meter.
When the number of pulses from the additive meter equals the number of pulses required during the
current ratio cycle minus the number of pulses required to close the additive valve on the previous
ratio cycle, the DanLoad 6000 deenergizes the additive ratio output and continues to count pulse
from the additive meter.
Additive volume computation and "additive per 1000 verification" (as for all injection methods) is
synchronized with the "per meter" volume computations.
Setup
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 97
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Calculations
The processing indicated on the following page is performed continuously during a batch for each
selected additive with non-zero "additive per 1000 units".
Compute ideal dose of additive per additive ratio quantity.

Ideal add dose = 143 / ... / 168 Additive per 1000 * 140 / ... / 165 Ratio quantity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1000
Compute the ideal volume of additive for loaded product.
Ideal vol add = Ideal add dose * Actual inj cycles complete
IF Measured vol add < Ideal vol add - (246 Additive error limit * Ideal add dose)
OR Measured vol add > Ideal vol add + (246 Additive error limit * Ideal add dose)
THEN Compute the ideal volume of additive for the current product quantity.
Ideal vol add = Prod vol * Ideal add dose
------------------------------------140 / ... / 165 Ratio quantity
Check + and - percentages.
IF Measured vol add < Ideal vol add - (Ideal vol add * 272 Prod/add -%)
------------------------------------------100
OR Measured vol add > Ideal vol add + (Ideal vol add * 273 Prod/add +%)
-------------------------------------------100
THEN Generate an Additive X failure primary alarm.
Stop the batch loading.
ENDIF
ENDIF
3 - 98
_________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.10.2
Additive Injection Configuration (Typical Examples)
Example 1 (Additive injection configuration)

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
Sequential
065
Number of components
050
Number of meters
482
Comp 1 %
139
Control meters
140
Ratio qty
138
Clean line qty
111
Primary component
100
G
40.0
Test Results
Setup
Preset
Quantity
Additive Ratio computed by

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
40.00
10
_________________________________________________________________ 3 - 99
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
Sequential
065
050
Number of meters
482
Comp 1 %
139
Control meters
140
Ratio qty
138
Clean line qty
20
111
Primary component
100
G
40.0
Test Results
Preset
Quantity

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
(400 - 20) (400 40) = 38.00
10
3 - 100 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
Sequential
065
050
Number of meters
524
Comp 1 %
139
Control meters
140
Ratio qty
138
Clean line qty
111
Primary component
10
100
G
40.0
Test Results
Preset
Quantity

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
(400 - 10) (400 40) = 39.00
10
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 101
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
Sequential
065
050
Number of meters
482
Comp 1 %
139
Control meters
140
Ratio qty
138
Clean line qty
20
111
Primary component
10
100
G
40.0
Test Results
Preset
Quantity

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
(400 - 10 - 20) (400 40) = 37.00
10
3 - 102 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
In line
065
050
Number of meters
482
483
Comp 1 %
Comp 2 %
067
070
Component 1 meter number

139
Control meters
GX
140
Ratio qty
40.0
138
Clean line qty (additive)
111
Primary component
714
Clean line qty (component)
60.00
40.00
1
2
Test Results
Preset
Quantity
Meter 1
Gross
Meter 2
Gross

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
240
160
40.00
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 103
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
In line
065
050
Number of meters
482
483
Comp 1 %
Comp 2 %
067
070

139
Control meters
GX
140
Ratio qty
40.0
138
60
111
Primary component
714
60.00
40.00
1
2
Test Results
Preset
Quantity
Meter
1
Gross
Meter
2
Gross

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
240
160
(240 - 60) (240 40) = 30.00
3 - 104 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
In line
065
050
Number of meters
482
483
Comp 1 %
Comp 2 %
067
070

139
Control meters
GX
140
Ratio qty
40.0
138
111
Primary component
714
30
60.00
40.00
1
2
Test Results
Preset
Quantity
Meter
1
Gross
Meter
2
Gross

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
240
160
(240 - 30) (240 40) = 35.00
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 105
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
In line
065
050
Number of meters
482
483
Comp 1 %
Comp 2 %
067
070

139
Control meters
GX
140
Ratio qty
40.0
138
60
111
Primary component
714
30
60.00
40.00
1
2
Test Results
Preset
Quantity
Meter
1
Gross
Meter
2
Gross

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
240
160
(240 - 60 - 30) (240 40) = 25.00
3 - 106 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
In line
065
050
Number of meters
482
483
Comp 1 %
Comp 2 %
067
070

139
Control meters
GX
140
Ratio qty
40.0
138
60
111
Primary component
714
30
60.00
40.00
1
2
Test Results
Preset
Quantity
Meter
1
Gross
Meter
2
Gross

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
240
160
(240 - 60) (240 40) = 30.00
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 107
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Configuration
Program
Code
Description
Value
026
Unit type
In line
065
050
Number of meters
482
483
Comp 1 %
Comp 2 %
067
070

139
Control meters
GG
140
Ratio qty
40.0
138
60
111
Primary component
714
30
60.00
40.00
1
2
Test Results
Preset
Quantity
Meter
1
Gross
Meter
2
Gross

DanLoad 6000
Additive
injections
400
240
160
(400 - 60 - 30) (400 - 40) = 31.00
10
3 - 108 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.10.3
Additive Meter Calibration
The DanLoad 6000's additive meter calibration screen provides a simple, step-by-step procedure for
computing an additive meter's K-factor using a beaker graduated in cubic centimeters (cm3 or cc).
Milliliters (ml) are equivalent units. Typically, product line pressure, i.e. downstream of the additive
meter, should be simulated using a back pressure valve as required per additive panel manufacturer
specifications (typically 35 psi) in order to establish an accurate K-factor for normal loading
conditions.
Prior to using the additive meter calibration screen, the following parameters should be configured:
#
Product units (program code 029) to allow the DanLoad 6000 to compute the metered
additive volume in cm3 from the additive meter K-factor
additive injection method ("Meter" or "Control"); it is important to understand the difference

between these two methods and configure correctly.
additive meter K-factor, e.g. the value printed on the additive meter
additive per 1000 (for the "Control" injection method)
The additive meter calibration screen is accessed by selecting "Additive calibration" from the
program mode menu. (A supervisor-privileged passcode is required.)
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Program Mode Menu
Pg 1 of 2
Alarm reset
Reprint transaction
Setup
Set date and time
More 9
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Program Mode Menu
Pg 2 of 2
Diagnostics
Reprint cutoff
CALMON status
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
More 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 109
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The additive meter calibration screen is displayed:
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Additive
_
K-factor
/ Gal
Vol (meter)
cc in
0 cycles
Vol (prover)
cc
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
The DanLoad 6000 prompts for an additive number. The operator should enter a valid additive
number, i.e. greater than or equal to 1, less than or equal to the configured number of additives
(program code 135) and with injection method "Meter" or "Control". If an invalid additive number
is entered the DanLoad 6000 displays "Invalid entry".
When a valid additive number has been entered, the DanLoad 6000 displays the current additive
meter K-factor (from Setup), zeros the metered additive volume ("Vol (meter)"), disables the
additive's usual counters (which disables the additive unauthorized flow alarm), energizes the
additive's pump and block valve outputs (if configured) and prompts "Press START to inject or
STOP to finish", e.g.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Additive
1
K-factor
2600.00 / Gal
Vol (meter)
0 cc in
0 cycles
Vol (prover)
cc
Press START to inject or STOP to finish

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
If the operator presses the "START" key, the DanLoad 6000 displays Please Wait (blinking once
every second) for the configured additive calibration delay (program code 720) which allows the
operator to move from the preset to the additive injector, if necessary. During this delay time, the
STOP key can be pressed to abort the delay and cancel the additive injection. Once the delay time
has elapsed, the DanLoad displays Injecting - press stop to cancel, performs the configured number
of additive injection cycles (program code 661) as described below, and updates the metered additive
volume at the end of each additive injection cycle. The metered additive volume is always computed
as cm3 based on the additive meter's K-factor and the configured product units (program code 29).
3 - 110 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The processing of an injection cycle depends on the additive's injection method. If the additive's
injection method is "Meter", the DanLoad 6000 performs an additive injection cycle as follows:
#
energizes the additive's ratio output.
waits for the additive meter pulse frequency to fall to zero, i.e. no pulses in one second, or
5 seconds to pass.
deenergizes the additive's ratio output and waits for the additive meter pulse frequency to fall
to zero (some fixed volume injectors inject on both strokes) or 5 seconds to pass.
If the additives's injection method is "Control", the DanLoad 6000 performs an additive injection
cycle as follows:
#
computes the required number of pulses for one injection cycle based on the additive's ratio
volume, K-factor and additive per 1000.
energizes the additive's ratio output.
waits until the required number of pulses for one injection cycle have been counted.
deenergizes the additive's ratio output.
waits for the additive meter pulse frequency to fall to zero.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 111
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

When sufficient injection cycles have been the completed (the total volume of additive required
usually depends on Weights and Measures and/or company operating procedures), the operator
should press the "STOP" key. The DanLoad 6000 prompts for the prover additive volume, i.e. the
volume of additive measured in the graduated beaker, in cm3.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Additive
1
K-factor
2600.00 / Gal
Vol (meter)
1869 cc in
31 cycles
Vol (prover)
_______ cc
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
If the operator enters a non-zero prover additive volume, the DanLoad 6000 computes, stores in
Setup and displays the new additive meter K-factor:
Knew = (Kold x Volmetered) / Volprover
The new K-factor computation can be bypassed by entering zero (or simply presses the "ENTER"
key) when prompted for the prover additive volume.
The DanLoad 6000 deenergizes the additive's pump and block valve outputs (if configured), and
prompts for an additive number so that the additive meter calibration process can be repeated for the
same or another additive. The information from the last run are displayed until a further additive
number is entered.
3.10.4
Multi-Stream Injection Mode
This paper describes the multi stream additive injection mode of the DanLoad 6000 Preset and
addresses the following points :
#
#
#
Theory of Operation
Accuracy
Advantages
3 - 112 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
Theory of Operation
#
General - The DanLoad 6000 Electronic Preset & Batch Controller can provide
direct control of up to 6 additive streams plus a clean line flush stream via a multi
stream additive panel. This functionality is available in firmware version 5.11 or
above. It eliminates the need for smart microprocessor based additive injectors,
thus providing the end user with an economical solution for load rack automation
requiring additive injection of 1 or multiple additives.
There are 2 basic designs of a multi stream injection panel. Both designs use just
one additive meter. The difference in design is :
#
Type 1 - one has 1 additive on/off control valve with a block valve for each
additive stream and the flush stream
Type 2 - the other design has 1 additive on/off control valve for each additive
stream and the flush stream and no block valves.
Therefore, a typical multi stream panel consists of 1 additive meter, 1 to 7 on / off

control valves (6 for additive streams and 1 for flush) or 1 on / off control valve with
1 to 7 block valves (6 for additive streams and 1 for flush).
The main characteristic of a multi stream additive panel is the use of just one additive
meter for two or more additive streams. In addition to being able to control, measure,
and verify the additive process, the DanLoad 6000 Preset is able to properly account
for each specific additive stream as well as the flush stream through the one additive
meter. All of this is accomplished with the simple addition of 1 or 2 discrete I/O
cards to the multi slot card cage of the DanLoad 6000.
#
Required I/O - The Multi Stream Injection Mode requires 1 high speed DC discrete
input for the additive meter input, 1 to 7 additive ratio outputs (typically AC discrete
output) to operate the additive on/off control valves, 1 to 6 AC discrete outputs for
each additive block valve , and 1 AC discrete output for the clean line flush block
valve if required. In addition to these I/O, the DanLoad must also have the necessary
I/O required for product loading (ie..control valve outputs, product pump output,
additive pump outputs, meter input, RTD temperature input). The DanLoad has a
discrete I/O capacity of 24 inputs and 28 outputs.
K-Factor per Additive - Additive volume is measured via an additive meter Kfactor per additive. This allows for maximum accuracy since viscosity varies for
different additives and affects the meters K-factor.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 113
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Configuration - In addition to the normal configuration for typical loading, the

DanLoad 6000 requires each additive be configured for parameters such as additive
pump output, additive ratio output, additive block valve output, additive meter
input, additive meter K-factor, clean line flush output (PC # 399 - Flush Output),
etc. The additive meter will be configured to the same input for each additive. Each
additives injection method (PCs # 141, 146, etc.) should be set to Control. The
flush pulses (PC # 425) is a configurable program code for entering the minimum
number of additive meter pulses the DanLoad must read during the flush cycle. To
disable the Flush Pulses alarm, set the minimum pulses to 0.
When the DanLoad sees two or more additive meters (PC # 381..396) configured as
the same input, it automatically assumes the multi stream injection mode of
operation and properly accounts for each additive according to the additive selected.
Therefore, the multi stream injection mode must have 2 or more additives configured.
Also, use of the multi stream injection mode precludes the use of the other injection
modes available with the DanLoad.
Flush Pump Output - A flush pump might be required to insure enough pressure for
the clean line flush to inject into the main product stream. There are two options for
operating a pump dedicated to the flushing operation. Option 1 is to wire the flush
pump in parallel with the Additive Clean Line Output (PC # 398). This runs the
pump during the flush mode only. Option 2 is to wire the flush pump to Trip Output
#3 (PC # 317) which runs the pump for the entire batch.
Operation - When the START button is pressed to begin a batch, the DanLoad will
check to see if an additive is selected. Only one additive can be selected at a time for
the multi stream injection mode of operation. If more than one additive is selected,
the DanLoad displays additive failure for each selected additive and does not allow
the batch to start. Depending on the type of design of the injection panel, the control
is as follows :
Type 1 (Panel w/ block valves and 1 additive on/off control valve) - The DanLoad
will control the additive injection by first energizing the appropriate additive block
valve output and pulsing the additive on/off control valve solenoid. As the end of the
batch is reached and if clean line flush is configured, the DanLoad concludes the
additive injection (reference clean line volume PC #138) and deenergizes the additive
block valve and the additive on/off control valve solenoids (ie..closes the valves).
Then the flush block valve output (PC # 398 - Additive Clean Line Output) will be
energized along with the flush output (PC # 399 - which is wired to the additive
on/off control valve) to allow the flushing operation. If configured, the DanLoad will
check the clean line pulses (PC # 425) at the end of the batch to verify the clean line
flushing operation took place and alarm if necessary.
3 - 114 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Type 2 (Panel w/ 2 or more additive on/off control valves and no block valves) The DanLoad will control the additive injection by pulsing the appropriate additive
on/off control valve solenoid. As the end of the batch is reached and if clean line
flush is configured, the DanLoad concludes additive injection (reference clean line
volume PC #138) by deenergizing the additive on/off control valve. Then the flush
block valve output (PC # 398 - Additive Clean Line Output) will be energized along
with the flush output (PC # 399 - which is wired to the additive on/off control valve)
to allow the flushing operation. If configured, the DanLoad will check the clean line
pulses (PC # 425) at the end of the batch to verify the clean line flushing operation
took place and alarm if necessary.
Flush Pulses Alarm - At the end of a batch, if the DanLoad records fewer clean line
flush pulses than the configured clean line flush pulses (PC # 425), the DanLoad will
raise an internal alarm and display the message that has been configured for safety
circuit #3 (PC # 254). To disable the Flush Pulses alarm, set the minimum pulses
to 0. The DanLoad will record the actual number of clean line pulses at the end of
each batch but will reset this register at the start of each batch. The flush pulses
counter can be displayed on the Dynamic Data Display via data code # 223 on
firmware versions 5.11 or above.
Calibrating the Additive Injectors - No additional electronics or handheld

calibrators are required to calibrate each injector stream. Calibration is accomplished
by using the DanLoads diagnostics to energize the discrete output wired to the
additive solenoid valve which allows additive to flow into a test beaker. The
DanLoads dynamic data display is used to show the amount of additive measured
by the DanLoad for that calibration cycle and is compared to the amount of additive
in the test beaker. A new factor is calculated as follows : New Factor = (Metered
Volume / Beaker Volume) x Old Factor, with the result rounded to 2 decimal places.
The new factor is entered as PC # 142..167.
Accuracy
The DanLoad 6000 is able to measure the injected additive with tremendous accuracy via a high
resolution additive meter. At each step of the process the DanLoad constantly reads measured
additive and adjusts the control cycle accordingly.
#
Example : Based on an additive meter with a K-factor of 2600 PPG and a ratio of
0.4 gallons of additive per 1000 US gallons of product (400 ppm), there will be 25
injections of additive. Each injection will be 0.016 gallons (41.6 pulses per injection)
for a total of 1040 pulses for the batch. At the completion of the batch, the DanLoad
will typically be within 1 pulse of the additive batch volume. This one pulse is
equal to 0.000385 gallons.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 115
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Advantages of Using DL6000 with Multi Stream Injection Mode vs. DL6000 with
Smart Injectors
In addition to cost savings, below are several advantages for using the DanLoad 6000 to directly
control a multi stream additive injector panel.
#
System installation is simplified and installation costs reduced due to less hardwiring
requirements. An example is the elimination of the communication cable between
the automation system and injector.
System operation is simplified. The DanLoad 6000 directly controls the flow of
product and additives and corrects for over or under injection. Configuration,
calibration, alarm processing, diagnostics, etc. all take place at the DanLoad 6000.
Some possible causes of alarms due to interfacing automation systems and/or presets
to smart injectors are eliminated.
Reduces trouble-shooting and maintenance by utilizing one piece of electronics for

both additive injection, measurement and control functions.
Provides gross and net running product totalizers and additive running totalizers
allowing for product and additive inventory management.
Provides built-in reporting capabilities to facilitate product and additive inventory

management.
Provides multiple injection rates per additive stream via the DanLoads Multi Rate
additive selection method (ie..five rates for each of six additive streams).
Overall electronic preset and additive injector cost is reduced because of savings
from not buying a smart injector.
3 - 116 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 117
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 118 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.10.5
Multi Rate Additive Injection
The DanLoad 6000, using multiple recipies, has the capability of controlling multiple injection rates
through a single additive injector. Typically, multiple additive injectors are required when different
rates are needed when using the same additive. The DanLoad allows the user the capability of
purchasing a minimum of 1 additive injector for a bay when the same additive with multiple rates
are used in multiple recipies. Naturally, the DanLoad will support multiple injectors that require
different rates when multiple additives are required.
Example:
Additive injection using Multi-Rate selection and Control method.
1.
Program Code (PC) Setup:

135 = 1 (Number of additives)
136 = Multi Rate (Selection method)
140 = 40 (Ratio Quantity. This value is ignored when Multi-Rate is selected).
141 = Control (Injection Method)
142 = 21 (Volume/Pulse or K factor)
143 = 0.4 (Additive per 1000)
480 = 2 (Number of recipies)
485 = x (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 1)
2.
Determine the amount of additive injected per pulse:

Vol/pulse = ((PC 140) / 1000) x (PC 143)
3.
Determine the additive ratio:

Additive ratio = ((Vol/pulse) x 1000) / (Desired Additive per 1000)
4.
Enter the new additive ratio into PC 485.
5.
If another additive ratio is required, then use the calculation in steps 2 and 3 and enter the
value into PC 491 (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 2).
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 119
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Example:
Additive injection using Multi-Rate selection and Meter method.
1.
Program Code (PC) Setup:

135 = 1 (Number of additives)
136 = Multi Rate (Selection method)
140 = 40 (Ratio Quantity. This value is ignored when Multi-Rate is selected).
141 = Meter (Injection Method)
142 = 21 (Volume/Pulse or K factor)
143 = 0.4 (Additive per 1000)
480 = 2 (Number of recipies)
485 = x (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 1)
2.
Determine the amount of additive delivered per injection:

Vol/pulse = (Total additive injected) / (# of pulses)
3.
Determine the additive ratio:

Additive ratio = ((Vol/pulse) x 1000) / (Desired Additive per 1000)
4.
Enter the new additive ratio into PC 485.
5.
If another additive ratio is required, then use the calculation in steps 2 and 3 and enter the
value into PC 491 (Component 4 % or ratio quantity for recipe 2).
In both examples above the DanLoad 6000 also computes the volume/pulse which is also known as
1 additive unit. This additive unit is used in additive error checking. If the delivered additive falls
outside of PC 278 (Additive/1000 error limit) and has also exceeded the parameters of PC 272 and
PC 273 (low and high % of the ideal quantity at any point in a batch) the DanLoad 6000 will
terminate loading and display an Additive x failure message, where x is the additive injector that
failed.
3 - 120 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.11
Transaction Storage Overview
Data for multiple transactions composed of one or more batch deliveries is stored in non-volatile
memory. Storage of transaction and batch delivery data is configured and enabled by program codes
834 through 837 and 840 through 901. Transaction storage MUST BE enabled and defined if either
one or both of the following two cases exist.
#
Case 1 A user defined Transaction Ticket will be printed on a pre-printed form. The print
coordinates of selected variables are defined by program codes 920 through 981.
Case 2 A host computer (Terminal Automation System) gathers data from the DanLoad
6000 and it is desired to provide backup storage of transaction data in case the host
computer or host computer communications link fails.
*** OR ***
A host computer (Terminal Automation System) polls the DanLoad 6000
at long time intervals, such as once per day. For this type of operation, the
host computer can upload all transaction data from the DanLoad 6000 once
per day and then the transaction storage memory can be cleared or left intact.
If the transaction storage memory is cleared, the DanLoad 6000 reads the
data for the next day beginning at transaction record 0000. If the transaction
storage memory is left intact, the DanLoad 6000 reads the data for the next
day beginning at the last read transaction record + 1.
It is not necessary to define the transaction / batch storage program codes 840 through 901 for any
other case.
Text in this section uses standard programming and database terminology. You do not need to
understand programming or database concepts to configure transaction storage. Examples are
provided that relate the unique terminology to how data is placed and viewed on a printed page. If
additional explanation is required, contact Daniel Automation Field Service Department or any
person with computer programming experience.
Section 3.10.1 gives an example of transaction data storage definition and formatting a user defined
transaction ticket. This example provides an overview of the required actions. Detailed information
on the transaction data storage program codes and the user defined transaction ticket program codes
is provided after the example. The procedures for implementing transaction storage and defining
the format of a user defined transaction ticket are described below.
Section 3.10.2 discusses the default ticket formats available with the DanLoad 6000.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 121
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.11.1
Transaction Storage / Transaction Ticket Setup Procedure (Example)
Refer to Section 3.10.2 for the available preconfigured Standard Ticket Formats.
For the example, assume that the DanLoad 6000 controls gasoline octane blending (midgrade),
high octane only, and low octane only gasoline loading to tanker vehicles. The example refers to
the Transaction Ticket (Typical), Figure 3 - 13, the Transaction Storage Code Worksheet
(Example), Figure 3 - 14, and the Batch Storage Code Worksheet (Example), Figure 3 - 15.
The Transaction Ticket (Typical) was generated with a word processor program. The bold type
indicates the pre-printed text in the ticket. The regular type indicates data that is obtained from the
transaction storage file and the batch storage file in the DanLoad 6000. The transaction storage file
can only contain data selected from the Transaction Storage Codes (TSC), Table 3 - 4 on page 3129, and the batch storage file can only contain data selected from the Batch Storage Codes (BSC),
Table 3 - 5 on page 3-131. If transaction data storage is defined and a user defined transaction ticket
is not required, the print coordinates defined by program codes 920 through 955 and 960 through
982 can be ignored.
Steps performed:
1
Design the ticket format using available data defined by transaction storage codes and batch
storage codes. Design the pre-printed text as desired.
Use a scale to measure and then mark the approximate row numbers and column numbers
on the rough draft of the transaction ticket. The printed output from the DanLoad 6000 is
normally 10 characters per inch on each line and 6 rows per inch vertically. The print font
(character style and size) is dependent on the data printer or other external device, such as
a personal computer driving a printer.
Circle each printed variable generated by the DanLoad 6000. Near each circled variable,
write the following code to describe the variable.
Type number, row, column, number of bytes stored in transaction or batch record, item
multiplier
Example:
Tnn, rrr, cc, b, m
OR
Bnn, rrr, cc, b, m
Type number T for TSC, B for BSC and TSC or BSC number
rrr
three-digit (leading zeros) row number on ticket
cc
two-digit (leading zeros) column number on ticket
3 - 122 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The number of bytes stored in the transaction or batch record. Obtain

from the # bytes/format column in the Transaction Storage Codes
(TSC) table on page 3-129 or the Batch Storage Codes (BSC) table
on page 3-131. Note: This number can be less than the number of
characters in the formatted printout of the variable.
[multiplier] The number of flow meters defined (for TSC 23, 24,
25, 26) or the number of components defined (for BSC 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15). The multiplier is 1 for all other TSC's and BSC's.
Enter the TSC number, ticket row / column coordinates, and number of memory storage
bytes required for the variable in the Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet.
Start with the top TSC entry and calculate record offsets in the following manner.
(bytes times multiplier) plus offset equals the offset for the following line TSC.
In the example, [# bytes for T11 equals 4 times 1 (assumed multiplier)] plus 1 (offset for
first entry) equals 5 which is entered as the offset for the next line TSC 12.
In the Record Length column, manually perform the bytes * m multiplication and write the
product in the column. Sum all of the values or products in this column. The example sum
is 120 bytes storage required in the transaction data storage record. Round this number to
150 bytes to allow for minor re-definition of data later. Enter the value 150 in program code
834 Transaction record length.
Enter the BSC number, ticket row / column coordinates, and number of memory storage
bytes required for the variable in the Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet.
Start with the top BSC entry and calculate record offsets in the following manner.
(bytes times multiplier) plus offset equals the offset for the following line BSC.
In the example, [# bytes for B2 equals 2 times 1 (assumed multiplier)] plus 1 (offset for
first entry) equals 3 which is entered as the offset for the next line BSC 7.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 123
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

9
In the Record Length column, manually perform the bytes * M multiplication and write the
product in the column. Sum all of the values or products in this column. The example sum
is 18 bytes storage required in the batch data storage record. Round this number to 30 bytes
to allow for minor re-definition of data later. Enter the value 150 in program code 836 Batch
record length.
Note
Ten memory pages (each page stores 8192 bytes) are allocated to store transaction records
and batch records. Transaction storage pages are allocated by program code 835 Start page
and # pages and batch storage pages are allocated by program code 837 Start page and #
pages. If transaction storage is enabled, at least one page must be assigned for transaction
storage records and at least one page must be assigned for batch storage records. The complete
block of ten pages is identified by numbers 600 through 1510, where the last two digits (00
through 10) identify the number of pages allocated and the 6 through 15 part of the
assignment indicates the start page. (Note: Memory pages 00 through 05 are used internally
by the DanLoad 6000.)
Let's assume that at this tanker vehicle loading facility it is common to load three or four
batch deliveries grouped into individual transactions.
Here are the known or assumed details:
#
Transaction record length
150
Batch record length
30
Maximum number of batches in each transaction is 6. Because the batches per

transaction should never exceed 6, set program code 047 Batches/transaction = 6 at
this time to limit the number of batches allowed per each transaction.
However, almost all transactions are composed of 4 batches. Typically 4 batches
times 30 bytes each batch equals 120 bytes per each transaction stored in the batch
storage record. (At the end of transaction, a 150 byte transaction record will also be
stored.)
Let's assume that most transactions are composed of 4 batches. In this case, at each
transaction close, 150 bytes are stored in the transaction file as the transaction record
for the completed transaction nnnn. And 120 bytes are stored in the batch file as
FOUR batch records that make up the completed transaction nnnn.
3 - 124 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
Compare the value of the transaction record length and the sum of all batch records
stored for each normal transaction.
1
Divide the smaller value by the larger value. In this example, divide 120 by
150. The result is 0.8.
Multiply the result (0.8) by 5. (Note: 5 is the median page count of the 10
pages used to store batch and transaction files.) The result of 0.8 times 5 is
4. If the result is a fraction, round the value up to a whole number. The
value, 4, is the number of pages in either the transaction file or the batch
file. The file is determined by the smaller value (numerator of the division)
that was determined in step 1 above. In this example, 120 (the numerator)
is the sum of the bytes in 4 batches (one transaction) so the number of pages
calculated in this step (4) is assigned to the batch file.
Set program code 837 Start page and # pages to 1204 (for batch storage).
This indicates that the start page is 12 and 4 pages (12, 13, 14, 15) are
assigned to the batch file.
The remaining 6 pages in the transaction storage group are allocated for
transaction data as follows. Set program code 835 Start page and # pages to
606 (for transaction storage). This indicates that the start page is 6 and 6
pages (6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11) are allocated to the transaction file.
Use the data entered in the Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter
the transaction data record offsets, beginning at 1, in program codes 840
through 875, as defined.
Use the data entered in the Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter the
batch data record offsets, beginning at 1, in program codes 880 through 901,
as defined.
[Optional, only if user defined transaction ticket is defined] Use the data
entered in the Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter the
transaction data print coordinates in program codes 920 through 955, as
defined.
[Optional, only if user defined transaction ticket is defined] Use the data
entered in the Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet and enter the batch data
record print coordinates in program codes 960 through 981, as defined.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 125
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Transaction Ticket (Typical)

Figure 3-12
3 - 126 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example)

Figure 3-13
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 127
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet (Example)

Figure 3-14
3 - 128 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The data contained in the Transaction Ticket (Typical), Figure 3 - 13, is described below.
Note: The upper area of the ticket contains data obtained from transaction storage codes and
therefore, each defined line is a transaction storage line.
SHIPPER
This number (up to eight-digits) is obtained from TSC-11 (Data item 1). This is
the operator entry in response to Prompt #1 (program code 031). Assume that this
prompt has been set to read "Enter shipper I.D. number".
CLIENT
This number (up to eight-digits) is obtained from TSC-12 (Data item 2). This is
the operator entry in response to Prompt #2 (program code 032). Assume that this
prompt has been set to read "Enter client I.D. number".
TRANSACTION SEQUENCE NUMBER

The sequence number of the transaction obtained from TSC-2 (Transaction sequence
number). This number (0 to 9999) is obtained from the internal transaction counter
in the DanLoad 6000. The transaction sequence number is readable by program code
042 Transaction #.
RECIPE NUMBER / NAME
The recipe number (1 to 30) is obtained from TSC-3 (Recipe number). This
number is maintained internally by the DanLoad 6000. The sequential recipe
numbers are assigned to recipe names which have been defined by program codes in
the recipe setup program code group (program codes 480 to 661).
The recipe name (up to 16 alpha-numeric characters) is obtained from TSC-4
(Recipe name). The name is obtained from the setup entry in program code 481
Recipe name (and similar program codes in the program code group 480 to 661).
Note: The example Delivery Ticket shows a slash (/) that visually separates the
recipe number and recipe name. This (/) slash is part of the pre-printed text.
TRANSACTION CLOSING (DATE/TIME)
The date and time that the transaction is ended. This data is obtained from TSC-17
(Transaction end date and time). The date format is dependent of the configuration
of program code 038 Date format and program code 039 Date separator. The time
format is always in the hh:mm:ss form.
TRANSACTION OPENING (DATE/TIME)
The date and time that the transaction is started. This data is obtained from TSC-16
(Transaction start date and time). The date format is dependent of the configuration
of program code 038 Date format and program code 039 Date separator. The time
format is always in the hh:mm:ss form.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 129
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Batch data section of the Delivery Ticket (BATCH:) follows:
The parameters in this group are defined by batch storage codes.
In the example, we will assume that any tanker vehicle can only have a maximum of six
compartments and that program code 047 Batches/transaction has been set to 6 to limit each
transaction to no more than six batches. Therefore, we have designed to pre-printed Delivery Ticket
with enough space to print up to six batch records (lines) in this area. If the number of batches per
transaction is not limited by setup (program code 047) or by strict operating procedures, the
number of batch records printed could over-print the lower area of the pre-printed Delivery Ticket.
SEQ # The batch sequence number is obtained from BSC-2 (Batch sequence number). All batches
that are part of one transaction will have sequential numbers in the range of 0 to 9999. The
batch sequence number is readable by program code 043 Batch number.
PRESET
The batch preset quantity obtained from BSC-7. This quantity was entered by the
local operator when the batch delivery operation was setup.
StandardGallons [OCTANE - HIGH]

The batch standard quantity, per component, obtained from BSC-11 (Component
batch standard quantity). In this example, high octane gasoline was defined as
Component 1 at setup time with program codes 066 to 068. In this case, at setup
time, we have set program code 067 Meter to 1 so that the high octane gasoline is
measured by flow meter 1. This is important in this instance so that we can display
the flow meter based TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING / OPENING READING
in the same format in the lower area of the Delivery Ticket.
StandardGallons [OCTANE - LOW]
The batch standard quantity, per component, obtained from BSC-11 (Component
batch standard quantity). In this example, low octane gasoline was defined as
Component 2 at setup time with program codes 069 to 071. In this case, at setup
time, we have set program code 070 Meter to 2 so that the low octane gasoline is
measured by flow meter 2. This is important in this instance so that we can display
the flow meter based TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING / OPENING READING
in the same format in the lower area of the Delivery Ticket.
3 - 130 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
TEMP [OCTANE - HIGH]

The average temperature is obtained from BSC-12 (Component batch average
temperature). Since the average temperatures are related to each component that has
been defined, the order of printing on the line is component 1 temperature then
component 2 temperature. In this case, the pre-printed labels OCTANE - HIGH and
OCTANE - LOW identify the corresponding component.
TEMP [OCTANE - LOW]
The average temperature is obtained from BSC-12 (Component batch average
temperature). Since the average temperatures are related to each component that has
been defined, the order of printing on the line is component 1 temperature then
component 2 temperature. In this case, the pre-printed labels OCTANE - HIGH and
OCTANE - LOW identify the corresponding component.
Note: The data obtained from batch storage codes ends here. The remaining lower area of the
Transaction Ticket contains only data obtained from transaction storage codes and therefore
each defined line is a transaction storage line.
TRANSACTION ADDITIVE GROSS VOLUMES
The injected additive gross volumes for the transaction are obtained from TSC-30 to
TSC-35 (Additive x transaction gross quantity). We have assumed for the example
that all six additives have been setup for injection by program codes 380 to 398.
Therefore, we have allocated space to print the gross quantities for all six additives.
Transaction additive quantities are cumulative each transaction. This means that
each additive will have only one quantity value. If accumulation of additive
quantities by batch is required, BSC-16 to BSC-21 can be used to access these
quantities. However, space on the report must be allocated to print a quantity value
for each additive and each batch. Note: pre-printed additive labels in the example
are ADD1, ADD2, etc., an actual transaction ticket could use the actual additive
names in place of the generic place holders used in the example.
ALARMS
Report space is allocated for up to two primary alarms that occur during the
transaction. The alarm messages are obtained from TSC-28 (Primary alarm during
transaction) and TSC-29 (Primary alarm during transaction). The alarm messages
that can be printed are defined by various program codes in the alarms group program
codes 220 to 275. Only Primary alarms are printed by TSC-28 and TSC-29. Two
transaction storage codes are accessible to provide printing capability of up to two
primary alarms that occur during a transaction.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 131
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

BitMap
The alarm bitmap is obtained from TSC-27 [Primary alarms during transaction
(bitmap)]. Note: Most organizations will probably not print the bitmap field on a
pre-printed report. However, the alarm bitmap does provide an historical record
of primary alarms that occur during transaction processing. The alarms bitmap
usually has limited utility in a stand alone system because 1) occurrence of primary
alarms indicates a hardware or operational problem that should be corrected
immediately, and 2) interpretation of an alarms bitmap requires an understanding
of the binary and hexadecimal numbering schemes. Section 3.10.6 contains
information on interpreting the alarm bitmap.
TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING READING

This gross quantity, per flow meter, obtained from TSC-25 (Gross meter totalizer
at end of transaction). In this example, high octane gasoline was defined as
Component 1 at setup time with program codes 066 to 068. The low octane gasoline
was defined as Component 2 at setup time with program codes 069 to 070. In this
case, at setup time, we have set program code 067 Meter to 1 and program code 070
Meter to 2 so that the high octane gasoline is measured by flow meter 1 and the low
octane gasoline is measured by flow meter 2. This is important in this instance so
that we can display all quantities on the Delivery Ticket in the same order.
TRANSACTION GROSS OPENING READING
This gross quantity, per flow meter, obtained from TSC-23 (Gross meter totalizer
at start of transaction). In this example, high octane gasoline was defined as
Component 1 at setup time with program codes 066 to 068. The low octane gasoline
was defined as Component 2 at setup time with program codes 069 to 070. In this
case, at setup time, we have set program code 067 Meter to 1 and program code 070
Meter to 2 so that the high octane gasoline is measured by flow meter 1 and the low
octane gasoline is measured by flow meter 2. This is important in this instance so
that we can display all quantities on the Delivery Ticket in the same order.
TOTAL GROSS TRANSACTION QUANTITY
This total quantity is obtained from TSC-18 (Transaction gross quantity). The
quantity is calculated by the following formula.
TRANSACTION GROSS CLOSING READING (TSC-25) (all meters)
minus
TRANSACTION GROSS OPENING READING (TSC-23) (all meters)
equals
TOTAL GROSS TRANSACTION QUANTITY
3 - 132 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
FLOW WEIGHTED AVERAGE TEMP.

This value is obtained from TSC-20 (Transaction average temperature). The value
is calculated by the following formula.
sum of COMPONENT BATCH AVERAGE TEMPERATURE
(for all components) divided by the number of
COMPONENT BATCH AVERAGE TEMPERATURE values
DELIVERED Standard quantity AT 60 DEG F
This quantity is obtained from TSC-19 (Transaction standard quantity). This
quantity is calculated by the following formula.
TOTAL GROSS TRANSACTION QUANTITY times the
COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR equals
DELIVERED Standard quantity AT 60 DEG F
Note: The COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR is the temperature correction
factor in this case because pressure compensation is not applied.
DRIVER
Space for the tanker vehicle driver to sign for receipt of product.
TERMINAL AUTHORIZATION
Space for the terminal supervisor or operator to sign for delivery of product.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 133
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.11.2
Default Ticket Formats
Three default ticket formats are preconfigured in the DanLoad. Refer to program code 838 for a
complete description of the Transaction Ticket Format. The basic formats are:
Format #1
Format #2
Format #3
Ticket without batch data

Ticket with batch data
Ticket with only batch data
See Figure 3-16 on the following page for an example of these formats.
Note: The first line under each format heading (numbers 1-8) and the very next line are used to
indicate the column number (1-80) of the preconfigured ticket format. Transaction storage
codes are in plain type. Batch storage codes are underlined. Field widths are indicated by
dots to the right of the storage codes, even though the values may be right-justified within
the fields.
Reference TSC and BSC codes on pages 3-129 to 3-131 for Field Identifier.
3 - 134 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Format 1 - Transaction summary without batch data

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #)
1.. 5
2... 3. 4...............
18....
19....
20...
16............... 17...............
6............................... 11......
23.......
25.......
24.......
26.......
<-- Assumes one meter only.
27..................
30........
31........
32........
33........
34........
35........
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Format 2 - Transaction summary with batch data

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #)
1.. 5
2... 3. 4...............
18....
19....
20...
16............... 17...............
6............................... 11......
23.......
25.......
24.......
26.......
<-- Assumes one meter only.
27..................
30........
31........
32........
33........
34........
35........
2... 7..... 8..... 9..... 4.... 6..... 5.....
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Format 3 - Batch data

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 (Column #)
1.. 5
2... 3. 4...............
2... 7..... 8..... 9..... 4.... 6..... 5.....
DanLoad Default Ticket Formats

Figure 3-15
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 135
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.11.3
Transaction Data Storage
The remaining sub-sections in the 3.10.x series contain detailed information on transaction data
storage and user defined transaction tickets.
Transaction / batch data storage parameters are defined by program codes 834 to 838, 840 to 875,
and 880 to 901. The function of these codes is independent from transaction ticket printing related
program codes. However, if user defined transaction / batch tickets are printed, an interrelation
between the different groups of program codes MUST BE established. Part of this interrelation
between program codes is performed manually at setup time and part is established automatically
internally by the DanLoad 6000. Program codes 920 to 981 specify the format of the printed tickets.
In addition, program codes 706, 707, and 709 control the actual printing and sequence numbering
of transaction tickets.
All other program codes implemented in the DanLoad 6000, except those listed in the previous
paragraph, are related to process monitor / control and manner of operation of the DanLoad 6000.
However, the transaction / batch storage codes and ticket printer control codes implement
programming / database methods.
Definitions
Byte
The term byte refers to a small space (8 binary bits) in computer memory used to
store one alpha (letter, number, or special) character used as text only or two
numeric (number) characters.
Nybble
A nybble is 4 binary bits. A byte contains two nybbles.
Database Terminology (applicable to DanLoad 6000 batch and transaction storage)
Database
All of the static (unchanging) and dynamic (changing) data stored in the DanLoad
6000.
File
In this case, the transaction file and the batch file are database tables. Each file is
a block of non-volatile (battery backed) memory that stores batch and transaction
data in logical groups. The file (table) contains groups of similar type data that
make up part of the database. The groups of data in the file are divided into columns
and rows similar to data entered on paper. The columns are called fields and the
rows are called records. The batch and transaction files are separate random access
(any data variable can be located with a pointer to (address of) the variable) files.
See Record definition below.
3 - 136 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Field
A vertical column that contains similar type data. Each field contains one or more
alpha-numeric characters. The Transaction and Batch File Organization table below
indicates the field and record organization of both transaction and batch files. The
field contents of a transaction record are defined by program codes 840 to 875. And
the field contents of a batch record are defined by program codes 880 to 901. The
transaction storage setup process allows the user to define multiple data items that
are grouped as sub-fields in the User Defined field of the Batch Record and the
Transaction Record.
Record
A row (horizontal string of alpha-numeric characters) that contains various types of

data, divided into fields. Each of the up to ten-thousand batch records and up to tenthousand transaction records contains information on one completed batch loading
(in the batch file) or one completed transaction (in the transaction file). The length
of each record in the transaction file is set to a fixed number of bytes by program
code 834 Transaction record length. The length of each record in the batch file is
set to a fixed number of bytes by program code 836 Batch record length. Note: The
process of defining the contents of the user defined field of a batch record or
transaction record define a template of the record contents. The actual alpha-numeric
contents of each record is written into each record during or after a batch loading or
transaction operation.
Record Header
[Note: In the table below, all fields (columns) except the User Defined field
(column) are part of the record header.] Record header fields in each record contain
information that is maintained and used internally by the DanLoad 6000. This
information enables the DanLoad 6000 to know where to find each record and what
data is contained in each record. The records are located by index numbers which are
similar to page numbers in the index of a book. The record header fields for both
transaction records and batch records are shown in the following table Transaction
and Batch File Organization. The record header fields are maintained internally by
the DanLoad 6000.
When transaction / batch storage is enabled, a non-volatile memory block (file) is
created for up to 10,000 user definable batch data records and up to 10,000 user
definable transaction data records. A record is a row in a database table. Columns
in the database table define data fields.
The table below shows the relationship between the data stored each transaction
record (and file) and the separate data stored in each batch record (and file). Note
that the transaction and batch records are stored in separate batch and transaction
files. The table shows one transaction record (top) and one batch record (bottom)
together for field comparison only.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 137
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Transaction and Batch File Organization

(Record Header Fields plus User Defined Field)
Type of
Record 9
Batch
Sequence
Number
Transaction
>
Batch
>
Transaction
Sequence
Number
Transaction
file key
Batch
file key
Start
Batch
Number
<yes>
Number of
Batches in
Transaction
Operating
Mode
Status
User
Defined
<yes>
<yes>
<yes>
<yes>
<yes>
<yes>
<yes>
Notes:
#
The transaction and batch file keys are not stored in their respective records. The DanLoad
6000 maintains these index numbers internally.
<yes> indicates that this field is stored in the corresponding record type.
<blank> indicates that the field is not applicable to the corresponding record type.
The fields contained in each record are defined below.

Batch Sequence Number (internal pointer to batch record)
The Batch Sequence Number is a sequential number between 0000 and 9999 that is
maintained internally by the batch record counter in the DanLoad 6000. This number is not
stored in any record field. However, because all batch deliveries and therefore batch
numbers are sequential, the DanLoad 6000 can locate any batch record by setting the batch
record counter.
Transaction Sequence Number (stored as part of batch record header)
The Transaction Sequence Number is a sequential number between 0000 and 9999 that is
maintained internally by the transaction record counter in the DanLoad 6000. This number
is not stored in transaction records. However, the current Transaction Sequence Number is
stored in the record header of each batch record. Because all transactions and therefore
transaction numbers are sequential, the DanLoad 6000 can locate any transaction record by
setting the transaction record counter. The Transaction Record Number stored in the batch
record header is used to group multiple batches into one transaction.
3 - 138 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Start Batch Number (stored as part of transaction record header)

The Start Batch Number is a number between 0000 and 9999 that is saved in a transaction
record when the first batch delivery of the transaction is started. This number is stored in the
transaction record header. This number, in conjunction with the Number of batches in
Transaction number is used to group one or more batch deliveries into one transaction.
Number of Batches in Transaction (stored as part of transaction record header)
The Number of Batches in Transaction is a number between 0001 and 9999 that is saved in
a transaction record after the transaction is terminated. This number is stored in the
transaction record. This number, in conjunction with the Start Batch Number is used to
group one or more batch deliveries into one transaction.
Operating Mode (stored as part of transaction record header)

The Operating mode is a number obtained from the state of program code 025 Operating
mode at the start of the current transaction. The possible Operating Modes are listed below.
Operating Mode Number
Operating Mode
Auto
Manual
Stand-alone
Status (stored as part of transaction and batch record headers)

The Status is a number that identifies the current state of each record. The possible states are
listed below.
Status Number
Record Status
record is not allocated and does not contain valid data
record is allocated, awaiting data from a batch loading or

transaction in progress
completed, the data is valid for the successfully

completed batch loading or transaction
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 139
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

User Defined (data field that is not part of record header)
[Note: The User Defined field contains multiple data items (sub-fields) that are defined at
setup time.] The complete User Defined field can be from 0 to 250 bytes in length. The
length of this field is set to a fixed value (record length) for all transaction records by
program code 834 Transaction record length and is independently set to a fixed value
(record length) for all batch records by program code 836 Batch record length. Selected
data is placed in sub-fields of this field at setup time by program codes 840 through 875 for
transaction records and program codes 880 through 901 for batch records. Data is selected
by Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) for transaction records (file) and Batch Storage
Codes (BSC) for batch records (file). The two tables Transaction Storage Codes and Batch
Storage Codes contain information on the selectable data definitions.
During setup of transaction storage codes, the following two rules must be observed or the
data will not be stored.
#
Each data variable cannot overlay another data variable in storage. Data variables
must be placed end to end with no overlap.
Any data variable cannot extend past the last byte of the record as defined by
program code 834 for transaction records or program code 836 for batch records.
The following example of the User Defined portion of a batch record illustrates application
of these rules. Assume that program code 836 is set to 50 (batch record length is fixed at
50 bytes).
1
2
3
4
5
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
aabbttTTPPPPcccccccccccccccc
PPPP
< OFFSET
< good record
< bad record
3 - 140 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The OFFSET is the position in the 50-byte record length set by program code 836. If
program code 836 where set to 0, no memory space is allotted and no data is stored. Data
storage is enabled by setting program code 836 to any value between 1 and 250. Very small
values in this variable are not meaningful because of the limitation of data variable storage.
Example of good record shows the following assigned data storage.
Program
Code
Variable
Storage Length (bytes)
File Pointer + Number of

Bytes in Variable
880
Unit address
2 (aa)
1 + 2 bytes
(9 start next at byte 3)
881
Batch sequence
number
2 (bb)
3 + 2 bytes
882
Transaction
sequence number
2 (tt)
5 + 2 bytes
883
Temperature
2 (TT)
7 + 2 bytes
884
Pressure
4 (PPPP)
9 + 4 bytes
889
Component gross
quantity
4 * number of components
defined (cccccccccccccccc)
13 + (4 * 4 bytes)
A transaction consists of one or more batch deliveries of a single recipe and additive selection
combination. Process data for transactions is stored by the DanLoad 6000 and can be accessible,
depending on the configuration of several program codes.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 141
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Transaction Data Access Program Codes

Program Code
Function
696
Enables printing of the PREDEFINED STANDARD Batch Summary

Report on one of up to four selectable printers.
697
Enables printing of the PREDEFINED STANDARD Transaction

Summary Report on one of up to four selectable printers.
706
Enables printing of a USER DEFINED Transaction Ticket on a one of

up to four selectable printers.
707
Enables selection and printing of a USER DEFINED Transaction Ticket

on one of up to four selectable printers. The selection and re-printing
function is enabled by manual entry of the transaction sequence number
in the Reprint transaction ___ display. The Reprint transaction ___
display is accessible by the second selection in the Program Mode
Menu.
3 - 142 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
The following tables contain information on Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) and Batch Storage
Codes (BSC). A description of the data in the tables follows the tables.
Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) Table 3 - 4

TSC Number and
Display
Record Offset
Program
Code
Ticket
Coordinates
Program Code
Time Saved
# bytes/format
Reference
1 Addr
840
920
start trns
2/nnn
DUART address
2 Tr seq #
841
921
start trns
2/nnnn
PC 042
3 Recipe #
842
922
start trns
2/nn
internal register
4 Recipe name
843
923
start trns
16/(a16)
PC 481...
5 Side
844
924
start trns
1/n
DC 001
6 Prompt 1
845
925
start trns
32/(a32)
PC 031
7 Prompt 2
846
926
start trns
32/(a32)
PC 032
8 Prompt 3
847
927
start trns
32/(a32)
PC 033
9 Prompt 4
848
928
start trns
32/(a32)
PC 034
10 Prompt 5
849
929
start trns
32/(a32)
PC 035
11 Data item 1
850
930
start trns
4/nnnnnnnn
entry for PC 031
12 Data item 2
851
931
start trns
4/nnnnnnnn
entry for PC 032
13 Data item 3
852
932
start trns
4/nnnnnnnn
entry for PC 033
14 Data item 4
853
933
start trns
4/nnnnnnnn
entry for PC 034
15 Data item 5
854
934
start trns
4/nnnnnnnn
entry for PC 035
16 Start date
855
935
start trns
6/
PC 038, 039
17 End date
856
936
end trns
6/
PC 038, 039
18 Gross
857
937
end trns
4/nnnnnn
19 Std
858
938
end trns
4/nnnnnn
20 Temp
859
939
end trns
2/nnn.n
21 Pres
860
940
end trns
4/
22 Dens *
861
941
end trns
4/
PC 457
Table continues on next page.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 143
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Transaction Storage Codes (TSC) Table 3 - 4 (continued)

TSC Number and
Display
Record Offset
Program
Code
Ticket
Coordinates
Program Code
Time Saved
# bytes/format
23 Start gross
862
942
start trns
4 * # of meters/
nnnnnnnnn
24 Start std
863
943
start trns
4 * # of meters/
nnnnnnnnn
25 End gross
864
944
end trns
4 * # of meters/
nnnnnnnnn
26 End std
865
945
end trns
4 * # of meters/
nnnnnnnnn
27 Alarm bit map
866
946
end trns
10/(a20)
28 Prim alarm
867
947
end trns
10/(a40)
29 Temp alarm
868
948
end trns
10/(a40)
30 Add 1
869
949
end trns
4/nnnnnnn.nn
31 Add 2
870
950
end trns
4/nnnnnnn.nn
32 Add 3
871
951
end trns
4/nnnnnnn.nn
33 Add 4
872
952
end trns
4/nnnnnnn.nn
34 Add 5
873
953
end trns
4/nnnnnnn.nn
35 Add 6
874
954
end trns
4/nnnnnnn.nn
36 Op mode
875
955
authorize trns
1/n
37 Gross units
876
956
authorize trns
6/nnnnnn
38 Std units
877
957
authorize trns
6/nnnnnn
Reference
PC 025
* The component 1 backup density/gravity is stored/printed. The individual batch densities/gravities

are not averaged.
3 - 144 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Batch Storage Codes (BSC) Table 3 - 5

BSC Number and
Display
Record Offset
Program
Code
Ticket
Coordinates
Program Code
Time Saved
# bytes/format
Reference
1 Addr
880
960
start batch
2/nnn
DUART address
2 Ba seq #
881
961
start batch
2/nnnn
PC 043
3 Tr seq #
882
962
start batch
2/nnnn
PC 042
4 Temp
883
963
end batch
2/nnn.n
DC 132
5 Pres
884
964
end batch
4/nnnn.n
DC 134
6 Dens
885
965
end batch
4/nnnn.n
DC 133
7 Preset
886
966
start batch
4/nnnnnn
DC 102
8 Gross
887
967
end batch
4/nnnnnn
DC 002
9 Std
888
968
end batch
4/nnnnnn
DC 003
10 Comp gross
889
969
end batch
4 * # of comp/
nnnnnn
DC 072, 078, 084,

090
11 Comp std
890
970
end batch
4 * # of comp/
nnnnnn
DC 073, 079, 085,

091
12 Comp temp
891
971
end batch
2 * # of comp/
nnn.n
DC 075, 081, 087,

093
13 Comp dens
892
972
end batch
4 * # of comp/
n.nnnn
DC 107, 109, 111,

113
14 Comp pres
893
973
end batch
4 * # of comp/
nnnn.n
DC 108, 110, 112,

114
15 Comp %
894
974
end batch
2 * # of comp/
nnn.n
DC 122, 123, 124,

125
16 Add 1
895
975
end batch
4/nnnnnnn.nn
DC 115
17 Add 2
896
976
end batch
4/nnnnnnn.nn
DC 116
18 Add 3
897
977
end batch
4/nnnnnnn.nn
DC 177
19 Add 4
898
978
end batch
4/nnnnnnn.nn
DC 118
20 Add 5
899
979
end batch
4/nnnnnnn.nn
DC 119
21 Add 6
900
980
end batch
4/nnnnnnn.nn
DC 120
22 Op mode
901
981
authorize trns
1/n
PC 025
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 145
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The tables above contain the following data.
TSC / BSC Number and Display
This column contains the identification number and text displayed when the Record Offset
Program Code is addressed.
Record Offset Program Code
This column contains the program code that defines the byte offset (1 to 250) within the
user defined area of each transaction or batch record.
Ticket Coordinates Program Code
This column contains the program code that defines the row and column coordinates to print
the data on a user defined transaction ticket. This function is described below in the User
Defined Transaction Ticket section.
Time Data is Saved
This column contains the time, in the transaction time sequence, when the data variable is
saved.
Normal Transaction Sequence
Step
State
Action
Authorize transaction
[authorize trns]
Select recipe
(single recipe setup defaults to recipe # 1)
Select additives (if defined)
Start transaction
[start trns]
Enter preset quantity for first batch to load

(go to Step 4)
Authorize batch
[authorize batch]
Enter preset quantity to load

(same as Step 2 for first batch load)
Start batch
[start batch]
Press START push-button to start any batch load

OR
Press START push-button to restart a suspended batch loading before preset
quantity is delivered
Batch in progress
Loading is in progress
End batch
[end batch]
Preset quantity has been delivered [return to step 3 if multiple batch loads are
grouped in this transaction]
OR
Press STOP/PRINT push-button [restart batch load (go to step 4) if allowed or
return to step 3 if multiple batch loads are grouped in this transaction]
End transaction
[end trns]
Press STOP/PRINT push-button

with no load in progress
3 - 146 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Sequence Steps 3 through 6 are repeated for multiple batch loads that are grouped into one
transaction.
# bytes/format
This column contains the number of bytes required to store the data variable in the
transaction or batch record and the format of the data printed on a User Defined Transaction
Ticket. Note that alpha-numeric data, such as the Recipe name and Prompt # is stored in a
standard ASCII string without NULL terminator (00 byte). Numeric data is stored in packed
binary (two decimal digits per byte). Fixed format characters, such as decimal points and
date/time field separators, are not stored but are maintained internally by the DanLoad 6000.
Several data values are stored and can be printed in groups that are dependent on the number
of flow meters or number of components defined by the system setup. Examples are:
Transaction Storage Code 23 Start Gross, program code 862
Four bytes in printable format nnnnnnnn times the number of flow meters defined. Each
field is printed on one line with one space between each field.
nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn
< example shows three flow meters
Batch Storage Code 10 Comp gross, program code 889

Four bytes, each in printable format nnnnnn, times the number of components defined.
Each field is printed on one line with one space between each field.
nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn
< example shows three components
Reference
This column contains an addressable program code (PC nnn), data code (DC nnn), or other
readable point, such as DUART address from address selection switches on DUART, for
reading the variable. This reference is not the source of the data variable. But, the reference
refers to an addressable point where the variable can be read.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 147
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.11.4
Relation Between Batch Storage and Transaction Storage Variables
Three batch storage codes and transaction storage codes reference identical data as indicated in the
following table.
Com mon Storage Codes

Batch Storage Code
Transaction Storage Code
Reference
1 Addr
1 Addr
DUART address
3 Tr seq #
2 Tr seq #
PC 042
22 Op mode
36 Op mode
PC 025
A storage variable can only be defined one time in a batch storage record or a transaction storage
record. In addition, any one variable can only be assigned one set of print coordinates for a user
defined Transaction Ticket. Therefore, all batch and transaction variables, with the exception of
the three variables listed above, can only appear once on a Transaction Ticket.
Relation Between Various Batch Storage Codes

Batch storage codes are related to other batch storage codes in the following manner.
Batch Storage Code (BSC) Relations

Batch Storage Code
7 Source Batch Storage Code
4 Temp
Average of BSC 12 Comp temp for all defined com ponents in the
batch.
5 Pres
Average of BSC 14 Comp pres for all defined com ponents in the
batch.
6 Dens
Average of BSC 13 Comp den for all defined com ponents in the
batch.
8 Gross
Sum of BSC 10 Comp gross for all defined com ponents in the batch.
9 Std
Sum of BSC 11 Comp std for all defined com ponents in the batch.
3 - 148 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.11.5
Relation Between Transaction Storage Codes / Batch Storage Codes / Program

Codes
Transaction storage codes are related to other transaction storage codes and batch storage codes in
the following manner.
Transaction Storage Code (TSC) Relations

Transaction Storage Code
7 Source Transaction Storage Code
6 Prompt 1
Program code 031 <prompt #1> text for which the operator entered
response is 11 Data item 1 during transaction setup.
6 Prompt 2
7 Prompt 3
8 Prompt 4
9 Prompt 5
Program code 035 <prom pt #5> text for which the operator entered
18 Gross
Sum of 25 End gross m inus 23 Start gross for each defined flow
m eter. (Sum of BSC 8 Gross for all batches in the transaction.)
19 Std
Sum of 26 End std m inus 24 Start std for each defined flow m eter.
(Sum of BSC 9 Std for all batches in the transaction.)
20 Temp
Average of BSC 4 Temp for all batches in the transaction.
21 Pres
Average of BSC 5 Pres for all batches in the transaction
22 Dens
Program code 454 Component 1 backup density/gravity. The

individual densities/gravities are not averaged.
30 Add 1
Sum of BSC 16 Add 1 for all batches in the transaction
31 Add 2
32 Add 3
33 Add 4
34 Add 5
35 Add 6
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 149
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The following table describes the relationship between the quantity total accounting for batches and
transactions.
Batch Quantity Totals

Component1
Component2
Component3
Component4
10 Comp gross
10 Comp gross
10 Comp gross
10 Comp gross
BSC 8 Gross is the sum of all defined BSC 10 Comp gross quantities in the batch.
11 Comp std
11 Comp std
11 Comp std
11 Comp std
BSC 9 Std is the sum of all defined BSC 11 Comp standard quantities in the batch.
Transaction Quantity Totals
M eter3
(PC-067)
M eter2
(PC-070)
M eter4
PC-073)
M eter1
(PC-076)
25 End gross
25 End gross
25 End gross
25 End gross
23 Start gross
23 Start gross
23 Start gross
23 Start gross
TSC 18 Gross is the sum of all defined TSC 25 End gross m inus TSC 23 Start gross m eter
quantities in the transaction. This value is equal to the sum of all BSC 8 Gross quantity
accum ulations for the transaction.
26 End std
26 End std
26 End std
26 End std
24 Start std
24 Start std
24 Start std
24 Start std
TSC 19 Std is the sum of all defined TSC 26 End std m inus TSC 24 Start std m eter quantities
in the transaction. This value is equal to the sum of all BSC 9 Standard quantity accum ulations
for the transaction.
Batch and Transaction Quantity Totals Accounting
Batch and transaction quantity accumulations are for deliveries of one recipe which is: single
component quantity without additives, single component quantity with additives, blend quantity
without additives, or blend quantity with additives.
3 - 150 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Components are permanently assigned to flow meters by program codes 067, 070, 073, and 076.
The component assignment in the table above is an example only. The example shows that any
component can be assigned to any flow meter. The table shows that batch quantities are accumulated
per component and the sum of all component quantity accumulations is added to obtain the total
batch quantity accumulations (BSC 8 Gross and BSC 9 Std). The table also shows that transaction
quantities are accumulated per flow meter and the sum of all flow meter accumulations is added to
obtain the total transaction quantity accumulations (TSC 18 Gross and TSC 19 Std). The method
of quantity accumulation allows access to both component quantities, for batches, and flow meter
quantities, for transactions, for user defined Transaction Tickets and terminal automation systems.
It is obvious that the only quantity accounting device in any tanker vehicle loading installation is the
flow meter. The quantity accounting per component is performed by the DanLoad 6000 control
program.
As explained later in the Transaction Ticket Configuration section, the component to flow meter
assignments determine the print format for multiple components [batch data (BSC 10 / 11 / 12 /
13 / 14 / 15)] and flow meters [transaction data (TSC 23 / 24 / 25 / 26)]. Therefore, if the listing
order of multiple batch quantity totals must match the listing order of transaction totals, overall
system design and setup can be important for user defined Transaction Tickets.
3.11.6
Transaction Ticket Configuration Overview
Selected transaction / batch data can be printed on a pre-printed form. The form can be used as a
loading ticket or transaction report. This section contains information on configuration of a user
defined transaction ticket. An example transaction ticket, Figure 3 - 13, is used to illustrate the
example. The bold text signifies the pre-printed part of the form. The regular text signifies the data
variables obtained from transaction storage codes or batch storage codes.
User configurable transaction tickets can be printed on personal computer style data printers. Or the
tickets can be transmitted to, and archived in, a personal computer or similar processing device.
User configurable transaction tickets are completely independent from the standard format Batch
Summaries and Transaction Summaries. Therefore, user definable transaction tickets can be printed
regardless of the print status of Batch Summaries and Transaction Summaries. Data Logging
Section 4.4.1 contains information on Batch Summaries and Transaction Summaries.
The reason for the user defined transaction tickets capability is to permit batch and transaction
loading data to be printed on a pre-printed loading ticket (transaction Bill of Lading). The process
of defining the format of the printed transaction ticket is easy. However, some planning is required
to insure that the ticket layout is as desired and that the ticket contains the required data.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 151
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.11.7
Transaction Ticket Layout Planning
Although printing user defined data on an existing pre-printed ticket form is certainly possible, it
is usually easier to plan the layout of the required printed data from the DanLoad 6000 and then
design the pre-printed form to fit the printed data format. The data from the DanLoad 6000 is
obtained from transaction storage codes (TSC) that have been defined for the transaction storage
record and batch storage codes (BSC) that have been defined for the batch storage record. A word
processor program for a personal computer can generate an example form similar to the example
Transaction Ticket, Figure 3 - 13. Otherwise, the form can be designed with paper and pencil.
Remember that multiple batch data in one transaction prints on consecutive lines. Quantity data
from transaction storage codes 23 / 24 / 25 / 26 prints variable length lines dependent on the number
of flow meters defined. And data from batch storage codes 10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14 / 15 prints variable
length lines dependent on the number of components defined.
The DanLoad 6000 outputs standard ASCII characters to the printer. The printer determines the
appearance (font) of the printed data. Virtually all personal computer style printers default to
Courier 10 font. These characters are printed 10 cpi (characters per inch) and 6 lines per inch.
Most printers allow manual selection of Courier 12 font which prints characters at 12 cpi and 8 lines
per inch. Fonts smaller than Courier 12 are usually not suitable for this type of report.
After the required data for the Transaction Ticket has been selected from the transaction storage file
and the batch storage file, the print coordinates should be defined and a test printout generated on
blank paper. Review the test printout. Check for space for the pre-printed areas of the form. Check
for a clear area of approximately 1-inch (2.5 cm) along the left margin to allow for holes and
storage in a ring binder. Adjust the print coordinates of data items as required so that the data and
spacing appears correct on the paper. After adjustments have been made, manually enter the data
to be pre-printed with a color pen. You may need to consult with a print shop at this time to
determine if the space allotted for the pre-printed area of the form is sufficient for the desired preprinted text.
The format of a Transaction Ticket is very flexible. However, the following rules are applicable to
format design.
#
Any transaction line (row) of the Transaction Ticket can only contain transaction data. In
other words, if a line of the Transaction Ticket contains a variable assigned by transaction
storage codes 840 through 875, then any other variable displayed on that line must also be
assigned by transaction storage codes 840 through 875.
3 - 152 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Any batch line (row) of the Transaction Ticket can only contain batch data. In other words,
if a line of the Transaction Ticket contains a variable assigned by batch storage codes 880
through 901, then any other variable displayed on that line must also be assigned by batch
storage codes 880 through 901.
Transaction storage codes 23 / 24 / 25 / 26 assign quantity data storage space in memory for
flow meter quantities in the following format.
Meter_1_quantity Meter_2_quantity Meter_3_quantity Meter_4_quantity
The quantity values for each configured flow meter are stored in sequence and will be printed
in this sequence if any of these four transaction storage codes is assigned print coordinates
on the Transaction Ticket. The values are right justified with leading zeros suppressed. A
minimum of one horizontal space is open between each accumulator value, dependent on
the number of digits in the value.
Batch storage codes 10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14 / 15 assign quantity, temperature, pressure,

density, and quantity percentage data storage space in memory for components in the
following format.
Component_1_value Component_2_value Component_3_value Component_4_value
The values for each configured component and variable type are stored in sequence and will
be printed in this sequence if any of these four transaction storage codes is assigned print
coordinates on the Transaction Ticket. The values are right justified with leading zeros
suppressed. A minimum of one horizontal space is open between each accumulator value,
dependent on the number of digits in the value.
During planning of the Transaction Ticket, we need to know a few things about the configuration
of the DanLoad 6000 in order to design a Transaction Ticket properly. The following program codes
have either direct or indirect effect on the data can be printed on the Transaction Ticket.
Program code 025 Operating mode

Defines the operating mode for the DanLoad 6000. The operating mode determines how
transaction and batch records are archived in their respective files. [Operating mode is
accessible by TSC 36 and BSC 22]
Program code 031 through 035 Prompt for data item #x

The actual text entries for prompts can be printed. The eight-digit operator entries in
response to these prompts can also be printed. [Prompt test is accessible by TSC 6 to 10]
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 153
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Program code 038 Date format and 039 Date separator

Determine the format for printing the date. [Date is accessible by TSC 16 and TSC 17]
Program code 047 Batches/transaction

Limits the number of batches in each transaction. [Important for user defined transaction
tickets]
Program code 067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter

The component to flow meter assignments determine the order for printing component values
(quantities) for transaction storage codes 23 / 24 / 25 / 26.
Program code 080 Preset/delivery type

Determines the gross or standard engineering units for BSC-7 Preset quantity
Program code group 135 through 168 Additive injection

Determine the maximum number of additive values (Volumes) that can be printed.
[See TSC 30 to 35 and BSC 16 to 21]
Program code group 220 through 268, 274, 275 Alarms

Determine the primary alarm assignments that are available for printing. Only primary type
alarms can be printed. [See TSC 27 / 28 / 29]
Program code 343 Auto/manual change-over

Determines mode of operation which effects the transaction and batch storage data files.
Program code 344 Primary alarm reset

Determines when primary alarms are reset by an external input.
Program code group 380 through 398 Additive injection

Determines how additive injection volumes are accumulated. [See TSC 30 to 35 and BSC
16 to 21]
Program code group 426 through 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density

Sets the process variable engineering units for temperature, pressure, and density. If any
of these values are printed, the pre-printed engineering units labels must match the internally
used engineering units. [See TSC 20 / 21 / 22]
Program code group 480 through 661 Recipes

Defines the recipe names and associates these names with internally maintained recipe
numbers. Both recipe names and or recipe numbers can be printed. [See TSC 3 and 4]
Program code group 663 through 673 Data Communications Parameters

Defines the serial data port parameters for interface to a serial input printer or other data
acquisition device.
3 - 154 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Program code 696 Batch summary

Defines printer interface for the STANDARD pre-formatted batch summary report. This
report is different from the batch data printed a user defined Transaction Ticket.
Program code 697 Transaction summary

Defines printer interface for the STANDARD pre-formatted transaction summary report.
This report is different from the transaction data printed in the user defined Transaction
Ticket.
Program code 706 Transaction ticket

Defines printer interface for the user defined Transaction Ticket described in this section.
Program code 707 Transaction ticket reprint

Defines printer interface for re-printing Transaction Tickets manually from the Reprint
transaction display in Program Mode.
Program code 709 Sequence numbers

Enables printing of form sequence numbers (0 to 9999) unique for each printer. This
feature allows organization and audit tracking of all forms printed on all printers.
Program code group 834 through 877, 880 through 901

Control and define storage of transaction storage variables and batch storage variables in the
transaction and batch files. Each variable must be stored in its respective file to enable
access to the variable for printing in the Transaction Ticket.
Program code group 920 through 957, 960 through 982

Define the row and column coordinates, for each transaction and/or batch variable, on the
printed Transaction Ticket.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 155
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.11.8
Alarm BitMap
The alarm bitmap is normally not printed on transaction tickets. However, comparison of alarm
activity for several loading operations can be a useful diagnostic tool.
For the following description we presuppose that the reader does not have programming experience
but does have some knowledge of number base systems. The common base 10 number system uses
digits 0 through 9 to indicate the value of each digit position. The position decimal weight increases
by 1 power of 10 for each position change in the leftward direction from the decimal point. The
DanLoad 6000, like all digital computers, uses the base 2 number system which uses digits 0 and
1 to indicate the value of each position. The position binary weight increases by 1 power of 2 for
each position change in the leftward direction from the binary point. A third number base system,
the base 16 (hexadecimal) number system is used solely to make the binary (base 2) number
system more readable and manageable for people. The hexadecimal number system uses digits 0
to 9, a, b, c, d, e, f. The a through f digits are symbols that are place holders for decimal digits
10 through 15. The symbols serve only as single character place holders to represent possible
numbers in the number system. The bitmap as the name implies is binary based. Each bit stands for
one unique alarm. Each bit can be 0 (no alarm occurred) or 1 (alarm occurred). The bitmap is
transmitted and read as hexadecimal for ease of use by people. The relation between internal storage
of the bitmap and representation is presented below.
BitMap Representation
0000000000 7 bytes
<through 9 >
ffffffffffffffffffff
hex digits
Description
ten 8-bit bytes (two
hexadecimal digits per
byte)
00000000000000000000
<through 9 >
ffffffffffffffffffff
twenty 4-bit
hexadecimal digits
0 <through 9 > f
each 4-bit digit

(nybble)
the bit weight

(hexadecimal) for
each 4-bit nybble
3 - 156 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
BitMap Character /
Printed
Character
(1 of 20)
Bit
Weight
8
Bit Weight Translation
Bit
Weight
4
Bit
Weight
2
Bit
Weight
1
0
1
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
Note: The bit is set TRUE if the corresponding alarm occurs during the transaction. The
combination of TRUE alarms determines the character printed.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 157
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The alarm bitmap is described on the following pages. The Alarm BitMap for Position:
000000000000000000000 table indicates the character position and the bit weight within each
character that is set TRUE when the alarm was active during the transaction. The alarm bitmap is
stored, by assignment of TSC 27, as 10 bytes with two-digits in each byte. Each character position
contains indicators (bits) for 4 alarms. Since each alarm is independent from other alarms, the
occurrence of no alarm or any combination of from 1 to 4 alarms assigned to each character position
will determine what character is printed in each position of the bitmap. The characters that can be
printed in each character position are 0 through 9, a, b, c, d, e, f. This is the hexadecimal
numbering system. The bitmap is read from right to left for both character position and bit position.
Example:
09876543210987654321
8421
< bitmap character position number
< bit weights any character position

(example for character position 12)
Read the printed bitmap with the aid of the following tables.
#
The leftward 4 character positions (17 through 20) are always zeros because alarms are not
assigned to these positions.
Any non-zero character printed indicates that an alarm occurred during the transaction.
Determine the character position, the rightward character is 1 the leftward character is 20.
Find the corresponding Character Position in the Alarm BitMap for Positions:
00000000000000000000 table below.
Use the BitMap Character / Bit Weight Translation table to determine which bits were set
TRUE.
#
If the printed character is 1, 2, 4, or 8, then only one alarm in that character

position group was set TRUE.
If the printed character is 3, 5, 6, 9, a, or c, then two of the alarms in that

character position group were set TRUE.
If the printed character is 7, b, d, or e, then three of the alarms in that character

position group were set TRUE.
If the printed character is f, then all four of the alarms assigned to that character
position were set TRUE.
3 - 158 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Alarm BitM ap for Positions: 00000000000000hhhhhh

Character
Position
Bit
W eigh
t
Prim ary/secondary internal tem perature too high/low
Flow rate too low m eter 1
Flow rate too high m eter 1
Unable to close valve m eter 1
Valve closed early m eter 1
Tim ed-out - no flow detected m eter 1
Unauthorized flow exceeds lim it m eter 1
Alarm
Note: The BitMap representation in the title line shows the character positions on this page as
hhhhhh. The 0's in the BitMap can be any valid character and are described on other pages
of the table.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 159
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Alarm BitM ap for Positions: 00000000hhhhhh000000

Character
Position
Bit
W eigh
t
Pulse security error m eter 1
Data m em ory full
Com m s failure channel A
Com m s failure channel B
Tem perature failure m eter 1
Density failure com ponent 1
10
10
10
Pressure failure m eter 1
10
11
11
11
Additive 1 failure
11
Additive 2 failure
12
Additive 3 failure
12
Additive 4 failure
12
Additive 5 failure
12
Alarm
hhhhhh. The 0's in the BitMap can be any valid character and are described on other pages
of the table.
3 - 160 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
Alarm BitM ap for Positions: 0000hhhh000000000000

Character
Position
Bit
W eigh
t
Additive 6 failure
13
Unable to m aintain blend
13
Unable to close block valve 1
13
13
14
14
Circuit 1 alarm
14
Circuit 2 alarm
14
Circuit 3 alarm
15
Circuit 4 alarm
15
Circuit 5 alarm
15
Circuit 6 alarm
15
Circuit 7 alarm
16
Circuit 8 alarm
16
Storage m em ory full
16
Power failure
16
Character positions: hhhh0000000000000000

not used in software version 3.0
17 to 20
Alarm
hhhh. The 0's in the BitMap can be any valid character and are described on other pages of
the table.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 161
Transaction Record / Ticket Worksheet

Unit: _______
Date: _______
Transaction
Storage Code
Ticket
(PC 920 to 955)
Row
Column
PgmCode
Row/Col
Record
(PC 840 to 875)
Length
(bytes * #)
Offset
1
PgmCode
Offset
Batch Record / Ticket Worksheet

Unit: _______
Date: _______
Batch
Storage Code
Ticket
(PC 960 to 982)
Row
Column
PgmCode
Row/Col
Record
(PC 880 to 902)
Length
(bytes * #)
Offset
1
PgmCode
Offset
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.12
Component Size Inputs
In the manual operating mode, the authorized [batch] quantity can be determined automatically based
on the state of up to four discrete inputs, each one corresponding to a possible tank or compartment
size, known as "compartment size inputs". With compartment size inputs configured (program code
341), it is often only necessary for the operator to select the compartment size via a multi-way
selector switch and press the "ENTER" and "START" keys, or even just the "START" key (see "start
method", program code 342). The same functionality can be achieved quite easily in the automatic
operating mode via automation system programming, and is simplified by the fact that the states of
the safety circuit inputs are included in the response to the Request Status (12h) command. Refer
to the DanLoad 6000 Comm Spec.
In order to authorize a batch, one compartment size input, indicating the actual compartment size,
should be closed prior to entering a preset quantity or simply pressing the "ENTER" key. If the
"ENTER" key is pressed without having keyed-in a preset quantity, the authorized quantity entered
is the compartment size. If a preset quantity is keyed-in prior to pressing the "ENTER" key, the
authorized quantity entered is the minimum of the compartment size and the keyed-in preset
quantity, i.e:
Authorized qty = min(Compartment size per closed inputs or User-entered preset qty (if any))
Note the "if any" condition on the user-entered preset quantity; if a preset quantity is not keyed-in,
the compartment size corresponding to the lowest-numbered compartment size input that is closed
is used. For this reason, compartment sizes should be configured (see recipe 28, program codes 644
to 647) from smallest to largest in ascending order. If none of the compartment size inputs is closed,
it is not possible to authorize a batch even if a preset quantity is keyed-in, i.e. it is necessary to select
the compartment size even if a preset quantity is to be keyed-in.
The number of compartment size inputs (program code 341) can be configured (0 to 4). Zero means
that compartment size inputs are not being used. Safety circuits 4 thru 8 inputs serve double as
compartment size inputs. If one or more of them is used as a compartment size input, the
corresponding safety circuit cannot be used and its alarm action (program codes 257, 259, 261, 263)
should be set to "Off". The compartment sizes are configured via recipe 28's component
percentages. Program codes 349/350/351/352 are used to define the physical discrete compartment
size input and program codes 644/645/646/647 are used to define the physical compartment size in
product units for the associated input. The actual compartment size value is calculated by the
DanLoad as the value, entered in program codes 644/645/646/647, times 100. The maximum preset
quantity (program code 078) should not be smaller than the largest configured compartment size.
If compartment size inputs are used, the number of recipes (program code 480) must not exceed 26.
3 - 164 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
If compartment size inputs are used, additional pre-authorization verification of the compartment
size/preset quantity (in the manual operating mode) and verification of the loaded quantity while a
batch is in progress (in any operating mode) can be enabled via the level input (program code 374)
and the hatch input (program code 375). The processing associated with the level input was
developed for a specific user, and as such may not provide as much flexibility as you would normally
expect from the DanLoad 6000; care should be taken to understand the processing fully before
deciding to use this capability. Refer to the relevant program codes (374, 375 and 650 thru 653) for
more information.
3.13
Cutoff (End of Day Processing)
The DanLoad 6000 runs a cutoff (end of day processing) every 24 hours based on the configured
cutoff hour (program code 710). When the time (hour) is equal to the configured cutoff hour, the
DanLoad 6000...
#
Waits for any batch is progress to end. (Note: A DanLoad 6000 transaction may span two
cutoff periods.)
Saves the previous cutoff data, i.e. cutoff date and time, previous cutoff date and time, meter,
component and recipe gross and standard running totalizers and additive running totalizers.
Saves the new cutoff data.
Prints the totalizer data log if it is enabled (program code 705) and the DanLoad 6000 is in
the manual operating mode (program code 25).
Prints the thruput data log if it is enabled (program code 708) and the DanLoad 6000 is in
the manual operating mode (program code 25).
The totalizer and thruput data logs can be reprinted (if they are enabled and the DanLoad 6000 is in
the manual operating mode) using the "Reprint cutoff" option in the program mode menu. Both data
logs show the date and time at which they were printed as well as the date and time of the cutoff.
The DanLoad 6000 can reprint the totalizer and thruput data logs only for the most recently
completed cutoff, i.e. it does not "archive" cutoff data.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 165
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3.14
Set Contrast / Backlighting
Access to the Set Contrast / Backlighting display is via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of the
Program Mode Menu, Figure 3 - 1. This display provides the method to change the current contrast
and backlighting settings for either the local or remote LCD panel.
SELECT display
Primary
8/9 adjust contrast level
n
ALT+8/ALT+9 adjust backlight level

Set Contrast / Backlighting Display
Figure 3 - 16
If only the local display is present, it is preselected and indicated. Use the 8 and 9 arrow keys to
adjust the contrast level. A value of 0 is minimum contrast, a value of 15 is maximum contrast.
Use the ALT+8 and ALT+9 keys to adjust the backlight level. A value of 0 is backlight off, a
value of 7 is maximum backlight intensity.
3 - 166 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.15
CALMON - Turbine Meter Calibration Monitoring for the DanLoad 6000

Electronic Preset
Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 contains 22 program codes (6 global and 4 per meter) and 4 data codes (1
per meter) that are associated with Calibration Monitoring. 19 program codes (3 global and 4 per
meter are in the Blending setup group. 3 program codes (all global) are in the Recipe setup
group and are configured via Recipe 30 comp 1%, comp 2% and comp 3%. Calibration Monitoring
related program and data codes are as follows:
#
"731/ 737/ 743/ 749 CALMON analysis method".

#
"Fuzzy". Calibration monitoring analysis incorporated Fuzzy logic with

four inputs and one output. This is the recommended setting.
"Heuristic". Analysis operation using a Heuristic method.
"753 CALMON error limit" (0 to 255): The number of "bad meter analyses" per
CALMON reset count (program code 754) calibration monitoring analyses above
which a calibration failure alarm is raised for the meter during monitoring. The
default value is 25.
"754 CALMON reset count" (0 to 9999): The total analyses, good meter
analysis and bad meter analyses counters are zeroed every CALMON reset count
calibration monitoring analyses during monitoring. A calibration failure alarm is
raised for the meter if there are no "good meter analyses" in "CALMON reset count"
calibration monitoring analyses during monitoring. This is also the number of
attempts to auto-detect the number of blades (if necessary) and acquire a calibration
sample before a calibration failure alarm is raised for the meter during calibration.
755 Calib fail alarm action": The calibration failure alarm action. The default
value is "Primary". Select one of the following:
#
#
#
#
"Off". The alarm is disabled.

"Info".
"Secondary".
Primary".
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 167
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
"757/ 762/ 767/ 772 Number of blades" (0 to 50): The number of magnetic blades
(or buttons) on the meter for calibration monitoring purposes. 0 disables calibration
monitoring for the meter. Any other value enabled calibration monitoring for the
meter. 1 indicates that the number of blades should be auto-detected by the "MPMC"
prior to acquiring a calibration sample. The default value is zero, i.e. calibration
monitoring disabled for the meter. In order to use the calibration monitoring feature
it is recommended that this value must be set to 1, if the information on number of
magnetic blades or buttons is not available.
"758/ 763/ 768/ 773 Max max char dev" (0 to 65535): The maximum characteristic
deviation computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "bad
meter" result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. The
default value of 100 detects a 10% blade bent corresponding to an average K-factor
change of 0.3%.
"759/ 764/ 769/ 774 Max tot char devs" (0 to 65535): The total characteristic
deviation computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "bad
meter" result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. The
default value of 400 detects a 10 % blade bent corresponding to an average K-factor
change of 0.3% or multiple bent blades, bent by a smaller magnitude.
"760/ 765/ 770/ 775 Calibration sample": The current calibration sample status.
This program code can be used to force acquisition of a new calibration sample. The
default value is "Not acquired", i.e. calibration sample not acquired. Select one of
the following:
#
"Not acquired". The calibration sample has not been acquired or is invalid.
Calibration sample is requested if the number of blades is greater than 0.
"Acquired". The calibration sample has been acquired and is valid.
Set this program code to Not Acquired to allow the MPMC to acquire or re-acquire
calibration sample.
#
"656 Recipe 30, Comp 1 % (Max sample Instability)" The sample instability (%
x 100) computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "bad meter"
result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. During the
initial start-up this value should be 150 (i.e 1.5 %)
3 - 168 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
"657 Recipe 30, Comp 2 % (Max frequency Instability)"The frequency instability

(% x 100) computed during a calibration monitoring analysis above which a "bad
meter" result may be indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented.
During the initial start-up this value should be set to 250 (i.e 2.5 %)
"658 Recipe 30, Comp 3 % (Monitoring frequency band)" The frequency band as
a % of high flow rate at which a monitoring sample is acquired. A monitoring
sample is not acquired if the meter frequency is above or below the monitoring
frequency band. During initial start up this value should be set to 00.10 (i.e 10 %).
"Data code 219/220/221/222. Mtr Calib status". The current calibration sample
status for meter 1
#
#
0 Calibration sample "Not acquired".

1 Calibration sample "Acquired".
Configure this dynamic data code as item 5 so that the flow rate and the current status
for the meter is visible.
#
Calib fail alarm action". The calibration failure alarm action. The default value is
"Primary". Select one of the following:
#
#
#
#
"Off". The alarm is disabled.

"Info". When an alarm is reported...
"Secondary". When an alarm is reported...
"Primary". When an alarm is reported...
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 169
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Operation
Calibration sample acquisition

The DanLoad 6000 auto-detects the number of blades, if necessary, and acquires a calibration
sample, which characterizes the meter, when the flow rate reaches the highest configured flow rate
during an authorized load. The status of the calibration sample (Acquired or Not acquired) may
be viewed in the dynamic data display. In order to acquire a calibration sample perform the
following :
#
Set the program code 757 "Number of blades" to the number of magnetic blades (or
buttons) on the meter if known or set it to 1 if unknown.
Set program code 760 "Calibration sample" to "Not Acquired".
Preset and start a load.
When the batch reaches its high flow section, the DanLoad tries to acquire a Calibration sample.
The status of the calibration sample may be viewed in the dynamic data display. The status of the
calibration sample in the dynamic data display changes to Acquired when a calibration sample is
acquired by the DanLoad 6000. The calibration sample may be viewed from the Calmon status
screen on the DanLoad.
Monitoring sample acquisition
The DanLoad 6000 acquires monitoring samples on subsequent loads and determines the monitoring
characteristic of the meter
CALMON analysis
A comparison of calibration characteristic and monitoring characteristic results in the monitoring
sample being classified as "Good", "Bad" or "Unsure". The DanLoad 6000 reports calibration alarms
depending on the sample classification and Calmon error limit and Calmon reset count.
3 - 170 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
CALMON Status Screen

The calmon status screen contains information on the Calibration sample, the Monitoring sample
and Calmon analysis. Following information may be obtained from a characteristic sample:
#
Sample frequency: The frequency in Hz at which the characteristic sample was

acquired.
Frequency instability: Flow rate in-stability during acquisition of a characteristic

sample. This value indicates accelerating or decelerating flow, or pulsating flow.
Mean blade deviation: A value indicating machine inaccuracies of blade spacing and
inaccuracies in blade angles.
Sample instability: A value indicating the condition of the bearing such as damaged
or dry bearings.
Total characteristic deviations: Calculated after acquiring a monitoring sample, it is

the sum of individual blade ratio deviations from the calibration sample.
Maximum characteristic deviation: Calculated after acquiring a monitoring sample,

it is the maximum of the blade ratio deviation from the calibration sample, among the
individual blade ratio deviations.
The characteristic deviations indicate conditions such as single or multiple bent blades or
broken blades.
#
Good count: The number of good meter analyses. The number of good meter
analyses are zeroed for every "CALMON reset count" calibration monitoring
analyses.
Bad count: The number of bad meter analyses. The number of bad meter analyses are
zeroed for every "CALMON reset count" calibration monitoring analyses.
Reset count: is the number of times Calmon reset count calibration monitoring
analysis was performed.
Individual characteristic. The Calmon status screen also contains the characteristic
of each individual blade samples. The number of samples contained in this screen
depends on the number of blades on the meter.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 171
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Alarm bitmap. is a 16 bit MPMC alarm bitmap since the DanLoad was last reset.
The alarm bitmap includes 4 types of Calibration monitoring alarms. The
DanLoad raises a Calibration failure alarm for any Calibration monitoring alarm
reported by the CALMON process.
The following table describes the Alarm bitmap that is displayed on the DanLoad 6000
Alarm bitmap field.
Alarm Flags
Bit #
Description
Pulse security error meter 1
Pulse security error meter 2
Program memory checksum
RAM check
Stack overflow
Unexpected interrupt
Calibration failure meter 1.
Calibration failure meter 2.
I/O port error
Invalid command (command code or command length).
10
Calibration sample could not be acquired meter 1.
11
Calibration sample could not be acquired meter 2.
12
Monitoring sample could not be acquired meter 1.
13
Monitoring sample could not be acquired meter 2.
14
Calibration checksum invalid meter 1.
15
Calibration checksum invalid meter 2.
Bit 0 is the LSB and bit 15 is the MSB. Alarms corresponding to bits 6,7 and 10, 11, 12,13,14 and
15 are raised by the CALMON process.
3 - 172 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
#
Description of Calibrating Monitoring Alarms
There are 4 types of alarms reported, per meter, by the CALMON process. These alarms are:
#
"Calibration sample could not be acquired ": "CALMON reset count" attempts were
made to auto-detect the number of blades (if necessary) and acquire a calibration
sample. This condition usually occurs when a steady flow velocity is not maintained
during calibration sample acquisition.
"Monitoring sample could not be acquired": A single good meter analysis per
"CALMON reset count" calibration monitoring analyses could not be made. This
condition is usually caused by either worn or dry bearings, unstable or pulsating flow
or debris in the line.
"Calibration failure": The number of times bad meter analyses per "CALMON reset
count" exceeded "CALMON error limit". This condition is usually caused by bent
or broken turbine meter blades or worn bearings or dry bearings.
"Calibration checksum invalid": Alarm is raised during monitoring indicating that

the calibration characteristic stored in battery backed memory changed after the
calibration sample was "acquired". This condition may be caused by a failure of the
non-volatile RAM. This alarm may also be raised if MPMC tries to acquire a
monitoring sample for a meter for which a calibration sample has not been
"acquired".
Calibration monitoring for a meter is disabled following an alarm and may be enabled again by the
master.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 173
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The following table is a list of calibration failure alarms reported by the MPMC and the probable
cause for these alarms.
Calibration Failure Alarms
Probable Causes
Calibration sample could not be acquired.
Unstable or pulsating flow. Worn or dry

bearings.
Blade count indeterminate.
Debris in the liquid line.
Monitoring sample could not be acquired.
Unstable or pulsating flow. Worn or dry

bearings.
Debris in the liquid line.
Calibration failure.
Bent or broken blade.

Worn or dry bearing.
Calibration checksum invalid.
Nonvolatile RAM failure.

MPMC tried to acquire a monitoring sample
for a meter for which a calibration sample
has not been acquired.
The following table is a list of common conditions that are responsible for meter calibration failures
and the Characteristic values that are affected by these conditions.
Conditions for Calibration Failures on

Liquid Turbine Meters
Characteristic Values Affected
Bent or broken blades.
Total characteristic deviations, Maximum

characteristic deviation, Mean blade
deviation.
Machine inaccuracies of blades or blade

angles.
Mean blade deviation
Unstable flow
Frequency instability.
Debris in liquid line, possibly trapped

upstream.
Frequency instability, Sample instability.
Worn or dry bearings or pulsating flow.
Sample instability.
3 - 174 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
_________________________________________________________
3.16
Configuration Parameter Groups
The tables located in Appendix A are provided as a guide to the various program codes (parameters)
that determine the configuration of the DanLoad 6000. These tables provide aid in determining if
all required program codes have been correctly configured. Refer to drawings BE-18204 Device
Linkages - DanLoad 6000 and DE-18201 Program Code to Device Assignments - DanLoad 6000,
located in Appendix E for help in understanding the parameter groups.
Setup _________________________________________________________________ 3 - 175
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
3 - 176 _________________________________________________________________ Setup
Section 4
Operation
Operator Interface
Batch Delivery
Additive Injection
Data Logging
Alarm Analysis
Diagnostics
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

This section contains information on operation of the DanLoad 6000 Preset during batch delivery
and multiple batch delivery transactions. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 is defined by program
codes. Program codes consist of a three-digit identification number, a name, and a value or
selection. Program codes are configured during the setup procedure described in Section 3 - Setup.
Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contains additional information on the function of all
program codes.
The DanLoad 6000 is used to control and measure the delivery of liquid products to tanker vehicles.
Single components or from two to four components can be blended and delivered. Delivery of a
single component, either sequentially or simultaneously with other components, is called a load.
A batch consists of one or more component loads.
A batch is defined as the delivery of one single product or a blend consisting of two to four
components, with or without additives. A single batch delivery may constitute a transaction, that
is no more batches will be delivered to this client at this time. A batch delivery begins when the user
/ operator presets a quantity to be delivered and initiates the delivery. A batch delivery can be
suspended and restarted at any time if the following two limitations are met. All the permissive
circuits are closed (no active permissive alarm condition) and the Remaining quantity is greater than
the value set in program code 079 Minimum preset qty. The batch delivery is terminated when the
last pulse from the flow meter is detected and the batch delivery cannot be restarted due to one of
the conditions mentioned above.
A transaction is defined as one or more batch deliveries that are grouped together for accounting
purposes. Transactions are logically the delivery of one or more batches to one client, which would
be the case in multiple batches delivered to multiple compartments in a tanker vehicle. The
DanLoad 6000 allows the operator to define the batch deliveries that comprise a transaction. A
transaction is terminated if any of the following conditions occur.
#
Loss of power to the DanLoad 6000.
An end transaction command is received from the terminal automation system.
The STOP/PRINT key is pressed and a delivery operation is not in progress. If a batch
delivery is temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key, and it is desired to
continue the batch delivery, the ENTER and START key press sequence will restart the
batch delivery. If while the batch delivery is suspended, the STOP/PRINT key is pressed,
the transaction is terminated and either the Recipe Selection Display, the Additive Selection
Display, or the Loading Display is presented to the user / operator, depending on the system
configuration.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

A new batch delivery which will be part of a new transaction must be defined before a product or
blend of products can be delivered. The batch delivery procedure is described in Section 4.2. Batch
delivery control parameters are preset by the user / operator. The method of delivering and
calculating the quantity the batch delivery are dependent on the preset configuration of the DanLoad
6000. The steps listed below indicate the sequence for initiating a batch delivery. Some or all of the
steps are bypassed if the feature is not implemented.
1
A recipe selection: Performed automatically if only one recipe is defined or performed

manually if two or more recipes are defined. The recipe defines the single product or multicomponent blending characteristics of the batch delivery. (Section 6 - Program Codes 480
to 661).
An additive selection: Required if additive injection selection method program code 136
Selection method is set to Prompt and the additive is selected program code 143 / 148 / 153
/ 158 / 163 / 168 Available.
Entry of one to five data items: Each data item can be from zero to eight numeric digits,
data items are used by terminal automation systems for batch / transaction accounting
purposes (Section 6 - Program Codes 030 to 037).
All of the batch delivery parameters must be preset before a batch delivery can begin. A transaction
must share all of these parameters for all associated batch deliveries. Therefore, a transaction is
restricted to one or more batch deliveries of a single product or a single blend of components which
have preselected additive injection parameters. A transaction cannot include multiple recipes, or
various additive injection combinations.
4-2
______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.1
Physical Configuration
The display panel, status indicators, and keypad that are mounted in the operator control panel
provide operator interface with the instrument.
Desired functions are controlled via command entries at the keypad in response to displayed data and
prompt messages.
4.1.1
Displays and Controls
A LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel and three (red, green, yellow) LED (Light Emitting
Diode) status indicators are provided.
4.1.1.1
LED Status Indicators
The three LED status indicators are visible through the vertical window located to the right of the
LCD display panel. During normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 in the Manual mode (not
connected to a terminal automation system) the yellow indicator is OFF (manual operating mode).
The green indicator is ON if power is applied to TB2 terminal 1 on the power supply board. This
power usually comes from the permissive power circuit and is not present unless the safety circuits
are enabled. The yellow and red LEDs are pulsed on/off for one second on power-up/reset of the
DanLoad 6000.
The indicators provide the following status information.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

LED
Status
AUTO/MANUAL
(yellow)
OFF
ON
Function
The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Manual mode (program code 025
Operating mode). (Note: Local operation is identical in either of these two
modes.)
The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Auto mode (linked to a host computer
and operating as a slave unit) (program code 025 Operating mode).
FLASHING
#
(Two short pulses every two seconds) Case internal temperature is

too high or the keypad/display is disconnected or power is removed
from the keypad/display.
(One short pulse every two seconds) The condition that cased the
alarm has returned to normal state. The DanLoad 6000 should be
powered-up or reset to continue using the keypad/display.
(Rapid flashing) Power failure or low power condition.
PERMISSIVE POWER
(green)
ON
The permissive power circuit is closed (normal state when a batch delivery
is in progress). The function of the green LED indicator is dependent on the
state of the permissive circuit, located on the power supply module, and is
not programmable.
OFF
ALARM STATUS
(red)
ON
OFF
The permissive power circuit is open. This indicates an abnormal state which
is due to permissive power failure or failure of one or more permissive
circuits wired in series (wired AND) with the permissive power source (the
function of the green LED indicator is dependent on the state of the
permissive circuit and is not programmable).
A primary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on alarm action).
All alarms are inactive (normal state).
FLASHING
4-4
A secondary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on

alarm action).
______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.1.1.2
LCD Alpha-numeric / Graphic Data Display
The LCD data display has a back-lighting feature for ease of reading in low ambient light conditions.
The intensity of the back-lighting is controlled by the intensity level of ambient light (program
codes 355 to 360).
Data is displayed in up to three basic formats during normal batch delivery setup and delivery
operations. These three display formats are:
#
Recipe Selection Display

This display is presented to the user / operator if more than one recipe has been defined. If
only one recipe has been defined, that recipe is selected automatically and the Recipe
Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on recipe selection and an
example of this display are provided below in this section.
Additive Selection Display

This display is presented to the user / operator if one or more additives have been defined and
the additive prompt option, program code 136 Selection method set to Prompt. In the case
where additives have been defined and made available, program code 143 / 148 / 153 / 158
/ 163 / 168 Available set to Yes, injection of all additives is always turned off and each
additive must be manually enabled via operator interaction. If no additives have been
defined, the Additive Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on
additive injection selection and enabling and an example of this display are provided below
in this section.
Loading Display
This display is always presented to the user / operator to provide data feedback during
definition of a batch delivery operation and during delivery of the batch or group of batches
(transaction). Information on batch loading and an example of this display are provided
below in this section.
Dynamic Data Display

This display can be manually selected when the loading display is active. This data is
particularly useful during batch loading and meter proving.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 5
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.1.1.3
Keypad
The numeric / function keypad provides the method for the user / operator to select recipes and
additives, enter the desired preset quantity, and control batch deliveries. Some key functions are
only applicable to setup of the DanLoad 6000 while in the Program Mode. These special functions
are not used in normal batch delivery operations and therefore are not covered in this section. The
keypad layout is indicated in Figure 4 - 1.
Keypad Layout
Figure 4 - 1
Note
The Weights and Measures switch is the lockable and sealable pushbutton switch located in
the upper left corner of the keypad.
4-6
______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Key
Function
0 thru 9
numeric digits for data entry
ENTER
accept the manually entered value and continue
CLEAR
reject the manually entered value and continue
SELECT
toggle the Off / On option for each defined

additive
scroll down, move the select box to the next item

in the Recipes Selection Display or the Additive
Selection Display
scroll up, move the select box to the previous

item in the Recipes Selection Display or the
START
initiate the batch loading operation after batch

setup data has been entered
STOP/PRINT
stop the batch loading operation and print batch

and / or transaction report, if enabled
program
access to the Program Mode for modification of

non-restricted program codes and system data
W&M
the Weights and Measures security switch

Key Functions (Batch Delivery)
Figure 4 - 2
Key functions applicable to batch delivery operations are listed in Figure 4 - 2. The description of
the batch delivery procedure in Section 4.2 contains in-context information of the function of the
various keys. The program key and the Weights and Measures switch are not used during normal
batch deliveries. However, the user / operator should be familiar with the functions of the program
key and Weights and Measures switch.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 7
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Program key
The program key is used, while operating in the Loading Mode and no batch delivery is in
progress, to access the Program Mode. This action is accomplished by pressing the ALT
key and while maintaining the ALT key depressed, simultaneously press the ENTER /
program key. The Enter passcode _________ prompt is displayed on the message line at
this time. The response is for the user / operator to enter their predefined passcode (one to
nine digits). If a passcode is not entered within thirty seconds or if an invalid passcode is
entered, the message Invalid passcode is displayed on the message line. Press the CLEAR
key to re-display the normal loading prompt, Enter preset quantity. Section 3 - Setup and
Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contain information on operation of the Program
Mode.
Weights and Measures security switch

Several parameters, accessible as program codes in the Program Mode, have direct effect
on the validity and accuracy of the batch quantity calculations. These parameters were
specified during the setup procedure to have Weights and Measures attributes. Parameters
with the Weights and Measures attributes set have three levels of protection to restrict
modification of their values or options settings. A valid user passcode must be entered, the
user must have supervisor privilege, and the Weights and Measures switch must be open
(in the extended position). If the drift pin through the spring loaded switch actuator is
visible, the switch is open. During normal operation, this switch should be closed and wire
sealed in the closed position.
Additional information on the Program Mode and the function of the Weights and Measures switch
is located in Section 3 - Setup and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.
4-8
______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.2
Batch Delivery Procedure
This sub-section contains a description of normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 during batch data
entry, batch delivery, and termination of a batch delivery. The description covers operation of the
DanLoad 6000 in either the Stand-alone mode or the Manual mode. Operation in both of these
modes is identical from the user / operator viewpoint. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 as a slave
device to a terminal automation system is installation dependent and is covered in the DanLoad 6000
Communications Specification, Part Number 9-6000-674.
It is assumed at this point that the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle state, that is no batch delivery is in
progress and no transaction is open. If two or more recipes have been setup, the Recipe Selection
Display is displayed at the start of the transaction. If only one recipe has been setup, the single
recipe is assumed to the active recipe and the Recipe Selection Display is not shown. When a recipe
is selected, the availability of each recipe component is checked. The 068 / 071 / 074 / 077
Available parameter for all recipe components, located in the Component parameters group, must
be set to Yes. In the case of sequential blending, the sum of the selected component percentages
specified by program code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load parameter of the recipe, must be 100.
In the case of in-line blending, the sum of the percentages of all four components in the recipe must
be 100. An example of the Recipe Selection Display is provided below.
Recipes mm/dd/yy
Regular Gasoline
Premium Gasoline
Diesel
Kerosene
hh:mm
Recipe Selection Display (Typical)

Figure 4 - 3
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

To select the product (recipe) for delivery from the Recipe Selection Display by using the 9 or 8
key to position the select box over the desired product (recipe), then press the ENTER key.
If one or more additives have been setup and program code 136 Selection method is set to Prompt,
the Additive Selection Display is presented to the user / operator for selective enabling of each
additive. The transaction is authorized after the recipe and additive(s) are selected. However, the
transaction does not start until the START key is pressed to initiate the first batch.
While operating in the Automatic mode, additive injection is controlled by the terminal automation
system. While operating in the Stand-alone mode or the Manual mode, additive injection is
dependent on the option selected for program code 136 Selection method and related factors
described below.
#
136 Selection method = External (default selection) All configured additives are injected
if an external enable contact closure is closed.
136 Selection method = Prompt The Additive Selection Display is presented to the operator
for manual selection of each additive before the start of each transaction. (Note: In AUTO
mode, at least one of the additive delivery enable program codes 143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163
/ 168 Available, must be set to yes to enable presentation of the Additive Selection Display.)
136 Selection method = Inputs Any configured additive is injected if the corresponding
external enable contact closure (program code 382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394 / 397 Selection
input) for that particular additive is closed.
136 Selection method = Recipe Additive 1 to 6 is selected automatically for the

corresponding recipe 1 to 6. The additive n's ratio output (if configured) is cycled when the
corresponding recipe number is being delivered.
4 - 10 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

The selected recipe is indicated in the top line of the Additive Selection Display. An example of the
Additive Selection Display is illustrated below.
Premium Gasoline
Additive #1
Additive #2
Additive #3
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm
Off
Off
Off
Use arrow keys and SELECT

Figure 4 - 4
To select the additive from the Additive Selection Display use the 9 or 8 keys to position the select
box over the desired additive, then press the SELECT key to toggle the option from Off to On (or
from On to Off if an entry error is made). Press the ENTER key after all desired (zero to six)
additives have been enabled for injection into the delivered stream.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 11
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The Loading Display is presented to the user / operator at this time. The Loading Display allows
the user / operator to enter the preset quantity to be delivered and to monitor the delivery of the batch
and transaction. An illustration of the Loading Display is provided below.
Premium Gasoline
Loaded
mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Preset
Remaining
Transaction total
Enter preset volume
0%
+)))),
0 Gal
0 Gal
0 Gal
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
.))))-
Loading Display
Figure 4 - 5
The Loading Display, Figure 4 - 5, illustrates several alpha-numeric and numeric fields related to
batch deliveries and a graphic representation of the batch delivery receiving tank. The fields
contained in the Loading Display are described below.
#
Recipe name (Premium Gasoline) field contains the name of the current recipe manually
selected by the operator or automatically selected if only one recipe is defined. In the
example, this field indicates Premium Gasoline which was defined as the recipe name in
program code 481 / ... / 655 Recipe name parameter located in the Recipes parameters group
and selected with the Recipe Selection Display.
Date and time (mm/dd/yy hh:mm) fields contain the current date and time. The format of
the date is specified by program code 038 Date format and program code 039 Date
separator program codes. The time is always indicated in the format hh:mm in the range of
00:00 to 23:59. The date and time entries are adjusted via the Program Mode Menu > Set
date and time selection. See Section 3 - Setup for date and time modification instructions.
4 - 12 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
Loaded field contains the batch quantity of the delivered product. The value in this field is
incremented in quantity units until either the preset quantity is reached or the delivery is
suspended or terminated.
Preset field contains the batch quantity to deliver which is manually entered by the user /
operator in response to the Enter preset quantity prompt shown on the message line of the
display panel.
Remaining field contains the batch quantity that has not yet been delivered during a batch
delivery. (Preset quantity minus loaded quantity equals remaining quantity)
Transaction total field contains the total accumulated quantity for the delivery transaction.
A delivery transaction can consist of one batch delivery or multiple batch deliveries.
Product units mnemonic (Gal) field contains the engineering units label used in the display
panel and in reports. The mnemonic is entered by program code 218 Product units
mnemonic. Although the default entry is Gal, any six-character label may be entered. Note
that this selection is a display label only and does not affect the quantity unit scaling of the
flow calculations. See Section 6 - Program Code Definitions for additional information.
Bar graph percentage display is the rectangle displayed on the right side of the display panel.
This display is a bar graph representation of the quantity percentage loaded to the receiving
tank. As the Loaded quantity is incremented and the Remaining quantity is decremented,
the bar graph percentage is proportionately shaded in black. The black shading represents
the Loaded quantity and the unshaded portion represents the Remaining quantity. The
number located at the top of the tank indicates the percentage of the Preset quantity that has
been Loaded. The normal range of this number is 0% to 100%. However, percentages
greater than 100 percent are indicated for a delivery quantity in excess of 100 percent of the
preset quantity.
Message line is the bottom line of the display panel and is used to display various status
messages to the user / operator. The content and meaning of the messages are explained
below in the Controlling the Batch Delivery section.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 13
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
4.2.1
Component #
n/n (not shown) is displayed below the Loaded field only if more than
one component has been defined for delivery (sequential blending). This field contains the
following information.
#
Component #
Component identification, as shown or the alpha-numeric

Component ID assigned in the Component parameters group,
program codes 065 to 077.
n/n
The sequence number of the component / total number of

components in the recipe, obtained from program code 486
/ ... / 660 Sequence to load and recipe definition located in the
Recipes group, program codes 480 to 661.
Controlling the Batch Delivery
If a data item prompt or prompts were defined during the setup procedure the prompts will be
displayed during batch delivery setup. Data item prompts accept user / operator numeric entries of
up to five eight-digit numeric values that are saved in transaction storage memory or printed in data
log in manual or stand-alone modes. In auto mode, data items are communicated to a terminal
automation system for transaction accounting purposes. Data item entries are not used internally by
the DanLoad 6000. Data item prompts are messages that are presented on the message line of the
display panel when the Loading Display is first shown. These prompt messages are defined during
setup with program codes 030 to 036.
The general format of a data prompt message is:

Enter data item #1
________
However, note that the message shown above is a default entry which can be changed to a
meaningful prompt message during setup. Actual messages that could be displayed are: Enter order
number:, Enter driver number:, Enter trailer number:, etc. The response is to enter the desired
number, from one to eight digits and then press the ENTER key. If program code 036 Prompt
time-out (s) has been defined, and no entry is made within the time-out time period, the Recipe
Selection Display will be redisplayed to allow restarting the batch delivery setup procedure. If an
error is made during the numeric entry, press the CLEAR key and reenter the number. If an invalid
number is entered and accepted, press the STOP/PRINT key to terminate and re-start the
transaction. If an entry is not required, press the ENTER key to continue. After all one to five data
items have either been entered or bypassed, the Loading Display as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the
Enter preset quantity prompt is presented to the user / operator.
4 - 14 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

If data item entries have not been defined in the setup procedure, the Loading Display is presented
as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the Enter preset quantity prompt displayed.
The quantity to deliver is entered with the numeric keypad. If an entry error is made, press the
CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again. If the entry is correct, press the ENTER key to
accept the entry and continue. If the selected recipe component percentages and components
specified by program code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load program code do not equal 100 percent,
the message Invalid recipe (percentages) is displayed on the message line at this time. This setup
error condition can be corrected by selecting the Program Mode > Setup Menu > Recipes program
codes and revising either the percentages of the individual components specified by the loading
sequence and / or the loading sequence program code. If the entered value is less than the value of
program code 079 Minimum preset qty, the message Invalid entry - less than minimum is displayed
on the message line of the display panel. Press the CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again.
If the entered value is greater that the value of program code 078 Maximum preset qty, the message
Invalid entry - more than maximum is displayed on the message line of the display panel. Press the
CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again.
If the manual entry passes the high and low preset quantity validation checks, the Preset and
Remaining field values are set to the entered value, the Delivered value is set to zero, and the
message Press START when ready or STOP to cancel is displayed on the message line of the display
panel. If the STOP/PRINT key is pressed at this time, the batch delivery that is setup is aborted.
The message Please wait is displayed on the message line of the display panel and then the Recipe
Selection Display is re-displayed to allow reentry of a new batch delivery definition. Any open
transaction is also terminated by this action.
The green LED ON indicates that the environment is safe for the loading operation. If all permissive
circuits are not in the safe state, the corresponding alarm message (Connect safety circuit, etc.) is
displayed.
The following message sequence is displayed on the message line of the display panel during a
normal batch delivery operation.
#
Open block valve - press ENTER

This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)
(manual sequential blender).
Opening block valve

The block valve for the component is being opened.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 15
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Line pack delay

The pump for the component is running and the loading line is being packed.
Ramping up to high flow rate

The flow control valve or valves are opening in stages to increase the flow rate to the
maximum predefined flow rate.
Load in progress
The batch delivery is in progress in a normal manner.
Ramping down to low flow rate

The flow control valve or valves are closing in stages to decrease the flow rate to the
predefined low flow rate.
Shutting valve
All open flow control valves are closed. Block valves are closed if the unit is not a manual
sequential blender.
Close block valve - press ENTER

This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)
(manual sequential blender).
The following tasks are performed during the batch delivery operation.
#
The display panel shows the preset quantity, the delivered quantity (incrementing), the
transaction quantity (incrementing), and the remaining quantity (decrementing). These
accumulators indicate either gross or standard quantities dependent on the setup parameters.
Up to four delivery flow rates can be defined for each flow meter / flow control valve
combination. The DanLoad 6000 always attempts to deliver the product at the maximum
defined flow rate except during low flow startup and shutdown times. The rate of flow is
controlled automatically without interaction with the user / operator. If the highest defined
flow rate cannot be maintained for some reason, the DanLoad 6000 will set the flow rate at
the next highest maintainable flow rate, which is selected in the setup, and periodically
attempt to increase the flow rate to the maximum defined flow rate.
4 - 16 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
Up to six additives can be injected into the delivered batch. The ratio of the quantity of each
additive to the delivered batch quantity is automatically controlled.
All permissive inputs are monitored continuously for abnormal conditions. An open
permissive circuit will cause the green LED indicator to turn OFF, indicating no permissive
power, cause an alarm message to appear on the message line of the display panel and may
suspend the batch delivery, depending on the defined control parameters.
All process variables are monitored continuously and compared to limit setpoints. Abnormal
process conditions will cause an alarm and the corresponding message to appear on the
message line of the display panel and may suspend the batch delivery, depending on the
defined control parameters.
Real-time process input data and calculated process data, such as real-time flow rates,
average temperatures, etc., can be monitored by the Dynamic Data Display window which
is displayed in the center area of the Loading Display. The SELECT key is pressed to
activate the Dynamic Data Display window. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to change
display pages (one to four display pages, with four data items in each display page - for a
total of up to sixteen different items, can be predefined). The CLEAR key removes the
Dynamic Data Display window and re-displays the standard Loading Display.
The batch delivery can be temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key. The
batch delivery can be restarted if the quantity remaining to deliver is greater than the
minimum preset quantity and all permissive circuits are closed, indicating that the system
is safe and ready for batch delivery.
If a power failure occurs during a batch delivery operation, the DanLoad 6000 saves the date
and time of the power failure in non-volatile memory and indicates this in a message on the
first display presented when power is restored to the instrument.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 17
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
The DanLoad 6000 ramps down to the low flow rate (or stop rate for an in-line blending
application) at a configurable quantity from the end of a batch. The valves are finally
commanded to close (fully), i.e. the final trip point is reached, based on the average value
of the five most recently taken valve closure pulse samples for the component/valve
combination. A valve closure pulse sample is the number of pulses between commanding
the valve to close (deenergizing the valve solenoids) and the flow rate dropping to zero (zero
flow rate being defined as 2.5 seconds without a single pulse being recorded). If the batch
terminates normally, i.e. flow is stable at the low flow rate at the final trip point and there is
no alarm (such as unable to close valve), a new valve closure pulse sample is taken and a
new average is computed to be used for the next batch. NOTE: If the low flow stop quantity
is too small it may not be possible for the flow rate to stabilize at the low flow rate, i.e.
within the deadband, prior to reaching the final trip point, in which case the flow control
valve closure sample for that batch will not be used. NOTE 2: The valve closure pulse
samples are stored in non-volatile (battery-backed) memory. NOTE 3: The valve closure
number of pulses depends on line pressure (particularly for hydraulically operated flow
control valves, which close more slowly when line pressure is low) and the repeatability of
the low flow rate (particularly with two-stage flow control valves).
When the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle / ready state, the Loading Display is presented to the
user / operator with the prompt Enter preset quantity. The previously delivered quantity is
indicated in the Loaded field and the Remaining field indicates 0. The Loading Display
remains in this state until the user / operator initiates a new batch delivery (part of the open
transaction) by entering the quantity to be delivered. Or the open transaction is closed by
pressing the STOP/PRINT key without a batch delivery in progress.
Each delivered batch quantity total will be combined in the transaction delivered total until
the STOP/PRINT key is pressed when a delivery is not in progress.
4 - 18 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.3
Additive Injection
Additives can be automatically injected into the delivered product or component blend. The additive
volume in relation to the delivered product volume is usually very small, typically less than four
percent of the delivered quantity. The basic features of the additive injection operations are listed
below.
#
Directly control the injection of one to six additives (or no additive). Additive injection is
quantity based and determined by the configured ratio, program code 140 / 145 / 150 / 155
/ 160 / 165 Ratio qty, of the preset batch quantity and the quantity of additive injected,
which is controlled by program code 139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Additive control
meters. The quantity of additive to inject is reset at the start of each batch delivery operation.
Therefore, additive injection is based on batch quantity and not transaction quantity.
However, the same additive or additives selection applies to all batches that are part of a
transaction.
Allow one additive to be selected automatically based on the selected recipe number 1 to 6.
Delivery of recipe 1 to 6 activates injection of the corresponding additive, 1 to 6. Different
injection methods (additive injector types) for each logical additive are also permitted.
Allow additives to be selected from the terminal automation system and / or a discrete
selection input for each additive and manual selection with the keypad while viewing the
Additive Selection Display.
Provide multiple injection rates (concentrations) per additive via the Multi Rate additive
selection method.
(Option) Accumulate and / or verify the quantity totals with data logging of the injected
additives.
(Option) Deliver a clean line quantity, without additive injection, at the end of each loading
operation. Additive injection ratio is maintained correctly with or without clean line loading
implemented.
(Option) Inhibit additive injection for part of a batch load.
The DanLoad 6000 can be configured to provide either an AC or DC control output to selfcontrolled or automatic additive injection systems that require a one-to-one drive signal. In
addition, either an AC or DC status input (default Safety circuit #4) can detect an alarm
condition from the additive injector.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 19
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.4
Data Logging
This sub-section contains information on the data logging and reporting capabilities of a DanLoad
6000 equipped with an optional DUART board. The data logging feature allows the DanLoad 6000
to generate an audit trail for documentation of operation of the loading system. The function
provides a cost effective manual backup documentation system for use if the terminal automation
system fails.
The program codes listed below, with the exception of program codes 709 and 710, are used to
enable or disable automatic logging of the corresponding data. Program code 709 is used to enable
or disable printing of data log sequence numbers on each data log. The sequence numbers are printer
sequential. If multiple printers are attached to the DanLoad 6000, sequence numbering for each
printer is independent.
Program Code
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
Log Function
Batch summary
Transaction summary
Alarm log
Power fail log
program mode entry/exit
W&M switch opened/closed
Program value change log
Configuration summary
Crash memory summary
Totalizers
Transaction ticket
Transaction ticket reprint
Thruput
Sequence numbers
Cutoff hour
Code operated switch attributes are found in Section 6.21.

Data logging usually involves sending the enabled reports / data to a common 80-column dot matrix
printer. However, data logs can be sent to a personal computer or any other data logging device that
can handle serial input ASCII data with a CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) at the end of each
line of data.
Data is sent from the DanLoad 6000 to the printer or logging device as each event occurs. This
method of operation is called event logging. Logs are not stored in the DanLoad 6000. However,
if the DanLoad 6000 detects that the printer or logging device is off-line, logs are held in memory
until either the printer / logging device becomes on-line, then the stored logs are printed or the log
memory is full. The action taken if the data logging memory becomes full is specified by program
code 235 Data logging alarm action.
4 - 20 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Several DanLoad 6000's can share one data printer or logging device. Printer sharing requires a
special device that accepts the serial data link from each DanLoad 6000 and provides one serial data
link to the printer.
The text language of the data logs is specified by program code 028 Language.
4.4.1
Example Data Logs
An example of each type of data log associated with normal batch deliveries and transactions is
provided below. The Crash memory summary log is described in Section 4.5 - Fault Analysis /
Correction. A brief description of the contents of each field follows the data log example.
Batch Summary
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
9999 <- Data log sequence number (program code 709)
Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 -- Batch Summary
Transaction 9999 Side 9 Recipe #1 IDXXXX
<-- transaction data
Enter data item #1
99999999
ENTER ORDER NUMBER
99999999
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 99999999
Batch 9999 Preset 999999
Started XXXXXXXX 99:99:99
Gross
Gal
Component #1 IDX 999999
Additive
Additive
Additive
Additive
Additive
Additive
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Gross 999999 Std 999999

<-- batch data
Stopped XXXXXXXX 99:99:99
Std
Temp
Dens
Pres
Gal
Deg C lb/ft3
psi <-- from PC's 029, 427, 428, 429
999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99 <-- Component data
999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99
999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99
999999 -999.9 9999.9 9999.99
XXX <- Additive units per program code 44.

9999999.99
9999999.99
9999999.99
9999999.99
9999999.99
9999999.99 <- Scale depends on additive units (program code 44).
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 21
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

A batch summary is generated automatically at the end of each batch delivery or when power is
restored after a power outage occurred during a batch delivery. The fields contained in the Batch
Summary are described below.
#
Unit
Transaction A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each

transaction.
Side
The loading island side where the delivery was made.
Recipe ##
The name of the recipe that controlled the delivery.
<Enter data item #1>

Up the five data prompts and corresponding manually entered numeric data.
The number of lines printed is dependent on the number of data prompts
defined by program code 030 Number of data item prompts. Data item
prompts are re-defined by the alpha-numeric entries for parameters 031 to
035 (03x Enter data item #x). The corresponding values, printed to the right
of the prompt messages, are the manual entries from the start of the batch
delivery.
Batch
The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optional
DUART board.
A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each

batch delivery, this row (record) also contains the gross quantity delivered
and the standard quantity delivered (sum of all components).
4 - 22 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
Preset
The preset quantity obtained from the batch data entry.
Gross
The accumulated gross quantity for the composite batch delivery.
Std
The accumulated standard quantity for the composite batch delivery.
Started
Date and time the delivery started.
Stopped
Date and time the delivery stopped.
Component #
One row (record) for each delivered component, with the following data
indicated:
Additive #
Gross quantity delivered of this component, the engineering units

label is obtained from program code 029 Product Units.
Standard quantity delivered of this component, the engineering units

label is obtained from program code 029 Product Units.
Average temperature of this component (negative values are

indicated), the engineering units label is obtained from program code
427 Temperature units.
Average density of this component, the engineering units label is

obtained from program code 428 Density units.
Average pressure of this component, the engineering units label is

obtained from program code 429 Pressure units.
The units and format in which additive volumes are display and printed.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 23
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Transaction Summary
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Transaction Summary
Transaction nnnn Side n Recipe ## aaaaaa Gross nnnnnn Std nnnnnn
Started mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Stopped mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
Enter data item #1
nnnnnnnn
Enter data item #2
nnnnnnnn
Enter data item #3
nnnnnnnn
Enter data item #4
nnnnnnnn
Enter data item #5
nnnnnnnn
Start
End
gross
gross
Meter 1 totalizer nnnnnnnnn
Start
End
std
std
nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn
nnnnnnnnn
A transaction summary is generated automatically at the end of each transaction consisting of one
or multiple batch deliveries or when power is restored after a power outage occurred while a
transaction is in progress. The fields contained in the Transaction Summary are described below.
#
Start gross / End gross

Start std / End std
The gross and standard quantitys are indicated for each active flow meter
(Meter m totalizer).
Alarm
Unit nnn
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss -- Alarm aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
An alarm log is generated automatically when an alarm condition is detected for alarms which have
the alarm action attribute set to Primary or Secondary. The fields contained in the Alarm log are
described below.
#
Unit
The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings o the optional
DUART board.
<time>
Date and time that the alarm condition was detected.
<message>
Alarm message, messages are indicated in Section 4.5.
4 - 24 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Power Failure Date and Time
Unit nnn
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss -- Power failed mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss
A power failure log is generated automatically when power is restored to the DanLoad 6000. The
fields contained in the Power failure log are described below.
#
Unit
DUART board.
<time>
The current date and time and the date and time that power was removed
from the DanLoad 6000.
Program Mode Entry and Exit

Unit nnn
Unit nnn
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa entered program mode

hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa exited program mode
A program mode entry / exit log is generated automatically whenever the program mode is entered
or exited. The fields contained in the program mode entry/exit log are described below.
#
Unit
DUART board.
<time>
Date and time of the event.
User
The user / operator name obtained from program code 002 / ... / 023 User ID
parameter entry.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 25
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Weights and Measures Switch
Unit nnn
Unit nnn
mm/dd/yy
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch opened

hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch closed
A weights and measures switch log is generated automatically whenever the state of the weights and
measures switch, located on the operator control panel, is changed. The fields contained in the
Weights and measures switch log are described below.
#
Unit
DUART board.
<time>
<message>
The message Weights and measures switch opened or

Weights and measures switch closed.
Program Code Value Changed

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Program Code Value Changed
User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Value 480 Number of recipes
A program code value changed log is generated automatically whenever a program code value is
changed for a program code which has the Data logging attribute set to Yes. (Note: This attribute
defaults to Yes for all program codes during initial startup (cold start). The fields contained in the
program code value changed log are described below.
#
Unit
DUART board.
<time>
User
The user / operator name obtained from program code 002 / ... / 023 User ID
parameter entry.
Value
The program code number and name followed by the current program code
value.
4 - 26 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Totalizers
The totalizers data log is generated automatically every 24 hours per the "cutoff hour"
(program code 710) or on demand (for the last cutoff) from the program mode menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
9999 <- Data log sequence number.
Unit 999 XXXXXXXX 99:99:99
-- Totalizers XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 <- Langauge dependent text and cutoff date and time.
Gross
Std <- Language dependent text.
XXX
XXX <- Configured units mnemonic.
XXXXX
999999999 999999999 <- Configured meter ID and gross and std totalizers.
XXXXX
999999999 999999999
XXXXX
999999999 999999999
XXXXX
999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # meters (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Additive
Additive
Additive
Additive
Additive
Additive
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
999999999
999999999
999999999
999999999
999999999 <- Configured component ID and gross and std totalizers.

999999999
999999999
999999999 <- Depending on configured # components (max. 4).
999999999 999999999 <- Configured recipe ID and gross and std totalizers.
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # recipes (max. 30).
XXX <- Configured additive units mnemonic.
99999.9999 <- Language-dependent text and totalizer (format depends on additive units).
99999.9999
99999.9999
99999.9999
99999.9999
99999.9999 <- Depending on configured # additives (max. 6).
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 27
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Thruput
The thruput data log is generated automatically every 24 hours per the "cutoff hour"
(program code 710) or on demand (for the last cutoff) from the program mode menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
9999 <- Data log sequence number.
-- Thruput XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 - XXXXXXXX 99:99:99 <- Language dependent text and start and end dates and times.
Gross
Std <- Language dependent text.
XXX
XXX <- Configured units mnemonic.
XXXXX
999999999 999999999 <- Configured meter ID and gross and std totalizers.
XXXXX
999999999 999999999
XXXXX
999999999 999999999
XXXXX
999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # meters (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
999999999
999999999
999999999
999999999
999999999 <- Configured component ID and gross and std totalizers.

999999999
999999999
999999999 <- Depending on configured # components (max. 4).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
999999999 999999999 <- Configured recipe ID and gross and std totalizers.
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999
999999999 999999999 <- Depending on configured # recipes (max. 30).
XXX <- Configured additive units mnemonic.
Additive #1
99999.9999 <- Language-dependent text and totalizer (format depends on additive units).
Additive #2
99999.9999
Additive #3
99999.9999
Additive #4
99999.9999
Additive #5
99999.9999
Additive #6
99999.9999 <- Depending on configured # additives (max. 6).
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 - 28 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Configuration Summary
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************** Security parameters
User 1
001 Passcode
*********
002 User ID
DanLoad 6000
003 Supervisor privilege
Yes
User 2
004 Passcode
*********
005 User ID
No
.
.
.
No

**************************************** Unit parameters
Unit parameters
025 Operating mode
Manual
026 Unit type
Seq. (auto)
027 Valve type
Std digital
.
.
.
etc.
etc.
etc.
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 29
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5
Alarm Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests
This sub-section contains information on the analysis and correction of common fault conditions that
can occur during batch delivery operations.
#
Alarm messages and causes of the alarm messages are described in Section 4.5.1. Additional
information on alarm parameters and other parameters in located in Section 6 - Program
Code Definitions.
Diagnostic tests, available in the Program Mode, are described in Section 4.5.2.
A Crash memory log is automatically generated, if enabled, if a processor memory error

is detected. Section 4.5.3 contains information on this error log.
Crash memory logs should be saved and the log occurrence reported to:
Daniel Measurement and Control
Daniel Measurement Services
Telephone:
(281) 897-2900
FAX:
(281) 897-2901
After-hours emergency answering service:
Electronics: (713) 468-4096

Automation: (713) 464-5715
General information on all alarm conditions and messages is provided on the following pages.
Additional information on alarms is provided in the Alarms group, program codes 220 to 279, and
the I/O Parameters group, program codes 280 to 379, in Section 6.
Note
Primary alarms are reset by logging-on with your passcode to activate the Program Mode.
Then use the 9 (down arrow) (depending on the firmware version) to select Alarm reset.
Press the Enter key to clear individual alarms. After alarms have been cleared, press EXIT
(ALT+CLEAR) to return to the Loading Mode.
Secondary alarms are reset automatically after the time period set by program code 220
Secondary alarm reset (secs) has elapsed.
4 - 30 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Alarm Messages
Flow rate too low meter #
Default
Range
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
100
0 to 99999
223 Low flow time (secs)
10
5 to 999
Notes:
#
In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3,

4).
The flow rate units for program code 222 Minimum flow rate are
determined by the corresponding program code 171 / 182 / 193 /
204 Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM, dLPM,
BPH, LBH, KGH).
This alarm is triggered by problems in the component pumping

circuit, flow control valve circuit, flow meter preamplifier, or
flow meter sensor.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 31
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Alarm Messages (continued)
Flow rate too high meter #
Default
Range
Primary
Off
Info
Primary
660
0 to 99999
226 High flow time (secs)
10
5 to 999
Notes:
#
In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3,

4).
The flow rate units for program code 225 Maximum flow rate are
determined by the corresponding program code 171 / 182 / 193 /
204 Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM, dLPM,
BPH).
This alarm is triggered by problems in the component pumping

circuit, flow control valve circuit, or flow meter circuit.
4 - 32 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Unable to close valve meter #
Default
Range
--- Overrun limit alarm action
Primary
<none>
2.0
0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
#
In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
The alarm action is internally set to Primary.
This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit.

program code 086 / 092 /098 / 104 Low flow stop qty too small, unstable
flow rate during low flow stop, K-factor to small (insufficient pulse rate
input for frequency calculation), flow control valve jammed OPEN by
debris or mechanical failure.
After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need to

deliver a minimum of three batches in order to determine the valve
closure time.
Valve closed early meter #
Default
Range
Off
Off
Primary
5.0
0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 33
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Timed-out - no flow detected meter #
Default
Range
230 No flow time-out alarm action
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
231 No flow time-out (secs)
1 to 99
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow meter circuit (bad

preamplifier or pulse input wiring), pump circuit, the component block
valve circuit, or the flow control valve circuit, failure of meter pulse board
or main processor board.
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter #
Default
Range
--- Unauthorized flow limit alarm action
Primary
<none>
232 Unauthorized flow limit qty
10
0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered by problems in the block valve or flow control valve circuit,
such as a mechanical failure (bad O-rings, etc.) of the valve or pulsation of the
product caused by multiple arms, valves, pumps in the same circuit in use at the same
time. The alarm is also triggered if either the normally closed or normally open stem
switches (stem switches 1 and 2, respectively) or both, are configured (program codes
294 and 295 for valve 1, etc.).
After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need to deliver a minimum
of three batches in order to determine the valve closure time.
See Section 3 and Section 6 for additional information.
4 - 34 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Pulse security error meter #
Default
Range
--- Pulse security alarm action
Primary
<none>
233 Error limit (levels B and C)
0 to 255
10000
0 to 65535
Notes:
#
The pulse security level B is determined by an electronic module installed on

the meter pulse input board. Reference British standard IP 252 or API
standard MPMS Chapter 5, Section 5 and program code descriptions in
Section 6.13 of this manual.
This alarm is triggered by pulse comparison errors between two pulse train
inputs from a single flow meter. Causes of errors are A / B input pulse trains
reversed, preamplifier failure, wiring failure.
Program code 233 Error limit (pulses) must be set to 0 (zero) to disable this
function if dual pulse security is not implemented.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 35
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Data logging memory full
Default
Range
Info
Info
Primary
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered when the data logging memory becomes full. This
condition is usually caused by the data logging printer being off-line, out
of paper, or otherwise not available. The data logging function is enabled
or disabled by the Data logging parameters.
Comm failure channel x
Default
Range
10
0 to 300
10
0 to 300
Note:
#
These program codes set the time-out in seconds for communication

channels A and B alarms. Zero (0) disables the alarm(s).
4 - 36 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Temperature failure meter #
Default
Range
238 Temperature failure alarm action
Primary
Off
Info
Primary
-40.0
-999.9 to
999.9
110.0
-999.9 to
999.9
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered by a failure in the RTD temperature input assigned to

the indicated flow meter. Temperature inputs are assigned by program codes
318 / 321 / 324 / 327 Meter x temp input. Some causes of this alarm are:
temperature of product out-of-range (can be caused by faulty product heater or
product remaining in heater too long a time), failure of RTD or failure of
wiring to RTD/
Fixed temperature values used in case of failure of the live temperature inputs
are set by program codes 434 / 437 / 440 / 443 Backup temperature. These
fixed temperature values are assigned to components, however, the DanLoad
6000 relates the current component flow to the current flow meter. The alarm
meter # indicates a specific RTD input.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 37
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Density failure component #
Default
Range
Primary
Info
Primary
9.9999
-9.9999 to
9.9999
9.9999
-9.9999 to
9.9999
Notes:
#
In the alarm message, # is the actual component number (1, 2, 3, 4).
This alarm is triggered by a failure in the density input assigned to the

indicated component.
Pressure failure meter #
Default
Range
--- Pressure failure alarm action
Primary
<none>
0.00
0.0 to
9999.99
0.00
0.0 to
9999.99
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered by a failure in the pressure input assigned to the

indicated flow meter. Possible causes include; input pressure out of range, the
density or temperature input to the CPL option is out of range, a pinch back
method other than Off has been configured and the required input is not
configured, or the pinch back method will not allow the flow control valve to
be properly closed due to insufficient pressure when flowing at the low flow
rate.
4 - 38 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Additive # failure
Default
Range
--- Additive error alarm action
Primary
<none>
1 to 99
0 to 9999
271 Unauthorized additive flow volume
0.0000
0.0000 to
99999.9999
272 Prod/add -%
0 to 99
273
0 to 99
1 to 99
Prod/add +%

Notes:
For the Mech and Handshake injection methods this is the maximum number of pulses by
which the actual feedback pulse count can differ from the ideal feedback pulse count before an
additive failure alarm is raised. The ideal feedback pulse count is based on the additive
feedback count (program code 247), or is 1 (internal default, independent of configuration) for
the Handshake injection method.
Program code 247 Additive feedback count is the expected number of feedback pulses per
additive ratio cycle for the Mech additive injection method, e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3
confirmation pulse, 2 for Hydrolec injector. The number of seconds within which the
additive feedback input must go on and off again after the additive ratio output has been
energized for the Handshake additive injection method, e.g. 5 (per Mapco).
Program code 278 Additive per 1000 error limit is the number of ratio quantities worth of
additive by which the actual quantity of additive can differ from the ideal volume of additive at
any point in a batch before the DanLoad 6000 checks for a low additive or high additive
condition (program codes 272 and 273).
Each additive failure alarm has a single character alphanumeric reason code which can be
accessed as a data code value, e.g. in the dynamic data display or via an automation system.
Data code 233 is the additive failure reason code for additive 1, etc. The possible additive
failure reason codes are as follows:
M
F
Multiple additives authorized in multi-stream injection mode.

Feedback input count error for Mech or Handshake injection method (program
codes 246 and 247).
T
Ratio output timer expired for Handshake injection method (program code 247).
U
Unauthorized additive flow for Meter and Control injection methods (program
code 271).
L
Low additive (or no additive) based on configured additive per 1000 (program codes
272 and 278).
H
High additive based on configured additive per 1000 (program codes 273 and 278).
The additive failure reason codes are cleared (reset) when a batch is started or restarted.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 39
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Component X block valve not closed
Default
Range
--- Block valve close fail alarm action
Primary
<none>
10
0 to 99
Notes:
#
In the alarm message, X is the actual component number (1, 2, 3, 4).
This alarm is triggered by a failure in the corresponding block valve control circuit
indicating that the block valve has not closed after the component has been
deselected. The position of the block valve is sensed by program code 401 / 403 /
405 / 407 Block value input, corresponding to one of four component block valves.
Component block valves are controlled by program codes 400 / 402 / 404 / 406
Block valve output.
4 - 40 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Ground detector open
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
1 to 32
characters
Notes:
#
General permissive input, message specified by program code 250 # 1 Ground

detector open can be modified.
This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assigned
to program code 345 Safety circuit 1.
Overspill detector open
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
1 to 32
characters
Notes:
#
General permissive input, message specified by program code 252 #2

Overspill detector open can be modified.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 41
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Permissive power failure
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
1 to 32
characters
Notes:
#
General permissive input, message specified by program code 254 #3

Permissive power failure can be modified.
Additive injection failure
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
1 to 32
characters
Notes:
#
General permissive input, message specified by program code 256 #4 Additive

injection failure can be modified.
This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assigned to
program code 348 Safety circuit 4.
4 - 42 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Arm down side 1
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
1 to 32
characters
265 Circuit 5 type
0 to 2
Notes:
#
Side assignable permissive input, message specified by program code 258 #5

Arm down side 1 can be modified.
to program code 349 Safety circuit 5. The side detect function is controlled by
program code 265 Circuit 5 type which senses the swing arm side based on the
option selection of program code 312 Side detect method.
The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependent on

either side.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 43
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Arm down side 2
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
1 to 32
characters
266 Circuit 6 type
0 to 2
Notes:
#

Arm down side 2 can be modified.

either side.
4 - 44 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Walkway down side 1
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
Up to 32
characters
267 Circuit 7 type
0 to 2
Notes:
#

Walkway down side 1 can be modified.

either side.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 45
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.1
Walkway down side 2
Default
Range
Secondary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
7
message
Up to 32
characters
268 Circuit 8 type
0 to 2
Notes:
#

Walkway down side 2 can be modified.

either side.
Memory check failed

The DanLoad 6000 continuously calculates and verifies CRC-16 checksums on critical
blocks of memory containing data such as totalizers, calibration factors and flow rates
and temperature calculation parameters. If a checksum does not verify correctly, the
DanLoad 6000 raises a Memory check failed primary alarm; this problem should be
reported to Daniel Customer Service. Additionally, there are two situations in when a
Memory check failed alarm is raised, both of which are harmless and can be
ignored:
1.
Flow meter pulses entering the unit during power-up or reset. Operator action:
Reset the alarm and continue to use the unit.
2.
Batch started after having modified calibraton factors or flow rates via
automation system communications without having reset the unit. Operator
action: Reset the alarm, power-up/reset the unit and continue to use the unit.
4 - 46 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Storage memory full
Default
Range
274 Storage alarm action
Off
Off
Primary
Note:
#
A storage alarm (Storage memory full) is raised when enabled (Primary)

and starting a new transaction or batch in the manual operating mode would
overwrite an old transaction or batch (in transaction storage memory) also
loaded in the manual operating mode.
Power failure
Default
Range
275 Power failure alarm action
Off
Off
Primary
Note:
#
A power fail alarm (Power failure) is raised on power-up when the alarm is
enabled (Primary) and a power failure or crash occurred during a batch,
i.e. the DanLoad 6000 was reset during a batch. Following a power failure
during a batch, the batch preset quantity is available (Dynamic Data Display)
via data code 245, the batch gross and standard quantities via data codes 130
and 131, and the batch remaining quantity via data code 246.
Unable to ramp down
Default
Range
Primary
Off
Primary
277 Ramp down time (secs)
0 to 9999
Notes:
#
Program code 276 selects the response to an Unable to ramp down alarm
when the DanLoad 6000 cannot reduce the flow rate to a defined lower flow
rate within the time period specified by program code 277 sets the time limit
for attempt to ramp down flow rate before triggering an Unable to ramp down
alarm.
When Primary is selected (default) for program code 276, the ramp down
alarm function is enabled.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 47
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Calibration failure meter X
Default
Range
755 Calib fail alarm action
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary
Note:
#
This program code sets the calibration failure alarm action for calibration
monitoring. Selections include Off which disables the alarm, Info,
Secondary and Primary.
The alarm indicates that the flow meter may be out of calibration. Refer to
section 3.15 CALMON -Turbine Meter Calibration Monitoring for the
DanLoad 6000 Electronic Preset.
MPMC X failure
Default
Range
756 FPO
0-2
757 Number of blades
0-50
Notes:
The MPMC X failure is a primary alarm and is raised when the DanLoad 6000 has
been configured to use one or both of the MPMCs features, i.e. factored pulse
outputs or calibration monitoring, and a batch is started or restarted and the DanLoad
detects the failure of (or non-existence of) the required MPMC board on the indicated
meter pulse board X.
FPO is the factored pulse output of the smart 4-ch. Meter pulse board on which to
generate factored pulses according to the configured FPO basis (program code 752).
The number of magnetic blades (or buttons) on the meter is for calibration
monitoring purposes. Zero (0) disables calibration monitoring for the meter. Any
other value enables calibration monitoring for the meter. One (1) indicates that the
number of blades should be auto-detected by the MPMC prior to acquiring a
calibration sample. Zero (0) disables calibration monitoring for the meter.
4 - 48 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

4.5.1
Primary display failure

Secondary display failure
Default
Range
--- Display failure alarm action
Primary
<none>
Notes:
#
This alarm is triggered if the keypad/display has been disconnected or the

internal temperature of the keypad/display enclosure is too high. Power is
removed from the keypad/display and the upper (yellow) LCD indictor pulses
twice every two seconds. When the condition that caused the alarm no longer
exists, the upper (yellow) LED is pulsed once every two seconds. The DanLoad
6000 should be powered-up/reset to continue using the keypad/display.
Maximum batches on transaction
Default
Range
--- Maximum number of batches exceeded alarm action
Primary
<none>
Notes:
#
This message is displayed when an attempt is made to start a batch and the
maximum number of batches per transaction (which is configurable via program
code 047 Batches/Transaction) has already been loaded. The new batch is not
started.
Side not authorized
Default
Range
--- Unauthorized swing arm configuration alarm action
Primary
<none>
Notes:
#
This message is displayed when an attempt is made to start a batch on a new side
(swing arm configurations) when the transaction on the old side has not been
ended, e.g. by pressing the STOP key.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 49
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

4.5.2
Diagnostic Tests
RAM (random access memory) diagnostics are run continuously while power is applied to the
DanLoad 6000. The RAM diagnostic and several other diagnostics are described in this section.
Several of the diagnostic tests are designed for maintenance troubleshooting and have limited use
for operations personnel. However, the operations personnel should be aware of the reaction of the
instrument to some types of failures. These failure indications are described in this sub-section.
A group of diagnostic tests are accessible for manual execution via the Diagnostics selection in the
Program Mode Menu. Access to the Program Mode Menu is described in Section 4.1.1.3. When
the Diagnostics selection is activated, the Diagnostics Menu shown below in displayed.
Diagnostics Menu
Firmware versions
RAM tests
Keypad
Display
Inputs/Outputs
DUART
Pg 1 of 2
More 9
Diagnostics Menu
ARCNET
Crash analysis
Show memory
Print configuration
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
Pg 2 of 2
More 8
Diagnostic Menu
Figure 4 - 6
4 - 50 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

The following selections in the Diagnostics Menu are available.
#
Firmware Versions
The firmware versions of the program for the two CPU's and the message EPROM is
displayed. The power failure message indicating the date and time of the last power failure
is also displayed.
RAM tests
The passed / failed results of the RAM tests is displayed. If a RAM test fails at any time,
all discrete outputs are OPENED, causing all flow control valves and block valves to close
and all pumps to stop running. The cause of the failure must be corrected before the
DanLoad 6000 can be used. (Note: The contents of RAM are not modified by the diagnostic
tests.)
Keypad
A prompt message Press key to test ... is displayed. The name of any key pressed is
displayed beside the prompt message. Multiple keys can be pressed until the EXIT
(ALT+CLEAR) key is pressed to re-display the Diagnostics Menu.
Display
The display backlighting level is stepped at one second intervals through the indicated
numeric level range of 0 to 7. The display contrast level is stepped at one second intervals
through the indicated numeric level range of 0 to 15. The local display panel and if
connected, the remote display panel are checked. Both the backlighting and the contrast
levels are restored to their current settings on exit from the display. (Note: Contrast and
backlighting can be manually adjusted via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of the
Program Mode Menu.)
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 51
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Inputs/Outputs
The Input/Outputs diagnostic display indicated below is shown. This display is used to view
the current live values of the selected input or output point.
Inputs/Outputs
Meter input
RTD input
4-20 mA input
Discrete input
Discrete output
__
__
__
__
__
#pulses = nnnnn
A/D value = hhhh
A/D value = hhhh
state = n
state = n

Inputs / Outputs Diagnostic
Figure 4 - 7
The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to move the flashing underline cursor to the desired line.
The 0 to 9 numeric keys are used to enter any valid input or output number up to the
maximum number for that type of input or output. Press the ENTER key to continue. The
value of the selected input is displayed. The flashing cursor remains on the same line and
other inputs of the same type may be viewed. The input value corresponds to the selected
input point. The state of a control output can be changed by entering the control output
number, pressing the ENTER key, and then when the flashing cursor is positioned at the
state field, press either the 0 key (to turn the output OFF, or the 1 key to turn the output
ON, as applicable. The output may be repeatedly toggled at this time with the 0 key and the
1 key or may be left in the desired state by pressing the ENTER key with the desired state
displayed. (Note: #pulses is an accumulated pulse count, A/D value is a four-digit
hexadecimal number, state is 0 or 1 as described above.)
4 - 52 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
DUART
Serial ports COM1 and COM2 are tested under program control by running the two channels
in local loopback mode. The three-digit address with leading zeros (000 to 255), selected
by the DIP switch on the module is displayed. A nnn% errors result of the test for each
channel is displayed. (Note: Channel A = COM1, Channel B = COM2.)
The diagnostic tests are performed on the channels configured 'Not used'. Channel A is
tested first, then channel B is tested. If a channel is configured, the word 'BUSY' is
displayed and diagnostic tests are not performed. The diagnostic tests are described below.
Local loopback
The type SCN2681 DUART in the DanLoad 6000 is tested by the channel 'X'
mode register 2. The DanLoad 6000 transmits 256 characters (0 through
255) looped back to the receive circuit. A result of 129/256 indicates that
129 out of the 256 characters where transmitted and received properly. The
correct result is 256/256. If the DUART is not installed or failed completely,
the word 'ERROR' is displayed.
External loopback
A hardware loopback connector is connected to the RS-232 / RS-485 port.

The test function and results are identical as those of the local loopback test.
Ch-A (RS-485)
RX+
1
RX2
TX+
3
Ch-B (RS-232)
TX4
RX
5
CTS
6
TX
7
COM
10
.))))))))3)))))))))*
.)))))))))))))))))))-
Loopback Connector Pinout (Reference Drawing CE-12693)

baud rates
All eight possible baud rates (from lowest speed to highest speed) are setup
and tested. The following ten test characters are used: 00h, 01h, 02h, 04h,
08h, 10h, 20h, 40h, 80h, and FFh. The example pass/fail map PPPPPPPF
indicates that the lowest seven baud rates passed and the highest baud rate
failed.
data formats
Parity bits, stop bits, and data bits are setup and tested. The pass/fail map
indicates the results of the test. For example: PFP indicates that the parity
test passed, the stop bits test failed, and the data bits test passed.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 53
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Interrupts
The RxRDY (receive ready), FFULL (receive buffer full), and TxRDY
(transmit ready) interrupts are tested. The pass/fail map indicates the results
of the test. For example: FPF indicates that the RxRDY interrupt test failed,
the FFULL interrupt test passed, and the TxRDY interrupt test failed.
DUART 001
Local loopback
External loopback
baud rates
data formats
interrupts
Press ALT+CLEAR to
Ch. A
256/256
203/256
PPPPPPPF
PFP
PPP
exit
Ch. B
256/256
52/356
FFFFFFFF
PPF
P--
DUART Ports Diagnostic

Figure 4 - 8
LAN
The LAN port is tested under program control. The address (0 to 255), selected by the DIP
switch settings on the module is displayed. The current value in the read only Diagnostic
Status Register and the current value in the read/write Configuration Register are displayed.
The values are two-digit hexadecimal numbers. Note: The Arcnet/Lan port option is not
available on the DanLoad 6000.
ARCNET
Address = nnn
Diagnostic Status 0xhh
Configuration 0xhh

LAN Port Diagnostic
Figure 4 - 9
4 - 54 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
Crash analysis
A crash is an unrecoverable hardware, software or configuration error detected by the
program. The symptom of a crash is that the unit resets itself, i.e. the display goes dark
(briefly) as if the unit had been powered off and on again; if product is flowing when this
happens, a memory check failed alarm may be raised since the pulse count checksum
cannot be verified. If a crash occurs, the program saves crash information so that the cause
can be determined. Perform the following steps:
- Go into Diagnostics | Crash anaylsis in program mode and write down the four
columns of figures before the unit is powered-off again, since powering off the unit
may cause CPU-2 crash information to be overwritten. (The unit generates a CPU-2
crash error code FADE whenever it is powered-off.) NOTE: Press the CLEAR
key to zero the four columns of figures so that you can find out when a new crash
occurs.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Crash memory
CPU 1
CPU2
Stk ptr/prog ctr
Int mask/int mask 1
WSR/tsk pg
Error code/task adr
4793/2085
004c/0063
0000/0002
0000/e742
7e9d/821e
0043/00c9
000f/0005
fff7/83bc

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
- Select Diagnostics | Firmware versions in program mode and write down the three
firmware version numbers, e.g. v5.60. The crash analysis cannot be interpreted
without the firmware version numbers.
- Contact Daniel Customer Service or your local representative or expert with the
crash analysis and firmware version number information.
The crash analysis in the same format as the Crash memory summary log, Section 4.5.3, is
displayed. See the description of the Crash memory summary log for details.
A Crash memory summary log indicates an unrecoverable error detected by the control program.
This feature is a general purpose detector / logger for critical hardware and software error conditions.
The Crash memory summary log should be saved for use in main processor troubleshooting.
If program code 704 Crash memory summary is set On and the data printer is available, a Crash
memory summary log is printed by the logging printer. The example below indicates the format of
the log.
Operation _______________________________________________________________ 4 - 55
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Crash Memory Summary
Unit nnn
mm/dd/yy
hh:mm:ss -- Crash Memory Summary

CPU #
Stk ptr/prog ctr
47n3/2085
Int mask/int mask 1 004c/0063
WSR/task
0000/0002
Error code/task adr 0000/e742
The fields contained in the Crash memory summary log are described below.
#
CPU #
The # is either 1 (indicating CPU 1 problem) or 2 (indicating CPU 2

problem).
Unit
The unit address obtained from the setting of the address DIP switches on the
DUART board, range is 0 to 255.
<time>
Stk ptr/prog ctr

The hexadecimal values of the stack pointer and the program counter.
Int mask/int mask 1

The hexadecimal values of the interrupt mask and the interrupt mask 1.
WSR/task
Error code/task adr

The hexadecimal identifier of the critical error code / the address of the active
task.
Print configuration
The Window Select Register / multi-task task number.
The configuration summary data log (a report showing all program code values) can be
printed from the diagnostics menu in the manual operating mode. The data log must be
enabled (program code 703). The data log is quite big, and should typically only be printed
when the unit is not needed for a while and the data logging device is not busy.
#
Show memory
Data memory is displayed. The display shows the memory address with data in both
hexadecimal and ASCII formats.
4 - 56 ______________________________________________________________ Operation
Section 5
Flow Meter Proving
General
Tank Prover Method
Master Meter Method
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

This section contains information on flow meter proving using methods specified in API standards
and English measurement units. The general information applies to other standards and
measurement units as well. Meter proving is the procedure for determining a meter factor for a rack
flow meter. Calibration is the procedure for determining a volume of the meter prover and is not
covered in this manual.
Details are provided on manual meter proving by the prover tank method and the master meter
method. The pipe prover method is usually used for proofs of large capacity flow meters in pipeline
or tanker ship loading service and is not covered in this manual. Meter proving determines the
accuracy of the flow measurement and therefore the accuracy of quantity and cash accounting for
delivered products. It is strongly recommended that you read this section, all local, regional, and
country standards, and all company standards applicable to your installation and meter proving,
before proving a rack meter or a master meter.
Typical forms used during the meter proving procedure are provided at the end of this section. These
forms can be copied or used as a guide for development of forms for your organization.
Note
The flow meter proving procedures described in this section and the typical meter proof forms
(Figure 5 -2, Figure 5 -3) are primarily provided to describe the DanLoad 6000 program
codes that affect meter proving and flow measurement accuracy. The method of meter proving
and the typical form may require changes before use in your organization. Consult the flow
measurement accounting department of your organization before conducting flow meter
proofs.
A prover tank is a field standard measure which is designed and calibrated by a laboratory that can
provide calibration traceability to the Weights and Measures Office of the National Bureau of
Standards. The calibrated prover tank can be used in either or both of the following meter proof
methods.
#
Used periodically to prove individual rack meters.
Used periodically to prove a master meter. Then the master meter is used to prove the
individual rack meters.
Flow Meter Proving
______________________________________________________ 5 - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The primary American Petroleum Institute standards applicable to meter proving are:
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards (MPMS)
#
Chapter 4 - Proving Systems
Chapter 12 - Calculation of Petroleum Quantities

#
Section 2 - Instructions for Calculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities

Measured by Turbine or Displacement Meters
(contains Tables A-1 and A-2 - Correction Factors for Steel)
Chapter 11.1 - Volume Correction Factors

Table 6 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Against API Gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Table 24 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Against Specific Gravity 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit
These standards supersede API Standards 1101, 2531, 2533, and 2534 and are widely used in the
USA and several other countries. The volume reduction tables 6 and 24 are also designated: ASTM
D 1250, API Standard 2540, and IP 200.
Every flow meter is a unique device. The manufacturer fabricates each flow meter so that it meets
design specifications. However, differences within normal fabrication tolerances produce
apparently identical flow meters that generate slightly different pulses per volume unit (K-factor).
The nominal K-factor [average number of pulses per each volume unit (such as a gallon) that are
generated by a flow meter] is stamped on the flow meter nameplate. For example, by design the
Daniel 4-inch LR turbine meter should produce 23.0 pulses per each gallon measured. After
manufacture, each LR turbine meter is proved with water flow at the factory. This initial meter
proof of the new flow meter may produce an actual K-factor for that flow meter of 23.403 pulses
per gallon measured. This initial meter proving is normally the only time that the flow meter Kfactor is determined by a meter proof. After a meter has been installed on-site, additional meter
proofs may be used to determine meter factors. Over the lifetime of a meter, its meter factor may
change due to variations in flow rates, viscosities, wear, and other causes. However, the K-factor
will always remain the same. The K-factor is the gross adjustment factor and the meter factor is the
fine adjustment factor. The DanLoad 6000 uses a mathematical combination of the K-factor and
the meter factor to adjust the volume accumulation totalizers to match the actual volume that has
flowed through the meter.
5 - 2 ______________________________________________________
Flow Meter Proving
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

In addition to the type of flow meter and installation design, the product being measured,
temperature of the product being measured, the flow rate, and, to a lesser extent, the pressure of
the product being measured may also affect the accuracy of the flow measurement. (Note: The
pressure effect on the volume of low vapor pressure hydrocarbon liquids, such as gasoline, diesel,
kerosine, and fuel oil is usually negligible when these liquids are handled at low pressures (less
than 100 PSIG) and is ignored in many tanker vehicle loading installations. Pressure compensation
and back-pressure control should always be implemented in LPG loading configurations.)
Flow meters can be proved as often as desired. Many organizations have regulations governing the
frequency of meter proofs. These regulations are often based on date, volume of flow through the
meter, and / or number of loading operations use the meter. If your organization does not have such
regulations, each meter should be proved periodically and the proof results compared with previous
proof results to determine if more frequent or less frequent proofs are required.
The terminology used in this section is defined below and is based on the definitions in the API
standards.
Term
Definition
Gross volume
The indicated volume times the meter factor derived from a meter proving of
the flow meter at a specific flow rate. This is a volume measurement. This
volume is displayable as Dynamic Data Element - Mtr m grs load in the
DanLoad 6000 and is used to determine the volume measured by the rack
meter during meter proving.
Calculation: gross volume = indicated volume times meter factor
Gross standard volume

The gross volume corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is a
quantity measurement.
Calculation: Gross standard volume = gross volume times CTLM
(correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in
the meter) times CPLM (correction factor for the effect of
pressure on the liquid in the meter)
Indicated volume
Flow Meter Proving
(also called meter registration) The change in the flow meter reading that
Occurs during a product flow measurement operation. This is a volume
measurement.
Calculation: indicated volume = end reading minus start reading
______________________________________________________ 5 - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Term
Definition
K-factor
The pulses per volume unit, such as gallon, generated by a pulse (System
factor) output type flow meter. The K-factor is also called the system factor.
The nominal value is determined by flow meter design and factory water flow
calibration and is indicated on the flow meter nameplate. The K-factor is a
physical characteristic of the flow meter and is a fixed number.
Master meter
A master meter is a turbine meter or positive displacement meter that has

been proved previously with a tank prover. The master meter is temporarily
connected in series with a rack meter to be proved so that all flow passes
through both meters. A volume of liquid is passed through both meters and
the volume measured by the master meter is considered to be 'correct'. The
difference between the volume measured by each meter determines the meter
factor for the rack meter. The API standard recommends that a minimum
volume of 10,000 volume unit increments are accumulated during a meter
proof and that the minimum duration of a meter proof run be five minutes.
The DanLoad 6000 can display delivered quantities in hundredths of volume
units, such as vvv.vv gallons. A proof run of 100.00 volume units may be
sufficient to satisfy the 10,000 volume unit requirement. Meter proof
deliveries of 1500 to 2000 whole volume units are more common.
Meter factor
A number used internally by the DanLoad 6000 in flow calculations to

correct the indicated volume (final flow meter registration minus initial flow
meter registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter
throughput at operating conditions). The meter factor value is near 1.0000
and rounded to four decimal places.
5 - 4 ______________________________________________________
Flow Meter Proving
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Term
Definition
Pipe prover
A pipe prover is a calibrated pipe section that contains a sphere made of an

elastomer material and a sphere detector switch located at each end of the
calibrated pipe section. The pipe prover has two basic configurations, bidirectional or uni-directional. As the names imply, the sphere can pass in
either direction or only one direction, respectively. The sphere detector
switches are used to start and stop an external prover counter which can be
connected to a high resolution pulse output from the DanLoad 6000. A meter
proof is performed by directing all flow through a flow meter in series with
the pipe prover calibrated pipe section and accumulating the raw pulses
generated by the flow meter while the prover sphere moves from the start
pulse count gate switch and the stop pulse count gate switch. Since the
precise volume of the calibrated section of the pipe prover is known, the
flow meter pulse output corresponds to that precise volume, and each
volume unit can be calculated.
Quantity (Example: gross standard volume)

The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operational
temperature and pressure, usually indicated in one of the following units:
gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.
Tank prover
A tank prover is a fixed or portable graduated tank that is calibrated to

contain a precise known volume of liquid. The tank bottom and sides are
reinforced so that the weight of the liquid in the tank does not distort the tank.
The graduated sight gauge(s) permit determination of the exact volume of
liquid in the tank. The minimum capacity of the tank must be equal to the
volume that passes through the flow meter in one minute. The recommended
capacity of the tank is 1-1/2 to 2 times the volume that passes through the
flow meter in one minute. For example, if the maximum operational flow
rate of a flow meter is 600 GPM, the minimum prover tank capacity is 600
gallons, and the recommended prover tank capacity between 900 and 1200
gallons.
Volume (Example: indicated volume; gross volume)

The actual space occupied by the product measured, usually indicated in one
of the following units: gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.
Flow Meter Proving
______________________________________________________ 5 - 5
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

5.1
General Considerations
Program codes that affect the flow measurement accuracy of the DanLoad 6000 may be restricted
from modification by the Weights & Measures attributes of those program codes. If these program
codes are set to ON, the value of the program codes can only be changed when the Weights &
Measures switch is set OPEN. Therefore, before a flow meter can be proved, the front panel
Weights & Measures switch must be set OPEN (extended position).
A DanLoad 6000 can deliver up to four components and each component can be delivered at up to
four different flow rates. The lowest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'low flow
rate'. The highest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'high flow rate' which is
also called the 'normal flow rate'. Any other defined flow rates for a component are called 'fall back
flow rates' or 'intermediate flow rates'. Each of the component / flow rate combinations has a
unique meter factor for a total of sixteen possible meter factors. Installations with less than four flow
meters and less than four flow rates will have fewer meter factors.
The meter factors for each component must be determined and entered in the order shown below.
Component p meter factor 1
Lowest defined flow rate.

Next higher flow rate if more than one flow rate is defined.
Next higher flow rate if more than two flow rates are defined.
Highest flow rate if four flow rates are defined.
The component number p is 1 to 4. The reason for determining meter factors in this order is to
prevent any inaccuracies at any lower flow rate from affecting the accuracy of the meter factor for
a higher flow rate. Because meter proving is performed during batch delivery, startup and shutdown
volumes delivered at low flow start rate and low flow stop rate, are included in the total proof batch.
Therefore, any volume measurement errors occurring during low flow rate times will be
compensated in the total proving batch.
In some organizations it is acceptable to use only a low flow and high flow meter factor even when
one or two fall back flow rates are defined. In these cases, the rack meter is proved at the low and
high flow rate and the meter factor for the high flow rate is also entered as the meter factor for one
or two fall back flow rates.
During meter proving, various parameter values may need to be changed. All associated parameters
are not located in the same Setup Menu sub-group. To access a parameter when the Setup Menu is
active, enter the three-digit program code number. The selected parameter is then displayed. Verify
or change the value of the parameter as desired. Then press the EXIT (ALT + CLEAR) key to
re-display the Setup Menu and select the next parameter or continue.
5 - 6 ______________________________________________________
Flow Meter Proving
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Each meter proving run can only determine one meter factor for one component (flow meter) / flow
rate combination. Each component defined by the DanLoad 6000 configuration is associated with
a meter number by program codes 067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter. Each flow meter is automatically
assigned a fixed input number (1 to 4) dependent on the pulse meter card slot location and on-board
switch settings. For example: Component number 1 may be associated with the fixed input for
meter number 3.
Unique meter proving recipes should be setup to define each single component for use in controlling
the block valves of a multi-component blending system during meter proving.
Example:
Select an undefined recipe number higher than the last defined operational recipe and set that recipe
to deliver 100 percent of component 1, set the next recipe to delivery 100 percent of component 2.
Setup from one to four recipes (one for each component) that permit selection and proof delivery
of each component without any blending. The setup could appear as follows.
Example meter proof recipes for a blender system:
Recipe 10:
535
Prove Gasoline
536
Component 1 %
537
Component 2 %
538
Component 3 %
539
Component 4 %
540
Sequence to load
=
=
=
=
1XXX
100
0
0
0
Recipe 11:
541
Prove Diesel
542
Component 1 %
543
Component 2 %
544
Component 3 %
545
Component 4 %
546
Sequence to load
=
=
=
=
2XXX
0
100
0
0
(Continue to define a third recipe for component 3 and a forth recipe for component 4 meter proofs
if required.)
Flow Meter Proving
______________________________________________________ 5 - 7
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The gross loaded volume, with the current meter factor applied, that the DanLoad 6000 measures
during the delivery operation must be displayable after a meter proof is completed. The following
data element codes are available for this purpose.
Data Code
103
104
105
106
Default Program Code
Mtr 1 grs load

Mtr 2 grs load
Mtr 3 grs load
Mtr 4 grs load
689
____
____
____
Description
Dynamic Data Display - Element 10 (default)
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
The table above indicates that only Mtr 1 grs load is displayable if the DanLoad 6000 is in the
default configuration. If two or more components are defined, the flow meter assignment for each
component must be determined. Once the flow meter / component relationship is determined, the
Mtr m grs load parameter must be made displayable as a Dynamic Data Display element. This task
is accomplished as follows.
Perform the following steps to activate display of the dynamic data codes required for meter proof
monitoring.
#
Enter Setup Mode, select the program codes listed above for each defined component and
record the flow meter assignment.
Decide which of the sixteen default dynamic data codes are not of interest for display at your
installation. Record the current program code assignment of these data display locations
(program codes 680 to 695).
Select program codes from 680 to 688 or 690 to 695 (do not change program code 689
Dynamic data element 10 (Mtr 1 grs load) which is used to monitor the component delivery
through flow meter number 1).
Enter the Dynamic Data Codes 104 Mtr 2 grs load, 105 Mtr 3 grs load, and 106 Mtr 4 grs
load as required for each defined flow meter / component combination. Only program codes
for defined flow meter / component combinations are displayable.
The Dynamic Data Display can now display the Mtr m grs load parameter for each defined
flow meter / component combination. The value of the active Mtr m grs load parameter is
obtained and entered in the meter proof form during a meter proof.
Note: See Section 6 for a complete list of Dynamic Data Codes and see Appendix A for the sixteen
default assignments (program codes 680 through 695).
5 - 8 ______________________________________________________
Flow Meter Proving
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Meter Factor Calculation
The method described below for calculating a new meter factor for a DanLoad 6000 generally
follows the published API method with the following modifications.
#
The API standard uses the flow meter registration which is the indicated volume without the
current meter factor applied. The DanLoad 6000 parameter Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx is the
gross volume with the current meter factor for the active component / flow rate combination
applied. The meter proof calculations described in this section provide an adjustment
number which is multiplied by the current meter factor to determine the value of the new
meter factor. (Note: The meter factor calculation must be performed properly or large
errors in flow measurement accounting can occur.)
The API standard uses compensation for the effect of pressure on the on the liquid (factor
CPLx) which is rarely used at a load rack installation. To ignore CPLx, enter 1.0000 in the
equation. (Note: The handling of CPLx must be determined by local regulations and the
policy of your organization and clients.)
The API standard uses compensation for the effect of temperature on the liquid (factor CTLx)
and compensation for the effect of pressure on the liquid (factor CPLx) for both the master
meter and the rack meter. Many organizations consider that the master meter and the rack
meter are operating at identical process conditions during meter proving batch deliveries.
Therefore, CTLx and CPLx are ignored and entered as 1.0000 in the equations for both the
master meter and the rack meter. (Note: The handling of CTLx and CPLx must be determined
by local regulations and the policy of your organization and clients.)
Flow Meter Proving
______________________________________________________ 5 - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The relation between the API volume designations and prover tank, master meter, and rack meter
volumes are indicated in the following table.
API Volume
Prover Tank
Master Meter
Rack Meter
indicated volume
equal to:
indicated volume
which is equal to:
gross volume
equal to:
indicated volume
which is equal
to:
registered volume
equal to:
indicated volume
which is equal to:
registered volume
gross volume
equal to:
gross volume
which is equal to:
indicated volume
indicated volume
x meter factor
indicated volume x
meter factor
which is obtained
from:
(Mtr m grs load
xxxx.xx)
gross volume at
standard
temperature
gross volume x CTSP

x CTLP
gross volume x
CTLP
gross volume x
CTLM
gross standard
volume
gross volume x CTSP

x CTLP
gross volume at
standard
temperature x
CPLP
gross volume at
standard
temperature x CPLM
Prover / Meter Volume Relationship

Figure 5 - 1
5 - 10 ______________________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

The table Prover / Meter Volume Relationship, Figure 5 - 1, shows relation of meter volumes to
the prover tank for information only. Note the following points.
#
The prover tank is a fixed volume tank in which the volume is measured at the nominal
atmospheric pressure. Therefore, the following factors, which do not apply to the prover
tank, are ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000.
#
meter factor
CPSP (Effect of pressure on the steel of the vessel.)
CPLP (Effect of pressure on the volume of the liquid.)
This means that the volume delivered to the prover tank can be considered to be indicated
volume which is also equal to gross volume because a meter factor is not required to adjust
the prover tank volume. Only temperature correction factors can be applied to the liquid
volume delivered to the prover tank.
#
The pressure correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow meter (CPLx)
is usually ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000 for rack operations.
The Dynamic Data Display element Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx in the DanLoad 6000 is an
accumulator for gross volume with a resolution of hundreds of a volume unit, such as
gallons.
The meter proof methods described using a rack meter connected to a DanLoad 6000 use values
obtained from the Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx accumulator. The basic calculation sequence, without
temperature correction factors, is described below.
Meter proving calculation 1:

Calculate the volume error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the rack
meter measured volume.
rack meter volume error
corrected delivery volume
rack meter
corrected
gross volume
Flow Meter Proving ______________________________________________________ 5 - 11
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

where:
The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the prover

and the rack meter corrected gross volume.
prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of

temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to the
prover tank.
master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,

corrected by the master meter meter-factor, the effect of
temperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the effect
of pressure on the liquid measured.
rack meter corrected gross volume

The volume obtained from the Dynamic Data Display element Mtr
m grs load, corrected for the effect of temperature on the liquid
measured and optionally the effect of pressure on the liquid measured.

Calculate the percentage error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the
rack meter measured volume.
rack meter percent error

--------------------------------rack meter corrected gross volume
where:
rack meter percent error
The percentage of error in the corrected volume delivery.
The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the prover

and the rack meter corrected gross volume (obtained from calculation
1).

__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

If this calculation produces a percentage error that is within the tolerances of the regulating
organizations and your organization, the current meter factor is considered to be acceptable and no
further action is required. The exact value must be determined by the governing regulations.
Example:
A typical calculation might produce a result of 0.01 which is equal to one percent
error.

Calculate the adjustment to be applied to the current meter factor, if it has been determined that the
percentage of error (calculation 2) is not acceptable.
adjustment
prover corrected gross volume

--------------------------------rack meter corrected gross volume
where:
adjustment
A mathematical factor that is multiplied by the current rack meter

factor to obtain the new meter factor, this factor is the error in the
current meter factor (THIS NUMBER IS NOT THE NEW
METER FACTOR).
prover corrected gross volume

#
prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of

temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to the
prover tank.
master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,
corrected by the master meter factor, the effect of
temperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the effect
of pressure on the liquid measured.

(Note: This volume is the gross volume with the current meter factor
applied. The use of the gross volume in the calculation is the reason
that the new meter factor cannot be calculated by this step.)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Calculate the new meter factor which will be manually entered in program code ccc Comp p meter
factor f corresponding to the active program code ccc Comp p flow rate r.
new meter factor
adjustment x rack meter current meter-factor
where:
new meter factor
The calculated meter factor that must be manually entered for

program code ccc Comp p meter factor f to correct the measurement
error in future flow measurement.
adjustment
The mathematical adjustment factor obtained from calculation 3

above.
rack meter current meter-factor

The current meter factor for the rack meter, obtained from program
code ccc Comp p meter factor f before the meter proof sequence is
started.
Three examples of meter factor calculations are provided below. The calculations show the relation
between the measured volumes and the meter factor adjustments required. To simplify the examples,
the temperature and pressure corrections are disregarded.
Assume that the volume accumulated Mtr m grs load is 1000.00 gallons and that the rack meter
current active meter factor is 1.0123 for the component / flow rate combination. Then the indicated
volume is equal to 987.85 gallons.
Equation:
1000.00
987.85 = ------------1.0123
Example 1: Correct delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Parameter
Value
1000.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load
1000.00 gallons
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR
0 gallons
(1000.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR
0 percent
(0 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT
1
(1000.00 / 1000.00)
RACK METER CURRENT METER-FACTOR
1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR
1.0123 (no change)

(1 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter exactly equals the volume
delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered corrected
gross volume is exactly equal to the rack meter corrected gross volume, the current_meter_factor
is correct. The new_meter_factor value is exactly equal to the current_meter_factor value.
Therefore, the current meter factor, 1.0123, should not be changed.
Example 2: One percent over delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
Parameter
Value
1010.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load
1000.00 gallons
10 gallons
(1010.00 - 1000.00)
0.01 (1 percent over delivery)

(10 / 1000.00)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Parameter
Value
ADJUSTMENT
1.01
(1010.00 / 1000.00)
1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR
1.0224
(1.01 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is less than the volume
gross volume is greater than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the value of the
current_meter_factor is less than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0224) should
be manually entered for the value of the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f.
Example 3: One percent under delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
Parameter
Value
990.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load
1000.00 gallons
-10 gallons
(990.00 - 1000.00)
-0.01 (1 percent under delivery)

(-10 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT
0.99
(990.00 / 1000.00)
1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR
1.0022
(0.99 x 1.0123)
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is greater than the volume
gross volume is less than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the value of the
current_meter_factor is greater than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0022)
should be manually entered for the value of the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f.
5.1.1
Initial Setup
The examples above do not include temperature compensation calculations. However, during actual
meter proving, these calculations must be performed. Before starting meter proving, obtain a copy
of Table A-1 - Temperature Correction Factors for Mild Steel or Table A-2 - Temperature
Correction Factors for Stainless Steel from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 - Instructions for
Calculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities Measured by Turbine or Displacement Meters for use in
calculating CTSP. And obtain a copy of Table 6A, 6B, 6C, 24A, or 24B from API MPMS Chapter
11.1 - Volume Correction Factors for use in calculating CTLP and CTLM.
Perform the following preliminary steps:

#
OPEN the Weights & Measures switch (release to extended position)
Enter Program Mode (press Program (ALT + ENTER) key)
Enter Passcode in response to prompt message
Enter Setup Mode (with box cursor on Setup selection, press ENTER key)
Access and change program codes as described below (refer to the tables located at the end
of this section for program code information)
If the DanLoad 6000 is a multi-component blender, specify a meter proof recipe as described
above to select the desired component for proof. If the DanLoad 6000 delivers only one
component, recipe number 1, which specifies a one component to one flow meter
relationship, is selected automatically.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#

Set to 1 to force continuous low flow rate for first meter proof (see additional information
below).

Set to fixed so that meter factor interpolation based on flow rate is disabled.
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor

Obtain actual meter K-factor from flow meter nameplate and round to nearest tenth, enter
result (example: nameplate K-factor is 23.403, enter 23.4).
172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor

Divide program code ccc Nominal K-factor by actual K-factor from nameplate and round to
four decimal places. [Example: 23.4 divided by 23.403 = 0.9999, enter result (0.9999)].
(Note: The ccc Master meter factor is used to establish a plus / minus two percent limit for
entries in the four program codes ccc Comp p flow rate r of the related component, this
parameter is not used in volume calculations.)
173 / 184 / 195 / 206 Stop rate

Set the flow rate at which this component is delivered during the components configured
low flow stop volume at the end of an inline batch. The overall flow rate of the blend at the
end of a batch is the sum of the stop rates of any flowing components.
If an existing preset system that uses an effective K-factor for each flow rate is replaced by
a DanLoad 6000, the DanLoad 6000 requires a nominal K-factor and meter factor for each
flow rate. Set program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 294 Nominal K-factor as indicated above,
enter program code ccc Comp p meter factor f as program code ccc Nominal K-factor divided
by the effective K-factor for the flow rate and rounded to four decimal places.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components:
#
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Comp p flow rate 1

This parameter should be set to the desired low flow start / low flow stop flow rate that will
be used in actual loading of the indicated component p. The first flow meter proof will
always be at this flow rate.
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Comp p meter factor 1

This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registration
when the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding program code ccc Comp p flow rate
1. This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meter
factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.
The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components in a two
stage (low flow / normal flow) loading system:
#
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Comp p flow rate 2

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or first fall back flow rate that
will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.

when the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding ccc Comp p flow rate 2 parameter.
This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meter
factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new installation or the
rack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of program code 172
/ 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.
The following four parameter group entries are required for all defined components only in
loading systems that define three or four flow rates for loading:
#
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Comp p flow rate 3

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or second fall back flow rate that
will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#

factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new installation or the
rack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of program code 172
/ 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Comp p flow rate 4

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow rate that will be used in actual
loading of the indicated component p.

factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.
As mentioned above, the meter factor for program code ccc Comp p factor 1 will always be
determined first. To assure continued flow at program code ccc Comp p flow rate 1 rate, set
program code 169 Number of factors/component to 1.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

5.2
Tank Prover Method
Rack meters, or a master meter, are proved with a tank prover by loading a batch of one product
at one flow rate to the prover tank. The frequency of meter proofs of rack meters must be
determined by company policy or regional regulations. Rack meters should be proved on each
product and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the rack meters
provide a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The corresponding
meter factor is then entered into the DanLoad 6000 and is automatically active when the related
product / flow rate combination is active.
A meter proof is performed by the tank prover method in the following manner.
#
A meter proof wetting run should be performed first to wet the prover tank and help stabilize
the temperature in the rack meter / prover tank circuit. The wetting run is a proof run
without recording data.
A liquid batch that will fill the tank prover to a liquid level visible in the graduated section
is defined and delivered to a prover tank.
Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error between
the prover tank volume (corrected for temperature) and the and the flow meter registration
(corrected for temperature).
The volume and percentage error are calculated. If necessary, a new meter factor is
calculated.
The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into the
DanLoad 6000 for the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one of
the following program codes: 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201
/ 203 / 208 / 210 / 212 / 214 dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meter
factor number f (1 to 4).
The prover tank can be drained and the steps listed above are repeated and the results
averaged, if desired.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

5.2.1
Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 1
For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that each
component is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal (high)
flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four component four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component (flow meter) at
each flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving is not important.
#
Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch to the
prover tank.
Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in the
program codes 480 to 661).
Set program code 169 Number of factors/component, to 1 to assure that only the low flow
rate is used.
Verify or set the low flow rate with program code 174.
Exit the Setup Menu
At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the volume of the prover tank.
Initiate the batch delivery to the prover tank.
Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys to
display item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated volume
units delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a volume unit.
After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in a
copy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN 1
column.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

5.2.2
At this point the new meter factor, program code 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1, is within tolerance
and accepted. The next higher flow rate, program code 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2, is used to
determine the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flow
rate that is used as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set 176
Comp 1 flow rate 2 to 400.
During the meter proof at the low flow rate, the low flow rate was forced active by setting program
code 169 Number of factors/component to 1 so that the DanLoad 6000 activates the low flow rate
only. Set program code 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the next
higher flow rate.
The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter proof for component
1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp down the flow rate
with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is determined by the value of
program code 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.
Example:
If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop volumes are 50 gallons, the time at low flow is
approximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program codes
that in any way affect the flow rates, volumes, or meter factors at lower flow rates must be set to
their normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates. After the rack
meter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the program codes
that affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is necessary to re-Prove a
rack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all lower flow rates in flow rate
ascending order.
5.2.3
and accepted. The next higher flow rate, program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 is used to determine
the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum (normal)
loading flow rate for component 1. Set program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 to 600.
1 flow rate 2.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

5.2.4
Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 4 (if Required)
If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would be
conducted in a similar manner as described above.
5.2.5
Meter Proofs for Component 2
Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2, 3, and 4 (as
required) have been determined and entered into program codes 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 (as required).
In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be disabled and
component 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined recipe for proving
component 2 (recipe definitions are in the program code group 480 to 661).
The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can now
be conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.
The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD, Figure
5 - 2, are described below.
Field
Description
Station
Date / Time
Meter Tag
Meter S/N
Meter Mfg
Meter Model
Meter Size
Product
API Gravity @ 60 oF
From Tank No.
To Prover Tank No.
Initial Totalizer Reading
Name of station or terminal.

Date and time of meter proof.
Process tag number of flow meter.
Serial number of flow meter.
Manufacturer of flow meter.
Model number of flow meter.
Diameter of flow meter.
Product (component) used for meter proof.
The API gravity of the product.
Source tank identification.
Destination tank identification (prover tank identification).
Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Prover Tank Volume Data
1 Flow rate
The flow rate that is set in the program code ccc Comp p flow rate r
corresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can be
verified by accurately timing the period of delivery to the prover tank
then dividing the volume delivered by the time to deliver. Example:
2010.36 gallons delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals 564.7
gallons per minute.
2 Delivery to Prover Tank
The gross volume delivered to the prover tank, obtained from prover
tank data and neck sight gauge graduation reading.
3 Tank Temp (Avg) oF
The average temperature of the product in the prover tank, API

recommends average of temperature at top, middle, and bottom.
4 CTSP
Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the prover tank

steel, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 - Table A-1
or Table A-2.
5 CTLP
Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the

prover tank, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24.
6 CCFP
Combined correction factor for the prover tank, obtained by

multiplying CTSP times CTLP.
7 Corrected Delivery Volume

The volume, corrected for temperature effects, of liquid in the
prover tank, obtained by multiplying Delivery to Tank (line 2) times
CCFP (line 6).
Load Rack Meter Data
8 Mtr m grs load (Final)
The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meter
proof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs load,
Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as applicable.
(Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with the current
active meter factor applied.)
9 Mtr m grs load (Initial)
The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run is
started, equal to 0 at start of delivery.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

10 Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume
The gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run, obtained
by subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load (Initial).
11 Rack Meter Temperature
The temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstream
side of the flow meter (usually upstream).
12 CTLM

flow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24. (Note: CTLM is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from the
flow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input to
the DanLoad 6000.)
13 Rack Meter Pressure
The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream side

of the flow meter (usually upstream).
14 CPLM
Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow
meter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the API
MPMS for additional information.
15 CCFM
Combined correction factor for the flow meter, obtained from

multiplying CTLM times CPLM.
16 Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volume
accumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained by
multiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCFM.
17 Rack Meter Volume Error
The difference between the corrected delivery volume to the prover
tank and the rack meter corrected gross volume.
18 Rack Meter Percent Error
The percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume.
19 Adjustment
A calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meter

factor.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

20 Current Meter Factor
The current active meter factor obtained from program code ccc
Comp p meter factor f corresponding to the component / flow rate
combination being proved. (Obtained from: program code 175 / 177
/ 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201 / 203 / 208 / 210
/ 212 / 214.)
21 New Meter Factor
The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run, obtained

by multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.
Test personnel block
Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the meter

proof runs, form should be altered as required by your company.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

5.3
Master Meter Method
A master meter is a flow meter that is used as a reference standard for volume measurement
comparison with rack meters. The volume measured by the master meter is determined by proving
the master meter with a tank prover. The frequency of meter proofs of the master meter must be
determined by company policy or regional regulations. As a minimum, the master meter should be
proved twice a year. If the master meter is proved in mid spring and mid fall, the measurement
accuracy of the master meter will be approximately adjusted for seasonal temperature changes that
affect the temperature of the products handled. The master meter must be proved on each product
and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the master meter provide
a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The corresponding meter
factor is then used in the calculation when proving a rack meter with the same product / flow rate
combination.
A meter proof is performed by the master meter method in the following manner.
#
Set the loading system valves to the proper positions so that all flow through the rack meter
to be proved is routed in series with the master meter. Assure that no leakage or bypass paths
are present at either flow meter or interconnecting pipe.
Connect an electronic prover counter to the raw pulse output of the master meter.
A meter proof stabilizing run should be performed first to help stabilize the temperature in
the proof meter / master meter circuit. The stabilizing run is a proof run without data
recorded.
A liquid batch that satisfies the minimum proof batch requirements stated in the definition
of Master Meter Proof at the beginning of this section is defined and delivered to a tank.
Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error between
the master meter volume [corrected for temperature (and optionally pressure)] and the and
the proof flow meter registration [corrected for temperature (and optionally pressure)].
A new meter factor is calculated by dividing the volume measured through the master meter
by the volume registered by the proof flow meter. The measured through the master meter
and the volume registered by the proof flow meter are compensated for the effect of
temperature on the liquid, and optionally compensated for the effect of pressure on the
liquid. If compensation calculation is performed for either the master meter or the proof flow
meter, a similar compensation calculation must be performed for the other flow meter.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
Under delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load)
during the proof run is greater than the volume measured by the master meter, the
meter factor value will be decreased to correct the flow meter measurement error.
Over delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load) during
the proof run is less than the volume measured by the master meter, the meter factor
value will be increased to correct the flow meter measurement error.
The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into the
DanLoad 6000 for the active program code ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one of
the following program codes: 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201
/ 203 / 208 / 210 / 212 / 214 dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meter
factor number f (1 to 4).
The prover counter is manually reset to zero and the steps listed above are repeated until the
corrected meter registration is within 0.02 percent of the corrected prover volume.
5.3.1
Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 1
For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that each
component is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal (high)
flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four component four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component (flow meter) at
each flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving is not important.
#
Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch through
the master meter by connecting the master meter in series with the rack meter by high
integrity block valves. All flow must pass through both the master meter and the rack meter
no bypass leakage is allowed.
Connect the master meter to a flow totalizer capable of measuring and displaying indicated
volume units (without internal meter factor or temperature / pressure compensation) to a
resolution of one one-hundredth of a volume unit (such as gallons).
Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in the
program codes 480 to 661).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Set program code 169 Number of factors/component to 1 to assure that one the low flow rate
is used.
Verify or set the low flow rate with program code 174.
Exit the Setup Menu
At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the minimum proving volume required.
Initiate the batch delivery.
Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys to
display item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated volume
units delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a volume unit.
After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in a
copy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN 1
column.
5.3.2
determine the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flow
rate that is used as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set
program code 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2 to 400.
Set program code 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the next
higher flow rate. The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter
proof for component 1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp
down the flow rate with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is
determined by the value of program code 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Example:
If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop volumes are 50 gallons, the time at low flow is
approximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program codes
that in any way affect the flow rates, volumes, or meter factors at lower flow rates must be set to
their normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates. After the rack
meter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the program codes
that affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is necessary to re-Prove a
rack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all lower flow rates in flow rate
ascending order.
5.3.3
determine the meter factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum
(normal) loading flow rate for component 1. Set program code 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3, to 600.
1 flow rate 2.
5.3.4
Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 4 (if Required)
If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would be
conducted in a similar manner as described above.
5.3.5
Meter Proofs for Component 2
Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2 , 3, and 4 (as
required) have been determined and entered into program code 175 / 177 / 179 / 181 (as required).
In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be disabled and
component 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined recipe for proving
component 2 (recipe definitions are in program code 480 to 661).
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can now
be conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.
The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD, Figure
5 - 3, are described below.
Field
Description
Station
Date / Time
Product
API Gravity @ 60 oF
From Tank No.
To Tank No.
Initial Totalizer Reading
Name of station or terminal.

Date and time of meter proof.
Product (component) used for meter proof.
The API gravity of the product.
Source tank identification.
Destination tank / vehicle identification.
Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Master Meter Volume Data
1 Flow rate
The flow rate that is set in the program code ccc Comp p flow rate r
corresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can be
verified by accurately timing the period of delivery then dividing the
volume delivered by the time to deliver. Example: 2010.36 gallons
delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals 564.7 gallons per minute.
2 Master Meter Final Reading

The indicated volume at the end of a rack meter proving run,
obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.
3 Master Meter Initial Reading
The indicated volume at the start of a rack meter proving run,
obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.
4 Master Meter Indicated Volume
The indicated volume measured by the master meter during the meter
proving run. Master Meter Final Reading minus Master Meter Initial
Reading.
5 Master Meter Temperature, degrees F
The temperature of the product in the master meter during the meter
proving run, used to derive CTLP.
6 CTLP

master meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24.
7 Master Meter Pressure, PSIG

The pressure of the product in the master meter during the meter
proving run, used to derive CPLP.
8 CPLP
Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the master
meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.2.
9 Master Meter Meter-Factor

The current active meter factor for the master meter obtained from a
tank prover meter proving of the master meter. The current master
meter factor should for the same product and flow rate that is used in
proving the rack meter. A table is provided at the end of this section
for recording master meter factors.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Field
Description
10 CCFP
Combined correction factor for the master meter, obtained by

multiplying CTLP times CPLP times the master meter meter-factor.
11 Master Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The volume, corrected for temperature effect (and optionally
pressure effect), of liquid in measured by the master meter, obtained
by multiplying Master Meter Indicated Volume (line 4 times CCFP
(line 10).
Rack meter Data
12 Mtr m grs load (Final)
The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meter
proof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs load,
Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as applicable.
(Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with the current
active meter factor applied.)
13 Mtr m grs load (Initial)

The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run is
started. Equal to 0 at start of delivery.
14 Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume
The gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run, obtained
by subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load (Initial).
15 Rack Meter Temperature
The temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstream
side of the flow meter (usually upstream).
16 CTLM

flow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24. (Note: CTLM is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from the
flow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input to
the DanLoad 6000.)
17 Rack Meter Pressure
The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream side

of the flow meter (usually upstream).
18 CPLM
Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the rack
meter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the API
MPMS for additional information.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

19 CCFM
Combined correction factor for the rack meter, obtained from

multiplying CTLM times CPLM.
20 Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volume
accumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained by
multiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCFM.
21 Rack Meter Volume Error
The difference between the Master Meter Corrected Volume and the
Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume.
22 Rack Meter Percent Error
The percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume.
23 Adjustment
A calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meter

factor.
24 Rack Meter Current Meter-Factor

The current active meter factor obtained from program code ccc
Comp p meter factor f corresponding to the component / flow rate
combination being proved. (Obtained from: program code 175 / 177
/ 179 / 181 / 186 / 188 / 190 / 192 / 197 / 199 / 201 / 203 / 208 / 210
/ 212 / 214)
25 New Rack Meter Factor
The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run, obtained
by multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.
Test personnel block
Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the meter

proof runs, form should be altered as required by your company.
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Program codes 169 to 214 are used to calibrate the DanLoad 6000 for each flow meter, component,
flow rate combination.
Code
Parameter
Default
Attribute
Options /
Values
Default
Value
Value to Use During

Meter Proof
temporarily set to 1
METER FACTORS
169
Number of factors/component
W&M
1 to 4
170
Meter factor method
W&M
Fixed
Linear
Fixed
COMPONENT 1 FACTORS
171
Nominal K-factor
W&M
0.5 to 2000.0
172
Master meter factor
W&M
0.5000 to 2.0000
173
Stop rate
W&M
0 to 99999
23.0
round meter nameplate K-factor

to nearest tenth
program code 171 / nameplate
K-factor
120
set to inline batch end volume
200
set to desired low flow rate
COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 1
174
Comp 1 flow rate 1
W&M
175
Comp 1 meter factor 1
W&M
0 to 99999
see text
176
Comp 1 flow rate 2
W&M
177
W&M
0 to 99999
600
set to desired fall back or high

flow rate
see text
178
Comp 1 flow rate 3
W&M
179
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
180
Comp 1 flow rate 4
W&M
181
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
COMPONENT 2 FACTORS
182
Nominal K-factor
W&M
0.5 to 200.0

to nearest tenth
183
Master meter factor
W&M
0.5000 to 2.0000

K-factor
184
Stop rate
W&M
0 to 99999
Yes
120
185
Comp 2 flow rate 1
W&M
186
W&M
Code
Parameter
Attribute
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
Options
Default
Meter Proof
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
Attribute
Options
187
Comp 2 flow rate 2
W&M
0 to 99999
188
W&M
Default
Meter Proof
flow rate
see text
189
Comp 2 flow rate 3
W&M
190
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
191
Comp 2 flow rate 4
W&M
192
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
COMPONENT 3 FACTORS
193
Nominal K-factor
W&M
0.5 to 200.0

to nearest tenth
194
Master meter factor
W&M
0.5000 to 2.0000

K-factor
195
Stop rate
W&M
0 to 99999
120
196
Comp 3 flow rate 1
W&M
197
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
198
Comp 3 flow rate 2
W&M
199
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
200
Comp 3 flow rate 3
W&M
201
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
202
Comp 3 flow rate 4
W&M
203
W&M
0 to 99999

flow rate
see text
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
Attribute
Options
Default
Meter Proof
COMPONENT 4 FACTORS
204
Nominal K-factor
W&M
0.5 to 200.0

to nearest tenth
205
Master meter factor
W&M
0.5000 to 2.0000

K-factor
206
Stop rate
W&M
0 to 99999
120
207
Comp 4 flow rate 1
W&M
208
W&M
0 to 99999
set to desired high flow rate

see text
209
Comp 4 flow rate 2
W&M
210
W&M
0 to 99999

see text
211
Comp 4 flow rate 3
W&M
212
W&M
0 to 99999

see text
213
Comp 4 flow rate 4
W&M
214
W&M
0 to 99999

see text
METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD
Report:
S T AT IO N
M E T E R T AG
M E T E R S /N
D AT E
T IM E
M ETER M FG
M ETER M O DEL
M E T E R S IZ E
PRODUCT
A P I G R A V IT Y
F R O M TAN K N O .
T O P R O V E R T AN K N O .
IN IT IAL T O T AL IZ E R R E AD IN G
P R O V E R T AN K V O L U M E D AT A
RUN
F L O W R A TE
D E L IV E R Y T O P R O V E R T AN K
P R O V E R T AN K T E M P E R A T U R E
(T AB L E A-1 / A-2)
(T AB L E 6)
TSP
TLP
L IN E
DEGREES
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
CCFP
C O M B IN E D C O R R E C T IO N FAC T O R
(L IN E 4 X
7
(AV G ),
@ 60 F
5)
C O R R E C TE D D E L IV E R Y V O LU M E
(L IN E 2 X
L IN E
R AC K M E TE R D ATA
6)
[DA N LO AD 6000]
RUN
MT R
M G R S L O AD
(F IN A L )
MT R
M G R S L O AD
(IN IT IA L )
10
R AC K M E T E R M E AS U R E D G R O S S V O LU M E
(L IN E 8 - L IN E 9)
11
R AC K M E T E R T E M P E R AT U R E , D E G R E E S
12
13
R AC K M E T E R P R E S S U R E ,
14
15
TLM
PLM
(T AB L E 6)
PSIG
(C H A P 11.2)
(L IN E 12 X
L IN E
CCFM
14)
16
R AC K M E T E R C O R R E C TE D G R O S S V O LU M E
17
R AC K M E T E R V O L U M E E R R O R
18
R AC K M E T E R P E R C E N T E R R O R
19
ADJUSTM ENT
20
R A C K M E T E R C U R R E N T M E T E R -F AC T O R
21
N E W M E TE R F AC T O R
(L IN E 10 X
L IN E
15)
(L IN E 7 - L IN E 16)
(L IN E 17 / L IN E 16)
(L IN E 7 / L IN E 16)
(L IN E 19 X
S IG N AT U R E
L IN E
20)
D AT E
E N G IN E E R
W IT N E S S
R E M AR K S
Figure 5 - 2 (Typical)
R E P R E S E N T IN G
METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD

S T AT IO N :
F R O M TAN K N O :
P RO D U CT:
A P I G R A V IT Y
MFG:
M A S T E R M E T E R D A TA
MODEL:
M AS T E R M E TE R V O L U M E D AT A
F L O W R A TE
M AS T E R M E TE R F IN AL R E AD IN G
M AS T E R M E TE R IN IT IAL R E AD IN G
M AS T E R M E T E R IN D IC AT E D V O LU M E
T O T AN K N O :
@ 60 F:
S E R IAL N O :
Report:
D A TE :
T IM E :
IN IT IAL T O T AL IZ E R R E AD IN G :
S IZ E :
K-F AC T O R :
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
AV E R AG E
(L IN E 2 - L IN E 3)
5
M AS T E R M E TE R T E M P E R AT U R E , D E G R E E S
M AS T E R M E TE R P R E S S U R E ,
TLP
(T A B L E 6)
PSIG
M A S T E R M E T E R M E T E R -F AC T O R
10
PLP
(C H A P 11.2)
(L IN E 6 X
11
L IN E
8X
L IN E
CCFP
9)
M AS T E R M E T E R C O R R E C TE D G R O S S V O LU M E
(L IN E 4 X
L IN E
10)
R AC K M E TE R V O LU M E D ATA
[DA N LO AD 6000]
12
MT R
M G R S L O AD
(F IN A L )
13
MT R
M G R S L O AD
(IN IT IA L )
14
R AC K M E T E R M E AS U R E D G R O S S V O LU M E
RUN
RUN
RUN
(L IN E 12 - L IN E 13)
15
R AC K M E T E R T E M P E R AT U R E , D E G R E E S
16
17
R AC K M E T E R P R E S S U R E ,
18
19
TLM
PLM
(T A B L E 6)
PSIG
(C H A P 11.2)
(L IN E 16 X
20
L IN E
CCFM
18)
R AC K M E T E R C O R R E C TE D G R O S S V O LU M E
(L IN E 14 X
L IN E
19)
21
R AC K M E T E R V O L U M E E R R O R
(L IN E 11 - L IN E 20)
22
R AC K M E T E R P E R C E N T E R R O R
23
ADJUSTM ENT
24
R A C K M E T E R C U R R E N T M E T E R -F AC T O R
25
N E W R AC K M E T E R F AC T O R
(L IN E 21 / L IN E 20)
(L IN E 11 / L IN E 20)
(L IN E 23 X
S IG N AT U R E
L IN E
24)
D AT E
E N G IN E E R
W IT N E S S
R E M AR K S
Figure 5 - 3 (Typical)
R E P R E S E N T IN G
AV E R AG E
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

This table contains meter factors for the master meter derived from tank prover proving of the master meter
on up to four different products at up to four different flow rates for each product. The master meter meterfactors are related to component / flow rate assignments within the DanLoad 6000 for reference during
proving of rack meters.
MASTER METER:
Manufacturer / model: ___________________________________________________
Size: _________________________________________________________________
Serial number: _________________________________________________________
Nominal K-factor: ______________________________________________________
Product
(component)
Meter Factor
Date
Master Meter Flow Rate
Master Meter Meter-Factor
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Section 6
Program Codes
Program Code Attributes

Program Codes
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

This section contains descriptions of all program codes. Each
program code consists of a three-digit number, an identifying
name, a variable that conveys control or numeric configuration
data to the Danload 6000, and four attributes. The variable part
of each program code defines a setup, configuration, or database
value. Each program code number / name combination identifies
a unique parameter that is either a setpoint, or limit value, or an
option that defines some method or mode of operation. Data
entry in a value / option field is accomplished by prompting the
user to enter a numeric value, enter an alpha-numeric string, or
select an option from a short list of options (pick list).
ccc aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Each program code has four program code attributes associated

with it that can be toggled ON or OFF to provide specific security
restrictions and status information for selected program codes.
An alpha-numeric name of up to thirty-four characters that

specifies the function of the program code. Some names are
repeated several times when the parameter type is repeated for
similar functions, such as different meters, components, or
additives. However, the three digit program code is always
unique.
Program codes are displayed in the following format when the

DanLoad 6000 is operating in the setup option of Program Mode.
vvv
where:
ccc
A three-digit identifier, this number is unique for each program
code. Program codes numbers are from 001 to 991. (Note:
Several numbers in the series are not used.)
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________
Section 6 - 1
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

#
vvv ...
A value assigned to the program code at setup time or modified
in the field. Note that the data type displayed and acceptable
entry in this field is dependent on the program code variable type.
These data types are:
#
alpha-numeric string
A message consisting of letter and number characters.
Example:
066
Component #1
integer
#
Whole number without a fractional part or decimal
separator. Example:
078
Maximum preset volume
selection
A predefined option selected from a scrollable short list of
options. Example:
3000
028
Component ID
Language
English
real number
A number consisting of a whole part, decimal separator,
and fractional part. Example:
130
Factor
Section 3 - Setup Contains information on the procedures used

to enter data in the various types of data fields mentioned above.
1.0
Section 6 - 2
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.1
Program Code Attributes
Program code attributes are characteristics that are associated

with each program code. There are four program code attributes
for any program code.
Access to program code attributes is by selection of the Program

Code Attributes option under the Program Mode Menu. It is
assumed that the DanLoad 6000 is in the loading mode with the
Loading Display active at this time.
Access program code attributes:
Select different program code:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key.

Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to
Enter passcode _________ prompt.
Press the ENTER key.
The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is
displayed.
Press the 9 (down arrow) key repeatedly to select (move
the box cursor over the item) Program code attributes
(item five in the list).
Enter the three digit program code in response to the

Enter program code prompt message. (Note: One or two
preceding zeros must be entered if the program code is
less than 100.)
Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key
to select (move the box outline cursor over the item) the
desired program code attribute.
Press the SELECT key to toggle the Yes or No status of
the program code.
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key.

Perform steps listed above under Access program code
attributes as desired.
Section 6 - 3
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.1
Program Code Attributes (continued)
Exit program code attribute modification mode:
Weights and measures
Prevent modification, in Setup and through communications with

a terminal automation system, of the value of the program code
value, unless the Weights and Measures switch located on the
operator control panel is open (out position). The message,
Weights and measures, is displayed on the message line of the
display if this attribute is set to Yes for the corresponding selected
program code.
#
#
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to

program code attributes).
Program Mode Menu).
Loading Mode).
The options for program code attributes are described below.
No
Disable this attribute for this program code.
Yes
Enable this attribute for this program code.
Read only
Prevent modification, in Setup, of the value of the program code
variable. The message, Read only, is displayed on the message
line of the display if this attribute is set to Yes for the
corresponding selected program code. (Note: Some program
codes can only be modified by internal logic or calculations and
are always Read only.)
#
No
Yes
Enable this attribute for this program code.
Section 6 - 4
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.1
Program Code Attributes (continued)
Data logging
Value changed
Automatically log new values of program codes if modified in

Setup. The changes are only logged if program code 702
Program code value change log is set to any logging printer and
data logging is enabled by program code 668 Ch. B mode.
The value of the program code variable was changed in Setup or

via communications. This program code attribute cannot be
changed manually. The program code attribute is set (Yes)
internally if the value was changed and can only be reset (No) by
a command from a Terminal Automation System. (Refer to
DanLoad 6000 Communications Specification, Part Number 39000-674)
No
Yes
Enable this attribute for this program code. This is the
default value for all program codes at initial startup time.
No
Program code has not been changed in Program Mode or
via communications.
Yes
Program code has been changed in Program Mode or via
communications.
Section 6 - 5
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.2
Program Code Groups
Program codes are grouped according to their logical functions.

Program codes are accessed by the Setup Menu. Figure 6 - 1 is
a diagram of the complete menu tree. Figure 6 - 2 contains an
overview of the program code groups. Access to the program
codes is allowed while in the Program Mode. Access to the
Program Mode from the Loading Mode is described below. It is
assumed at this time that the DanLoad 6000 is in the Loading
Mode with either the Recipe Selection Menu, the Additive
Selection Menu, or the Loading Display active at this time.
#
#
#
#
#
Enter Setup Mode:

#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key.

Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to:
Enter passcode _________ prompt.
The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is
displayed.
The box cursor is at the first selection Alarm Reset.
Press the 9 (down arrow) to move the cursor to the Setup
selection.
The first display page of the Setup Menu is displayed.

The box cursor is at the first selection Security
Parameters.
to select (move the box cursor over the item) the desired
program code group from the list of twenty-four groups,
divided into four display pages.
The first page of the selected program code group is
displayed.
Note: Each program code group is divided into pages of
one to six program codes.
to select (move the box cursor over the item) the desired
program code. Program codes are not displayed for
undefined meters, valves, components, additives, etc.
For example, if two meters are configured, then program
codes for meters 3 and 4 are not displayed.
Section 6 - 6
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.2
#
Program Code Groups (continued)

Note: The displayed data for each program code is
entered for the program code value when the EXIT
(ALT+CLEAR) key is pressed to exit the program code
group. Verify that data is correct before exiting a
program code group.
Exit Setup Mode:

#
#
#
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to Setup

Menu).
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (displays Setup
Complete).
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (resets the
DanLoad 6000 and returns to the Loading Mode).
Section 6 - 7
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Program Mode Menu
Alarm reset
Alarm reset display
Reprint transaction
Reprint transaction display
Setup
Setup menu
Program code attributes display
Set date and time
Set date and time display
Set contrast/backlighting display
Diagnostics
Diagnostics menu
Reprint cutoff
Reprint end-of-day processing data
CALMON status
Calibration monitoring
Additive meter calibration screen
EXIT (ALT+CLEAR)
|
|
Diagnostics Menu
Firmware versions
RAM tests
Keypad
Display
Inputs/Outputs
DUART
ARCNET
Crash analysis
Show memory
Print configuration
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setup Menu
Security parameters
Unit parameters
Valve parameters
Meter parameters
Delivery parameters
Factors
Alarms
I/O parameters
Temperature/pressure/density
Recipes
Data communications
Data logging
Blending
LPG/pressure
Transaction storage
Transaction ticket
Analog inputs
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
Menu Tree - Figure 6 - 1
Section 6 - 8
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.2
Group
Name
Used For
001 to 018
Security parameters
Operation security
023 to 047
Unit parameters
Global parameters
048, 049 V
Valve parameters
Flow control valves
050 to 061
Meter parameters
Flow meters
065 to 077
Liquid components
078 to 111
Delivery parameters
Batch deliveries
112 to 127
Digital flow control valves
128 to 134
Volume pulses to external equipment
135 to 168
Additive delivery parameters Additive injection
169 to 219
Factors
Flow meter factors and flow rates
220 to 279
Alarms
Actions and limits
280 to 379
I/O parameters
Input / output signal assignments
380 to 399
Additive injection signal assignments
400 to 425
Component block valve signal assignments
426 to 479
Temperature / pressure / density
Standard quantity calculation
480 to 661
Recipes
Product / batch deliveries
Parameters List Overview - Figure 6 - 2a

Section 6 - 9
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.2
Group
Name
Used For
662 to 672
Data communications
Logging / terminal automation system
679 to 695
Operator data view (programmable)
696 to 710
Data logging
Reports to printer
711 to 799
Blending
Product blending control
800 to 817
Additive pump and block valve control
818 to 833
LPG/pressure
LPG pressure control
834 to 902
Transaction storage
Allocate storage for transaction and batch loading

data
920 to 982
Transaction ticket
Format control for user defined transaction tickets
983 to 991
Analog inputs
v2 CPU board calibration for 4-20 mA and RTD
Parameters List Overview (continued) - Figure 6 - 2b
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 10
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.2
How to Use the Program Code List
When the list of program code numbers is too long to list,

the actual first number and the actual last number are
shown with ellipsis to indicate the missing numbers.
(Example: nnn / ... / nnn.)
The vertical columns in the tables indicate the different

sub-groups of parameters and the actual program code
number that can be obtained from the corresponding table.
The list of program codes on the remaining pages in this section

is divided into groups as they appear in the Setup Menu.
#
The tables in each section summarize each group of

program codes in the left-hand column and show the
possible Range/Option and Default settings in the righthand column.
Some program code groups are sub-divided into several

tables for ease of reading.
A detailed description of each program code is located

below the corresponding table.
If a program code number is unique, that number is used.

If several program code numbers are used to identify
different devices, components, or additives, each number
is separated by a / (slash).
Example: If only one flow meter is specified by program

code 050 Number of meters, the program codes related to
flow meter 1 (051 to 052) are displayable and program
codes 054 to 062 for flow meters 2, 3, and 4 are not
displayable.
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 11
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.3
Security Parameters
PC# / Function
(Six Users)
Range <Default> OR Option (* = Default)
001 / 004 / 007 / 010 / 013 / 016 Passcode
0 to 999999999
<6000> (001 only)
002 / 005 / 008 / 011 / 014 / 017 User ID
1 to 16 characters
<DanLoad 6000> (002 only)
003 / 006 / 009 / 012 / 015 / 018 Supervisor privilege
0 Yes * (003 only)

1 No
Program Code Definitions (001 to 024 Security Parameters) __________________________________________
Section 6 - 12
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.3
Security Parameters (continued)
Security parameters contain data which defines access passcodes

and access privileges for selecting menu options and changing
parameter values. Security parameters do not affect operation in
the Loading Mode which is active during batch deliveries. Up to
eight users / operators, each with unique access privileges, can
be defined. Passcodes should be maintained and recorded by a
supervisor-privileged user.
If all supervisor-privileged
passcodes are lost of forgotten, it will not be possible to access
the DanLoad 6000. A randomly-generated emergency
passcode is available from Daniel Customer Service. The
DanLoad 6000 is shipped from the factory with the security
parameters for User 1 set to the following default values /
selections.
001
Passcode
6000
002
User ID
DanLoad 6000
003
Supervisor privilege
Yes
001 / ... / 016 Passcode

This program code assigns a numeric value (one to nine digits)
that is used as a unique passcode for the user. Duplicate
passcodes, except for zero (which is not a valid passcode), are
not permitted. A minimum of one passcode must be non-zero.
002 / ... / 017 User ID

This program code assigns an alpha-numeric entry (Up to sixteen
characters) that is used to identify the user / operator with a
meaningful name. (Example: Operator # 1, John Jones, or
similar)
Section 6 - 13
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.3
Security Parameters (continued)
003 / ... / 018 Supervisor privilege
This program code enables or disables supervisor privilege for the

corresponding user.
The corresponding user has supervisor privilege disabled and can

access only the following menu options:
Yes
The corresponding user has supervisor privileges and thus has

access to all program mode menu options including
Setup/Security parameters in order to perform passcode
maintenance.
No
Alarm reset
Reprint transaction
Reprint cutoff
Section 6 - 14
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 15
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
Unit Parameters
Function
023 Side stream Blending
Yes "Side" stream blending enabled

No "Side" Stream blending disabled *
024 Sequential proportional
Yes - Side stream sequential blending performed using in-line

proportional blending logic
No - "Side" Stream sequential blending performed using in-line
non-proportional logic *
025 Operating mode
0 Auto (* for automation systems)

1 Manual (* for local control systems)
026 Unit type
0
1
2
3
4
027 Valve type
0 Std digital *
1 Std 2-stage
2 Stem sw.
028 Language
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Seq. (auto) (* for sequential unit types)

Seq. (manual)
In-line (* for in-line unit types)
Off-rack (not used)
Dispenser
English *
English 2
Spanish
German
Portuguese
Dutch
French
Norwegian
8 Slovak
9 Polish
10 Macedonian
11 Italian
12 Greek
13 Malay
14 Russian
15 Croatian
16 Vietnamese
Program Code Definitions (023 to 047 Unit Parameters) ______________________________________________
Section 6 - 16
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Function
029 Product units
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Off
Bbl
Dek
L
Gal *
lbs
kgs
Section 6 - 17
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
Unit Parameters (continued)
Note: The default for Unit Type is dependent on options specified

during initial setup.
Unit Parameters contain data which defines various general
operating characteristics of the DanLoad 6000.
025 Operating mode

This program code selects the operating mode of the DanLoad
6000 for interaction with a terminal automation system. The data
logging feature operates in the Manual mode, only. Data logging
is not available in the Auto mode. The operating modes are:
023 Side stream blending

#
Auto
This program code enables or disables the side stream blending.

A terminal automation system maintains bi-directional
communications with the DanLoad 6000 and performs
monitoring and control of the batch delivery operations.
If used, program code 343 Auto/manual changeover
should be CLOSED to select this option.
024 Sequential proportional

This program code specifies whether the blend of side stream
component and primary component is performed as an in-line
proportional blend or an in-line non-proportional blend. This
program code is applicable only when the DanLoad is configured
for sequential blending for primary components.
Manual
A terminal automation system can maintain bi-directional
communications with the DanLoad 6000 and performs
monitoring of the batch delivery operations. Control
functions issued from the terminal automation system are
not accepted by the DanLoad 6000. If used, program
code 343 Auto/manual changeover should be OPEN to
select this option.
Section 6 - 18
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
026 Unit type

This program code selects the method of controlling batch
deliveries. The options are:
Off-rack
Not used.
Seq. (auto)
#
Sequential blending is performed.
One to four
components are loaded sequentially, one at a time. The
block valves are controlled automatically.
Dispenser
A dispenser inherits most of the characteristics of an inline blender. However, the following differences from an
in-line blender should be noted:
Seq. (manual)
- The STOP key stops and ends a batch.
Sequential blending is performed.
One to four
components are loaded sequentially, one at a time. The
operator is prompted to open and close block valves.
In-line
- A primary or secondary alarm stops and ends a batch.

Note: A single component DanLoad 6000 can be either a
sequential or in-line unit type depending on which other
characteristics of these unit types are of interest.
In-line proportional or in-line non-proportional blending

(depending on recipe configuration) is performed. One or
more components are loaded simultaneously with each
component flow measured by a separate flow meter and
controlled by a separate digital flow control valve.
Section 6 - 19
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
027 Valve type

This program code selects the flow control valve (FCV) type used
in the system. All flow control valves in the system must be the
same type.
#
Std digital
The flow control valve is a standard digital type. The
flow rate is automatically adjusted to match a setpoint
value. The DanLoad 6000 can lock the flow rate at
configured values for the best possible accuracy.
Stem sw.
The flow control valve is a 2-stage type with stem
switches providing inputs to the DanLoad 6000 to control
low flow start and stop (program codes 294 and 295 for
valve 1, etc.). The flow rates achieved are a function of
switch adjustment and line pressure. The unit type
(program code 026) should be set to Seq. (Auto) or
Seq. (Manual) and initial flow time (program code 049)
should be 0.
Std 2-stage
The flow control valve is a standard 2-stage type. This
valve type can also be used to control simple on-off
valves. The flow rates achieved are a function of line
pressure.
Section 6 - 20
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

028 Language
This program code selects the language used for the Loading
Display and data logging.
#
#
English
English 2
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Spanish
German
Portuguese
Dutch
French
Norwegian
Slovak
Polish
Macedonian
Italian
Greek
Malay
Russian
Croatian
Vietnamese
Slovenian
(See notes following list on message

codes.)
(Data logging in English)

(Data logging - no accented characters)
Section 6 - 21
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
English2 in the list above has message numbers appended to

permit the use of printed code translation card for other
languages. In v5.70, the message number for the Flow rate too
high message was changed from 15 to 6. All available message
codes are shown below:
01 Enter passcode
02 Invalid passcode
03 Enter preset volume _STR
04 Press START when ready or STOP cancel
05 Load in progress
06 Flow rate too high meter X
07 Batch started - testing display
08 Line pack delay
09 Memory check failure
10 Valve closed early meter X
11 Invalid entry - more than maximum
12 Invalid entry - less than minimum
13 Side not authorized
14 Please wait
15 Safety Circuit 1 message
16 Safety Circuit 2 message
17 Flow rate too low meter X
18 Unable to close valve meter X
19 Timed-out - no flow detected meter X
20 Unauth. flow exceeds limit meter X

21 Safety circuit 3 message
22 Additive X failure
23 Pulse security error meter X
24 Temperature failure meter X
25 Safety circuit 4 message
26 Density failure component X
27 Component X block valve not closed
28 Data logging memory full
29 Pressure failure meter X
30 Comms failure channel X
31 Unable to maintain blend
32 Ramping up to high flow rate
33 Ramping down to low flow rate
34 Shutting valve
35 Use arrow keys and SELECT
36 Additive #
37 Not available
38 Opening block valve
39 Invalid recipe (percentages)
40 Open block valve - press ENTER
41 Close block valve - press ENTER
42 Primary or secondary display failure
43 Supervisor passcode required
44 Original passcode required
Section 6 - 22
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
45 Power failure
46 Storage memory full
47 Maximum batches on transaction
48 Unable to ramp down
49 MPMC X failure
50 Calibration failure meter X
51 Intermediate level input
Bbl
The product units are barrels.
Dek
The product units are dekaliters.
L
The product units are liters.
029 Product units
Gal
The product units are U.S. gallons.
lbs
The product units are pounds.
kgs
The product units are kilograms.
This identifies the product (component) units so that conversions

can be made when necessary. In particular, converting additive
volumes to cubic centimeters (during additive calibration) and
external additive units (during loading). The nominal K-factor in
the Factors setup group specifies the number of pulses per unit of
product. The product units should typically be set to the units in
which the K-factor is specified. For example, if the K-factor is in
pulses per U.S. gallon, then the product units should be Gal.
The default value is Gal.
See also: Gross and standard product unit mnemonics (program

code 217 and 218).
Off
Undetermined units. (Not recommended)
Section 6 - 23
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
Function
030 Number of data items
0 to 5 <0>
031 #1 Prompt for data item #1
32 characters <Enter data item #1>
036 Prompt time-out (s)
0 to 9999 <60>
037 Check display
0 Off *
1 Start
2 Start/Restart
Section 6 - 24
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
030 Number of data items
This program code sets the number of data prompts in the general
format Enter data item #1__________, displayed in the message
line of the display panel. These prompts allow the operator to
enter up to five numbers of up to eight digits each number,
before the first preset quantity is entered in the Loading Display,
i.e. prior to authorization of the transaction. The data items can
be printed on the Batch Summary, Transaction Summary and
Transaction Ticket data logs. If the DanLoad 6000 is in a
terminal automation system network, the data items can be
transmitted to the DanLoad 6000 from the terminal automation
system in the Authorize Transaction command (refer to Comms
Spec, part number ___________) for accounting purposes. Data
item entries are not validated and do not affect the operation of
the DanLoad 6000.
This program code contains the message to be displayed for data

item prompt # 2. The default message is Enter data item #2
which can be modified to a more descriptive prompt.
Example: Enter invoice number:

Example: Enter driver number:

Example: Enter order number:

Example: Enter trailer number:
Section 6 - 25
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
037 Check display

Example: Enter permit number:
This program code selects the method of verifying the operation

of the display panel. The area of the display that is used to
display the large digits of the batch-loaded quantity is
momentarily darkened then lightened to verify that all pixels that
form the digits are displayable. The current batch-loaded quantity
is automatically re-displayed after completion of the test.
036 Prompt time-out (s) (0 to 9999)

#
The time allowed for various operations in loading mode in the
manual operating mode, i.e.
- Prompting for a data item.
- Prompting for a preset quantity. (Enter preset quantity.)
- Prompting to start or restart a batch. (Press START when
ready or STOP to cancel.)
- Prompting for an additive selection, i.e. the additive selection
screen. (See program code 136.)
- Ending a transaction with no batch in progress. (See program
code 839.) The time-out is not used in program mode.
Typically, the automation system controls the time-out in the
automatic operating mode. (Refer to the DanLoad 6000
Communications Specification for details.) Zero disables the
time-out. The default value is 60 seconds.
Off
Disable display panel check function.
Start
When a batch delivery is initially started, perform the
display check after displaying Press START when ready
or STOP to cancel on the message line while in the
Loading Mode.
Section 6 - 26
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
Start/Restart
When batch delivery is initially started or subsequently
restarted, perform the display check after displaying Press
START when ready or STOP to cancel on the message
line while in the Loading Mode.
Section 6 - 27
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
Function
038 Date format
0 mm/dd/yy *
1 dd/mm/yy
2 yy/mm/dd
039 Date separator
0 / (slash) *
1 . (dot)
2 - (stroke)
040 Decimal separator
0 . (dot) *
1 , (comma)
041 Display data rate
0
1
2
3
4
5
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
28800 bps *
Section 6 - 28
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
038 Date format
This program code selects the format of the date for display, date
entry, and logging purposes. Selections are indicated in the
table. Displayed / printed ranges are: month - 01 to 12, day - 01
to 31, year - 00 to 99.
This program code selects the character used to separate the

whole part and fractional part of a real number.
#
<dot>
mm/dd/yy
<comma>
dd/mm/yy
yy/mm/dd
041 Display data rate
039 Date separator

This program code selects the character used to separate the
month, day, and year components of the date.
#
<slash>
<dot>
<hyphen>
This program code selects the rate that data is transferred from the
processor to the local and remote display panels. Data to / from
the display panel is on a dedicated RS-422 serial link. This link
is normally operated at 28800 bps. If data errors are observed,
the data speed may be reduced. Operation at reduced data speed
should only be necessary in cases where a display panel is
located a long distance from the CPU board.
Section 6 - 29
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
Function
042 Transaction #
0 to 9999 <9999>
043 Batch #
0 to 9999 <9999>
044 Additive units
0
1
2
3
045 Round method
0 Trunc
1 Up *
2 Up/odd
1 to 4 <4>
047 Batches/transaction
0 to 10000 <0>
cc *
in3
Gal
L
Section 6 - 30
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
042 Transaction #
044 Additive units
This program code indicates the sequence number of the current

active transaction if one is in progress. If a transaction is not
currently in progress, this parameter indicates the sequence
number of the last completed transaction.
This program code selects the engineering units for display and
printout of additive injection volumes. (Internal engineering units
depend on the configured additive injection method.)
#
cc
0.0 to 9999999.99 cubic centimeters
in3
0.0 to 9999999.99 cubic inches

Internal calculation:
Vol(in3) = Vol(cc) / 16.387064
Gal
0.0 to 99999.9999 US gallons

Vol(Gal) = Vol(cc) / 3785.412
0.0 to 99999.9999 liters

Vol(L) = Vol(cc) / 1000
043 Batch #
This program code indicates the sequence number of the current
batch loading operation if one is in progress. If a batch loading
operation is not currently in progress, this parameter indicates the
sequence number of the last completed batch loading operation.
Section 6 - 31
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
045 Round method
This program code selects the method for rounding the displayed
and printed meter and component quantities to whole numbers.
This program code defines the number of decimal places to use

when displaying and printing density or gravity.
Trunc, i.e. truncate
Value Format
Discard accumulated fractions (tenths) of a quantity.
1
2
3
4
Up
IF fractional accumulation is GREATER THAN OR
EQUAL TO xxxxx.5, add 1 to the whole units
accumulation and discard the fractional accumulation.
Up/odd
IF whole units accumulation is even AND IF fractional
(tenths) accumulation is GREATER THAN xxxxx.5,
add 1 to the whole units accumulation. IF whole units
accumulation is odd AND IF fractional (tenths)
accumulation is GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO
xxxxx.5, add 1 to the whole units accumulation.
Typical Use
xxxx.x density in kg/m3

xxx.xx API gravity
xx.xxx
x.xxxx density in g/cm3, relative density or specific
gravity
Warning
The density /gravity (program code 46) scale must be entered
appropriately for the density/gravity units and CTL/SPL options
being used.
This must be set carefully since the density/gravity scale is also
used for mass computation. See Mass adjustment (program codes
068 / 071 / 074 / 077).
Section 6 - 32
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.4
This program code defines the maximum number of batches that
can be grouped into each transaction. The message Maximum
batches on transaction is displayed when an attempt is made to
enter the preset quantity for a further batch. The default value 0
indicates that the number batches per transaction is unlimited.
Section 6 - 33
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.5
Valve Parameters
Function
048 Number of valves
1 to 4 <1>
049 Initial flow time (s)
0 to 9.999 < 0.200>
Valve Parameters select the configuration of the flow control

valves.

This program code defines the time (in seconds) during which
each flow control valve remains in its initial state as defined by
its Open method (program codes 115 / 119 / 123 / 127).
This program code sets the number of flow control valves in the
system. A minimum of one flow control valve must be defined.
Program Code Definitions (048, 049 Valve Parameters) _______________________________________________
Section 6 - 34
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Program Code Definitions (048, 049 Valve Parameters) _______________________________________________
Section 6 - 35
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.6
Meter Parameters
PC# / Function
(Four Meters)
1 to 4 <1>
051 / 054 / 057 / 060 Meter ID
5 characters <M1>
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve
1 to number of valves
<depends on initial setup choices>
053/056/059/062 Side Stream Meter (Ethanol

Meter)
0 to 4 < 0 >
0 No Side Stream meter
063 Midgrade Primary blend stream meter

(Midgrade Gasoline Meter)
0 to 4 < 0 >
0 No Side Stream meter
Program Code Definitions (050 to 063 Meter Parameters) _____________________________________________ Section 6 - 36
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.6
Meter Parameters (continued)
Meter Parameters contain data which defines from one to four

flow meters. The first parameter in the group, program code 050
Number of meters, sets the total number of component flow
meters in the system. Additive meters are configured separately.
The remaining parameters are organized in groups related to each
flow meter.
052 / 055 / 058 / 061 Valve

This program code identifies the flow control valve that controls
flow through this meter. Note that two meters can use the same
flow control valve.
053 / 056 / 059 / 062 "Side" Stream Meter (Ethanol Meter)

This program code sets the total number of flow meters used in
the system. A minimum of one flow meter must be defined.
051 / 054 / 057 / 060 Meter ID

This program code identifies the flow meter for display and
logging purposes.
These program codes specify the meter number used as a Side

Stream Meter.
For example, assume meter 1 as the primary premium blend
stream meter used for loading Premium and measures the blend
of Premium and Ethanol. Meter 2 as the primary regular blend
stream meter used for loading Regular and measures the blend of
Regular and Ethanol. Meter 3 as the side stream meter for
measuring the Ethanol component volume.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.6
Meter Parameters (continued)
Program code 053, 056, 059, and 062 correspond respectively to

preset meters 1, 2, 3, and 4 set in PC 051, 054, 057, and 060. In
the above example meter 1 (PC 051) measures the combined
blend volume of both the Premium component and the Ethanol
component, and meter 2 (PC 054) measures the combined blend
volume of both the Regular component and the Ethanol
component, Meter 3 (PC 057) measures only the Ethanol volume.
For example, meter 1 is for Premium, meter 2 is for Regular and

meter 3 is for Ethanol. Set program code value to 1 if the
Premium meter (meter 1) is used to pass the Ethanol for
Midgrade product (Blending of Premium, Regular and Ethanol)
As an example, the user sets program code 053 = 3, 056 = 3, and

059=0. This configuration indicates that the Ethanol measured by
Meter 3 is passing through the Premium meter 1 (053) and
through the Regular meter 2 (056). Meter 3 (059) is not being
used to measure a final delivered flow, however the volume being
measured by meter 3 flows though meter 1 or meter 2.
063 Midgrade Primary blend stream meter (Midgrade
Gasoline Meter)
This program code defines the meter number where the side
stream (Ethanol stream) passes through in case of more than two
product blending.
Note: This program code is applicable only when DanLoad 6000
is configured for inline blending.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.7
Component Parameters
PC # / Function
(Four Components)
1 to 4 <1>
066 / 069 / 072 / 075 Component ID
16 characters <Component #1>
067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter
0 to number of meters
068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment
0.000000 to 999.999999 <0.000000>
<depends on
choices made
during initial
setup>
Program Code Definitions (065 to 077 Component Parameters) ________________________________________ Section 6 - 39
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.7
Component Parameters (continued)
Component Parameters contain data which defines from one to

four liquid components. The first parameter in the group,
program code program code 065 Number of components, sets the
total number of components for the system. The remaining
parameters are organized in groups of three parameters related to
each component.
067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter
068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment
This program code sets the number of liquid components used in

the system. A minimum of one component must be defined.
This program code sets the components mass computation

adjustment factor (1) such that:
This program code identifies the flow meter (1 to 4) used to

measure this component. The entry of a zero (0) disables the
component, making it unavailable for loading. In a sequential
blending application, all components flow through the same
meter, one at a time.
Mass = Std volume x (Density - Buoyancy) x 1

066 / 069 / 072 / 075 Component ID
Warning
This program code identifies the component for display and
logging purposes. For example, during delivery of a sequential
blend, the component currently being loaded is displayed.
Whereas the standard volume is typically similar in magnitude to

the gross volume, i.e. a similar number of units, the mass may be
substantially different from either. Thus, when preset/delivery is
by mass (program code 80), it is recommended that several
"small" batches be loaded to ensure that the DanLoad 6000's
configuration is correct before attempting to preset a full
compartment.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.7
Component Parameters (continued)
Zero disables mass computation. A non-zero value causes the "standard quantity", i.e. the meter, component, batch and running totalizer
standard quantities, to be computed as mass (using the formula above) rather than standard (temperature and/or pressure corrected) volume.
Note: The "meter X std load quantity to 2 decimal places" (data codes 147, 148, etc. per meter) is "std volume" even if the DanLoad 6000
is configured to compute mass. If the preset/delivery type (program code 80) is "Std" and there is more than one standard product unit
per gross product unit, i.e. if mass is larger than volume in magnitude, then the low flow stop quantity (program code 86, etc. per
component) may need to be increased (because the low flow stop quantity is gross or standard quantity depending on the preset/delivery
type). The default mass computation adjustment factor is 0.000000. (Buoyancy is configured via program code 426.)
Some example mass computation adjustment factors are:
Required
Mass
Units
Vol
Units
per K-Factor
Dens
Units
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
L
L
L
L
L
kg/m 3 @T
g/cm 3 @T
r.d. 15C/4C
r.d. 60F/60F
API
0.001000
1.000000
1.000000
0.999012
(141.5 x 0.999012) / ((API - Buoyancy) x (API - Buoyancy + 131.5)),
i.e. a function of the API gravity, e.g. 0.013817 (rounded) for
55.00API
lb
U.S. Gal @60F
r.d. 60F/60F
8.337161 (rounded)
ton
L @T
g/cm 3 @T
0.001000 ** WARNING: DL6000 6000 WILL ROUND TO WHOLE TONS! **, e.g. 5000
L / 4 tons
ton
L @T
kg/m 3 @T
0.000001 ** WARNING: DL6000 6000 WILL ROUND TO WHOLE TONS! **
@T
@T
@15C
@60F
@60F
For example, if your K-Factor is for U.S gallons, your density is in relative density 60F/60F and you wish to compute mass in
lbs, configure the components s to 8.337161.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.8
Delivery Parameters
PC # / Function
(Four Components)
5 to 999999 <3000>
0 to 999999 <50>
0 Gross *
1 Std
0 Gross *
1 Std
082 Stop key action
0 Low flow *
1 Immediate
083 Fall back qty
0 to 99999 <1000>
084 / 090 / 096 / 102 Low flow start qty
0 to 99999 <50>
085 / 091 / 097 / 103 Low flow restart qty
0 to 99999 <20>
086 / 092 / 098 / 104 Low flow stop qty
0 to 99999 <50>
087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s)
0 to 99999 <2>
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s)
0 to 999 <30>
0 to 99 <0>
Program Code Definitions (188 to 111 Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 42
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.8
Delivery Parameters (continued)
Delivery Parameters contain data which define the batch delivery

characteristics. The first six parameters in the group, program
code 078 to 083 are global parameters that are applicable to all
batch deliveries. The remaining parameters are organized in
groups of six parameters related to each component. Delivery
Parameters provide a unique profile for fine tuning the delivery
of each component.

This program code sets the maximum quantity (gross or standard,
depending on the preset/delivery type), that can be preset in a
single batch. This must be greater than or equal to the minimum
preset quantity, program code 079.

This program code sets the minimum quantity (gross or standard,
depending on the preset/delivery type), that can be delivered in a
single batch. A batch cannot be started or restarted if the
remaining quantity is less than the minimum preset quantity.
This must be less than or equal to the maximum preset quantity,
program code 078 Maximum preset qty. The default value is 50.
The special value zero (0) bypasses preset quantity entry, i.e. the
maximum preset quantity is entered automatically when a batch
is authorized, and the operator need only press "START" to start
the batch; the operator should press "STOP" followed by
"ALT"+"ENTER" (within one second) in order to enter program
mode. The special value one (1) suggests, i.e. automatically pretypes in large digits, the maximum preset quantity as the preset
quantity, and the operator can press "ENTER" to preset the
maximum preset quantity or "CLEAR" to enter a smaller preset
quantity.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.8
It is possible to preset and deliver by gross quantity, but to

display "Loaded" by gross or standard quantity. Similarly, it is
possible to preset and deliver by standard quantity, but to display
"Loaded" by gross or standard quantity. However, the
"Remaining" quantity is always the preset quantity minus the
loaded quantity (gross or standard). This is controlled by the
following two program codes.
This program code selects the quantity used for preset, loaded,
and remaining quantities. Ramp up to high flow rate is always
based on gross quantity. Ramp down to low flow rate and flow
control valve closure is based on the quantity specified by this
parameter.
#
This program code selects the quantity used for display purposes.
#
Gross
Display quantity based on gross quantity calculation.
Std
Display quantity based on standard quantity calculation.
Gross
Delivered quantity based on gross quantity calculation.
Std
Delivered quantity based on standard quantity calculation,
i.e. net volume or mass.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.8
082 Stop key action
083 Fall back qty
This program code selects the method used to suspend a batch

delivery operation after the STOP key is pressed. (Note: The
STOP key function should not be used for an emergency
shutdown because the power to the permissive circuits is not
removed by this function.)
This program code sets the quantity (gross or standard, depending

on the unit type and preset/delivery type), to deliver at a fall back
flow rate before the DanLoad 6000 attempts to ramp up flow rate
to the next higher flow rate, i.e. recovery from fall back. A fall
back quantity greater than or equal to the maximum preset
quantity (largest batch) disables this feature.
Low flow
Ramp to low flow rate before finally closing the flow
control valve to stop all flow while keeping the pump
running. This method of shutdown prevents hydraulic
shock in the piping system. (Note: The 086 / 092 / 098
/ 104 Low flow stop qty is not delivered during this
method of shutdown.)
Immediate
Close the flow control valve and stop the pump
immediately. This method of shutdown may cause
hydraulic shock in the piping system.
Preset/delivery type:
Gross
Preset/delivery type:
Standard
Sequential
Unit type
Recovery from fall

back is by gross
quantity
Recovery from fall

back is by standard
quantity
In-line
Unit type
Recovery from fall

back is by gross
quantity
Recovery from fall

back is by gross
quantity

This program code sets the quantity to deliver before controlling
the flow control valve to increase the flow rate to the high flow
rate.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.8

087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s)

This program code sets the quantity to deliver before controlling
the flow control valve to increase the flow rate to the high flow
rate after restarting a suspended batch delivery and after the initial
program code 084 / 090 / 096 / 102 Low flow start volume has
been delivered. The default value is 20 units. Can also be used
for multiple component sequential blending applications; see
program code 219.
This program code sets the time between starting the pump for
this component and opening the flow control valve when a batch
is started or restarted. The default value is 2 seconds.
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s)

This program code sets the time between terminating flow
through the meter and de-energizing the pump for this
component.
086 / 092 / 098 / 104 Low flow stop qty

This program code sets the quantity (gross or standard depending
on the preset/delivery type) to deliver at the low flow rate or stop
rate before all flow is stopped. The default value is 50 units.
(Note: If this quantity is set to a very low value, the DanLoad
6000 may not be able to stabilize the flow rate during delivery of
the Low flow stop quantity. If this happens, the control value
closure quantity cannot be accurately computed and the preset
target volume will be missed.) It should be remembered that flow
control valves that operate using line pressure typically close
more slowly when line pressure is low.

This program code sets the time between opening the component
block valve and opening the component flow control valve during
startup. The component block valve is closed after flow has been
terminated by the flow control valve, or when a primary alarm is
raised.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.8
PC # / Function
108 Ramp clicks
0 to 999 <30>
0 to 999 <30>
0 to 9999 <10>
1 to 4 <1>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.8
108 Ramp clicks
This program code selects the maximum number of attempts

(flow control valve solenoid clicks) to increase flow rate to a
higher flow rate before halting attempts and maintaining current
or fall back flow rate.
This program code defines (by component number) the primary

component of a blend which is used to determine a blend error if
the Blend error method (program code 722) is Grsqtydiff or
Stdqtydiff. In this case there must be a non-zero percentage of the
primary component in every recipe. This program code is also
used for line flushing at the end of a delivery, in which case the
highest octane component is usually defined to be the primary
component.

This program code selects the maximum number of attempts
(flow control valve solenoid clicks) to maintain flow rate before
halting attempts and going to a lower fall back flow rate.

This program code selects the time delay between the load stop
and deenergizing the additive pump outputs (program code 800
/ 802 / 804 / 806 / 808 / 810 Pump output).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.9
Digital Valve Parameters
PC # / Function
(Four Digital Valves)
112 / 116 / 120 / 124 Low flow % error
2 to 10 <5>
113 / 117 / 121 / 125 High flow % error
2 to 10 <2>
114 / 118 / 122 / 126 Maint click

adjustment
0.000 to 0.500 <0.040>
115 / 119 / 123 / 127 Open method
0 Normal *
1 Opened
2 Closed
Program Code Definitions (112 to 127 Digital Valve Parameters) ______________________________________
Section 6 - 50
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.9
Digital Valve Parameters (continued)
Digital Valve Parameters contain data which defines the method

for controlling the operation of digitally operated flow control
valves. The parameters are organized in groups of four
parameters related to each digital flow control valve.
Digital Valve Parameters are not applicable to other types of flow
control valves selected by program code 027 Valve type.
112 / 116 / 120 / 124 Low flow % error

This program code sets the percentage of difference in the actual
low flow rate and the programmed low flow rate (setpoint)
allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to the
flow control valve. This program code defines the deadband and
is only in effect when the low flow rate is established and not in
effect when the flow rate is changing to the low flow rate during
startup or shutdown. The suggested value is 5 percent. Higher
values may affect measurement accuracy since the flow rate will
be allowed to vary over a wider range without being controlled.
113 / 117 / 121 / 125 High flow % error

This program code sets the percentage of difference in the actual
high flow rate and the programmed high flow rate (setpoint)
allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to the
flow control valve. A high flow rate is any flow rate greater
than the low flow start rate or the stop rate. This program code
defines the deadband and is only in effect when the high flow
rate is established and not in effect when the flow rate is
increasing to the high flow rate setpoint during startup. The
suggested value is 2 percent. Higher values may affect
measurement accuracy since the flow rate will be allowed to vary
over a wider range without being controlled.
WARNING
Increasing the low or high flow deadbands may reduce
measurement accuracy since product may not flow out at the
same flow rate each time a batch is loaded.
Section 6 - 51
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.9

#
Normal
114 / 118 / 122 / 126 Maint click adjustment (s)

This program code sets the time that is added to the base times
that the valve control solenoids are toggled on (to increase the
flow rate) and toggled off (to decrease the flow rate) during
flow rate maintenance. The base times are 20 milliseconds to
increase the flow rate and 40 milliseconds to decrease the flow
rate. The default value is 0.040 seconds, i.e. 60 milliseconds to
increase the flow rate and 80 milliseconds to decrease the flow
rate. Decrease this value if flow-rate maintenance adjustments
cause the flow rate to oscillate above and below the required flow
rate. Increase this value if flow-rate maintenance adjustments do
not significantly change the flow rate. Use increments of 0.01
seconds, i.e. 10 milliseconds.
Flow control valve solenoid 2 is energized during program code

049 Initial flow time. (Note: The flow control valve may or may
not crack open during the initial flow time depending on the
orifice sizes exposed by solenoids 1 and 2, and the upstream
pressure provided by the pump.)
Opened
Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are energized

during program code 049 Initial flow time. (Note: The
component flows during the initial flow time as the valve tries to
become fully open.)
115 / 119 / 123 / 127 Open method

This program code sets the method for controlling the flow
control valve during the time specified by program code 049
Initial flow time. (Note: This feature is intended for use in multicomponent blending systems. The purpose is to allow a
component with low pumping pressure to start flowing before
other components with higher pumping pressure.)
Section 6 - 52
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.9
Closed
Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are deenergized

during program code 049 Initial flow time. (Note: The
component does not flow during initial flow time. This effectively
increases the line-pack delay. See program codes 087 / 093 / 099
/ 105.)
Section 6 - 53
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.10
Pulse Per Unit Outputs
PC # / Function
128 Number of pulse per unit outputs
0 to 2 <2> for sequential unit type

<0> for in-line unit type
129 / 132 Control meters
4 characters <GXXX>
(Only G, S and X are valid)
130 / 133 Factor
0.1 to 10.0 <1.0>
131 / 134 Pulse width (ms)
10 to 87 <20>
Program Code Definitions (128 to 134 Pulse per Unit Outputs) _________________________________________ Section 6 - 54
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.10
Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)
Pulse Per Unit Outputs contains data which define the method of
processing pulsed outputs for each measured product. The first
parameter in the group, program code 128 Number of pulse per
unit outputs, sets the number of pulse per unit outputs that are
assigned to discrete outputs (program codes 313 and 314). The
remaining parameters are organized in groups of three parameters
related to each pulse per unit output. Each output can be setup to
provide different outputs derived from the flow measured through
different flow meters and with different scaling.
Flow through this meter is not used for

determining the control quantity.
Use the gross quantity through this meter for

Use the standard quantity through this meter for

This program code sets the total number of pulse per unit outputs.
(Note: If more than 2 pulse per unit outputs are needed, the
additive ratio outputs: program code 380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392
/ 395 Ratio output with the corresponding program code 140 /
145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty set to 1.0 can be used for
this purpose.)
This program code selects the flow meter or combination of flow

meters and either the gross or standard quantities to drive this
output. Access to internal accumulators for flow meters is
assigned by a one to four character string, one character position
for each flow meter, i.e. the first character specifies the
accumulator for meter 1, the second character specifies the
accumulator for meter 2, etc. The selections for each position in
the string are X, G or S using alphanumeric string-type entry.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.10
Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)
Example:
SXGS
The example shows four character positions which

indicates that four flow meters are defined. The number
of character positions in the string is automatically set to
the number of defined flow meters (program code 050
Number of meters). The 'SXGS' selections specify the
following quantity sum (combination) is used to drive
the assigned discrete output.
meter 1 standard + meter 3 gross + meter 4 standard, do
not sum quantity from meter 2

This program code sets the duration of output ON pulse in ten
millisecond increments. The OFF time is equal to or greater than
the ON time. The default pulse width is 20 milliseconds (20
milliseconds ON / at least 20 milliseconds OFF, a 40
millisecond minimum period which allows a maximum of 25
pulses per second).
20 ms
20 ms
130 / 133 Factor

This program code sets the scale factor for the corresponding
output. A factor of 1.0 causes the output to be pulsed for each
accumulated unit of product. A factor of 0.1 causes the output to
pulse for each one-tenth of an accumulated unit of product. A
factor of 10.0 causes the output to pulse one time for each ten
accumulated units of product.
=20 ms
=20 ms
=20ms
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
Additive Delivery Parameters
PC # / Function
(Six Additives)
135 Number of additives
0 to 6 <0>
136 Selection method
0
1
2
3
4
137 Inject Percentage
0 to 100 <50>
138 Clean line qty
0 to 9999 <0>
External *
Prompt
Inputs
Recipe
Multi Rate
Program Code Definitions (135 to 168 Additive Delivery Parameters) ___________________________________ Section 6 - 58
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function
(Six Additives)
139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Additive control meters
4 characters <GGGG>
(only G, S and X are valid)
140 / 145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty
1 to 9999 <40>
141 / 146 / 151 / 156 / 161 / 166 Injection Method
0
1
2
3
142 / 147 / 152 / 157 / 162 / 167 Volume/pulse or K-factor
0.00 to 9999.99
<0.00>
143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163 168 Additive per 1000
0.0000 to 999999.9999
<0.0000>
Mech *
Handshake
Meter
Control
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
Additive Delivery Parameters contains data which define

automatic control injection of up to six additives into the
delivered product stream. The first four parameters in the group,
program code 135, 136, 137, and 138, define values and
selections that are applicable to all additive deliveries. The
remaining parameters are organized in groups of five parameters
related to each additive.
This program code selects the method for selecting additives

while in the manual mode or if not overridden in the automatic
mode. (Note: Additives can be selected by the Terminal
Automation System via the Authorize Transaction command while
in the automatic mode.
Refer to the Danload 6000
Communications Specification)
This program code sets the number of logical additives to be

controlled and/or measured. There may be one or more logical
additives for each physical additive or additive injector. Each
logical additive has its own batch and running totalizers that can
be displayed in the dynamic data display or printed on various
data logs.
External
All configured (Number of additives) additive ratio
outputs are cycled. An additive can be selected by an
external contact, e.g. an automation system relay or a key
switch can close the circuit from the additive ratio output
to the injector.
Prompt
The local operator is prompted, via the Additive selection
display prior to the start of each transaction, to select the
additives to be injected.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
Inputs
Configured (Number of additives) additive ratio outputs
are cycled only if their corresponding additive selection
inputs are closed during a batch.
Recipe
The additives specified by the last two characters of the
recipe name, entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent of
an additive bit map (see below), are selected
automatically. Multiple additives can be selected per
recipe. The ratio quantity defined in the additive delivery
parameters is used.
Multi Rate
The additives specified by the last two characters of the
recipe name, entered as the 2-digit decimal equivalent of
an additive bit map (see below), are selected
automatically. Multiple additives can be selected per
recipe. The ratio quantity defined in the recipe
parameters (component 4 percentage) is used. For
multiple rates per injector, see Section 3.10.5 for further
explanation.
The default value is External. The decimal equivalent of the

additive bit map for the Recipe and Multi Rate selection
methods is computed by adding together the appropriate values
from the right-hand column of the following table:
Additive #
Value
16
32
For example, if additive 3 is to be injected in recipe 1, then 04

should be entered as the last two characters of recipe 1's name
(program code 481). For additives 2 and 4, 10 would be entered
as the last two characters.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
137 Inject Percentage
138 Clean line qty
This program code selects the percentage of the adjusted additive

ratio cycle at which injection begins, i.e. the ratio output is
switched on. For the Mech, Handshake and Meter
injection methods, injection ends, i.e. the ratio output is switched
off, after 50% of the adjusted additive ratio quantity has been
delivered. For the Control injection method, injection ends, i.e.
the ratio output is switched off, when the appropriate quantity of
additive for the ratio cycle has been metered. The default value
is 50.
This program code sets the additive clean line quantity, i.e. the
gross or standard quantity (depending on the configured
preset/delivery type) of product delivered prior to the end of a
batch during which no additive injection takes place, so that the
next batch is not contaminated with the previous batchs additive.
This value should be at least as large as the volume of the pipe
and loading arm between the point where additive is injected and
the connection to the vehicle.
Setting the inject percent to 100 and the injection method

(program code 141, etc.) to Handshake implements the inject
after ratio quantity control sometimes required for mercaptan
injection.
For example, if the additive ratio quantity is 40 and the clean line
quantity is 50, then for a preset quantity of 1000 the additive ratio
quantity is adjusted to 38 so that the required 25 injection cycles
are completed with 50 units of product remaining to be delivered.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164 Additive control meters
Example:
This program code identifies the product flow meters whose

measured quantities are used to control additive injection cycles
based on the additives ratio quantity. Flow meters are designated
by relative character positions in a one to four-character alpha
string (one character position for each configured flow meter).
The example shows four character positions which

indicates that four flow meters are defined. The number
of character positions in the string is automatically set to
the number of defined flow meters (program code 050
Number of meters). The 'SXGS' selections specify the
following quantity sum (combination) is used to drive
the assigned additive injection output.
meter 1 std + meter 3 gross + meter 4 std, do not sum
quantity from meter 2
Flow through this meter is not used for

Use the gross quantity through this meter for

Use the standard quantity through this meter for

SXGS
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11

#
Mech
140 / 145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165 Ratio qty

Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed dose
per ratio cycle) with feedback. The DanLoad 6000
controls the ratio output (if configured) and totalizes
additive using the volume per pulse on input (if a
feedback input is configured) or on output (if not).
Additive verification is based on the configured required
number of feedback pulses per ratio cycle (program code
247) and the configured additive error limit (program
code 246).
The quantity (possibly a combination of gross and/or standard

quantities through multiple component meters) in product units
(program code 29) which controls one additive injection cycle.
The default value is 40 which is suitable when the product units
are gallons. A value of 100 or 150 is suitable when the product
units are liters.
141 / 146 / 151 / 156 / 161 / 166 Injection Method
The first two injection methods ("Mech" and "Handshake")
totalize additive based on a volume per pulse, and their internal
additive units are cm3. The other two injection methods ("Meter"
and "Control") totalize additive using an additive meter K-factor,
and their internal additive units are the configured product units
(program code 29). For all four injection methods, the DanLoad
6000 converts additive volumes from internal units to external
units (program code 44) for display and printing. Since the
injection method is configured per additive (program codes 141,
146, etc.), one additive can be injected via a simple mechanical
injector ("Mech") while another can be injected and measured via
an additive panel ("Control"). The default value is Mech.
Handshake
Additive injection via a handshake cycle for (mercaptan).
The DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if
configured) based on the ratio cycle and the feedback
input, and totalizes additive using the volume per pulse on
input. Additive verification is based on one feedback
pulse per ratio cycle, the configured additive error limit
(program code 246) and the configured additive feedback
count (program code 247) which is interpreted as a
number of seconds.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
Meter
Additive injection via a mechanical injector (fixed dose
per ratio cycle) with additive meter. The additive meter
should be upstream of the injector cylinder. The
DanLoad 6000 controls the ratio output (if configured)
and totalizes additive using the additive K-factor on input
(if a feedback input is configured). Additive verification
is based on the volume of additive per 1000 of product (if
configured) and the additive per 1000 error limit (program
code 278).
Control
Additive control via an on/off valve (variable dose per
ratio cycle) with additive meter. The DanLoad 6000
controls (by manipulating the on/off valve) the volume of
additive per ratio cycle (unlike the other injection
methods) and totalizes additive using the additive Kfactor on input (if a feedback input is configured).
Additive dose per ratio cycle and verification is based on
the volume of additive per 1000 of product and the
additive per 1000 error limit (program code 278). The
volume of additive per 1000 of product must be
configured for the "Control" injection method.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.11
142 / 147 / 152 / 157 / 162 / 167 Volume/pulse or K-factor
143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163 /168 Additive per 1000
This program code is used for totalizing additive (both authorized

and unauthorized additive flow). This is in internal additive
units. For the Mech and Handshake injection methods it is
the volume per pulse in cm3. For the Meter and Control
injection methods, it is the additive meters K-factor, i.e. pulses
per product unit (Product units per program code 29). An
additive meters nominal K-factor is usually marked on the meter,
and provides a good starting value. The additive meters actual
K-factor can be determined using the additive meter calibration
screen (accessible from the Program Mode menu). Internal
additive units are converted to external additive units for display,
printing and communications via the configured Additive units
(program code 044).
The required volume of additive (in product units specified by

program code 029) per 1000 units of product. When a non-zero
value is configured, the DanLoad 6000 verifies that the volume
of additive is within limits (program codes 272, 273 and 278)
during a batch and calculates the actual percentage of the required
additive per 1000 continuously throughout a batch (data code 239
for additive 1, etc.). Thus, additive volume verification can be
enabled independently of the additive injection method (program
codes 141, 146, etc.). An additive failure alarm is raised if the
measured volume of additive is not within limits during a batch.
This is a primary alarm which stops the batch. It is usually
necessary to correct the problem, end the batch and start a new
batch for the remaining quantity of product.
The default value is 0.00.

Conversions:
1)
Additive PPM = Additive per 1000 x 1000
2)
Additive per 1000 = Additive PPM / 1000
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors
PC # / Function
(Four Components)
1 to 4 <2>
0 Fixed *
1 Linear
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor
0.5 to 2000.0 <23.0>
0.5000 to 2.0000 <1.0000>
173 / 284 / 195 / 206 Stop rate
0 to 99999 <120>
Program Code Definitions (169 to 219 Meter Factor Parameters) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 68
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
Factors contains data which define the flow meter calibration

characteristics for up to four components at up to four different
flow rates for each component. The first two parameters in the
group, program code 169 and program code 170, apply to the
calculation of all factors; the remaining parameters are organized
in groups of three parameters related to each defined component
and groups of two parameters related to each defined flow rate for
that component, thus allowing different components that flow
through the same flow meter. e.g. in a sequential blending
application, to have different meter factors for that meter.
This program code sets the number of meter factors, determined

at different flow rates, available for each flow meter and
component combination. The lowest flow rate, for low flow
startup and shutdown, must be entered first
(Component # factor 1), the highest flow rate must be entered
last (Component # factor 1, 2, 3, or 4).
Each configured flow rate lower than the highest flow rate can be
considered to be a fall back flow rate if the highest flow rate
cannot be achieved or maintained.

[Sequential unit] Number of flow rates at which to control the
flow rate and to calibrate each components meter.
[In-line units] Number of flow rates at which to calibrate each
components meter.
This program code selects the method used to determine the

meter factor used in the flow calculation.
Note: The Meter factor method MUST be set to Fixed during
meter proving.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
Fixed
The meter factor that was determined at a flow rate that is closest
to the current flow rate is used. Fixed is normally selected for
digital flow control valves in single component or sequential
blending loading operations.
#
Linear
The meter factor is calculated by an interpolation process that

uses the meter factors determined at the next highest flow rate and
the next lowest flow rate from the current flow rate. A ratio
between the two flow rates and the corresponding two meter
factors is determined. The current meter factor is calculated
assuming that the meter factor value increments are linear
between the two proved meter factors and based on the current
flow rate and the ratio. Linear is sometimes selected for 2-stage
flow control valves or in-line blending when the meter cannot be
calibrated at every possible flow rate that will be seen. However,
the meter factor method must be set to Fixed during meter
proving.
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor

This program code sets the nominal pulses per product unit
received from the flow meter. The K-factor is sometimes referred
to as the system factor and is usually printed on the flow meter
nameplate. The default value is 23.0 which is the nominal pulses
per gallon for a Daniel 4-inch diameter LR turbine meter. This
entry should always be set to match the K-factor of the actual
flow meter and should not be changed during meter proving. A
K-factor of at least 10 is recommended, and the meter-pulse input
frequency at low flow should not be less than 40 Hz, particularly
if a digital flow control valve is used.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
173 / 184 / 195 / 206 Stop rate
This program code sets the number used internally to verify the
probability of a valid meter factor entry. All meter factors for this
component must be within the percent (set by program code
215 Master MF %) of this value or the meter factor entry is
considered to be out of range. The master meter factor is not used
in flow computations.
This program code defines the flow rate at which this component
is delivered during the components configured low-flow stop
quantity at the end of an in-line batch. Thus, the final closure of
the flow control valve is always from the same flow rate so that
valve closure averaging will work correctly, independent of the
individual component blend percentages in the recipes. This also
means that the overall flow rate at the end of a batch is the sum of
the stop rates of any flowing components. The default value is
120.
Example: Assume program code 215 equals 2.00 (2 %). If this

entry is 1.0000, acceptable meter factors for any of the
corresponding program codes 175 / ... / 214 Component # meter
factor # entries are 0.9800 to 1.0200.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
PC # /Function (Four Components)
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Flow rate 1
0 to 99999 <200>
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Meter factor 1
per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Flow rate 2
0 to 99999 <600>
177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Meter factor 2
per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Flow rate 3
0 to 99999 <0>
179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Meter factor 3
per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Flow rate 4
0 to 99999 <0>
181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Meter factor 4
per PC 215 / PC 216 <1.0000>
215 Master MF %
0.00 to 99.99 <2.00>
216 Adjacent MF %
0.00 to 99.99 <0.25>
217 Gross units mnemonic
6 characters <Gal>
218 Std units mnemonic
6 characters <Gal>
219 Use restart qty
0 No *
1 Yes
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Flow rate 1
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Flow rate 2
This program code sets the value in quantity per minute at which
the meter factor for the low flow rate is established. Engineering
units for flow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling
(program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for the
component. The units entered for this parameter are GPM,
dLPM, LPM, etc.
the meter factor for the high flow rate, or an intermediate flow
rate, is established. Engineering units for flow rates are
determined by the K-factor scaling (program code 171 / 182 /
193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for the component. The units
entered for this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, etc.
177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Meter factor 2
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Meter factor 1

This program code sets the meter factor that is used for the
corresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Flow rate 3
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Flow rate 4
the meter factor for the high flow rate, or an intermediate flow
rate, is established. Engineering units for flow rates are
determined by the K-factor scaling (program code 171 / 182 /
193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for the component. The units
entered for this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, etc.
This parameter sets the value in quantity per minute at which the
meter factor for the high flow rate is established. Engineering
units for flow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling
(program code 171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor) for the
component. The units entered for this parameter are GPM,
dLPM, LPM, etc.
179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Meter factor 3
181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Meter factor 4
This parameter sets the meter factor that is used for the
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
215 Master MF %
216 Adjustment MF %
This program code sets the percentage bandwidth for limit checks
of the individual Component p meter factor f referenced to the
program code 172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter factor. The
default value is 2.00 which limits any program code 175 / ... / 214
Component p meter factor f entry to 2 percent of the
corresponding program code 172 / 183 / 194 / 205 Master meter
factor for the component (meter).
This program code sets the allowable percentage difference

between any two adjacent meter factors. Adjacent meter factors
are:
[program code 175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Component p meter factor
1 and program code 177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Component p meter
factor 2]
factor 1 and program code 179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Component p
meter factor 3]
factor 2 and program code 181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Component p
meter factor 4]
factor 3]
Entering 0.00 disables the validation.
The default value is 0.25 percent.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.12
Factors (continued)
217 Gross units mnemonic
219 Use restart qty
The gross product units mnemonic independent of the configured

product units (program code 29) for display on the loading screen
and printing on data logs. This allow the units mnemonic to be
entered in any language of local abbreviation. Six character
alphanumeric entry. The default value is Gal.
For sequential unit type, this code indicates whether or not a

components low flow restart quantity should be used for starting
up components after loading the first component in the recipes
sequence to load. Select one of the following:
#
Start up each component by loading its low flow start

quantity at its low flow rate.
218 Std units mnemonic

The standard quantity units mnemonic independent of the
configured product units (program code 29) for display on the
loading screen and printing on the data logs. This allows the
units mnemonic to be entered in any language or local
abbreviation. Six character alphanumeric entry. The default
value is Gal.
No
Yes
Start up the first component by loading its low flow start
quantity at its low flow rate. Start up further components
by loading their low flow restart quantities at their low
flow rates. This typically reduces the time required to
load a sequential blend batch.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms
The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that alarm. The four possible alarm actions
are described below. The alarm actions for several alarms are limited to less than four selections. Alarm action for several alarms is fixed
and not selectable. The allowable alarm action selections for each alarm are listed for each alarm parameter.
Alarm Action
Description
Reset
If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended.
A message is displayed on the message line of the display panel.
Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared.
Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are ON.
Alarm discrete output, program code 287 Alarm output 1 is maintained closed (if defined and
enabled by program code 269 Alarm o/p 1 mask). Alarm discrete output program code 379 Alarm
output 2 is maintained closed (if defined and enabled by 270 Alarm o/p 2 mask).
Keypad in program Mode.
If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended. A message
is displayed on the message line of the display panel.
Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary alarm reset time has elapsed.
Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are flashing.
Alarm discrete output, program code 287 Alarm output 1 is pulsed (if defined and enabled by
program code 269 Alarm o/p 1 mask). Alarm discrete output program code 379 Alarm output 2 is
pulsed (if defined and enabled by 270 Alarm o/p 2 mask).
Correct cause of alarm
Info
A message is displayed on the message line of the display panel for ten seconds.
Automatically reset after ten seconds have

elapsed.
Off
Disable monitoring of this alarm.
N/A
Primary
Secondary
Alarm reset discrete input, program code

344 Primary alarm reset (if defined).
Terminal automation system.
Automatically reset after time value in

program code 220 Secondary alarm reset
(s) has elapsed. The batch can be restarted
(Press START when ready or STOP to
cancel) if the remaining quantity is not
less than the min. preset.
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________
Section 6 - 77
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # /Function
0 to 9999 <300>
0
1
2
3
0 to 99999 <100>
5 to 999 <10>
0 Off
1 Info
3 Primary *
0 to 99999 <660>
5 to 999 <10>
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary *
Section 6 - 78
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
Alarms Parameters contain data which defines the conditions that

generate alarms and the method that the DanLoad 6000 responds
to alarms. Multiple alarms can be processed simultaneously.
Alarms are processed in the chronological order that they are
detected. The first parameter, program code 220 Secondary
alarm reset (s), is applicable to all alarms that have the alarm
action set to Secondary. All other alarm parameters are related to
specific alarm actions or limits.
The response to any alarm is handled by a specific alarm action.

There are up to four possible alarm actions for any alarm. In
some cases, the alarm action is permanently set at one option and
cannot be modified. Alarm action selections are located in
relation to associated alarm parameters in the following alarm
tables.
This program code selects the response to a low flow condition.

If Secondary is chosen the batch is stopped without an alarm
being raised if the flow rate falls below the configured minimum
flow rate (program code 222) for the configured low flow time
(program code 223). The default selection is Primary.
This program code sets the elapsed time to allow a secondary

alarm to be active before it is cleared automatically. The default
value is 300 seconds.

This program code sets the value of the minimum flow rate
permitted for the time period set in program code 223 Low flow
time (s) before the low flow alarm is set. The default entry is 100
product units per minute.
Section 6 - 79
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
226
This program code sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at or

less than the flow rate specified by program code 222 Minimum
flow rate before the low flow alarm is set.
This program code sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at or

greater than the flow rate specified by program code 225
Maximum flow rate before the high flow alarm is set.
224
High flow time (s)
This program code selects the response action to a high flow

condition. The default selection is Primary.
225
Maximum flow rate
This program code sets the value of the maximum flow rate
permitted for the time period set in program code 226 High flow
time (s) before the high flow alarm is set. The default entry is 660
product units per minute. (Note: Set this value slightly greater
than the highest expected flow rate through any single meter.
This setting enables the DanLoad 6000 to detect loss of control
of a flow control valve and alarm the condition.)
Section 6 - 80
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 81
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0.0 to 99.9 <2.0>
0 Off *
3 Primary
0.0 to 99.9 <5.0>
0
1
2
3
231 No flow t-o time (s)
1 to 99 <5>
0.0 to 99.9 <10>
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary *
Section 6 - 82
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
230 No flow t-o (time out) alarm action
This program code sets the allowable quantity in excess of the

preset quantity to be delivered before the Unable to close valve
meter # alarm is set.
This program code selects the response to a no flow condition. If

there is no flow through a meter when there should be flow, i.e.
the appropriate flow control valve has been opened, for the
configured no flow time-out time (program code 231). If
Secondary is chosen, the batch is simply stopped without an
alarm being raised The default selection is Primary.

This program code selects the response to an underflow
condition. The default selection is Off.

This program code sets the allowable quantity by which the
loaded quantity can be less than the preset quantity before the
Valve closed early meter # alarm is issued.
WARNING
The no flow alarm is important for detecting meter pulse
stream failures, and should not be disabled without careful
consideration.
It may be necessary to disable the no flow alarm in applications
where the DanLoad 6000 does not operate the flow control valve.
Section 6 - 83
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)

This program code sets the elapsed time to allow for no flow
pulse input to be detected after opening the flow control valve.
The default value is 5 seconds. (Note: This delay can be set to
1 or 2 seconds if detection of a meter pulse input failure or other
cause of the no flow condition must be detected immediately.)
232 Unauthorized flow limit quantity

This program code sets the allowable quantity to be recorded as
unauthorized flow before the Unauthorized flow exceeds limit
meter # primary alarm is issued. The default value is 10 product
units.
If the unauthorized flow quantity is set to something point 1",

e.g. 0.1, 1.1 or 2.1, then a meters unauthorized flow counter (the
internal one that causes the alarm to be raised, not the running
totalizer seen in the dynamic data display or by the automation
system) is cleared whenever the meter is authorized for a batch;
this prevents the unauthorized flow alarm will eventually
happen problem.
With the dual pulse stream pulse security option, the DanLoad
6000 has the ability to eliminate spurious unauthorized flow
pulses that can occur with turbine or PD meters due to vibrational
effects.
Section 6 - 84
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 85
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0 to 255 <0>
0 to 65535 <10000>
The pulse security function provides verification of meter pulse

inputs per API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards,
Chapter 5 - Metering, Section 5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow
Measurement Pulsed-Data Transmission Systems and IP 252,
Part XIII - Fidelity and Security of Measurement-Data
Transmission Systems. This function can only be implemented if
there are two meter pulse train inputs from a single flow meter.
The dual meter pulse inputs must be 90 degrees electrically out of
phase. Turbine meters capable of implementing this function
must have two pick-up coils, 90 degrees electrically out of phase,
and two preamplifiers. Positive displacement meters must have
dual pulse transmitters.
Pulse stream A is used for measuring flow. Pulse stream B
is used for verification and should trail pulse stream A by
around 90 degrees electrically.
A
B
jk_jk_jk_jk_jk_
jk_jk_jk_jk_jk_
))))))))) 6
time
DanLoad 6000 dual pulse security is available per the IP252

level-B standard. This is accomplished by monitoring the two
meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90 89 out of phase.
The algorithm is in the firmware of a Program Logic Device
Integrated Circuit (PLD).
The PLD performs a level B security check while a load is in
progress. The Channel A input stream is sent directly to the CPU
for totalizing the product flow.
Section 6 - 86
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
Channel B is used as a comparison input stream to determine

flow direction and errors. The PLD samples the two input
streams at 6 MHZ and watches for a state transition in either
channel. As soon as one of the channels changes states, the PLD
determines if it was a forward transition. If the change was not a
forward transition, the PLD decrements the error counter by one.
As soon as the error counter reaches zero, the meter board triggers
an interrupt to the CPU which will halt the load.
While in a no load condition, the PLD will set a REV flag if any
reverse state transitions are seen. This will inhibit channel A
output to the CPU. A forward transition will clear the REV flag
and enable channel A output to the CPU on the next forward
transition. This will eliminate any pulses sent by a blade rocking
across a pick-up.
The level-B security-checking PLD is U9 on the 2-Channel Meter
Pulse board or U9 and U10 on the 4-Channel Meter Pulse board.
Possible Pulse Security Inputs

Meter Pulse Boards
Installed
MAX # of Meters
with Pulse Security
one 2-channel
two 2-channel
one 2-channel and one 4-channel
two 4-channel

This program code sets the error count at which a pulse security
alarm occurs. Pulse security checks are performed only when a
load is in progress. This value is used to reload an 8-bit hardware
counter, which generates an interrupt when it counts down to
zero, i.e. error limit exceeded. Zero disables pulse security. The
default value is 0, i.e. no pulse security.
Section 6 - 87
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)

This program code sets the value of raw pulses accumulated
during pulse error checking before resetting the accumulator to
zero. This value defines a window of accumulated raw pulses
that is used to determine if program code 233 Error limit value
is exceeded. A zero entry resets the error count only at the start
of each batch delivery. A value greater than zero indicates that
the accumulated error count will be cleared each time the
accumulated raw pulses equal the entry. This field is not used if
the value of program code 233 Error limit is set to zero.
PC # / Function
0 Info *
3 Primary
0 to 300 <10>
0 to 300 <10>
Section 6 - 88
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
This program code selects the response to a data logging memory

full condition. This condition is caused by failure to print data
logs due to the logging printer being off-line, out of paper, or
some other disabling condition. Around 10 pages of data logs are
spooled to battery-backed memory before the alarm is raised,
and are printed automatically as soon as the problem with the
logging printer is rectified. The default selection is Info.
This program code sets the time-out (in seconds) for the Comms
failure channel B alarm, which is a primary alarm. The alarm is
raised when the DanLoad 6000 is in Auto (program code 25)
and the channels communications mode (program code 668) is
configured for Modbus RTU, i.e. automation system
communications, and the DanLoad 6000 does not receive a query
(with its communications address) on the channel for the
configured number of seconds. The Comms failure channel B
alarm can also be raised in the manual operating mode. See
program code 673. Zero disables the alarm. The default value is
10.

This program code sets the time-out (in seconds) for the Comms
failure channel A alarm, which is a primary alarm. The alarm is
raised when the DanLoad 6000 is in Auto (program code 25)
and the channels communications mode (program code 663) is
configured for Modbus RTU, i.e. automation system
communications, and the DanLoad 6000 does not receive a query
(with its communications address) on the channel for the
configured number of seconds. Zero disables the alarm. The
default value is 10.
Section 6 - 89
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0 Off
1 Info
3 Primary *
-999.9 to 999.9 <-40.0>
-999.9 to 999.9 <110.0>
1 Info
3 Primary *
-9.9999 to 9.9999 <0.0000>
-9.9999 to 9.9999 <0.0000>
0.0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
0.0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
1 to 99 <3>
247 Additive Feedback count
0 to 9999 <0>
0 to 99 <10>
Section 6 - 90
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
This program code sets the temperature to use (live or backup)

and selects the response to a temperature out-of-range condition.
Live temperature refers to temperature read from an RTD input.
Backup temperature refers to a value in Setup.
This program code sets the minimum allowable process

temperature input from an RTD before the Temperature failure
meter # alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified by
program code 427 Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheit
or degrees Celsius). The default value is -40.0 degrees.
Off
Use backup temperature from program code 434 / 437 /
440 / 443 backup temperature entry.
Info
Use live temperature if in limits of program code 239
Minimum temperature and program code 240 Maximum
temperature else use program code 434 / 437 / 440 / 443
Backup temperature.

This program code sets the maximum allowable process
temperature input from an RTD before the Temperature failure
meter # alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified by
program code 427 Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheit
or degrees Celsius). The default value is +110.0 degrees.
Primary
Use live temperature only and halt loading if it is out of
limits set by program code 239 Minimum temperature and
program code 240 Maximum temperature.
Section 6 - 91
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
location in this field is dependent on the setting in program code

046 Density/gravity scale.
This program code selects the response to a process density input

out of range condition. The default selection is Primary.
This program code sets the minimum allowable process density
input from a densitometer before the Density failure component
# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on the
selection of program code 432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature
option corresponding to the component. The decimal point
location in this field is dependent on the setting in program code
046 Density/gravity scale.
This program code sets the minimum allowable process pressure

input from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failure
meter # alarm is issued. Refer to Section 4.5.1 Alarm Messages
for possible minimum pressure failure causes.

This program code sets the maximum allowable process pressure
input from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failure
meter # alarm is issued. Refer to Section 4.5.1 Alarm Messages
for possible maximum pressure failure causes.
This program code sets the maximum allowable process density

input from a densitometer before the Density failure component
# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on the
selection in program code 432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature
option corresponding to the component. The decimal point
Section 6 - 92
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
For the Mech and Handshake injection methods this is the

maximum number of pulses by which the actual feedback pulse
count can differ from the ideal feedback pulse count before an
additive failure alarm is raised. The ideal feedback pulse count
is based on the additive feedback count (program code 247), or is
1 for the Handshake injection method (independent of
configuration). The default value is 3.
This program code sets the time period allowed for any
component block valve to close. The default value is 10 seconds.

This program code sets the expected number of feedback pulses
per additive ratio cycle for the Mech additive injection method,
e.g. 1 for Titan PAC-3 confirmation pulse, 2 for Hyrolec
injector. The number of seconds within which the additive
feedback input must go on and off again after the additive ratio
output has been energized for the Handshake additive injection
method, e.g. 5 (per Mapco). The default value is 0.
Section 6 - 93
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0
1
2
3
250 #1 <message>
Up to 32 characters
<Ground detector open>
0
1
2
3
252 #2 <message>
Up to 32 characters
<Overspill detector open>
0
1
2
3
254 #3 <message>
Up to 32 characters
<Permissive power failure>
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary
Primary *
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Section 6 - 94
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
Safety Circuit Alarm Action
Note: Refer to Section 4.5.1 for alarm message and alarm action
configuration.
Alarm program codes 249 to 268 define the operation of eight
configurable safety circuit inputs (permissive circuits). All eight
safety circuits are configurable to be either side independent or
dedicated to side 1 or dedicated to side 2. The safety circuit 3 and
4 alarms have alternate uses as the end and recipe selection
alarms respectively. Safety Circuit #3 can also be used as the
additive meter flush alarm in multi-stream injection mode, if so
configured.
The physical discrete inputs for the safety circuits are assigned
with program codes 345 to 352.

This program code selects the response (either primary or
secondary alarm action) to an OPEN state for the discrete input
assigned to this function by program code 344 Safety circuit 1.
Off
The associated input, if any, is read, and its current status
is made available in the dynamic data display (if
configured) and via the automation system Request Status
and Enhanced Request Status commands. The DanLoad
6000 performs no other processing on the input. This
allows an automation system to process discrete inputs
independently of the DanLoad 6000 with no
communications overhead.
Info
If the associated input (safety circuit input or redirected
input) is open at any time in loading mode, i.e. in the
recipe selection screen, the additive selection screen or the
loading screen, and there is no higher priority
(secondary or primary) alarm active then the associated
alarm message is displayed for the first 10 seconds of
every 15 second period. If multiple informational safety
circuit alarms are active, the associated alarm messages
are displayed in rotation, i.e. a new message every 15
seconds.
Section 6 - 95
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
An informational safety circuit alarm neither prevents a batch

from being started nor stops a batch in progress. There is no
discrete output (alarm output) associated with an informational
safety circuit alarm. Safety circuits may be side-dependent even
if configured as informational.
See program code 249 for options and descriptions. The default
value is Primary.
Secondary
This program code contains the alarm message assigned to this

safety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
Primary
The default is Secondary.
252 #2 <Overspill detector open>
253

This program code selects the response to an OPEN state for the
discrete input assigned to this function by program code 347
Safety circuit 3 and program code 424 End input. See program
codes 249, 423 and 425 for multi-purpose options and
descriptions. The default value is Secondary.
254
Safety circuit 2.

safety circuit, the default message is indicated above.
250 #1 <Ground detector open>
#3 <Permissive power failure>
Section 6 - 96
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 97
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0
1
2
3
256 #4 <message>
Up to 32 characters <Additive injection failure>
0
1
2
3
258 #5 <message>
Up to 32 characters <Arm down side 1>
0
1
2
3
260 #6 <message>
Up to 32 characters <Arm down side 2>
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Section 6 - 98
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
258 #5 <Arm down side 1>
Safety circuit 4. If program code 348 Safety circuit 4 is set to 0,
then program codes 361 through 366 Recipe X input are enabled.
See program code 249 for options and descriptions. The default
value is Secondary.

256 #4 <Additive injection failure>

Safety circuit 6. See program code 249 for options and

260 #6 <Arm down side 2>

Section 6 - 99
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0
1
2
3
262 #7 <message>
Up to 32 characters <Walkway down side 1>
0
1
2
3
264 #8 <message>
Up to 32 characters <Walkway down side 2>
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Off
Info
Secondary *
Primary
Program Code Definitions (220 to 279 Alarm Parameters) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 100
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
262 #7 <Walkway down side 1>
264 #8 <Walkway down side 2>


________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # Function
265 Circuit 5 type
0 to 2 <1>
266 Circuit 6 type
0 to 2 <2>
267 Circuit 7 type
0 to 2 <1>
268 Circuit 8 type
0 to 2 <2>
Safety Circuit
Program Code
265
266
267
268
830
831
832
833
All safety circuits have an associated safety circuit type which

controls special processing. Note that Safety Circuits 1 through
4 are defined by program codes 830 through 833.
Type 0 is standard processing, i.e. the safety circuit is checked for
the purpose of alarming independently of the swing-arm side if
the safety circuits alarm action is Info, Secondary or
Primary.
Type 1 means that the safety circuit is checked for the purpose of
alarming only while the swing-arm side is 1 if the safety circuits
alarm action is Info, Secondary or Primary.
Type 2 means that the safety circuit is checked for the purpose of
alarming only while the swing-arm side is 2 if the safety circuits
alarm action is Info, Secondary or Primary. Thus the
safety-circuit type provides flexibility for double-sided (swingarm) applications.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
265 Circuit 5 type
267 Circuit 7 type
This program code sets the side assignment for safety circuit
number 5.
number 7.
#
#
#
#
#
#
0 = side independent
1 = enabled only if loading at side 1
Side is determined by the swing arm position inputs.
266 Circuit 6 type
268 Circuit 8 type
number 6.
number 8.
#
#
#
#
#
#
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0 to 16777215 <16777215>
0 to 16777215 <0>
0.0000 to 99999.9999 <0.0000>
272 Prod/add - %
0 to 99 <0>
273 Prod/add + %
0 to 99 <0>
0 Off *
3 Primary
275 Power fail alarm action
0 Off *
3 Primary
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
To enable the alarm output 1 and/or 2 capability, enter the

decimal sum of the values corresponding to the alarm types from
the Alarm Type Mask Values table.
To enable the alarm output 1 and/or 2 capability, enter the

decimal sum of the values corresponding to the alarm types from
the Alarm Mask Bit-Map table found on the following page.
Including an alarm types mask value in the sum configures the

alarm output to respond per the alarms configured action, i.e.
primary or secondary.
Note
In the Alarm Mask Bit-Map that follows, Alarm Type 15 (if
enabled) will activate the alarm output if any of the
configured safety circuits go into an alarm state during the
loading process.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
Alarm Type Mask Values
Alarm Type
Mask Value
0=
Display failure
1=
Comms failure
2=
Unable to maintain
blend
3=
Flow rate to low
4=
Alarm Type Mask Values

Alarm Type
Mask Value
12 =
Density failure
4096
13 =
Unable to close block

valve
8192
14 =
Additive failure
16384
15 =
Safety circuit
32768
Flow rate too high
16
16 =
Data logging memory full
65536
5=
Valve closed early
32
17 =
Memory check failed
131072
6=
Timed out - not flow

detected
64
18 =
Storage memory full
262144
Unauthorized flow
exceeds limit
128
19 =
Power failure
524288
8=
Pulse security error
256
20 =
Unable to ramp down
1048576
9=
Temperature failure
512
21 =
MPMC failure
2097152
10 =
Pressure failure
1024
22 =
Calibration failure
4194304
11 =
Unable to shut valve
2048
23 =
Intermediate level input
8388608
7=
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)
271 Unauthorized Additive flow volume

The volume (units determined by additive K-factor) of
unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarm
is raised for the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods
(program codes 141, 146, etc.). Unauthorized additive flow is
detected as a feedback error for the "Mech" and "Handshake"
injection methods. Zero disables the alarm. The default value is
0.0000, i.e. disabled.
272 Prod/add -%
For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods 143 / 148 / 153
/ 158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000, this is the percentage of the
ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch (determined from
the actual number of injection cycles, the configured additive
ratio quantity and the configured volume of additive per thousand
of product) below which an additive failure alarm is raised. The
default value is 0.
Note:
Due to discrete (dosed) injection of additive, program codes
272 and 273 will be checked only after program code 278
Additive per 1000 error limit has been exceeded.
273 Prod/add + %
For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods 143 / 148 / 153
/ 158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000, this is the percentage
of the ideal quantity of additive at any point in a batch
(determined from the actual number of injection cycles, the
configured additive ratio quantity and the configured quantity of
additive per thousand of product) above which an additive failure
alarm is raised. The default value is 0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)

Enable triggering of a transaction storage memory full alarm.
This alarm is raised if starting a new transaction or batch in
manual mode would cause an overwrite of previously archived
transaction / batch records. The default is Off, i.e. the storage
memory full alarm is disabled.
275 Power fail alarm action

Enable triggering of a power fail alarm. This alarm is raised
during power-up if a power failure or processing crash occurred
during the last batch delivery. Following a power failure during
a batch, the batch preset quantity is available (Dynamic Data
Display) via data code 245, the batch gross and standard
quantities via data codes 130 and 131, and the batch remaining
quantity via data code 246. The default is Off, i.e. the power
fail alarm is disabled.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
276
Alarms (continued)
PC # / Function
0 Off
3 Primary *
0 to 9999 <4>
1 to 99 <1>
279 End time (s)
0 to 9999 <180>
This program code selects the response to an Unable to ramp

down alarm when the DanLoad 6000 cannot reduce the flow rate
to a defined lower flow rate within the time period specified by
program code 277 Ramp down time (s).
This alarm is intended to stop a batch of LPG when there is
insufficient line pressure to pinch back using a line-pressure
operated control valve.
For non-LPG applications, a good value for the ramp down time
is the time that would be required to load 3/4 of the low flow stop
quantity at the high flow rate.

#
Off
Disable function.
Primary
Enable function based on time period

specified by program code 277 Ramp
down time (s).
277
Ramp down time (s)
[For program code 026 Unit type equal to sequential or in-line

type.] Sets time limit for attempt to ramp down flow rate before
triggering an Unable to ramp down alarm.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.13
Alarms (continued)

For the "Meter" and "Control" injection methods this is the
number of injection cycles worth of additive, i.e. ideal doses of
additive, by which the actual volume of additive can differ from
the ideal volume of additive at any point in a batch before the
percentages (program codes 272 and 273) are checked for the
purpose of raising an alarm. For the Control injection method
a value of 1 is recommended; larger values may be required for
the Meter injection method depending on required tolerances
and additive meter calibration accuracy. The default value is 1.
279 End time (s)

The end batch/transaction, depending on the configured end
output method (program code 373), time in seconds. See "end
output" program code 423 for more information. The default
value is 180.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
I/O Parameters
PC # / Function
280 Slot 1 board
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
281 Slot 2 board
<same as above>
282 Slot 3 board
<same as above>
283 Slot 4 board
<same as above>
284 Slot 5 board
<same as above>
285 Slot 6 board
<same as above>
286 Slot 7 board
<same as above>
Empty
DC I/O
AC I/O
8-Ch. Analog Input
2-Ch. Pulse Input
Enhanced I/O
2-Ch. Analog Input
4-Ch. Pulse Input
Program Code Definitions (280 to 379 I/O Parameters) ______________________________________________
Section 6 - 112
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
I/O Parameters (continued)
I/O Parameters contain data which defines the type of process

input / output signal card that is inserted in each card cage slot.
Physical I/O points are assigned logical functions by logical I/O
points.
NOTE
Refer to Section 2.2.2 Input/Output Board Descriptions and
Jumper Settings for detailed information about board types,
uses, configurations and connections. Appropriate drawings
are also referenced in Section 2.2.2 and can be found in
Appendix E.
280 / 281 / 282 / 283 / 284 / 285 / 286 Slot # board

This program code indicates the type of board located in slot J#,
and is automatically detected on power-up/reset. The J number
for the input / output board connector is the same as the # in the
parameter name.
#
Empty
No card present.
DC I/O
DC Voltage discrete input / output board.
AC I/O
AC Voltage discrete input / output board.
8-Ch. Analog Input 8-channel analog input board.
2-Ch. Pulse Input
2-channel meter pulse input board.
Enhanced I/O
Enhanced input / output board.
2-Ch. Analog Input 2-channel analog input board.
4-Ch. Pulse Input
4-channel meter pulse input board
Section 6 - 113
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
Function
287 Alarm output 1
0 to number of discrete outputs <4>
287 Alarm output 1

This program code assigns a physical discrete control output for
the general alarm control output logical function. This output is
pulsed ON (CLOSED) when a Secondary alarm is active and is
steady ON (CLOSED) when a Primary alarm is active. The
output is enabled per alarm type by program code 269 Alarm o/p
1 mask. (Note: See also program code 379 Alarm output 2.)
Section 6 - 114
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
PC # / Function
(Four Product Pumps)
288 / 289 / 290 / 291 Pump control output
0 to number of discrete outputs <see table below>

the product pump control output logical function. This output is
normally OFF and is maintained ON to run a product pump
motor or to indicate component in use. See also component
line pack delay (program code 87, etc. per component) and pump
stop delay (program code 88, etc. per component).
Recommended discrete output assignments:
Component
Program Code
Discrete Output
288
289
290
11
291
15
Section 6 - 115
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
I / O Parameters (continued)
PC # / Function
(Four Flow Control Valves)
292 / 297 / 302 / 307 Solenoid 1 (upstream)
293 / 298 / 303 / 308 Solenoid 2 (downstream)
294 / 299 / 304 / 309 Stem switch 1
0 to number of discrete inputs,

51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
295 / 300 / 305 / 310 Stem switch 2

296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input

Recommended discrete output assignments:

Flow Control
Valve
Solenoid 1
Program Code
Discrete
Output
Solenoid 2
Program Code
Discrete
Output
292
293
297
298
302
303
10
307
13
308
14
Section 6 - 116
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
292 / 297 / 302 / 307 Solenoid 1 (upstream)

the corresponding solenoid 1 logical function. This output is used
to control the normally open pilot on a digital flow control valve
or 2-stage flow control valve.
detecting leakage even if the meter pulse stream has failed, e.g.
preamp or pulse transmitter failure. The stem switch should be
installed such that it provides a closed (1) input to the DanLoad
6000 when the flow control valve is closed, and an open (0)
input otherwise. Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e.
the actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state (open
or closed) is inverted.
293 / 298 / 303 / 308 Solenoid 2 (downstream)

295 / 300 / 305 / 310 Stem switch 2
the corresponding solenoid 2 logical function. This output is used
to control the normally closed pilot on a digital flow control valve
or 2-stage flow control valve.
294 / 299 / 304 / 309 Stem switch 1

The low flow start (normally closed) stem switch input. The
DanLoad 6000 locks the flow control valve when this input
opens while ramping up to low flow.
An unauthorized flow alarm is raised for a meter if the associated
flow control valves stem switch 1 input is open when the meter
is not authorized. This provides a method of
The low flow stop (normally open) stem switch input. The
DanLoad 6000 locks the flow control valve when this input
closes while ramping down to low flow.
An unauthorized flow alarm is raised for a meter if the associated
flow control valves stem switch 2 input is closed when the meter
is not authorized. This provides a method of detecting leakage
even if the meter pulse stream has failed, e.g. preamp or pulse
transmitter failure. The stem switch should be installed such that
it provides an open (0) input to the DanLoad 6000 when the flow
control valve is open, and a closed (1) input otherwise. Input
numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the actual input number
is the input number minus 50, but the state (open or closed) is
inverted.
Section 6 - 117
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Note: Stem switches 1 and/or 2 can be used to monitor the
position of the flow control valve when the meter is not
authorized independent of the flow control valve type (program
code 027).
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input
This program code assigns a physical discrete status input for the
corresponding close input logical function. This input is used to
sense some external condition or permissive circuit which
controls the state of the flow control valve. If assigned, this
input must be CLOSED during batch deliveries. An OPEN input
on this circuit closes the flow control valve. Input numbers 51
and above are inverted, i.e. the actual input is the input number
minus 50, but the state (open or closed) is inverted.
Section 6 - 118
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 119
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
PC # / Function
312 Side detect method
0
1
2
3
4
5
313 Pulse per unit output 1
315 Trip 1 output
316 Trip 2 output
317 Trip 3 output
Sgl w/o sw. *

Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)
Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)
Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)
Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)
Dbl 2 sw.
Section 6 - 120
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14

This program code selects the method of detecting one of three
possible positions of the product loading swing arm, based on
inputs from one or two swing arm position switches. Swing arm
switch input is connected to two physical discrete contact closure
inputs, accessible at the three connector terminal board on the
main processor board (v1 CPU board) [SWING1 is swing arm
input 1 which is the rightward terminal on the main processor
board] [SWING2 is swing arm input 2 which is the leftward
terminal on the main processor board] [COMMON is the
common connection for both inputs and in the center terminal on
the main processor board]. (Note: The connections are labeled
on the aluminum board retainer plate.)
Swing Arm Switch Status

Side Detect
M ethod
Side 1
Side 2
Parked
Sgl w/o sw
Enabled
N/A
N/A
Sgl 1 sw (SW 2)
SW 2
CLOSED
N/A
SW 2
OPEN
Sgl 1 sw (SW 1)
SW 1
CLOSED
N/A
SW 1
OPEN
Dbl 1 sw (SW 2)
SW 2
CLOSED
SW 2
OPEN
N/A
SW 1 must be OPEN
Dbl 1 sw (SW 1)
Discrete input swing-arm switches can also be used as per

program codes 376 and 377. The v2 CPU board does not have
dedicated swing-arm inputs.
SW 1
OPEN
N/A
SW 2 must be OPEN
Dbl 2 sw
Sgl = single-sided load spot; Dbl = double-sided load spot

SW1 = right terminal to center (common) terminal or discrete
input per program code 376.
SW2 = left terminal to center (common) terminal or discrete
input per program code 377.
SW 1
CLOSED
SW 2
CLOSED
SW 2
OPEN
SW 2
OPEN
SW 1
OPEN
SW 1
CLOSED
SW 1
OPEN
Section 6 - 121
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
Sgl w/o sw.
Single side without swing arm switch. Side 1 forced

active at all times.
Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)

Single side with one swing arm switch.
SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = parked).
Double side with one swing arm switch.

SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = side 2;
(SW2 must be OPEN).
#
Dbl 2 sw.
Double side with two swing arm switches,
SW2 CLOSED and SW1 OPEN = side 1;
SW2 OPEN and SW1 CLOSED = side 2;
SW2 OPEN and SW1 OPEN = parked.
Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)

Single side with one swing arm switch.
SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = parked.
Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)
Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)
Note that the v2 CPU board does not have dedicated

swing-arm inputs. Discrete input swing-arm switches per
program codes 376 and 377 should be used. The v2 CPU
board simulates SW2 closed, SW1 open so that side 1
will be detected for all values of program code 312 except
Sgl 1 switch (SW1) and Dbl 1 switch (SW1) if
neither program code 367 nor 377 is configured.
Double side with one swing arm switch.

SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = side 2;
(SW1 must be OPEN).
Section 6 - 122
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
315 Trip 1 output

the pulse per unit output 1 logical function. The drive logic for
this output is setup by program code 128 Number of pulse per
unit outputs, 129 Control meters, 130 Factor, 131 Pulse width
(ms).

the trip 1 output logical function. Output is ON during low flow
startup (indicates low flow startup phase to external device).
316 Trip 2 output

the pulse per unit output 2 logical function. The drive logic for
this output is setup by program code 128 Number of pulse per
unit outputs, 132 Control meters, 133 Factor, 134 Pulse width
(ms).

the trip 2 output logical function. Output is ON during low flow
startup and high flow (indicates low flow startup and high flow
phases to external device).
317 Trip 3 output

the trip 3 output logical function. Output is ON from start of
delivery to final trip (OFF at same time as Solenoid 1 for
sequential unit type) (indicates delivery phase to external device).
Section 6 - 123
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
PC # / Function
(Four Meters)
318 / 324 / 330 / 336 Meter X temp input
0 to number of RTD inputs
319 / 325 / 331 / 337 Meter X offset (Ohms)
-20.00 to +20.00
320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input
0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdc inputs
321 / 327 / 333 / 339 Meter X dens input
0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdc inputs
322 / 328 / 334 / 340 Meter X flow input
0 to max. discrete input,

318 / 324 / 330 / 336 Meter X temp input
319 / 325 / 331 / 337 Meter X offset (Ohms)
This program code assigns a physical RTD process temperature

input, corresponding to a flow meter, to the RTD input logical
function.
This program code sets the resistance compensation for wiring

between the RTD and the DanLoad 6000 RTD input terminals.
The offset is applied only to RTD inputs on the 2- and 8-channel
analog inputs boards, not to the RTD input on the v2 CPU board.
Section 6 - 124
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input
322 / 328 / 334 / 340 Meter X flow input
This program code assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,

corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter pressure logical
function.
This program code, if configured, disables the authorized flow

alarms (no flow detected, flow rate too low and flow rate too
high) for the meter while the input is open, i.e. deenergized, and
can be used to prevent spurious authorized flow alarms in an
application where the DanLoad 6000 does not have direct control
of the valve. Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the
actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state (open
or closed) is inverted. Zero indicates not used. The default
value is zero, i.e. not used.
321 / 327 / 333 / 339 Meter X dens input

This program code assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,
corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter density logical
function.
Section 6 - 125
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
PC # / Function
341 # cpmt inputs
0 to 4 <0>
342 Start method
0 Normal *
1 Immed.
343 Auto/manual change-over

344 Primary alarm reset

341 # cmpt inputs

See section 3.12 for a summary of operating instructions. This is
the number of compartment size inputs. Safety circuit 4 input is
used as compartment size input 1, safety circuit 5 input is used as
compartment size input 2, etc. Using safety circuit inputs as
compartment size inputs prevents their use as safety circuit
inputs. The alarm action of any safety circuit that is used as a
compartment size input should be set to "Off". Special
processing is performed if the configured number of
compartment size inputs is greater than zero. If the configured

number of compartment size inputs is greater than zero, the
preset quantity is calculated (when the "ENTER" key is pressed
while the DanLoad 6000 is prompting for a preset quantity IN
THE MANUAL OPERATING MODE) as the minimum of the
quantity entered by the operator (if any) and the smallest
compartment size indicated by any compartment size inputs that
are closed. There is a two-second delay after the "ENTER" key
is pressed to allow the compartment size inputs to be scanned.
Section 6 - 126
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
Compartment
Size Input
Compartment
Size
Program Code
for Physical
Discrete Input
Program Code
for Alarm
Action
Compartment
Size Low
Limit
Compartment
Size High
Limit
PC 644 x 100
349
257
NA
NA
PC 645 x 100
350
259
PC 650 x 100
PC 651 x 100
PC 646 x 100
351
261
NA
NA
PC 647 x 100
352
263
PC 652 x 100
PC 653 x 100
"Error conditions" on the compartment size inputs are handled as follows: If multiple compartment size inputs are closed, the DanLoad
6000 uses the lowest compartment size indicated by the closed inputs, e.g. if compartment size inputs 2 and 4 are closed, the compartment
size corresponding to compartment size input 2 is used. If none of the compartment size inputs is closed, the compartment size in
"undefined" and a batch cannot be authorized.
Section 6 - 127
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
342 Start method
This program code defines the method by which a batch is

started. The default value is "Normal". Select one of the
following:
auto/manual mode change-over logical function. This input
selects the Auto Mode or Manual Mode of operation (input
CLOSED = Auto Mode, input OPEN = Manual Mode). The
function is used to enable manual operation of the DanLoad 6000
in case of a failure of the terminal automation system. Input
numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the actual input is the
input number minus 50, but the state (open or closed) is
inverted. Reference program code 025 for operating mode.
"Normal". A batch is started by punching in a [valid]

preset quantity and pressing the "ENTER" key (at which
point the preset quantity is validated) followed by the
"START" key.
"Immed.". Immediate. A batch is started by punching in

a [valid] preset quantity and pressing the "START" key or
the "ENTER" key. When the DanLoad 6000 is prompting
for a preset quantity, the "ENTER" key and the "START"
key do the same thing. This method is useful where the
operator does not have direct access to the DanLoad
6000's keypad and the "START" key has been wired to a
"remote start push-button", e.g. attached to the loading
arm, via a "START/STOP interface only" or
"START/STOP remote display interface" board (part
numbers 3-6000-147 and -149 respectively).
344
Primary alarm reset
primary alarm reset logical function. Normal state = OPEN, a
momentary CLOSE of the input circuit resets oldest active
primary alarm. All primary alarms can be reset in this manner.
Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the actual input
inverted.
Section 6 - 128
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 129
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14

PC# / Function
345 Safety circuit 1
0 to max. discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. discrete input) <0>
349 Safety circuit 5 or

compartment size input 1



353 RTD range
0 Std *
1 Hi
2 Low
354 Delay after outputs

(msec)
0 to 9999 <0>
Section 6 - 130
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14

safety circuit 1 logical function. Logical control of this safety
circuit is performed by program codes 249 and 250. Input
inverted.

circuit is performed by program codes 251 and 252. Input
inverted.
Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the actual input
inverted.
348 Safety circuit 4 or Recipe selection input

circuit is performed by program codes 255 and 256. An
additional function of this parameter is to enable the six recipe
selection inputs program code 361 / 362 / 363 / 364 / 365 / 366
Recipe x input. To enable this feature, set program code 348
Safety circuit 4 to 0 and assign program code 361 / 362 / 363 /
364 / 365 / 366 Recipe x input to discrete inputs as required by the
installation configuration. Input numbers 51 and above are
inverted, i.e. the actual input is the input number minus 50, but
the state (open or closed) is inverted. Zero indicates redirect
to recipe selection inputs for recipes 1 through 6.

circuit is performed by program codes 253, 254 and 425.
Section 6 - 131
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
349 Safety circuit 5 or compartment size input 1
circuit is performed by program codes 257, 258, and 265. Input
inverted. This can also be used as compartment size input 1 (see
program code 341 for details and special considerations).

Section 6 - 132
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
353 RTD range
354
This program code matches the type of RTD inputs on the analog
inputs board for various temperature ranges. All the RTD inputs
on a DanLoad 6000's analog inputs board must be the same
temperature range. The RTD input on the v2 CPU board is
always -20 to 55 degrees Celsius. Select one of the following:
Delay in milliseconds between energizing the recipe and

component combination outputs and checking the safety circuit
inputs. Enables an automation system to energize an output
based on status of inputs it receives from the DanLoad 6000.
Delay after outputs
Std
Analog inputs board with RTD inputs from - 40 degrees
to + 110 degrees Celsius.
Hi
Analog inputs board with RTD inputs from + 50 degrees
to + 200 degrees Celsius.
Low
Analog inputs board with RTD inputs from -200 degrees
to -50 degrees Celsius.
Section 6 - 133
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
PC# / Function
355 Primary LCD type
0
1
2
3
356 Primary LCD min light
0 to 1023 <455>
357 Primary LCD max light
0 to 1023 <405>
358 Secondary LCD type
0
1
2
3
359 Secondary LCD min light
0 to 1023 <455>
360 Secondary LCD max light
0 to 1023 <405>
Unknown
Standish
Optrex *
Old Optrex
Unknown
Standish
Optrex *
Old Optrex
Section 6 - 134
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
355 / 358 <Primary / Secondary> LCD type

This program code identifies the type of LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display) installed in the local DanLoad 6000. When the LCD
type is known, this information is used to auto-adjust the
LCDs contrast for internal temperature variations and also
enables the display failure alarm, i.e. keypad/display
disconnected, or internal temperature too high. There is no need
to detect an internal temperature too-low condition. The default
value is Optrex". A few early DanLoad 6000's had Old Optrex"
LCDs marked Y-LY on the back of Optrexs LCD board (not
on Daniels display board attached to the Optrex display board).
Most DanLoad 6000's shipped since 1993 have Optrex" LCDs,
usually marked YJ-LY on the back of the Optrex LCD board,
although a few of the earlier Optrex" LCDs had the same mark
as the Old Optrex" LCDs. Select one of the following:
#
Unknown
Standish
The Standish LCD has a maximum internal temperature
of 70 degrees Celsius with the temperature sensor located
just below the top edge of the display.
Optrex
The Optrex extended range (maximum internal
temperature = 70 degrees Celsius) LCD has the
temperature sensor located just below the top edge of the
display. This is the usual setting. Post-1996 Optrex
extended range LCDs may be of the transflective type.
Old Optrex
Standard range (maximum internal temperature = 60
degrees Celsius) LCD with the temperature sensor located
just below the top edge of the display.
Automatic contrast adjustment, automatic backlighting

adjustment and display failure alarm disabled.
Section 6 - 135
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
356 / 359 <Primary / Secondary> LCD minimum light

This program code sets the relative level of ambient light used to
set the backlighting of the display to maximum brightness.
#
0 to 1023
A relative number related to the level of ambient light (default is

455).
357 / 360 <Primary / Secondary> LCD maximum light

This program code sets the relative level of ambient light used to
set the backlighting of the display to minimum brightness
(backlighting off).
#
0 to 1023
A relative number related to the level of ambient light (default is

405).
Section 6 - 136
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 137
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14

PC# / Function
361 Recipe 1 input
362 Recipe 2 input
363 Recipe 3 input
364 Recipe 4 input
365 Recipe 5 input
366 Recipe 6 input
367 Recipe 1 output
368 Recipe 2 output
369 Recipe 3 output
370 Recipe 4 output
371 Recipe 5 output
372 Recipe 6 output
373 End output method
0 Ba only *
1 Tr only
2 Both
374 Level input
0 to max. Discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. Discrete input) <0>
375 Hatch input
0 to max. Discrete input, 51 to (50 + max. Discrete input) <0>
376 Swing 1 input
377 Swing 2 input
378 Low flow input
379 Alarm output 2
Section 6 - 138
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
361 / 362 / 363 / 364 / 365 / 366 Recipe X input
This program code selects the physical discrete input that is used
to allow or permit the corresponding recipe. This feature permits
manual switch or relay selection of one of six recipes from a
remote source (input CLOSE = recipe allowed; input OPEN =
recipe not allowed). Input numbers 51 and above are inverted,
i.e. the actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state
(open or closed) is inverted.
If for recipes 1 through 6 only, safety circuit 4's input (program
code 348 Safety circuit 4) is not configured and a recipes
selection input is configured, the recipe can be loaded only if the
recipes selection input is closed. If the recipes selection input
is open, the DanLoad 6000 behaves as if safety circuit 4's input is
configured and open, i.e. safety circuit 4's input is redirected to
the recipe selection input determined by the selected recipe.
Configures whether the end output (program code 423), end input
(program code 424) and end time (program code 279) processing
(see program code 423 for details) is performed only at the end of
a batch, only at the end of a transaction, or both at the end of a
batch and at the end of a transaction. The default value is Ba
only. Select one of the following:
#
Ba only
Perform end output processing only at the end of a batch.
Tr only
Perform end output processing only at the end of a
transaction.
367 / 368 / 369 / 370 / 371 / 372 Recipe X output

#
This program code selects a physical discrete output that is
energized during an active batch load when that recipe is selected.
The corresponding output is energized at batch start
or restart (before the pump delay) and deenergized at batch end
after flow has stopped.
Both
Perform end output processing both at the end of a batch
and at the end of a transaction. (The timer is not restarted
if it is already running.)
Section 6 - 139
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
374 Level input

If configured, the DanLoad 6000 performs intermediate level
input logic. This logic works specifically with compartment size
inputs 1, 2 and 4 as described in the pseudo code description
below. Input numbers 51 and above are "inverted", i.e. the actual
input is input number minus 50" but the state ("open" or
"closed") is inverted. Zero indicates "not used". The default
value is zero. If the level input is closed, only a preset quantity
less than 1000 can be authorized.
The pre-authorization batch check is performed only in manual
mode after a preset quantity has been entered/calculated and prior
to authorizing a batch:
////
IF Operating mode is manual
AND Compartment size inputs are being used
AND Level input is configured
AND Level input is closed
AND Preset quantity >= Compartment size 1 THEN
BEGIN
Display "Intermediate level input" briefly
Do not authorized batch
END
ELSE
BEGIN
DO AUTHORIZATION BATCH
END
END IF
i.e. if the level input is closed, only a preset quantity less than 1000 can be authorized.
During batch delivery in auto or manual, each and every time the level input closes ("edge
triggered", if you like):
////
IF Compartment size inputs are being used
AND Level input is closed
BEGIN
IF (Batch gross loaded quantity < 900) // Hard-coded!
OR ((Cpmt size 2 lo < Gross loaded qty < Cpmt size 2
hi) AND (Cpmt size <= Cpmt size 2))
OR ((Cpmt size 4 lo < Gross loaded qty < Cpmt size 4
hi) AND (Cpmt size <= Cpmt size 4)) THEN
Allow batch to continue
ELSE
Raise "Level input" secondary alarm
IF (Level input was closed at < 900)
AND (Level input is still closed at < 900)
/* i.e. (which is the same as saying) If the
level input
is closed at 900" */
END
ELSE
////
////
Section 6 - 140
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
Compartment size 1 and 3 low and high limits do not exist. The
compartment size 2 low (lo) and high (hi) limits are program
codes 650 and 651 respectively (x 100). The compartment size
4 low (lo) and high (hi) limits are program codes 652 and 653
respectively (x 100). There is also an automation system
communications status bit that indicates that the batch was
stopped due to a level input alarm. Refer to the DanLoad 6000
Communications Spec.
NOTE: The pre-authorize batch check is performed only in
manual, whereas the during batch delivery check is performed in
auto and manual. The pre-authorized batch check is performed
only if compartment size input are being used. The during batch
delivery check performed is different depending on whether or
not compartment size inputs are being used; if compartment size
inputs are not being used, the during batch delivery check acts
similarly to an "inverted safety circuit" (input "open" =
safe/condition) with hard-coded secondary alarm action and hardcoded, language-dependent message text.
375 Hatch input

If configured and compartment size inputs are being used, the
DanLoad 6000 performs hatch sensor input logic. Input
numbers 51 and above are "inverted", i.e. the actual input is
input number minus 50", but the state ("open" or "closed") is
inverted. Zero indicates "not used".
The default value is zero. The hatch sensor input logic allows
batch to be authorized for compartment size 4 only if
compartment size input 4 is closed and the hatch input is closed.
Compartment size 4 is program code 647.
376 Swing 1 input

This program code selects the discrete input swing-arm switch 1
input. When used, it corresponds to Swing 1" (TB2-3) on the
CPU board. Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the
or closed) is inverted. Zero indicates not used.
Section 6 - 141
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.14
377 Swing 2 input
379 Alarm output 2
This program code selects the discrete input swing-arm switch 2

input. When used, it corresponds to Swing 2" (TB2-1) on the
CPU board. Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the
or closed) is inverted. Zero indicates not used.
Assign this discrete output to one of the physical discrete outputs.

This output is triggered based on enabling by program code 270
Alarm o/p 2 mask, the assigned action for the mask enabled
alarm, and the alarm in the active state.
378 Low flow input

This program code defines the stay in low flow input. When
configured, the batch is delivered in low flow, i.e. at the low flow
start flow rate, if the input is closed when the batch is started or
restarted. (This is achieved by overriding, i.e.
temporarily increasing the low flow start quantity internally. For
a sequential unit type, the low flow start quantity is per
component. For an in-line unit type the low flow quantity is for
the batch.) Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e. the
actual input is input number minus 50", but the state (open or
closed) is inverted. Zero indicates not used.
Section 6 - 142
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 143
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.15
Additive I/O Parameters
PC# / Function
(Six additives)
380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392 / 395 Ratio/valve output
0 to number discrete outputs <0>
381 / 384 / 387 / 390 / 393 / 396 Feedback/meter input
0 to number discrete inputs <0>
382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394/ 397 Selection input

398 Clean line output
0 to number discrete outputs <0>
399 Flush output
0 to number discrete output <0>
Additive I/O Parameters contain data which defines control of automatic injection of one to six additives.
Program Code Definitions (380 to 399 Additive I/O Parameters) ______________________________________ Section 6 - 144
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.15
Additive I/O Parameters (continued)
380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392 / 395 Ratio/valve output
382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394 / 397 Selection input
The output which is cycled according to the additive inject

percentage (program code 137) and the additive's configured ratio
quantity (program code 140) and injection method (program code
141). This output would normally be connected to an injector
"pak", additive flow control solenoid or a PLC. Zero indicates
"not used". The default value is zero.
For the "Inputs" additive selection method (program code 136)

this is the input which is used to select the additive either prior to
or during loading. The additive remains selected while the input
remains closed. Input numbers 51 and above are inverted, i.e.
the actual input is the input number minus 50, but the state
(open or closed) is inverted. Zero indicates "not used". The
default value is zero.
381 / 384 / 387 / 390 / 393 / 396 Feedback/meter input

398 Additive clean line output
The input which is used to verify additive injection or totalize
additive (possibly for volumetric verification) using a pulse per
volume or an additive meter K-factor. This input would normally
be connected to an additive "pak's" feedback switch, a "smart"
injector's verification pulse or an additive meter's pulse output.
Zero indicates "not used". The default value is zero.
This program code assigns a discrete control output that is

energized during delivery of the quantity set by program code 138
Additive clean line qty at the end of a batch delivery. A typical
use for this output is to connect the clean line volume to a smart
(microprocessor controlled) additive injector that over-injects at
the start of a batch and stops injecting prior to the end of the
batch. Another use is with a multi-stream injector where the
additive clean line output should be connected to the block valve
that allows product to flow to the (shared) additive ratio solenoid.
Zero indicates not used.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.15
Additive I/O Parameters (continued)
399 Flush output

This program code selects the output to be energized during
delivery of the (additive clean line quantity - 10) product units at
the end of a batch. This output is intended to be used in multistream injection mode, but is available independent of the
injection mode. In multi-stream injection mode (multiple
additives with the same non-zero meter input), the additive flush
output is energized only if an additive has been authorized. Zero
indicates not used.
Note: The additive flush output is energized approximately 10
product units after the additive clean line output is
energized, so the additive clean line quantity (program
code 138) should be greater than 10 product units when
using the additive flush output.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
Component I/O Parameters
PC# / Function
(Four components)
400 / 402 / 404 / 406 Block valve output
0 to number discrete outputs
401 / 403 / 405 / 407 Block valve input

Component I/O Parameters contain data which define automatic

control and monitoring of component block valves, typically used
in sequential blending applications. Block valve control discrete
outputs can be assigned for single components or combinations
of two, three, or four components.

the corresponding component block valve output logical function.
For "Side" stream In-line Blending, the user should assign an

output to open a block valve to allow the side stream component
(e.g. Ethanol) to blend with the wild stream component (e.g.
Gasoline). For two component blending (One component must
be the side stream component) the block valve output will be
"Closed" when corresponding wild stream component is used.
For more than two component blending ( One Component must
be the side stream component) the block valve output will be
"Closed" when the recipe is defined with a corresponding wild
stream component and that component uses the Midgrade primary
blend stream meter defined in program code 063.
The function of the block valve is changed in the following

manner for Side stream in-line blending.
Program Code Definitions (400 through 425 Component I/O Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 148
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
Component I/O Parameters (continued)

corresponding block valve input logical function. Input numbers
51 and above are inverted, i.e. the actual input is the input
number minus 50, but the state (open or closed) is inverted.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16

PC# / Function
408 1 1XXX
409 2 X2XX
410 3 12XX
411 4 XX3X
412 5 1X3X
413 6 X23X
414 7 123X
415 8 XXX4
416 9 1XX4
417 10 X2X4
418 11 12X4
419 12 XX34
420 13 1X34
421 14 X234
422 15 1234
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
Note
Component combination outputs indicate which components
are included in the recipe being loaded. Recipe outputs
(program codes 367 to 372) indicate which recipe is being
loaded (recipes 1 to 6 only).
408
1 1XXX
This program code assigns a physical discrete control output to a

block valve, block valves, or other device. This output is
CLOSED when the indicated components are being blended
(selected by the active recipe).
[component 1 only]
409
410
3 12XX

[components 1 and 2]
411
4 XX3X

[component 3 only]
2 X2XX

[component 2 only]
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
412
5 1X3X
414
7 123X

(selected by the active recipe)

[components 1, 2, and 3]
413
415
6 X23X

8 XXX4

[component 4 only]
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
416
9 1XX4

417
418
11 12X4

10 X2X4
419

12 XX34

________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
420
13 1X34

421
422
15 1234

[components 1, 2, 3, and 4]
14 X234

________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
PC# / Function
Range < Default> OR Option (* = Default)
423 End output
0 to 24 <0>
424 End input

425 Flush pulses
0 to 999999999 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.16
423 End output
425 Flush pulses
The end output (if configured) is energized at the end of a

batch/transaction, depending on the configured end output
method (program code 373), if the end input (program code 424)
is open (deenergized) or not configured when the
batch/transaction ends (not when a batch stops and is restartable).
The end output remains energized until the end input closes or a
"safety circuit 3" alarm is raised. A "safety circuit 3" alarm is
raised if the end input does not close within "end time" (program
code 279) seconds of the end batch output being energized.
Safety circuit 3 is used so that the alarm message (program code
254) can be configured, which allows the end output and input to
be used for a variety of purposes. One application is controlling
the mercaptan vessel fill for LPG loading. Zero indicates "not
used". The default value is zero.
This program code sets the minimum number of pulses required

from the additive meter during additive meter flushing, i.e. while
the additive flush output (program code 399) is energized at the
end of a batch, in order to prevent a safety circuit 3 alarm, e.g.
Additive meter flush failure, from being raised. Note that the
Safety circuit 3 alarm is shared with the safety circuit 3 input, and
end alarm processing. The additive meter flush pulse count
(data code 223) is checked only at the end of a batch, not
continuously during additive meter flushing so that a batch will
not be stopped (or ended) with a small number of units of product
remaining. In multi-stream injection mode (multiple additives
with the same non-zero meter input), the additive meter flush
pulse count is checked only if more than one additive is
authorized. It is important to understand that additive meter
pulses are not added to the additive meter flush pulse count (data
code 223) until the additive meter flush output (program code
339) has been energized. Zero disables additive meter flush
pulses checking.
424 End input

See "End output" (program code 423) for details. Zero indicates
"not used". The default value is 0. Input numbers 51 and above
are inverted, i.e. the actual input is input number minus 50, but
the state (open or closed) is inverted.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17
Temperature / Pressure / Density

PC# /Function
(Four Components)
426 Buoyancy
-9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>
427 Temperature units
0 C (Celsius) *
1 F (Fahrenheit)
428 Density units
0
1
2
3
4
5
lb/ft3 *
kg/m3
g/cm3
60/60 F
15/4 C
20/4 C
429 Pressure units
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
psi *
Pa
in. H2O
in. Hg
bar
mbar
kPa
kg/cm2
430 Reference temperature
-99.9 to 999.9 <15.0>
Program Code Definitions (426 to 479 Temperature/Pressure/Density Parameters) ______________________
Section 6 - 158
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
PC# /Function
(Four Components)
431 Sample qty
0 to 9999 <100>
432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature option
0 Off *
1 Linear
2 API 6A
3 API 6B
4 API 6C
5 API 24A
6 API 24B
7 API 54A
8 API 54B
9 API 54C
10 IMP [Mexico (Pemex)]
11 Old 24
12 Old 54
13 Pbras [Brazil (Petrobras)]
14 TP-16
15 China
16 API 6D
17 API 54D
18 4311 1
19 CAN 54B
433 / 436 / 439 / 442 Alpha
0.0002700 to 0.0016740 <0.0005100>
434 / 437 / 440 / 443 Backup temperature
-99.9 to 999.9 <15.0>
Section 6 - 159
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters contain data that

defines the calculation methods used to compute the values of Ctl
(correction for the effect of temperature of the liquid) and Cpl
(correction for the effect of pressure of the liquid).
428 Density units

This program code selects the density units mnemonic to be used
in calculations, displays, printing and logs.
#
lb/ft3
kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter
g/cm3
grams per cubic centimeter
60/60 F
relative density 60 deg. F / 60 deg. F
427 Temperature units
15/4 C
relative density 15 deg. C / 4 deg. C
This program code selects the temperature units to be used in

calculations, displays, and logs. The default value is C.
20/4 C
relative density 20 deg. C / 4 deg. C
pounds per cubic foot
426 Buoyancy
This program code sets the density adjustment for bouancy in air.
The position of the floating decimal point depends on the
density/gravity scale (program code 46).
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Section 6 - 160
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
429 Pressure units
This program code selects the pressure units mnemonic used in

calculations, displays, printing and logs.
(Note: See program code 432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature

option.) This program code sets the reference temperature for the
Linear equation or API tables 6C or 54C. (Note: Normal
reference temperature for API tables 6C is 60.0 degrees
Fahrenheit. Normal reference temperature for API table 54C is
15.0 degrees Celsius. This program code allows a non-standard
reference temperature to be used.)
psi
Pounds per square inch
Pa
Pascals
in. H2O
Inches water column
in. Hg Inches mercury
bar
Bar
mbar
Millibar
kPa
KiloPascals
kg/cm2
Kilograms per centimeter square
431 Sample qty

This program code sets the quantity-based temperature sampling
frequency used during a batch delivery. The process temperature
is sampled at the start of a batch delivery and thereafter each time
the quantity of units indicated by this parameter have been
accumulated.
Section 6 - 161
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
the DanLoad 6000 calculations produce API gross

quantity which is the indicated quantity (meter
registration) times the meter factor.
432 / 435 / 438 / 441 Temperature option

This program code selects the method of temperature
compensation of the process liquid.
#
Note
Daniel Industries, Inc. and Daniel Measurement and Control
Products (Daniel) shall not be held responsible or liable in
any way for loss or damage, including, but not limited to,
consequential damage, resulting from the use of volume
correction tables or related mathematical relationships or for
violation of any federal, state, or municipal laws,
regulations, or practices of the United States or of any
foreign country.
For pure MTBE, API recommends either Table 6C with "60 =
789.0 x 10-6/oF or Table 54C with "15 = 1420.2 x 10-6/oC. For
ethanol, API recommends Table 6C with "60 = 580.0 x 10-6/oF.
#
Off
Disable temperature compensation. If the meter pulse
input is not temperature compensated at the flow meter,
Linear
The following linear equation is used to calculate
temperature compensation.
CTL
1 - ((t - T) * "T )
where:
CTL
"T
Correction for the effect of temperature on

a liquid.
Observed temperature from an RTD input
or the fixed entry in program code
434/437/440/443 Backup temperature.
Reference temperature from program code
430 Reference temperature.
Coefficient of thermal expansion for the
liquid at base temperature, from program
code 433/436/439/442 Alpha.
Section 6 - 162
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
API Temperature Compensation Tables:

#
Standard reference temperature: 60 degrees F.

Temperature correction to a non-standard
reference temperature via program code 430.
API 6A
#
#
API 6C
API 24B
API 6B
API 24A
API 54A
Section 6 - 163
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
Tables 1A/1B through 20A/20B are supported.

Since IMPs method uses six significant digits
with single precision floating point, the volume
correction factor can vary by +/- 1 in the least
significant digit. Standard reference temperature:
20 degrees C. Temperature correction to a nonstandard reference temperature via program code
430.
API 54B
Standard reference temperature: 15 degrees C.
API 54C
#
Old 24
IMP
Instituto Mexicano del Petroleo programa
Correccion de Volumen por Temperatura de los
Productos Petroliferos Evaluados a 20 grados
Celsius
Old ASTM-IP Table 24 Reduction of Volume

to 60 degrees F against Specific Gravity 60/60
degrees F (ASTM D 1250, IP 200, API 2540).
Note: This table is not functional when the Side
stream blending (Program code 023) is set to
YES.
Section 6 - 164
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
Old 54
Old ASTM-IP Table 54 Reduction of Volume
to 15 degrees C against Density at 15 degrees
C (ASTM D 1250, IP 200, API 2540).
The component density (program codes 457, etc.

per component) should be relative density 20/4
degrees C. Standard reference temperature: 20
degrees C. Temperature correction to a nonstandard reference temperature via program code
430.

#
Pbras (Petrobras - Brazil)

Petrobras Departamento Comercial - Diviso de
Controle das Movimentaes -- Biblioteca Geral
de Aplicativos para a rea de Movimentaes de
Produto - Mdulo 4: Programa para Clculo de
Densidade 20oC/4oC e Fator de Correo de
Volume para 20oC, July 1988. Only part 3,
Clculo do Fator de Correo de Volume para
20oC, is implemented.
Section 6 - 165
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
GPA TP-16-6 for natural gasoline (relative

density 60/60 degrees F = 0.664) give Ctpl factors
computed from the CTL factor given by API 24A
and the CPL factor given by the API 11.2.2. The
DanLoad 6000 computes TP-16-6 by configuring
the appropriate temperature and pressure
correction options.
TP-16
GPA TP-16 CTPL factors for LPGs, i.e. TP-16-1
through TP-16-5. An appropriate relative density
60/60 degrees F (0.5010, 0.5050, etc.) Should be
configured. For TP-16-1 through TP-16-5, i.e.
propanes and butanes, the Cpl option should be
API 11.2.2 and the vapor pressure method should
be TP-15. The published TP-16 assumes TP-15
with atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psia (see
program code 822). TP-16" actually selects Old
Table 24, except that the component average
temperature is rounded to the nearest 0.5 degrees
F, and if necessary, two Ctl factors from Old Table
24 (which is defined in 1 degree F intervals) are
averaged. Standard reference temperature: 60
degrees F. Temperature correction to a nonstandard reference temperature via program code
430.
China
Similar to Linear CTL method, but uses a lookup table for the coefficient of thermal expansion
("20) based on component density at 20 degrees C.

YES.
Section 6 - 166
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
API 6D
API Table 6D for lubes: -10 to 45 degrees API, 0

to 300 degrees F. Standard reference temperature
is 60.0 degrees F. Temperature correction to a
non-standard reference temperature is done via
program code 430.
ASTM D 4311 Table 1 for asphalts. Less than or

equal to 34.9 degrees API, or greater than or equal
to 0.850 specific gravity 60oF/60oF, 0 to 500
degrees F. The input is degrees API if the density
scale (program code 046) is 2, otherwise it is
specific gravity. Standard reference temperature
is 60.0 degrees F. Temperature correction to a
non-standard reference temperature is via program
code 430.

YES.
#

YES.
API 54D
API Table 54D for lubes: 800 to 1064 kg/m3, -20
to 150 degrees C. Standard reference temperature
is 15 degrees C. Temperature correction to a nonstandard reference temperature is done via
program code 430.
YES.
4311 1
NH3
YES.
Section 6 - 167
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
sequential blender, i.e. more than one component through the

same meter, then the backup temperature must be entered for all
configured components.
CAN 54B
reference temperature is via program code 430.
433 / 436 / 439 / 442 Alpha

This program code sets the coefficient of thermal expansion ("T)
used by the linear equation or the API tables 6C or 54C. The
default value is 0.0005100

This program code sets the fixed temperature value to use for the
corresponding component in case of a failure of the live
temperature input from the RTD. The backup temperature can be
set at any time by an automation system or can be entered
manually in program mode/setup. (The backup temperature is per
component to simplify the interface to an automation system, but
could actually be per meter.) If a backup temperature is required
and the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multiple-component
Section 6 - 168
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 169
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
The Pressure options are not functional when the side stream blending is enabled (Program Code 023 set to YES).
PC#/ Function
(Four Components)
444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Off *
Const
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.1M
11.2.2M
Pbras
Pbras LPG
NH3
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000
0 to 999999999 <0>
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Backup pressure
0.0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
Section 6 - 170
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
PC#/ Function
(Four Components)
456 / 458 / 460 / 462 Density/gravity option
0 Off *
1 DT
2 5A
3 5B
4 23A
5 23B
6 53A
8 53B
9 L1
10 L2
457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backup density/gravity
-9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>

Entry and scale dependent on program code 046
Density/gravity scale:
1
nnnn.n
2
nnn.nn
3
nn.nnn
4
n.nnnn
Section 6 - 171
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
pressure compensation.
444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option

Program code 444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option selects the
method of pressure compensation.
Note
Daniel Industries, Inc. and Daniel Measurement and Control
Products (Daniel) shall not be held responsible or liable in
any way for loss or damage, including, but not limited to,
consequential damage, resulting from the use of volume
correction tables or related mathematical relationships or for
violation of any federal, state, or municipal laws,
regulations, or practices of the United States or of any
foreign country.
1
CP L =
[1 - (operating pressure - equilibrium pressure)
where:
CPL
Correction for the effect of

pressure on a liquid.
operating
pressure
The pressure obtained from a

pressure transmitter.
equilibrium
pressure
The equilibrium vapor pressure

obtained from program code
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Pe pressure.
F-factor
The compressibility factor for the

liquid obtained from program code
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X
1000000000.
The following selections are available.

#
Off
Disable pressure compensation.
F-factor]
Const
The following linear equation is used to calculate
Section 6 - 172
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
API Pressure Compensation Tables:
11.2.1
Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume to 0 pounds
per square inch against API gravity at 60 degrees
Fahrenheit. The table inputs are API gravity at 60 degrees
Fahrenheit obtained live or from program code 457 / 459
/ 461 / 463 Backup density/gravity and the F-factor
obtained from program code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 Ffactor X 1000000000 and the operating pressure obtained
from a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:
11.2.2
Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume to 0
pounds per square inch against relative density 60/60
degrees Fahrenheit. The table inputs are relative density
at 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from
program code 457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backup
density/gravity and the F-factor obtained from program
code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000 and the
operating pressure obtained from a pressure transmitter,
ranges for the table are:
Rel.Density
Temp.(dg.F) Press(PSI)
API Gravity Temp.(deg.F) Pressure (PSI)

0.350 to 0.637
0 to 90
-20 to +200
-50 to +140
0 to 2200
0 to 1500
Section 6 - 173
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
11.2.1M
Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume to 0
kiloPascals against absolute density at 15 degrees Celsius.
The table inputs are absolute density at 15 degrees Celsius
obtained live or from program code 457 / 459 / 461 / 463
Backup density/gravity and the F-factor obtained from
program code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X
1000000000 and the operating pressure obtained from a
pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:
Abs.Dns.(kg/m3)
638 to 1074
Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)
-30 to +90
0 to 10300
11.2.2M
Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of volume
to 0 kiloPascals against absolute density at 15
degrees Celsius. The table inputs are absolute
density at 15 degrees Celsius obtained live or
from program code 457 / 459 / 461 / 463 Backup
density/gravity and the F-factor obtained from
program code 445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X
1000000000 and the operating pressure obtained
from a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table
are:
Abs.Dns(kg/m3)
350 to 637
Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)
-46 to +60
0 to 15200
Section 6 - 174
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
#
Pbras
NH3
Pressure correction using degrees C and relative

density 20/4 degrees C per Petrobras, Brazil. The
relative density is converted and API Table
11.2.1M is used.
This option is available only in specially

programmed DanLoad 6000 units.
The
supporting calculations, though not the selection,
is disabled in the standard DanLoad 6000.
Pbras LPG
This option is specific to anhydrous ammonia

(NH3), and as such the component density is
implicit. The Pe method (program code 819)
should be configured as NH3". The temperature
range is 0 to 100 oF (inclusive). Note program
codes 239 and 240. The pressure range is 50 to
350 psig (inclusive). Note program codes 244 and
245. The pressure option has been programmed
such that the CTL, CPL and CTPL factors will be
set to 1.0 and a pressure failure alarm will be
raised if the input pressure is less than the
calculated vapor pressure.
Pressure correction for LPGs using degrees C and

relative density 20/4 degrees C per Petrobras,
Brazil. The temperature and relative density are
converted and API Table 11.2.2 is used.
The default value is Off.
Section 6 - 175
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000
This program code sets the constant F-factor used in pressure

compensation calculations (CPL). The entry value is multiplied
by 109 by the DanLoad 6000. This entry is only used if program
code 444 Pressure option is set to Const, since the other CPL
options calculate the F-Factor based on the temperature and
density.
This program code selects the status of using density inputs in the
flow calculations.
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Backup pressure

This is the component's backup pressure in pressure units
appropriate to the configured pressure correction option (kPa for
API Table 11.2.1M, psi for API Table 11.2.1, etc.), interpreted as
either static pressure (Pm) or differential pressure (Pd) depending
on the configured PT type (program code 818). A non-zero value
is used in standard quantity computations (pressure correction)
only, i.e. not for valve control. The effect on standard quantity
measurement accuracy should be considered very carefully before
using a backup pressure. The default value is 0.00, i.e. don't use
backup pressure.
Off
DT
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
5A
5B
23A
23B
53A
53B
L1
L2
Use configured backup density (program codes

457, etc.).
Use density from density transmitter input
(program codes 321, etc.).
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
From an LNG table, density (lb/ft3) against
pressure (45 to 201 psia) for pure methane
(Liquified Natural Gas).
From an LNG table, density (lb/ft3) against
temperature (-230.7 to -177.8 degrees F) for pure
methane (Liquified Natural Gas).
Section 6 - 176
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)

This program code sets the value of the density (or gravity) to
used in calculations when a live analog input is not available.
Entries in this field are validated in the following manner:
Temperature Option
Valid Entry
6A, 6B, 6C
0.00 to 100.00 API gravity
24A, 24B
0.6110 to 1.0760
relative density
Off, Linear,
54A, 54B, 54C
610.5 to 1075.0 kg/m3
Section 6 - 177
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
PC# / Function
(Four Meters)
464 / 468 / 472 / 476 Pressure @4 mA
0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
465 / 469 / 473 / 477 Pressure @20 mA
0 to 9999.99 <0.00>
466 / 470 / 474 / 478 Density @4 mA
-9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>
467 / 471 / 475 / 479 Density @20 mA
-9.9999 to 9.9999 <0>
Section 6 - 178
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.17

(continued)
464 / 468 / 472 / 476 Pressure @4 mA
466 / 470 / 474 / 478 Density @4 mA
Zero scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering unit

specified by program code 429 Pressure units.
Zero scale for density input from transmitter. The position of the
floating decimal point depends on the density/gravity scale
(program code 46).
465 / 469 / 473 / 477 Pressure @20 mA

467 / 471 / 475 / 479 Density @20 mA
Full scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering units
specified by program code 429 Pressure units.
Full scale for density input from transmitter. The position of the
floating decimal point depends on the density/gravity scale
(program code 46).
Program Code Definitions (480 to 661 Recipe Parameters) __________________________________________
Section 6 - 179
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.18
Recipes
PC# / Function
(Recipes 1 through 10)
Range <Default> OR
Option (* = Default)
0 to 30 <1>
481 / 487 / 493 / 499 / 505 / 511 / 517 / 523 / 529 / 535 Name
1 to 16 chars <Recipe #1>
482 / 488 / 494 / 500 / 506 / 512 / 518 / 524 / 530 / 536 Comp 1 %
0 to 100 <100>
483 / 489 / 495 / 501 / 507 / 513 / 519 / 525 / 531 / 537 Comp 2 %
0 to 100
484 / 490 / 496 / 502 / 508 / 514 / 520 / 526 / 532 / 538 Comp 3 %
0 to 100
485 / 491 / 497 / 503 / 509 / 515 / 521 / 527 / 533 / 539 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
0 to 300
486 / 492 / 498 / 504 / 510 / 516 / 522 / 528 / 534 / 540 Sequence or low proportion
nnnn
Section 6 - 180
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.18
Recipes (continued)
PC# / Function
Range <Default> OR
541 / 547 / 553 / 559 / 565 / 571 / 577 / 583 / 589 / 595 Name
1 to 16 chars
542 / 548 / 554 / 560 / 566 / 572 / 578 / 584 / 590 / 596 Comp 1 %
0 to 100
543 / 549 / 555 / 561 / 567 / 573 / 579 / 585 / 591 / 597 Comp 2 %
0 to 100
544 / 550 / 556 / 562 / 568 / 574 / 580 / 586 / 592 / 598 Comp 3 %
0 to 100
545 / 551 / 557 / 563 / 569 / 575 / 581 / 587 / 593 / 599 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
0 to 300
nnnn
Section 6 - 181
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.18
Recipes (continued)
PC# / Function
Range <Default> OR
601 / 607 / 613 / 619 / 625 / 631 / 637 / 643 / 649 / 655 Name
1 to 16 chars
602 / 608 / 614 / 620 / 626 / 632 / 638 / 644 / 650 / 656 Comp 1 %
0 to 100
603 / 609 / 615 / 621 / 627 / 633 / 639 / 645 / 651 / 657 Comp 2 %
0 to 100
604 / 610 / 616 / 622 / 628 / 634 / 640 / 646 / 652 / 658 Comp 3 %
0 to 100
605 / 611 / 617 / 623 / 629 / 635 / 641 / 647 / 653 / 659 Comp 4 % or ratio qty
0 to 300
nnnn
661 # add calib cycles
1 to 9999 <1>
NOTE:
1.
2.
PC#s 644/645/647 (compartment sizes) are used in conjunction with PC#s 349/350/351/352 (compartment size
inputs) when PC# 341 (# cmpt inputs) is configured.
PC#s 650/651/652/653 are the low and high limits for compartment sizes 2 and 4 respectively. Compartment sizes
1 and 3 do not have low and high limits associated with them.
Section 6 - 182
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.18
Recipes (continued)
Recipe Parameters contain data which defines the percentage of

each of one to four components that can be blended into a
composite liquid for deliveries. Single components are assigned
recipe names so that the component can be referred to by a
common name (example: Gasoline in place of Component 2). In
the case of a single component delivery, program code 482 / ...
/ 656 Component # % value for that component is 100 percent.
This program code sets the total number of recipes. At least one
recipe must be defined.
481 / ... / 655 Name
This program code contains the name used in displays and logs to
identify the recipe. The last two characters in this field can also
be used to select the additive using the configured additive
selection method.
482 / ... /656 Component 1 %

This program code sets the percentage of this component used in
the delivered blend. Zero means component is not used.
483 / ... / 657 Component 2 %
the delivered blend. Zero means the component is not used.
484 / ... / 658 Component 3 %
the delivered blend. Zero means the component is not used.
485 / ... / 659 Component 4 % or ratio volume
the delivered blend or the additive ratio quantity for the MultiRate additive selection method (which limits the DanLoad 6000
to a maximum of three components). Zero means that the
component is not used in the recipe.
Section 6 - 183
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.18
Recipes (continued)
486 / ... / 660 Sequence or low proportion

Note: Applicable to Unit type (026) = Seq. (Auto or Man)
This program code selects the sequence to deliver the
components. The sum of the recipe selected component
percentages must equal 100 percent.
Example: Sequence to load = 312 means component 3 is loaded,
then component 1 is loaded, then component 2 is loaded. If the
DanLoad 6000 is configured for only one component, this value
must be 1".
Note: Applicable to Unit type (026) = In-line
A '0' or a '1' in each component position (nnnn = 1234)
indicates that the corresponding component is either a highproportion component (0) or a low-proportion component (1).
Example: Sequence to load = 0100 means that component 2 is a
low-proportion component for a 4-component blend. If the
DanLoad 6000 is configured for only one component, this value
must be 0".
Low-proportion components must be indicated so that the

DanLoad 6000 can load these components at the normal flow
rates during the first part of the loading time period. This method
of loading is performed because the DanLoad 6000 cannot keep
a constant blend ratio correct without allowing the flow rate of a
low-proportion component to fall below the minimum flow rate
of the components meter. Therefore, as the loading progresses,
the quantity of the low-proportion components exceeds the
quantity desired by the batch ratio. The high-proportion
components continue to be loaded throughout the total time
period of the batch delivery. At the end of the batch delivery, the
blend ratio is correct.
Low proportion products are those whose flow rates, if allowed
to be loaded proportionally (in proper blend ratio throughout the
load), would fall below the minimum rating of the meter. These
components are therefore loaded at a specific rate (refer to
product code 715) which is within the meters rating. The
DanLoad 6000 calculates the quantity of this required component,
allows the primary component(s) to load the Low Flow Start
quantity, then loads the low-proportional component at the
specified rate. When this quantity has been loaded, the valve for
this component closes and the batch continues normally for the
other component(s). The blend ratio will not be correct until the
end of the batch delivery.
Section 6 - 184
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.18
Recipes (continued)
661 # add calib cycles

The number of additive injection cycles that are performed when
START is pressed in the additive calibration screen (refer to
Additive Meter Calibration - Section 3.10.3). The default value
is 1, i.e. one additive injection cycle each time the START key
is pressed in the additive calibration screen.
Section 6 - 185
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.19
Data Communications
PC#
Ch. A
Ch. B
Function
662
662
Address
0 to 255 <0>
663
668
Mode
0
1
2
3
Not used *
Modbus RTU
ASCII
Data logging (ch. B only)
664
669
Data Rate
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
300 bps
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
665
670
Word Size
0
1
2
3
5 bits
6 bits
7 bits
8 bits
666
671
Stop Bits
0 1 bit
1 1-1/2 bits
2 2 bits
667
672
Parity
0 None
1 Odd
2 Even
Program Code Definitions (662 to 672 Data Communications Parameters) ______________________________ Section 6 - 186
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.19
Data Communications (continued)
Data Communications Parameters contain data which defines

operating parameters for the one or two serial ports and the
network port. Serial ports can be used for communications with
a Terminal Automation System, host computer, and data logging
printer or device. The network port can be used for
communications with a Terminal Automation System or other
host computer. On the v1 CPU board, the DUART is on a
daughter board with an address switch that is read on power-up.
On the v2 CPU board, the DUART is built-in and is addressed via
program code 662.
663 / 668 Mode

This program code selects the protocol used for data
communications with an external device, such as a data printer,
a terminal automation system, or other host computer.
#
This port is not assigned.

#
Modbus RTU
Modicon Modbus RTU (binary) protocol.
662 Address
The communications address for the Modbus RTU protocol and
to identify the unit on data logs. This should typically be
modified from the default value prior to placing the unit in
service. The default value is 0 in order to avoid conflict with
another unit on the same multidrop.
Not used
ASCII
Not used.
Data logging
Send data logs to this port, can be connected to an alphanumeric data printer or other data logging device. (For use
with RS-232 channel B only.)
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.19
Data Communications (continued)
664 / 669 Data rate
667 / 672 Parity
This program code selects the bits per second data rate used by
this port.
This program code selects the parity checking method.

#
Note: If 38400 bps is selected for Channel B then 19200 bps is

not available on Channel A. This is due to the SCN2681's
Auxiliary Control Registers Baud Rate Generator Set Select. On
the DanLoad 6000, Channel B controls the available set of baud
rates. 38400 bps is not intended for normal operational use.
None
Parity checking in not performed.
Odd
Odd parity checking is performed.
665 / 670 Word size

This program code selects the data word length in bits.
Even
Even parity checking is performed.
666 / 671 Stop bits

This program code selects of the number of stop bits used in
serial data transmission.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20
Dynamic Data Display
PC# / Function
Range <Default> OR
PC# / Function
Range <Default> OR
679 Mode
Off
Standard *
All
688 Line 9 data code
3 digit data display code
Program Code Definitions (679 to 695 Dynamic Data Display Parameters) _____________________________
Section 6 - 190
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20
Dynamic Data Display (continued)
Dynamic Data Display Parameters contain program codes which

define data values that can be viewed when the DanLoad 6000 is
prompting for a preset quantity or a batch delivery is in progress.
The viewable data lines are displayed in pages with four lines in
each page. The data variables that can be assigned to each line
are selected by entry of a one to three digit identifying number
(Dynamic Data Display Data Code). These Data Codes are listed
in Section 6.20.1.
All
The dynamic data display can be invoked by pressing the

"SELECT" key in the loading screen. Four pages, each with four
data codes (identified by program codes 680 thru 695), are
displayed, plus additional pages for data codes 1 thru
<maximum> in ascending order.
Example:
Four configurable pages
679 Mode
This program code controls how the dynamic data display items
are presented. The default value is Standard.
#
Grs
Std
Mtr
Mtr
batch
batch
1 grs
1 std
qty
qty
total
total
150
152
23838017
23839223
5
6
7
8
Mtr
Mtr
Mtr
Mtr
1
1
1
1
grs
std
grs
flw
batch
batch
unauth
rate
9
10
11
12
Mtr
Mtr
Mtr
Mtr
1
1
1
1
factor
1.0000
grs ld
149.72
pls cnt
3821
max flw rate
602
Off
The dynamic data display is disabled.

#
1
2
3
4
Standard
The dynamic data display can be invoked by pressing the

SELECT key in the loading screen. Four pages, each with four
data codes (identified by program codes 680 through 695), are
displayed.
150
152
0.0
597
Section 6 - 191
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.20
13
14
15
16
Mtr
Cmp
Cmp
Arm
1 curr temp
1 ave temp
1 ave vlv cls
position
42.6
42.6
230
1
Data codes 1 through <maximum>

This program code selects display of the description and data
value associated with the specified data code at page 1, line 1 in
the Dynamic Data Display.
001Arm
002Grs
003Std
004Mtr
position
batch qty
batch qty
1 grs total
1
150
152
23838017
005Mtr
006Mtr
007Mtr
008Mtr
1
1
1
1
23839223
150
152
597
etc.
std
grs
std
flw
total
batch
batch
rate

Section 6 - 192
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20


.




Section 6 - 193
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20






Section 6 - 194
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20.1
Dynamic Data Display Data Codes
Up to sixteen of the Dynamic Data Display Data Codes listed

below can be selected for inclusion in the Dynamic Data Display.
The label and the current value of these variables can be
displayed in a window, superimposed in the center area of the
Loading Display. Up to four windows, each window containing
four dynamic data lines can be defined. The dynamic data is
displayable while in the Loading Mode by pressing the SELECT
key. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to change the display
pages. The CLEAR key removes the Dynamic Data Display
window from the Loading Display.
Code
Display Data
Function
001
002
003
Batch Data
Arm position
Grs batch qty
Std batch qty
swing arm position indicator

gross batch quantity
standard batch quantity
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Flow Meter 1 Data

Mtr 1 grs total
Mtr 1 std total
Mtr 1 grs batch
Mtr 1 std batch
Mtr 1 flw rate
Mtr 1 CCF
Mtr 1 max flw rate
Mtr 1 factor
Mtr 1 pls cnt
gross totalizer quantity

std totalizer quantity
std batch quantity
instantaneous flow rate
combined correction factor
maximum flow rate this batch
meter factor
pulse count total (resets at 65535)
Code
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
Display Data
Function
Mtr 1 pls flrt1
pulse count at low flow rate (for load)
Mtr 1 pls flrt2
pulse count at flow rate 2 (for load)
Mtr 1 pls flrt3
Mtr 1 pls flrt4
Mtr 1 grs unauth unauthorized gross quantity
Mtr 1 std unauth unauthorized std quantity
Mtr 1 grs start
start gross quantity
Mtr 1 std start
start std quantity
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
Flow Meter 2 Data

Mtr 2 grs total
Mtr 2 std total
Mtr 2 grs batch
Mtr 2 std batch
std batch quantity
Mtr 2 flw rate
Mtr 2 CCF
average flow rate
Mtr 2 max flwrate maximum flow rate this batch
Mtr 2 factor
meter factor
Mtr 2 pls cnt
Mtr 2 pls flrt1
pulse count at low flow rate (for load)
Mtr 2 pls flrt2
Mtr 2 pls flrt3
Mtr 2 pls flrt4
Mtr 2 grs start
Mtr 2 std start
start std quantity
Section 6 - 195
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20.1
Code
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054

(continued)
Display Data
Flow Meter 3 Data
Mtr 3 grs total
Mtr 3 std total
Mtr 3 grs batch
Mtr 3 std batch
Mtr 3 flw rate
Mtr 3 CCF
Mtr 3 max flw rate
Mtr 3 factor
Mtr 3 pls cnt
Mtr 3 pls flrt1
Mtr 3 pls flrt2
Mtr 3 pls flrt3
Mtr 3 pls flrt4
Mtr 3 grs unauth
Mtr 3 std unauth
Mtr 3 grs start
Mtr 3 std start
Function
std batch quantity
average flow rate
maximum flow rate this batch
meter factor
pulse count - low flow rate (for load)
unauthorized gross quantity
unauthorized std quantity
start std quantity
Code
Display Data
Function
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
Flow Meter 4 Data

Mtr 4 grs total
Mtr 4 std total
Mtr 4 grs batch
Mtr 4 std batch
std batch quantity
Mtr 4 flw rate
Mtr 4 CCF
average flow rate
Mtr 4 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch
Mtr 4 factor
meter factor
Mtr 4 pls cnt
Mtr 4 pls flrt1
pulse count - low flow rate (for load)
Mtr 4 pls flrt2
Mtr 4 pls flrt3
Mtr 4 pls flrt4
Mtr 4 grs start
Mtr 4 std start
start std quantity
072
073
074
075
076
077
Component 1 Data
Cmp 1 grs batch
Cmp 1 std batch
Mtr 1 curr temp
Cmp 1 ave temp
Cmp 1 ave vlv cls
Cmp 1 batch %
component gross quantity, batch

component std quantity, batch
component current temperature
component batch average temp
comp. average FCV closure time
component # % from recipe
Section 6 - 196
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20.1

(continued)
Code
Display Data
Function
078
079
080
081
082
083
Component 2 Data
Cmp 2 grs batch
Cmp 2 std batch
Mtr 2 curr temp
Cmp 2 ave temp
Cmp 2 ave vlv cls
Cmp 2 batch %

084
085
086
087
088
089
Component 3 Data
Cmp 3 grs batch
Cmp 3 std batch
Mtr 3 curr temp
Cmp 3 ave temp
Cmp 3 ave vlv cls
Cmp 3 batch %

090
091
092
093
094
095
Component 4 Data
Cmp 4 grs batch
Cmp 4 std batch
Mtr 4 curr temp
Cmp 4 ave temp
Cmp 4 ave vlv cls
Cmp 4 batch %

Code
Display Data
Function
Additive Injection Data

1
2
3
4
5
6
total
total
total
total
total
total
(Batch)
096
097
098
099
100
101
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
accumulated
accumulated
accumulated
accumulated
accumulated
accumulated
additive
additive
additive
additive
additive
additive
102
103
104
105
106
Delivery Quantity Data

Preset quantity
preset entry
Mtr 1 grs load
accumulated total
Mtr 2 grs load
accumulated total
Mtr 3 grs load
accumulated total
Mtr 4 grs load
accumulated total
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
Pressure and Density Data

Cmp 1 ave dens
average
Cmp 1 ave pres
average
Cmp 2 ave dens
average
Cmp 2 ave pres
average
Cmp 3 ave dens
average
Cmp 3 ave pres
average
Cmp 4 ave dens
average
Cmp 4 ave pres
average
density,
pressure,
density,
pressure,
density,
pressure,
density,
pressure,
volume
volume
volume
volume
volume
volume
(n.nn)
(n.nn)
(n.nn)
(n.nn)
component 1
component 1
component 2
component 2
component 3
component 3
component 4
component 4
Section 6 - 197
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20.1

(continued)
Code
Display Data
Function
115
116
117
118
119
120
Additive Data for Batch

Add 1 batch
additive
Add 2 batch
additive
Add 3 batch
additive
Add 4 batch
additive
Add 5 batch
additive
Add 6 batch
additive
1
2
3
4
5
6
volume
volume
volume
volume
volume
volume
121
Total Flow Rate

Flow rate
122
123
124
125
Component Blend Ratio

Cmp 1 adjust %
comp 1 % for
Cmp 2 adjust %
comp 2 % for
Cmp 3 adjust %
comp 3 % for
Cmp 4 adjust %
comp 4 % for
126
127
128
129
Quantity Correction Factor for Load

Mtr 1 CTL
meter 1
Mtr 2 CTL
meter 2
Mtr 3 CTL
meter 3
Mtr 4 CTL
meter 4
130
131
132
133
134
this/last
this/last
this/last
this/last
this/last
this/last
batch
batch
batch
batch
batch
batch
load flow rate

blend
blend
blend
blend
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
adj
adj
adj
adj
Batch Data
Power fail grs bch gross delivered vol. at power fail time
Power fail std bch std
delivered qty at power fail time
Batch temperature
average temperature during load
Batch density
average density during load
Batch pressure
average pressure during load
Code
Display Data
Function
135
136
137
138
Current Meter Pressure

Mtr 1 curr pres
meter
Mtr 2 curr pres
meter
Mtr 3 curr pres
meter
Mtr 4 curr pres
meter
139
140
141
142
Pressure Correction Factor for Load

Mtr 1 CPL
meter 1
Mtr 2 CPL
meter 2
Mtr 3 CPL
meter 3
Mtr 4 CPL
meter 4
143
144
145
146
Current Meter Density

Mtr 1 curr dens
Mtr 2 curr dens
Mtr 3 curr dens
Mtr 4 curr dens
meter
meter
meter
meter
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Delivery Volume Data

147
148
149
150
Mtr
Mtr
Mtr
Mtr
1
2
3
4
std
std
std
std
ld
ld
ld
ld
accumulated
accumulated
accumulated
accumulated
total
total
total
total
(n.nn)
(n.nn)
(n.nn)
(n.nn)
Section 6 - 198
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20.1

(continued)
Code
Display Data
Function
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Component
Cmp 1 grs
Cmp 1 std
Cmp 2 grs
Cmp 2 std
Cmp 3 grs
Cmp 3 std
Cmp 4 grs
Cmp 4 std
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
Recipe Quantity Totals

Rec 1 grs tot
Recipe 1 gross quantity, total
Rec 1 std tot
Recipe 1 std quantity, total
Rec 2 grs tot
Rec 2 std tot
Rec 3 grs tot
Rec 3 std tot
Rec 4 grs tot
Rec 4 std tot
Rec 5 grs tot
Rec 5 std tot
Rec 6 grs tot
Rec 6 std tot
Rec 7 grs tot
Rec 7 std tot
Rec 8 grs tot
Rec 8 std tot
Rec 9 grs tot
Rec 9 std tot
Rec 10 grs tot
Rec 10 std tot
Rec 11 grs tot
Rec 11 std tot
Quantity Totals
total
component
total
component
total
component
total
component
total
component
total
component
total
component
total
component
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
gross quantity, total

std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
Code
Display Data
Function
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27

std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
Section 6 - 199
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.20.1

(continued)
Code
Display Data
Function
213
214
215
216
217
218
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Rec
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
Recipe
219
220
221
222
223
Meter
Mtr 1
Mtr 2
Mtr 3
Mtr 4
Flush
28
28
29
29
30
30
grs
std
grs
std
grs
std
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
tot
28
28
29
29
30
30

std quantity, total
std quantity, total
std quantity, total
Calibration Status
calib stat
meter 1
calib stat
meter 2
calib stat
meter 3
calib stat
meter 4
pls cnt
Multi-Stream Additive Injection
Flush pulse count
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
Current safety circuit state

Safety 1
State of safety circuit 1
Safety 2
Safety 3
Safety 4
Safety 5
Safety 6
Safety 7
Safety 8
Cpmt qty
Compartment quantity based on
compartment size inputs
Add 1 fail code
Additive 1 failure reason code
Add 2 fail code
Add 3 fail code
Add 4 fail code
Add 5 fail code
Add 6 fail code
Add 1%
Additive #1 % of required additive
Add 2%
Add 3%
Add 4%
Add 5%
Add 6%
Power fail preset
Power fail preset quantity
Power fail remain
Power fail remaining quantity
Section 6 - 200
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
Section 6 - 201
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.21
Data Logging
Program Code / Function
696 Batch summary
697 Transaction summary
698 Alarm log
699 Power fail log
700 Program mode entry/exit
701 W &M switch opened/closed
702 Program value change log
Range <Default> OR
0 Off *
1 PR
2 PRFF
3 PR1
4 PR1FF
5 PR2
6 PR2FF
7 PR3
8 PR3FF
9 PR4
10 PR4FF
703 Configuration summary

704 Crash memory summary
705 Totalizers
706 Transaction ticket
707 Transaction ticket reprint
708 Throughput
709 Sequence Numbers
0 Off *
1 On
710 Cutoff hour
0 to 23 <0>
Program Code Definitions (696 to 710 Data Logging Parameters) ____________________________________
Section 6 - 202
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.21
Data Logging (continued)
Data Logging program codes are used to control printing of

several types of reports or event / alarm logs. Program codes 696
through 708 enable data printing to one of four printers or disable
the printing of the related report. program code 709 Sequence
numbers enables or disables printing of report sequence numbers
on all reports. See Section 4.4 for a description of data spooling
and printing with a code operated switch.
698 Alarm log

This program code controls spooling and printing of single line
alarm logs.
699 Power fail log
Data logging program codes with common option selections.

power fail logs.
696 Batch summary
This program code controls spooling and printing of the fixed

format batch summary report.

program mode change logs.
701 W&M switch opened/closed
This program code controls spooling and printing of the fixed

format transaction summary report.

W&M switch status logs.
Section 6 - 203
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.21
702 Program code value change log
Operated Switch) and form feed control can be configured.
This program code controls spooling and printing of program

code value change logs.

The configuration summary data log (a log showing all program
code values) can be printed from the diagnostics menu in the
manual operating mode. The printer on which to print (via a
Code Operated Switch) and form feed control can be configured.
This program code controls spooling and printing of the current

user defined transaction ticket. See Section 3.10 for a complete
description of transaction data storage and user defined
transaction tickets.
This program code controls spooling and printing of the Crash

memory summary.
This program code controls spooling and printing of a copy of a

completed user defined transaction ticket from the archive of up
to 10,000 transaction tickets. See Section 3.10 for a complete
description of transaction data storage and ticket printing.
705 Totalizers
708 Recipe throughput
This program code enables/disables automatic printing every 24

hours (per program code 710 and manual reprinting (from the
program mode menu) of meter, component, recipe and additive
running totalizers. The printer on which to print (via a Code
This program code controls spooling and printing of the Recipe

Throughput report every 24-hours.
Section 6 - 204
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.21
The following option selections apply to each of the program

codes 696 through 708.
PR1
Enable spooling for this report and direct this report to
printer number 1 via control code to code operated switch.
Off
#
PR1FF
Disable spooling and printing for this data log.

#
PR
Enable spooling and printing for this data log. (No code
operated switch)
Same as PR1 above, except send form-feed control to

printer at end of report.
#

PRFF
Same as PR above, except send form feed control to
PR2
PR2FF
Section 6 - 205
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.21
PR3
709 Sequence numbers

This program code globally enables or disables printing of data

log sequence numbers on all reports. Up to four counters, one
for each data printer enabled, are maintained by the DanLoad
6000. Each counter maintains the current sequence number of
any report printed to one data printer. The sequence is 0000 to
9999 with automatic rollover to 0000 after report 9999 is printed.
Sequence numbers are generated on a per printer basis and each
printed report or alarm / event printed line is assigned a sequence
number which is printed if
this function is enabled. Note that the report sequence numbers
are not related to transaction or batch sequence numbers.
PR3FF
PR4
#
#
Off (default)
PR4FF
Enable printing of report sequence numbers on each
report.

#
On
Disable printing of report sequence numbers.
Section 6 - 206
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.21
710 Cutoff hour

The hour (24-hour clock/military time) at which a cutoff (end of day) processing is run by the DanLoad 6000. Cutoff processing is
postponed until any batch in progress is ended. Cutoff processing includes storing and printing meter, component, recipe and additive
totalizers. The default is 0, i.e. cutoff at midnight.
Once a second, the DanLoad 6000 compares the current hour with the configured cutoff hour, the current day with the last cutoff day and
the current hour with the last cutoff hour as follows:
if (CurrentHour IS EQUAL TO ConfiguredCutoffHour)
BEGIN
if
(
(CurrentDay IS NOT EQUAL TO LastCutoffDay)
OR
(CurrentHour IS GREATER THAN LastCutoffHour))
BEGIN
RunCutoff( )
END
END
This allows multiple cutoffs per day to be run per day by increasing the configured cutoff hour (program code 710).
Section 6 - 207
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
Blending
PC# / Function
711 Ramp down %
0 to 100 <50>
712 Rate reduction
0 to 9999 <100>
0 to 99999 <50>
714 Clean line qty
0 to 9999 <0>
715 Low prop fac
1 to 4 <1>
716 Correct after qty
0 to 9999 <100>
717 Alarm after qty
0 to 9999 <200>
718 Adjustment qty
0 to 9999 <50>
719 Comp % display
0 Gross *
1 Std
720 Add calib delay (s)
0 to 9999 <0>
Program Code Definitions (711 to 799 Blending Parameters) __________________________________________ Section 6 - 208
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
Blending (continued)
Blending Parameters, program codes 710 to 770 are used to

define the method of handling a product blending process.
Various parameters in this group interact with other parameters,
dependent on the type of blending process defined by program
code 026 Unit type. Details on configuration of each type of
blending operation are contained in Section 3 - Setup.
711 Ramp down %
This program code defines the quantity of the primary component

to load at the end of the batch delivery to purge the blend from
the loading lines. If, for a particular batch, the preset quantity is
less than or equal to the clean line quantity, the batch is delivered
as if there were no clean line quantity configured. The default
value is 0.
The percentage of the blends desired flow rate to which the

blends flow rate is initially reduced when there is insufficient
pressure to maintain the blends desired flow rate during an inline blend. The blends flow rate is not reduced below the blends
low flow rate. The default value is 50.
This program code defines the quantity to load at the low flow
rate before increasing the flow rate to high (normal) flow rate.
714 Clean line qty
715 Low prop fac

712 Rate reduction
This program code defines the flow rate reduction [high
(normal) flow rate minus program code 712 Rate reduction] that
is used if the high flow rate cannot be maintained.
This program code defines the calibration point flow rate at which
to deliver those components that are configured as low-proportion
components in a recipe. The default value is 1.
This program code defines the quantity of the blend to deliver
before blend adjustment begins. The default value is 100.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
717 Alarm after qty
719 Comp % display
This program code defines the quantity of the blend to deliver

before enabling the checking and action of the blend ratio alarm
function that generates the message: Unable to maintain blend.
This program code defines the display form for the quantities of
the blend components, defined by the active recipe. The default
is Gross.
718 Adjustment qty

This program code defines the blend quantity to consider when
adjusting the flow, via flow control valves, to maintain the blend
ratio. A small value for this parameter causes the DanLoad 6000
to issue more clicks (adjustment commands) to flow control
valves to correct errors in the blend ratio. The default value is 50.
Gross
Std

In the additive meter calibration screen (see Additive Meter
Calibration - Section 3.10.3), this is the time (in seconds)
between pressing the START key and the beginning of the first
additive injection cycle. This program code is intended to give
the operator time to move from the preset to the additive injector,
if necessary. The default value is 0.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
PC# / Function
722 Blend error method
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
723 Max dev %
0 to 999 <2>
724 Blend tol %
0 to 999 <5>
725 Max dev qty
0 to 9999 <20>
726 Blend tol qty
0 to 9999 <40>
727 Blend sample qty
0 to 9999 <10>
Grspctbatch *
Stdpctbatch
Grsqtydiff
Stdqtydiff
Grspctsmpl
Stdpctsmpl
Flrtsmpl
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
This program code defines the method for computing blend ratio
adjustments and sensing blend ratio error conditions.
Samples of the gross quantity percentages of each blend

component, relative to the gross quantity of the primary
component set by program code 111 Primary component, are
used in the batch delivery calculations.
Grspctbatch
Gross quantity percentages of each blend component are used in

batch delivery calculations.
#
Stdpctbatch
Standard quantity percentages of each blend component are used

in the batch delivery calculations.
Flrtsmpl
Grsqtydiff
Gross quantity difference between each blend component are used

in the batch delivery calculations.
#
Stdpctsmpl
Samples of the std quantity percentages of each blend component,

relative to the std quantity of the primary component set by
program code 111 Primary component, are used in the batch
delivery calculations.
#
Grspctsmpl
The sampled flow rates of each blend component are used in the
batch delivery calculations.
Stdqtydiff
Standard quantity difference between each blend component are

used in the batch delivery calculations.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
723 Max dev %
726 Blend tol qty
This program code defines the maximum percentage deviation for

the blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component of
the blend. When the value is program code 723 Max dev % is
reached, a blend ratio adjustment is performed.
This program code defines the maximum quantity tolerance

allowed for the blend before generating an Unable to maintain
blend alarm.
727 Blend sample quantity

724 Blend tol %
This program code defines the maximum percentage tolerance
allowed for the blend before generating an Unable to maintain
blend alarm.
This program code defines the blend quantity to deliver between

calculations of blend ratio by percentage methods ('Grspctsmpl'
and 'Stdpctsmpl').
725 Max dev qty

This program code defines the maximum quantity deviation for
the blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component of
the blend.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
PC# / Function(Four Meters)
728 / 734 / 740 / 746 Flow adj fac
0.00 to 9.99 <1.00>
729 / 735 / 741 / 747 Ratio adj fac
1.00 to 9.99 <1.00>
730 / 736 / 742 / 748 Ramp %
0 to 110 <85>
731 / 737 / 743 / 749 CALMON analysis method
Fuzzy *
Heuristic
PC# / Function MPMC
752 FPO basis
Raw *
Gross
Net
753 CALMON error limit
0 to 255 <25>
754 CALMON reset count
0 to 9999 <50>
0 Off
1 Info
2 Secondary
3 Primary *
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
PC# / Function
(Four Components)
756 / 761 / 766 / 771 FPO
0 to 2 <0>
757 / 762 / 767 / 772 Number of blades
0 to 50 <0>
758 / 763 / 768 / 773 Max max char dev
0 to 65535 <100>
759 / 764 / 769 / 774 Max tot char devs
0 to 65535 <400>
760 / 765 / 770 / 775 Calibration sample
0 Not acquired *
1 Acquired
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
728 / 734 / 740 / 746 Flow adj fac
731 / 737 / 743 / 749 CALMON analysis method
This program code defines a factor for each flow meter used in
the blend. The factor provides fine tuning of individual flow rates
for blend ratio adjustment. Reduce the value if the ramp up to
normal flow rate is too fast. Increase the value if the ramp up to
normal flow rate is too slow.
This program code selects the logic used to perform a

calibration monitoring analysis with a MPMC board installed.
The default value is Fuzzy.
#
Calibration monitoring analysis incorporates Fuzzy

logic with four inputs and one output. This is the
recommended setting.
729 / 735 / 741 / 747 Ratio adj fac

This program code defines a factor for each component of the
blend. The factor provides fine tuning for individual components
for blend ratio adjustment.
Fuzzy
Heuristic
Analysis operation using the Heuristic method.
730 / 736 / 742 / 748 Ramp %

[Sequential blending / digital flow control valves]
Percentage of desired flow rate to ramp up by a single click of the
downstream solenoid valve, before switching to flow rate
maintenance.
In the DanLoad 6000's "Blending" setup group (setup group 20)

there are twenty-three program codes (three "global" and five "per
meter") associated with the "smart" 4-ch. meter pulse board's (4ch. meter pulse board with MPMC installed) factored pulse
output (FPO) and calibration monitoring (CALMON) features.
Factored pulse outputs are supported by DanLoad 6000.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
752 FPO basis
The factor that is applied to the meter pulse inputs ("A" streams)
in order to generate the factored pulse outputs (FPO's). The
default value is "Raw". Select one of the following:
The "total analyses", "good meter analyses" and "bad meter

analyses" counters are zeroed every "CALMON reset count"
calibration monitoring analyses during monitoring; a calibration
failure alarm is raised for the meter if there are no "good meter
analyses" in "CALMON reset count" calibration monitoring
analyses during monitoring. This is also the number of attempts
to auto-detect the number of blades (if necessary) and acquire a
calibration sample before a calibration failure alarm is raised for
the meter during calibration. The default value is 50.
"Raw". One-to-one, i.e. the factor is 1.0000. This

is required for compatibility with the "prover
outputs" on 2-ch. meter pulse boards.
"Gross". The factor is the (current) meter factor.
"Net". The factor is the (current) meter factor

multiplied by the combined correction factor
(CCF).

The number of "bad meter analyses" per CALMON reset count
(program code 754) calibration monitoring analyses above which
a calibration failure alarm is raised for the meter during
monitoring. The default value is 10.

This program code sets the calibration failure alarm action for
calibration monitoring. Refer to MPMC v2.00 (Calibration
Monitoring) specifications for more information about this alarm
and the pertinent operating conditions. Selections include Off
which disables the alarm, Info, Secondary and Primary.
Primary is the default.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
756 / 761 / 766 / 771 FPO
759 / 764 / 769 / 774 Max tot char devs
The factored pulse output on the "smart" 4-ch. meter pulse board
on which to generate factored pulses according to the configured
FPO basis (program code 752). The default value is zero, i.e.
FPO disabled.
The sum signature deviation computed during a calibration

monitoring analysis above which a "bad meter" result may be
indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. The
default value (400) detects a 10% blade deviation corresponding
to an average K-factor change of 0.3%.
757 / 762 / 767 / 772 Number of blades

760 / 765 / 770 / 775 Calibration sample
The number of magnetic blades (or buttons) on the meter for
calibration monitoring purposes.
0 disables calibration
monitoring for the meter. Any other value enables calibration
monitoring for the meter. 1 indicates that the number of blades
should be auto-detected by the MPMC prior to acquiring a
calibration sample. The default value is zero, i.e. calibration
monitoring disabled for the meter.
The current calibration status (according to DanLoad 6000's point

of view). This program code can be used to force acquisition of
a new calibration sample. The default value is "Not acquired".
#
Not acquired - The calibration sample has not

been acquired or is invalid. (Calibration sample is
requested if the number of blades is greater than
0.)
Acquired - The calibration sample has been

acquired and is valid.
758 / 763 / 768 / 773 Max max char dev

The maximum signature deviation computed during a calibration
monitoring analysis above which a "bad meter" result may be
indicated, i.e. the "bad meter" counter may be incremented. The
default value (100) detects a 10% blade deviation corresponding
to an average K-factor change of 0.3%.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
The calibration monitoring (CALMON) status screen is selected using the "CALMON status" option in the program mode menu. The
DanLoad 6000 prompts for a meter number.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
CALMON status
Meter 9
<- Enter meter number.

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Enter a valid meter number or press "ALT"+"CLEAR" to return to the program mode menu. (A valid meter number is any configured
meter, i.e. 1 <= meter number <= program code 50.) If there is no 4-ch. MP and MPMC v2.00 board associated with the meter, or if the
meters configured number of blades is zero, then zeros are displayed for all calibration monitoring data. If there is an error reading from
the MPMC board, then the maximum possible value is displayed for unsigned values and -1 is displayed for signed values. The DanLoad
6000 displays the calibration sample (two pages), the monitoring sample (two pages) and the calibration monitoring analysis (one page).
Use the "8" and "9" keys (as indicated on the display) to move up and down through the 5 pages. Use "ALT"+"CLEAR" to return to the
"Enter meter number" screen. Numbers are displayed in decimal (base 10) except for the blade ratios which are in hexadecimal (base 16).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
Calibration sample (two pages)
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Calibration sample
Not acquired
Sample freq
99999
Freq stability x 100
99999
Mean blade dev x 100
99999
Sample stability x 100
99999
Sample count
99999
<<<<<<-
Meter ID, heading and calibration sample status

unsigned int
unsigned int (max. rot dev)
unsigned int
unsigned int (max. blade ratio diff)
unsigned int
9
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
The maximum blade ratio (ratios) has (have) a plus sign to the right of it (them). The minimum blade ratio (ratios) has (have) a minus sign
to the right of it (them).
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Calibration sample
Not acquired <- Meter ID, heading and calibration sample status
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX <- Up to 50 blade ratios x 1000 (unsigned int) in hex
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX
89
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
Monitoring sample (two pages)

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Monitoring sample
Sample freq
99999
99999
Mean blade dev x 100
99999
Sample stability x 100
99999
Sample count
99999
<<<<<<-
Meter ID
unsigned
unsigned
unsigned
unsigned
unsigned
and heading
int
int (max. rot dev)
int
int (max. blade ratio diff)
int
89
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX Monitoring sample
<- Meter ID and heading
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX <- Up to 50 blade ratios x 1000 (unsigned int) in hex
XXXX XXXX
89
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
Calibration monitoring analysis (one page)

If a "blade 1 fit", i.e. alignment of the monitoring sample with the calibration sample, was not possible then the MPMC sets "Max char
dev" and "Tot char devs" to 65535.
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
XXXXX CALMON analysis
Working number of blades
99
99999
Max char dev
99999
Tot char devs
9999999999
Good 99999 Bad 99999 Reset 99999
MPMC board 9 MPMC alarms XXXX
<<<<<<<-
Meter ID and heading

unsigned char
unsigned int (sum max. rot dev)
unsigned int
long
unsigned int, unsigned int, unsigned int
int, unsigned int (bonus data!)
8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.22
PC# / Function
[(Recipes 1 through 10), (11 to 20), (21 to 30)]
776 / 778 / 780 / 782 / 784 / 786 / 788 / 790 / 792 / 794 /
796 / 798 Low flow rate
0 to 99999 <200>
777 / 779 / 781 / 783 / 785 / 787 / 789 / 791 / 793 / 795 /
797 / 799 High flow rate
0 to 99999 <600>
776 / ... / 798 Low flow rate
777 / ... / 799 High flow rate
This program code defines the low flow rate setpoint for the batch
recipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each have
independent low flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20 share
one low flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through 30 share one low
flow rate setpoint.
This program code defines the high flow rate setpoint for the
batch recipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each have
independent high flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20
share one common high flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through
30 share one common high flow rate setpoint.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.23
Additive Pumps / Block Valves
PC# / Function
(Six Additives)
800 / 803 / 806 / 809 / 812 / 815 Pump output
801 / 804 / 807 / 810 / 813 / 816 Block valve output
Program Code Definitions (800 to 816 Additive Pump/Block Valve Parameters) _________________________ Section 6 - 228
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.23
Additive Pumps / Block Valves (continued)
This group of parameters is used to assign the discrete control

outputs which control additive injector pumps and additive line
block valves. Assigned and active additive pumps and control
valves are opened when the batch load is started. Additives are
then injected under control of program code 380 / 383 / 386 / 389
/ 392 / 395 Ratio output for each additive. An additive block
valve is closed after the last program code 380 / 383 / 386 / 389
/ 392 / 395 Ratio output for the batch delivery is completed. An
additive pump is stopped at the time the batch delivery is stopped.
800 / 803 / 806 / 809 / 812 / 815 Pump output

This program code assigns a physical discrete output for
controlling RUN / STOP of an additive injector pump. The
default value is 0.
801 / 804 / 807 / 810 / 813 / 816 Block valve output

This program code assigns a physical discrete output for
controlling OPEN / CLOSE of an additive line block valve. The
default value is 0.
Program Code Definitions (800 to 816 Additive Pump/Block Valve Parameters) _________________________ Section 6 - 229
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24
LPG / Pressure
This group of parameters contains program codes that control the

pressure control function used when loading liquefied petroleum
gas. Pressure control is intended to maintain sufficient operating
pressure in the meter stack to prevent flashing (vaporizing) of the
liquid due to the pressure drop created by the devices in the meter
stack. The general equation for the minimum back pressure
required for light hydrocarbon liquids is stated below.
BPMIN
(2 * DPWATER) + (1.25 * AVPTMAX)
BPMIN
Minimum back pressure required
DPWATER
pressure drop flowing water at maximum

flow rate
(. 4 PSIG for turbine meters)
AVPTMAX
absolute vapor pressure of the liquid at

maximum temperature
Refer to Appendix C for an example of a LPG Loading

Configuration Checklist.
where:
Program Code Definitions (818 to 833 LPG / Pressure Parameters) _____________________________________ Section 6 - 230
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24
LPG / Pressure (continued)
PC# / Function
818 PT type
0 Pm - Static pressure inputs *

1 Pd - Differential pressure inputs
819 Pe method
0
1
2
3
4
Const Pe - Constant Pe
2 point - Use Pe for T1 and T2
3 point - Use Pe for T1, T2, and T3
Hillburn - Correlation for Pe per Hillburn (1968)
TP-15 - Correlation for Pe per Reid *
820 Pinch back method
0
1
2
3
Off - Disable pressure control

Sw Pm
Pd
821 Pinch back pressure
0 to 9999.99
822 Atmospheric pressure
0 to 9999.99
823 Pinch back qty
0 to 999999 <0>
824 T1
-999.9 to +999.9 <0.0>
825 Pe at T1
0.0 to 9999.99 <0.0>
826 T2
-999.9 to +999.9 <0.0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
PC# / Function
827 Pe at T2
0.0 to 9999.99 <0.0>
828 T3
-999.9 to +999.9 <0.0>
829 Pe at T3
0.0 to 9999.99 <0.0>
830 Circuit 1 type
0 to 2 <0>
831 Circuit 2 type
0 to 2 <0>
832 Circuit 3 type
0 to 2 <0>
833 Circuit 4 type
0 to 2 <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24
This group of parameters is used to define the method for backpressure control. The flow control valve is used to pinch back the
flow in order to maintain a preset or calculated minimum backpressure in the meter stack. The back-pressure is necessary to
prevent very light hydrocarbon liquids, such as LPG (liquified
petroleum gas) from flashing (vaporizing) due to the pressure
drop present in the piping system.
819 Pe method
This program code defines the method of back-pressure
calculation.
#
Const Pe
Program code 825 is the vapor pressure.

818 PT type
#
2 point
This program code defines the type of pressure transmitter inputs.

Vapor pressure is determined via program codes 824 to 827.
#
Pm
#
The pressure inputs are static pressure. The DanLoad 6000

calculates Pd = Pm - Pe for pressure correction and valve control.
#
3 point
Vapor pressure is determined via program codes 824 to 829.
Pd
The pressure inputs are pressure differential (Pm - Pe).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24
Hillburn
Old correction for Pe per Hillburn (1968). Program code 825 is

the vapor pressure at 100 degrees F.
Disable pressure control

#
Off
Sw
TP-15
New correlation for Pe per Reid. Vapor pressure is computed via

GPA TP-15 with temperature (degrees F) and relative density
60/60 degrees F as inputs.
Pressure switch inputs, assigned by program codes 296 / 301 /

306 / 311 Close input, control the OPEN / CLOSE state of the
flow control valves.
Pm

This program codes selects the method to use to maintain the
minimum back-pressure setpoint specified by program code 821
Pinch back pressure.
A static pressure input for each meter us used to implement

pressure control. Flow meters are assigned pressure transmitters
by program codes 320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input.
#
With pressure control enabled, response to a low pressure

condition also depends on:
026 Unit type
027 Valve type
Pd
A pressure differential input for each meter is used to implement

pressure control. Flow meters are assigned pressure transmitters
by program codes 320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter X pres input.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24

The static or differential pressure, depending on program code
820, below which the DanLoad 6000 ramps down to a lower
("fall back") flow rate or raises a pressure failure alarm when
pressure maintenance is configured (program code 820).

This is used to convert absolute pressures to gage pressures, e.g.
the output from GPA TP-15 (vapor pressure computation). The
default value is 14.70, which is the "standard atmospheric
pressure" for GPA TP-16 (which uses GPA TP-15).
API's standard atmospheric pressure is 14.73, so GPA's matches
this rounded to one decimal place. The "normal" atmosphere is
14.696 psia and the "technical" atmosphere is 14.223 psia.
The six program codes below define three temperature and vapor
pressure pairs for two or three point linearization. Values should
be entered in order of increasing temperature, i.e. T1 < T2 < T3.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24
823 Pinch back qty
825 Pe at T1
The gross quantity at the start of a batch for which pressure

control (see program code 820) is disabled. This can be used to
suppress problems starting a batch, such as alarms due to "surge"
and "flashing", when the pressure in the receiving tank is much
lower than in the loading arm and supply pipe.
Pe at temperature T1. The default value is 0.0.
826 T2
Temperature 2, i.e. T2. The default value is 0.0.
* The DanLoad raises a pressure alarm when the sampled

pressure is not within the pressure tables specified by Pressure
Option (program code 444). This alarm is also disabled at the
start of the batch, and is enabled after the Pinch back qty has
been delivered.
WARNING: It should be understood that entering a non-zero
value simply suppresses the alarm, and may hide a real problem
that should possibly be solved by other means. The default value
is zero.
827 Pe at T2
828 T3
824 T1
829 Pe at T3
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.24
830 Circuit 1 type
833 Circuit 4 type
See program code 265 for more information. The default value
is 0, i.e. check safety circuit independent of side, for compatibility
with older versions.
831 Circuit 2 type

832 Circuit 3 type

________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.25
Transaction Data Storage
Program Code
834 Transaction record length
0 to 250 bytes <0>
835 Start page and # pages
600 to 1510 pages divided as

start/# 6/00 to 15/10 <602>
836 Batch record length
0 to 250 bytes <0>
600 to 1510 pages divided as

start/# 6/00 to 15/10 <808>
838 Tr tk format
0
1
2
3
4
839 Time out tr
No *
Yes
Lock *
Clear
Fmt 1
Fmt 2
Fmt 3
Program Code Definitions (834 to 902 Transaction Data Storage Parameters) ___________________________ Section 6 - 239
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.25
Transaction Data Storage (continued)
Transaction data storage program codes allocate random access

memory space and assign data variables in the DanLoad 6000 for
storage of various parameters that define loading transactions and
batch operations. A detailed description of this group of program
codes is provided in Section 3.10. This group of program codes
MUST BE defined if transaction storage is required when the
DanLoad 6000 is a slave unit in a terminal automation system or
when user defined transaction tickets are printed.

This program code allocates memory storage area for fixed length
transaction records. The value of this program code can only be
determined after the transaction storage codes have been selected
and located with program codes 840 to 875. The default value of
0 disables storage of any transaction records.
Note
When entering the start page and # pages for the
transaction (tr) and batch (ba) files in program codes 835 and
837, the DanLoad 6000 simply verifies that the start page is
between 6 and 15 and the # pages is between 0 and 10 for
each file, i.e. no cross validation is performed. However, on
power-up/reset the DanLoad 6000 validates the start pages
and # pages for both files. The # pages must be an exact
divisor of 10,000.
The memory start page (between 6 and 15) and the number of
memory pages to allocate for the transaction file which holds the
transaction records. Each page is 8192 bytes in size. The # pages
defines the number of pages to allocate for the transaction file.
The default value is 602 which allocated two memory pages,
starting with page 6, to the transaction file. A total of 16,384
bytes are allocated for storage. An entry of 600 (no pages
allocated) disables transaction storage.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.25
838 Tr tk format
This program code allocates memory storage area for fixed length
batch records. The value of this program code can only be
determined after the batch storage codes have been selected and
located with program codes 880 to 901. The default value of 0
disables storage of any batch records.
This program code defines control of the user defined transaction

ticket storage area in memory. Three internally defined
transaction ticket formats are also selectable by this program
code. The internally defined transaction ticket formats are useful
for obtaining quick printouts of predefined data on blank sheets.
Formatting actual user defined transaction tickets is described in
Section 3.10.

#
The memory start page (between 6 and 15) and the number of
memory pages to allocate for the batch file which holds the batch
records. Each page is 8192 bytes in size. The # pages defines the
number of pages to allocate for the batch file. The default value
is 808 which allocated eight memory pages, starting with page 8,
to the transaction file. A total of 65,536 bytes are allocated for
storage. An entry of 600 (no pages allocated) disables
transaction storage.
Lock <default option>

Prevents the selected default Fmt 1, Fmt 2, or
Fmt 3 internally defined ticket formats from
overwriting a modification of one of these formats
during power-up.
Clear
Command to clear the transaction storage memory
and transaction ticket configuration.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.25
Fmt 1, Fmt 2, Fmt 3
839 Time out tr
Automatic configuration of transaction storage

and transaction ticket per internally defined
configurations. (Fmt 1 is ticket without batch
data; Fmt 2 is ticket with batch data; Fmt 3 is
ticket with only batch data) All three default
formats assume that only one component is
configured.
This program code determines whether or not a transaction in

progress in the manual operating mode, that has neither a batch
in progress nor a primary alarm active, should be timed out and
ended automatically after prompt time-out (program code 036)
seconds. The time-out is useful when working with a
"monitoring only" ticket printing system if the
operator/user/driver is likely to forget to press the "STOP" key to
end the transaction after the last batch on the transaction has been
loaded. Note that when the time-out is enabled, a transaction may
be ended prematurely, i.e. prior to the last batch being loaded, in
which case a further transaction would be required to complete
loading. The default value is "No" for compatibility with earlier
versions. Select one of the following:
#
"No". Don't time out and end a transaction in

progress automatically.
"Yes". Time out and end a transaction in progress

automatically.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.25
Program Code (Transaction Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
840 1 Addr
0 to 250 bytes <0>
841 2 Tr seq #
0 to 250 bytes <0>
842 3 Recipe #
0 to 250 bytes <0>
843 4 Recipe name
0 to 250 bytes <0>
844 5 Side
0 to 250 bytes <0>
845 6 Prompt 1
0 to 250 bytes <0>
846 7 Prompt 2
0 to 250 bytes <0>
847 8 Prompt 3
0 to 250 bytes <0>
848 9 Prompt 4
0 to 250 bytes <0>
849 10 Prompt 5
0 to 250 bytes <0>
850 11 Data item 1
0 to 250 bytes <0>
851 12 Data item 2
0 to 250 bytes <0>
852 13 Data item 3
0 to 250 bytes <0>
853 14 Data item 4
0 to 250 bytes <0>
854 15 Data item 5
0 to 250 bytes <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.25
Range <Default> OR
855 16 Start date
0 to 250 bytes <0>
856 17 End date
0 to 250 bytes <0>
857 18 Gross
0 to 250 bytes <0>
858 19 Std
0 to 250 bytes <0>
859 20 Temp
0 to 250 bytes <0>
860 21 Pres
0 to 250 bytes <0>
861 22 Dens (Comp 1 backup density/gravity)
0 to 250 bytes <0>
862 23 Start gross
0 to 250 bytes <0>
863 24 Start std
0 to 250 bytes <0>
864 25 End gross
0 to 250 bytes <0>
865 26 End std
0 to 250 bytes <0>
866 27 Alarm bit map
0 to 250 bytes <0>
867 28 Prim alarm
0 to 250 bytes <0>
868 29 Temp alarm
0 to 250 bytes <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.25
Range <Default> OR
869 30 Add 1
0 to 250 bytes <0>
870 31 Add 2
0 to 250 bytes <0>
871 32 Add 3
0 to 250 bytes <0>
872 33 Add 4
0 to 250 bytes <0>
873 34 Add 5
0 to 250 bytes <0>
874 35 Add 6
0 to 250 bytes <0>
875 36 Op mode
0 to 250 bytes <0>
876 37 Gross units
0 to 250 bytes <0>
877 38 Std units
0 to 250 bytes <0>
840 to 874 <name>
875 to 877 <name>
Program codes in this group define the start locations within the
user defined transaction record template for storing the
corresponding variables. The default value <0> disables storage
of the corresponding variable. The first actual storage start
location is 1. The process is described in detail in Section 3.9.
The offset from the start of the user-configurable part of the

transaction record at which to store the value associated with
transaction storage codes 036 through 038 respectively, i.e. the
gross product units mnemonic (program code 218).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.25
Program Code (Batch Storage Code)
Range <Default> OR
880 1 Addr
0 to 250 bytes <0>
881 2 Ba seq #
0 to 250 bytes <0>
882 3 Tr seq #
0 to 250 bytes <0>
883 4 Temp
0 to 250 bytes <0>
884 5 Pres
0 to 250 bytes <0>
885 6 Dens
0 to 250 bytes <0>
886 7 Preset
0 to 250 bytes <0>
887 8 Gross
0 to 250 bytes <0>
888 9 Std
0 to 250 bytes <0>
889 10 Comp gross
0 to 250 bytes <0>
890 11 Comp std
0 to 250 bytes <0>
891 12 Comp temp
0 to 250 bytes <0>
892 13 Comp dens
0 to 250 bytes <0>
893 14 Comp pres
0 to 250 bytes <0>
894 15 Comp %
0 to 250 bytes <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.25
Range <Default> OR
895 16 Add 1
0 to 250 bytes <0>
896 17 Add 2
0 to 250 bytes <0>
897 18 Add 3
0 to 250 bytes <0>
898 19 Add 4
0 to 250 bytes <0>
899 20 Add 5
0 to 250 bytes <0>
900 21 Add 6
0 to 250 bytes <0>
901 22 Op mode
0 to 250 bytes <0>
902 23 CCF
0 to 250 bytes <0>
880 to 902 <name>

Program codes in this group define the start locations within the
user defined batch record template for storing the corresponding
variables. The default value <0> disables storage of the
corresponding variable. The first actual storage start location is
1. The process is described in detail in Section 3.9.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.26
Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates)
Range <Default> OR
920 1 Addr
rrrcc <0>
921 2 Tr seq #
rrrcc <0>
922 3 Recipe #
rrrcc <0>
923 4 Recipe name
rrrcc <0>
924 5 Side
rrrcc <0>
925 6 Prompt 1
rrrcc <0>
926 7 Prompt 2
rrrcc <0>
927 8 Prompt 3
rrrcc <0>
928 9 Prompt 4
rrrcc <0>
929 10 Prompt 5
rrrcc <0>
930 11 Data item 1
rrrcc <0>
931 12 Data item 2
rrrcc <0>
932 13 Data item 3
rrrcc <0>
933 14 Data item 4
rrrcc <0>
934 15 Data item 5
rrrcc <0>
Program Code Definitions (920 to 982 Transaction Ticket Format Parameters) __________________________ Section 6 - 248
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.26
Transaction Ticket Format (Print Coordinates) (continued)
Range <Default> OR
935 16 Start date
rrrcc <0>
936 17 End date
rrrcc <0>
937 18 Gross
rrrcc <0>
938 19 Std
rrrcc <0>
939 20 Temp
rrrcc <0>
940 21 Pres
rrrcc <0>
941 22 Dens (Comp 1 backup density/gravity)
rrrcc <0>
942 23 Start gross
rrrcc <0>
943 24 Start std
rrrcc <0>
944 25 End gross
rrrcc <0>
945 26 End std
rrrcc <0>
rrrcc <0>
947 28 Prim alarm
rrrcc <0>
948 29 Temp
rrrcc <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.26
Range <Default> OR
949 30 Add 1
rrrcc <0>
950 31 Add 2
rrrcc <0>
951 32 Add 3
rrrcc <0>
952 33 Add 4
rrrcc <0>
953 34 Add 5
rrrcc <0>
954 35 Add 6
rrrcc <0>
955 36 Op mode
rrrcc <0>
956 37 Gross units
rrrcc <0>
957 36 Std units
rrrcc <0>
920 to 957 <name>

Program codes in this group define the row (rrr) and column
(cc) coordinates to print the corresponding transaction storage
code variables on user defined transaction tickets. See Section
3.10 for a detailed description of transaction ticket format. The
default value of 0 disables printing of the corresponding variable.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
CONTINUE
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.26
Range <Default> OR
960 1 Addr
rrrcc <0>
961 2 Ba seq #
rrrcc <0>
962 3 Tr seq #
rrrcc <0>
963 4 Temp
rrrcc <0>
964 5 Pres
rrrcc <0>
965 6 Dens
rrrcc <0>
966 7 Preset
rrrcc <0>
967 8 Gross
rrrcc <0>
968 9 Std
rrrcc <0>
969 10 Comp gross
rrrcc <0>
970 11 Comp std
rrrcc <0>
971 12 Comp temp
rrrcc <0>
972 13 Comp dens
rrrcc <0>
973 14 Comp pres
rrrcc <0>
974 15 Comp %
rrrcc <0>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
6.26
Range <Default> OR
975 16 Add 1
rrrcc <0>
976 17 Add 2
rrrcc <0>
977 18 Add 3
rrrcc <0>
978 19 Add 4
rrrcc <0>
979 20 Add 5
rrrcc <0>
980 21 Add 6
rrrcc <0>
981 22 Op mode
rrrcc <0>
982 23 CCF
rrrcc <0>
982 CCF
960 to 981 <name>
Program codes in this group define the row (rrr) and column
(cc) coordinates to print the corresponding batch storage code
variables on user defined transaction tickets. See Section 3.10 for
a detailed description of transaction ticket format. The default
value of 0 disables printing of the corresponding variable.
Combined correction factor for temperature and presssure

compensation of the liquid components.
CTL times CPL
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.27
Analog Inputs
Range <Default> OR
983 RTD Alpha
0 3850 *
1 3902
984 LL cnt (4-20 mA input)
0 to 9999 <0>
985 LH cnt (4-20 mA input)
0 to 9999 <0>
986 HL cnt (4-20 mA input)
0 to 9999 <0>
987 HH cnt (4-20 mA input)
0 to 9999 <0>
988 LL cnt (RTD input)
0 to 9999 <0>
989 LH cnt (RTD input)
0 to 9999 <0>
990 HL cnt (RTD input)
0 to 9999 <0>
991 HH cnt (RTD input)
0 to 9999 <0>
This section is specific to RTD inputs and 4-20 mA inputs on the v2 CPU board. The v2 CPU boards 4-20 mA and RTD inputs each use
two A/D channels on the CPU-2 microcontroller. An inputs overall range is subdivided with low input values handled by the low A/D
channel and high input values handled by the high A/D channel. The A/D channel to use, and its value, are determined using the
channels low and high calibration values. Program codes 984 to 987 are for the 4-20 mA input, and program codes 988 to 991 apply to
the RTD input.
Program Code Definitions (983 to 991 Analog Inputs) ________________________________________________ Section 6 - 254
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.27
Analog Inputs (continued)
983 RTD Alpha
986 HL cnt
The alpha value is set for temperature calculations. All RTDs

connected to the DanLoad 6000's CPU board and analog inputs
boards must have the same alpha. There are two possible
selections:
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU boards 4-20 mA inputs
High channels Low calibration point, i.e. 12 mA.
987 HH cnt
3850"
3902"
BS 1904:1984 and DIN 43760

" = 0.003850
High channels High calibration point, i.e. 20 mA.
" = 0.003902
984 LL cnt
Low channels Low calibration point, i.e. 4 mA. Enter value
from label on CPU board (see Section 2) or calibrate using the
procedure below.
985 LH cnt
Low channels High calibration point, i.e. 12 mA.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.27
Analog Inputs (continued)
988 LL cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU boards RTD inputs Low
channels Low calibration point, i.e. R-20C.
989 LH cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU boards RTD inputs Low
channels High calibration point, i.e. R18C.
990 HL cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU boards RTD inputs High
channels Low calibration point, i.e. R18C.
991 HH cnt
The count, i.e. A/D value, for the CPU boards RTD inputs High
channels High calibration point, i.e. R55C.
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

6.28
Step
Step
CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration

1.
2.
Equipment Required
A.
Digital Voltmeter-- At least 4 digit
B.
4-20 mA - Current source or voltage equivalent, must drive 425S to 8.5

volts. An adjustable power supply with fine and course adjustments may
be substituted for a current source.
C.
RTD simulator -- 100 S R-Box with 0.01 S steps
Setup
A.
Go into setup and enter a zero (0) into the following Program Codes:
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B.
NOTE:
PC 984 lolo (4-20 mA) = 0

PC 985 lohi (4-20 mA) = 0
PC 986 hilo (4-20 mA) = 0
PC 987 hihi (4-20 mA) = 0
PC 988 lolo (RTD) = 0
PC 989 lohi (RTD) = 0
PC 990 hilo (RTD) = 0
PC 991 hihi (RTD) = 0
Program Codes 318 = 1, 320 = 1 (Select Temperature and

Pressure Meter 1)
Record the following program codes: 464, 465and 695 then re-enter
them when finished with the calibration.
C.
Program Codes 464 = 9.00, 465 = 45.00 (Pressure Zero and Fullscale)
D.
Program Code 695 = 135 (live pressure- Dymanic Data Display)
CPU Version 2 Analog Calibration ________________________________________
6-257
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Program Codes
Calibration Values
PC 984 4-20 mA LoLo

PC 985 4-20 mA LoHi
PC 986 4-20 mA HiLo
PC 987 4-20 mA HiHi
PC 988 RTD LoLo
PC 989 RTD LoHi
PC 990 RTD HiLo
PC 991 RTD HiHi
Copy this page and record values.
6-258 ________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Step
3.
Analog Calibration Low Range

A.
Connect a Voltmeter across TP1-TP2.
B.
With the test setup shown in Figure 1, adjust the 4-20 mA to 0.900V
across TP1-TP2.
C.
Go to Program Menu to Input Output in the diagnostics, select 1 for

the 4-20 mA input. Record the number on the DanLoad 6000 Display
for 0.900 Volts. (Example 4-20 mA lo lo = 141)
D.
Adjust the 4-20ma signal to 2.700 volts across TP1-TP2. Record the
number displayed for 2.700 Volts. (Example 4-20 ma lo hi = 956)
E.
Set the R-Box to 92.16 S " = 0.00385 (-20C.)
F.
In the diagnostics, select 1 for the RTD input. Record the number for
-20C.(Example RTD lo lo = 92)
G.
Set the R-Box to 107.02 S " = 0.00385 (18C).
H.
Record the number displayed for 18 degrees. (Example RTD lo hi = 992)
I.
Go into Setup, select the following program codes(PC) to enter the

values previously recorded.
J.
4-20 mA lo lo reading into PC 984 = (example 141)
K.
4-20 mA lo hi reading into PC 985 = (example 956)
L.
RTD lolo reading into PC 988 = (Example 92)
M.
RTD lohi reading into PC 989 = (Example 992)
6-259
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Step
4.
Analog Calibration High Range

A.
Exit setup, and re-enter diagnostics and select 1 for 4-20 mA
B.
With the Voltage still set to 2.700 volts across TP1-TP2. Record the
displayed number. (Example 4-20 mA hi lo = 41)
C.
Adjust the 4-20 mA signal until 4.50 volts is across TP1-TP2. Record the
displayed number. (Example 4-20 mA hi hi = 858)
D.
In the Diagnostics, select 1 for RTD.With the R-Box still set to 107.02 S,
Record the number for 18 C. (Example: RTD hi lo = 76)
E.
Set the R-Box to 121.32 S " = 0.00385 (55 C.)
F.
Record the number for 55 C. (Example RTD hi hi = 998)
G.
Go into Setup, select the following program codes to enter the values
previously recorded.
H.
4-20 mA hi lo reading into PC 986 = (example 41)
I.
4-20 mA hi hi reading into PC 987 = (example 858)
J.
RTD hi lo reading into PC 990 = (Example 76)
K.
RTD hi hi reading into PC 991 = (Example 998)
6-260 ________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Step
Step
5.
6.
Check Temperature Calibration

A.
Exit out of Setup, Go to the load menu and press Select. Scroll down into
the Dynamic Data Display until Mtr 1 curr temp and Mtr 1 curr pres are
Displayed.
B.
With the R-Box still set at 121.32 S, the displayed Current Temperature
should read 55.0C 0.1 C.
C.
Adjust the R-Box to 107.02 S. The displayed Current Temperatue should

read 18.0C 0.1 C.
D.
Adjust the R-Box to 92.55 S. The displayed Current Temperature should

read -19.0C 0.1 C.
Check Pressure Calibration

A.
With the Voltage still set to 4.500 volts across TP1-TP2. The displayed
Current Pressure should read 45.00 0.05 psi.
B.
Adjust the 4-20 mA input to 2.700 volts across TP1-TP2. The displayed
C.
Adjust the 4-20 mA input to 1.000 volts across TP1-TP2. The displayed
6-261
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
CPU v2 Analog Calibration Set Up

Figure 6-3
6-262 ________________________________________
Appendix A
Installation Worksheets
Input / Output Signal

Configuration
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

This appendix contains several tables that can be photocopied and used to enter parameter settings
for records of DanLoad 6000 installations. The tables can be used as an aid in generating wire lists
and drawings for the installations.
Daniel drawing BE-18204, Device Linkages - DanLoad 6000, shows the relationship between
system devices, liquid components, and additives. Daniel drawing DE-18201, Program Code to
Device Assignments - DanLoad 6000, shows all devices that can be monitored and controlled by a
DanLoad 6000. In actual installations, only some of the devices will be installed. The program
codes indicated in the drawing are the primary parameters that relate the devices to the proper flow
meter / meter stream. Many additional parameters define and modify the operation of each device.
Use the program codes indicated in the drawing to reference the device parameters Tables A - 11 to
A - 28. These tables contain brief descriptions of the device related parameters. See Section 6 for
a complete description of each parameter.
The flow meter is considered the primary device in the system. All other accessory devices, liquid
components, and additives are assigned to a meter stream by either direct reference or indirect
reference. Interrelations between physical devices, liquid components, and additives are established
in the following manner.
#
Any liquid component can flow through any flow meter and from two to four components,
can flow, one at a time, through the same flow meter. This function is the reason that the
meter factors (program codes 169 through 216) are assigned to the components. The meter
factors are automatically applied to the active flow meter when the selected component is
flowing through that flow meter.
Pumps and block valves for liquid components are enabled specifically for each component
by assigning corresponding physical discrete outputs (and discrete inputs in the case of block
valves). Drawing DE-18201, Program Code to Device Assignments, indicates sequential
numbering of all devices for ease of drawing layout. Note however, if component 1 were
assigned to meter 3 (program code 067 Meter set to 3) then the pump for component 1 (P-1)
and the block valve for component 1 (BV-1) are also assigned to meter stream 3. Actual
device tags and system drawings for each unique installation should show this assignment
correctly.
Flow rate through any flow meter can be controlled by any one flow control valve and from
two to four flow meters can share the same flow control valve. Drawing DE-18201,
Program Code to Device Assignments, indicates sequential numbering of all devices for ease
of drawing layout. Note however, meter 1 could be assigned to flow control valve 3
(program code 052 Valve to be controlled set to 3) and meter 2 could be assigned to flow
control valve 3 (program code 055 Valve to be controlled set to 3). Actual device tags and
system drawings for each unique installation should show these assignments correctly.
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________
Appendix A - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

#
Resistive temperature devices (RTD), pressure transmitters (PT), and density transmitters
(DT) are enabled specifically for each meter stream by assigning corresponding physical
analog inputs.
Pumps and block valves for additives are enabled specifically for each additive by assigning
corresponding physical discrete outputs (and discrete inputs in the case of block valves).
Daniel drawing DE-18201, Program Code to Device Assignments - DanLoad 6000, shows
additive injection on each meter stream. In actual installations, additive injection is usually
implemented in the primary component meter stream only.
Tables A - 1a to A - 9 can be used to provide a record of input / output signal assignments. Tables
A - 11 to A - 28 contain lists of all program codes (parameters) organized in device or functional
groups. An overview of the tables is provided below.
Table
Description
Slot Number
A-1a
2-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring
J5 or J6
A-1b
4-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring
J5 or J6
A-2
AC I/O Board Wiring
J1 or J2
A-3a
Enhanced I/O Board Wiring (Old)
J1 or J2
A-3b
Enhanced I/O Board Wiring (New)
J1 or J2
A-4
DC I/O Board Wiring
J3 or J4
A-5a
2-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring
J7
A-5b
8-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring
J7
A-6
Power Supply Wiring
J0
A-7
Swing Arm Input Wiring
CPU board
A-8
DUART Module Wiring
CPU module
A-9
LAN Module Wiring
Not implemented
Appendix A - 2 _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Table
Description
Setup
A-10
Base Level Program Codes for System Items
A-11
General Configuration Parameters
Required
A-12
Flow Meter Parameters
Required
A-13
Flow Control Valve Parameters
Required
A-14
Required
A-15
Component Block Valve / Pump Parameters
Required
A-16
Delivery Parameters
Required
A-17
Blending Parameters
Optional
A-18
Temperature Compensation Parameters
Optional
A-19
Pressure Compensation Parameters
Optional
A-20
Density Compensation Parameters
Optional
A-21
Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters
Optional
A-22
Additives Parameters
Optional
A-23
LPG / Pressure Control Parameters
Optional
A-24
Dynamic Data Display Parameters / Codes
Optional
A-25
Communications / Data Logging Parameters
Optional
A-26
Transaction Storage Parameters
Optional
A-27
Transaction Ticket Parameters
Optional
A-28
Alarm Parameters
Optional *
A-29
Analog Input Parameters (for v2 CPU)
Optional
Notes:
#
Only enabled and applicable program codes in each group are required to be configured.
* Alarm parameters are set to default values. Some of these values and / or limits may
require adjustment to prevent erroneous alarms.
Appendix A - 3
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

A.1
Physical Configuration of the DanLoad 6000
The following inputs and outputs are fixed and are not reconfigurable.
#
One to four meter pulse inputs to meter pulse boards
Two swing arm status inputs to main processor board (not present on v2 CPU)
Two high-resolution pulse outputs from 2-channel meter pulse board (only with MPMC
board on 4-channel meter pulse board)
Maximum physical input channels:

#
4 each RTD process temperature (5 for v2 CPU)
8 each 4 to 20 mAdc process pressure or density (9 for v2 CPU)
24 each discrete status functions
Maximum physical output channels:

#
28 each discrete control functions
Note
The number of functions that can be assigned to physical discrete input and output channels is
greater than the number of available physical discrete channels. Some logical discrete input
and output functions are mutually exclusive and cannot be active at the same time. The v2
CPU board (1997) has one 4-20 mA input, one RTD input and a DUART built in.
The unit number assigned to each DanLoad 6000 is derived as follows. If the DanLoad 6000
communicates with a data logging device or terminal automation system, each instrument must be
assigned a unit number. This assignment is accomplished by DIP switches located on the DUART
(v1 CPU board) or by program code 662 (v2 CPU board). The range of the unit number is 1 to 255.
A Multi-drop network implemented with the RS-485 port (DUART) has an electrical limit of 32
units to one RS-485 master port. However, the unit numbers of these 32 units can be any unique
number within the range of 1 to 255. If neither communications module is installed, it is advisable
to use the same number range (1 to 255) for unit assignment numbers. Using numbers in this range
may avoid the need to renumber the units if data logging and / or terminal automation system
communications are added in the future.
Appendix A - 4 _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

Input and output signal channel identification numbers can be entered into the tables using the
following channel number labels.
Input / Output Signal Identification
Process Tag
Channel Number
Description
FT-# (1 to 4)
Meter pulse input
TE-# (1 to 4)
RTD input
PT-# / DT-# (1 to 4)
4 to 20 mAdc analog input
ACI-# (1 to max AC inputs)
Discrete Vac input
ACO-# (1 to max AC outputs)
Discrete Vac output
DCI-# (1 to max DC inputs)
Discrete Vdc input
DCO-# (1 to max DC outputs)
Discrete Vdc output
The initial setup procedure should be performed at this time. Section 3 provides information on the
initial setup procedure. After the initial setup procedure has been performed, the assigned physical
hardware channel for each input / output channel can be determined in the following manner. While
operating in the Program Mode, press the ALT+0 key to display the physical hardware
configuration of the instrument. The first display page shows the type of boards installed in slots J1
through J7. Scroll through the I/O assignment display pages using the 9 and 8 arrow keys.
Manually enter the assigned hardware channels indicated in the leftward column of the display pages
into the Assigned Channel column of the corresponding Tables A - 1a through A - 22. Also enter
the DanLoad 6000 Unit number and the physical slot, Jn number, where the board is located. The
number and type of these assigned hardware channels determine the fixed input / output signal
capability of the individual DanLoad 6000.
#
Enter the power supply wiring information into Table A - 7.
Enter the swing arm wiring information into Table A - 8. Enter a descriptive identification
of the loading side, such as north, west, etc.
Enter the wiring information for the DUART, Table A-9 at this time.
The final step is to review and record the settings of the applicable program codes listed in
Tables A - 11 to A - 28.
Appendix A - 5
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

The following two rules apply to assignment of a physical channel to an input or output function:
#
The type of input / output signal board for the desired function must be installed in the
DanLoad 6000.
The physical input or output channel should typically not have been previously assigned to
some other function.
Physical input / output channel assignments are made, while in Program Mode, by using the 9 or
8 arrow key to place the box cursor over a physical channel number (rightward column)
corresponding to a function displayed to the left of the physical channel number. The currently
assigned physical channel identification number, obtained from Tables A - 1a through A - 22, is
then verified or changed. Press the ENTER key to accept the assignment or the CLEAR key to
reject the assignment and re-enter a number. If the entry is a valid assignment, the box cursor
automatically steps to the next parameter in the group. If the hardware is not installed to support this
physical channel or the number of supported physical channels is exceeded, the message Point does
not exist is displayed on the message line.
Appendix A - 6 _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.2
Functional Configuration of the DanLoad 6000
Table A - 10, Base Level Program Codes for Physical Components of the System, contains
information on the primary program codes that enable devices, components, and additives. Several
additional program code settings are required to fully configure the operation of the DanLoad 6000.
These additional program codes are organized in device and functional groups and listed in Tables
A - 11 to A - 28. Several program codes can be listed at several points within one table or can be
listed in more than one table. This multiple listing is done for clarity due to the cross function of
some program codes. In general, program code settings are used to enable and assign devices,
components, and additives in the following manner.
#
Program codes define the number of devices, components, and additives in the system. This
definition controls the activation of the correct number of similar parameters dependent on
the number of devices, components, and additives defined.
Individual program codes for each device, component, and additive configure links or cross
assignments between the devices, components, and additives.
Individual program codes for each device, component, and additive assign actual physical
input and output signal circuits to the logical devices, components, and additives. With the
exception of meter pulse inputs, high resolution pulse outputs, and swing-arm status inputs,
all input and output signals can be assigned to any available physical circuit of the
corresponding type. (Note: Meter pulse inputs were assignable to meters in Version 3.0 and
below of the DanLoad 6000.)
The minimal device configuration for a DanLoad 6000 is stated below. This configuration is for a
one component sequential blender.
Minimal Configuration
Program code
Value
052 Valve for meter 1
067 Meter for component 1
Appendix A - 7
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

This minimal configuration, though valid, is not typical. Normally, many other parameters will be
configured, such as, a component pump defined by program code 288 Pump control output. The
base DanLoad 6000 has one 4-Channel Meter Pulse board and one AC I/O board. Additional
features such as additive injection control, volume correction for temperature / pressure / density,
and pulse per unit outputs can be enabled as required.
Tables A - 11 to A - 29 contain additional information related to the basic Table A - 10. The
corresponding program codes for each function implemented should be verified during initial setup
of the DanLoad 6000. Section 6 of the manual contains detailed descriptions of each program code.
Appendix A - 8 _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Board
Channel
Function
TB
Meter 1 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc)
Meter 1 pulse input
Meter 1 preamp common
Meter 2 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc)
Meter 2 pulse input
Meter 2 preamp common
Meter 1 pulse output +
1 or 3
Meter 1 pulse output -
1 or 3
2 or 4
10
2 or 4
Control 2 switched + Vdc
11
Control 2 return - Vdc
12
13
14
P / S common
15
P / S common
16
Assigned
Channel
1 or 3
2 or 4
2-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring (Slot J5 / J6)

(Drawing DE-12694)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:___________
Table A - 1a
Appendix A - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Board
Channel
Function
TB
Meter preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc)
Meter 1A pulse input
Meter 1A preamp common
Meter preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc)
Meter 1B pulse input
Meter 1B preamp common
1, 3, 5
1, 3, 5
2, 4, 6
10
2, 4, 6
11
12
13
14
START (proof)
15
P / S common
16
Meter 2A pulse input
17
Meter 2A preamp common
18
Meter 2B pulse input
19
Meter 2B preamp common
20
Assigned
Channel
1, 3, 5
2, 4, 6
3, 5, 7
4, 6, 8
4-Channel Meter Pulse Board Wiring (Slot J5 / J6)

(Drawing CE-15532)
Table A - 1b
Appendix A - 10 _________________________________________ Installation Worksheets
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Function
TB
Board
Channel
Status 2 switched Vdc/Vac
Status 2 common
Status 1 common
Control 8 supply Vac
Control 8 switched Vac
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Assigned
Channel
AC I/O Board Wiring (Slot J1 / J3)

(Drawing CE-12695)
Table A - 2
Installation Worksheets _________________________________________ Appendix A - 11
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Function
TB
Board
Channel
Status 5/6 common
Status 3/4 common
Status 1/2 common
10
Control 5/6 supply Vac
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Assigned
Channel
Enhanced I/O (Additive Injector) Board Wiring (Slot J1 / J2)

(Drawing CE-12697 or CE-19021)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:__________
Table A - 3
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Board
Channel
Function
TB
Status 6 supply Vdc
Status 6 switched Vdc
Status 5 supply Vdc
Status 4 supply Vdc
Status 3 supply Vdc
Status 2 supply Vdc
10
Status 1 supply Vdc
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Assigned
Channel
DC I/O Board Wiring (Slot J3 / J4)

(Drawing CE-12696)
Table A - 4
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Board
Channel
Function
TB
Transmitter 1 power (24 Vdc)
Transmitter 1 input
Transmitter power common
+ Vsource
RTD 1 +
RTD 1 -
RTD current source
Assigned
Channel
2-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring (Slot J7)

(Drawing BE-12707)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:____________
Table A - 5
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Board
Channel
Function
TB
Transmitter 1/2 power (24 Vdc)
Transmitter 1 input
Transmitter 2 input
Transmitter 3/4 power (24 Vdc)
Transmitter 3 input
Transmitter 4 input
Transmitter power common
+ Vsource
RTD 1 +
RTD 1 -
10
RTD loop tie point
11
RTD 2 +
12
RTD 2 -
13
RTD loop tie point
14
RTD 3 +
15
RTD 3 -
16
RTD loop tie point
17
RTD 4 +
18
RTD 4 -
19
RTD current source
20
Assigned
Channel
8-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring (Slot J7)

(Drawing CE-12698)
Location:__________ Unit:________ Date:____________
Table A - 6
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Function
TB
Vac power hot
TB1-1
Vac safety ground
TB1-2
Vac neutral (230 Vac hot)
TB1-3
Space heater Vac hot (supply)
TB1-4
Space heater Vac neutral
TB1-5
Vac permissive power input
TB2-1
Vac permissive power neutral
TB2-2
Vac permissive power output (fused)
TB2-3
Source /
Destination
Power Supply Wiring (Slot J0)

(Drawing CE-12692)
Table A - 7
Physical
Channel
Function
TB
Swing arm switch 1
1 (SW1)
(right)
Swing arm common
(center)
Swing arm switch 2
2 (SW2)
(left)
Actual
Side Per program
code 312
Swing Arm Input Wiring (CPU Board)

(Drawing CE-12693 and BE-12789)
Table A - 8
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Function
TB
Channel A, RS-485 Rx+
Channel A, RS-485 Rx-
Channel A, RS-485 Tx+
Channel A, RS-485 Tx-
Channel B, RS-485 Rx+

or
Channel B, RS-232 RxD
Channel B, RS-485 Rxor

Channel B, RS-232 CTS (clear to send)
Channel B, RS-485 Tx+

or
Channel B, RS-232 TxD
Channel B, RS-485 Tx-
Channel B, RS-232 RTS (request to send)
Channel B, RS-232 common
10
Destination
<not used>
DUART Module Wiring (CPU Module)

(Drawing CE-12693)
Location:__________ Unit:_______ Date:__________
Table A - 9
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Device Assignment Program Codes

Device / Component / Additive
Assignment
Program Code
Name
LOADING ARM (at)

METERS *
050
Number of meters
ENABLE FCVs *
048
Number of valves
flow control valve meter(s) *
052
ENABLE COMPONENTS *
065
meter component(s) *
067
070
073
076
--
--
Meter
block valve component
400
402
404
406
--
--
Block valve output
block valve component(s)
408 to 422
block valve component
401
403
405
407
--
--
Block valve input
pump component
288
289
290
291
--
--
Pump control output
RTD x meter x
318
324
330
336
--
--
Meter x temperature input
PT x meter x
320
326
332
338
--
--
Meter x pres input
DT x meter x
321
327
333
339
--
--
Meter x dens input
ENABLE PULSE OUTPUTS
128
pulse output meter(s)
129
ENABLE ADDITIVES
135
additive meter(s)
139
144
149
154
159
164
Additive control meters
block valve additive
801
804
807
810
813
816
Block valve output
pump additive
800
803
806
809
812
815
Pump output
055
058
061
--
--
Valve to be controlled
Component combination
Number of pulse
per unit outputs
132
--
--
--
--
Control meters
Number of additives
Base Level Program Codes for Physical Components of the System

Table A - 10
Notes:
#
#
* In the assignment column indicates that these parameters must be defined in all
installations.
Tables A - 11 to A - 29 follow this page.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.3
General Configuration Parameters Setup
TABLE A -11
General Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Global
001 / 004 / 007 / 010 / 013 / 016 / 019 / 022
Passcode
Numeric passcode entry for operators and supervisors.
6000
Required passcode entry per each transaction (not implemented)
002 / 005 / 008 / 011 / 014 / 017 / 020 / 023

User ID
Configurable user name
003 / 006 / 009 / 012 / 015 / 018 / 021 / 024

Enable supervisor data access
025 Operating mode
Select manual / auto mode for unit
Manual / Auto
026 Unit type
Select type of blending
Seq. (auto)
027 Valve type
Select type of flow control valve
Std digital
028 Language
Select language for unit
English
030 Number of data item prompts
Select quantity of prompts to user
031 / 032 / 033 / 034 / 035 #x Prompt
Configurable prompt text
<message>
036 Prompt time-out (s)
Set time to display prompt
60
Setup (Parameter Groups) _____________________________________________________________________ Appendix A - 19
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -11
General Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
037 Check display
Display diagnostic
Off
038 Date format
Select date format
mm/dd/yy
039 Date separator
Select date units separator
Select decimal separator
041 Data display rate
Select data display rate
28000
280 Slot 1 board
Type of input / output board installed in J1
Auto-detect
281 Slot 2 board
Auto-detect
282 Slot 3 board
Auto-detect
283 Slot 4 board
Auto-detect
284 Slot 5 board
Auto-detect
285 Slot 6 board
Auto-detect
286 Slot 7 board
Auto-detect
Swing-arm switch input sensing method ( v2 CPU does not have swing arm inputs)
Sgl w/o sw
315 Trip 1 output
ON during low-flow startup
316 Trip 2 output
ON during low-flow startup and high-flow
317 Trip 3 output
ON from start of loading to end of loading
Input CLOSED = automatic mode / input OPEN = manual mode
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -11
General Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
355 Primary LCD type
Type of LCD display installed
Optrex
356 Primary LCD minimum light
Controls LCD backlighing intensity based on low ambient light level
455
357 Primary LCD maximum light
Controls LCD backlighing intensity based on high ambient light level
405
358 Secondary LCD type
Type of LCD display installed
Optrex
359 Secondary LCD minimum light
Controls LCD backlighing intensity based on low ambient light level
455
360 Secondary LCD maximum light
Controls LCD backlighting intensity based on high ambient light level
405
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.4
Flow Meter Parameters Setup
TABLE A -12
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
ENABLE 1 to 4 METERS FOR LOAD SPOT
Default
Actual
User input
Global Parameters
029 Product units
Label for volume units.
Gal
045 Round method
Select the method for rounding volume accumulations.
Up
Individual Meter Configuration

051 / 054 / 057 / 060 Meter ID
Assign identification label to flow meter.
Assign flow control valve to meter stream
M#
Not used
Pulse Security
Accumulation of pulse errors to allow before triggering a Pulse security error meter x
alarm. Set to 0 to disable feature.
Accumulated value of error counts at which the error counter is reset to zero. This
counter is always reset to zero at the start of a loading operation.
10000
Alarms
Low flow rate setpoint for alarm trigger.
100
Time period to ignore low flow rate before triggering alarm.
10
Action in response to low flow rate alarm.
Primary
High flow rate setpoint for alarm trigger.
660
Time period to ignore high flow rate before triggering alarm.
10
Action in response to high flow rate alarm.
Primary
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -12
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
Quantity over preset that can be delivered before triggering an Unable to close valve
meter x alarm. This alarm is a Primary alarm.
2.0
Quantity under preset that can be delivered before triggering a Valve closed early
meter x alarm.
5.0
Action in response to an underflow alarm.
Off
Time period allowed with no flow when flow is expected before triggering a Timedout - no flow detected meter x alarm.
Action in response to a no flow time-out alarm.
Primary
Quantity allowed to be measured when flow is not expected before triggering an

Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter x alarm.
10.0
269 Alarm o/p mask 1
Enable alarms to output 1 (bit mask)
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Assign alarm output 1 to a discrete output.
270 Alarm, o/p mask 2
Enable alarms to output 2 (bit mask)
379 Alarm output 2
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.5
Flow Control Valve Parameters Setup
TABLE A -13
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
ENABLE 1 to 4 FLOW CONTROL VALVES
Assign flow meter(s) to flow control valve

[flow control valve flow meter(s)]
Default
Actual
Delivery Parameters - Global

027 Valve type
Select type of valve
Std digital
Startup time at initial state before beginning flow control
0.200
Delivery Parameters - Individual Components

108 Ramp clicks
Maximum attempts to ramp-up flow rate before maintaining lower flow rate
30
Maximum attempts to maintain flow rate before falling back to a lower flow rate
30
114 / 118 / 122 / 126

Maint click adjustment (s)
Normal valve control ON time plus the time specified by this parameter
0.040
112 / 116 / 120 / 124 Low flow % error
Variation from low flow rate allowed before adjustment attempt is made
113 / 117 / 121 / 125 High flow % error
Variation from high flow rate allowed before adjustment attempt is made
115 / 119 / 123 / 127 Open method
Method to control FCV during initial flow time set by program code 049 Initial flow
time (s)
Normal
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A -13
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
292 / 297 / 302 / 307

NO solenoid on FCV
293 / 298 / 303 / 308

NC solenoid on FCV
Actual
Inputs
294 / 299 / 304 / 309
Stem Switch 1
Unauthorized flow through FCV
295 / 300 / 305 / 310

Stem Switch 2
Not used
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input
Pressure control (pinch back)
Not used
Alarms
Action in response to loss of CLOSE control of the flow control valve.
Time period allowed to reduce flow rate without response before issuing an alarm.
Primary
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.6
Component Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 14
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
ENABLE 1 to 4 COMPONENTS (PRODUCTS)
067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter
Assign component(s) to flow meter

[flow meter component(s)]
Default
Actual
1 or more
Global Parameters
026 Unit type
Specify loading / blending configuration
Seq.(auto)
045 Round method
Select method for mathmatical rounding of accumulated totals
Up
Component for blend error detection and / or line flushing
215 Master MF %
Maximum percent variance of any meter factor to corresponding master meter factor
2.00
216 Adjacent MF %
Maximum percent variance of any meter factor to adjacent meter factors.
0.25
066 / 069 / 072 / 075 Component ID
Assign identification label to component
Component #n
068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment
The components mass computation adjustment factor
0.000000
Meter Factors
Specify the number of flow rate / meter factor combinations for the component
through its flow meter
Select use of fixed or linearized meter factors
Fixed
171 / 182 / 193 / 204 Nominal K-factor
Pulses per engineering unit rounded to one decimal place. Obtained from meter
nameplate.
23.0
Median value of meter factor for use in validation by program code 215 Master MF
%
1.0000
173 / 184 / 195 / 206 Stop rate Comp x
Set the flow rate for low-flow stop quantity at end of inline batch
120
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 14
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
174 / 185 / 196 / 207 Flow rate 1
Low calibration flow rate
200
175 / 186 / 197 / 208 Meter factor 1
Meter factor for low calibration flow rate
1.0000
176 / 187 / 198 / 209 Flow rate 2
High or fallback calibraiton flow rate
600
177 / 188 / 199 / 210 Meter factor 2
Meter factor for calibration flow rate 2
1.0000
178 / 189 / 200 / 211 Flow rate 3
High or fallback calibration flow rate
179 / 190 / 201 / 212 Meter factor 3
Meter factor for calibration flow rate 3
1.0000
180 / 191 / 202 / 213 Flow rate 4
High calibraton flow rate
181 / 192 / 203 / 214 Meter factor 4
Meter factor for high calibration flow rate
1.0000
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.7
TABLE A - 15
Component Block Valve / Pump Parameters Setup

Block Valve / Pump Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
Default
Actual
Block Valve Control Parameters

Assign discrete output for block valve control

[block valve component]
408 to 422 Component combination nn (cccc)
Assign discrete output for block valve control

[block valve component(s)]
026 Unit type
DanLoad 6000 unit assignment for general control of block valves
Seq.(auto)
Time between opening block valve and opening the FCV
354 Delay after outputs
Time between energizing recipe and component combination outputs and checking
safety circuits (used in conjunction with an automation system).
486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load
Block valve control sequence
Block Valve Status Parameters

Assign discrete input for block valve status

[block valve component]
Recipes
Total number of recipes enabled
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 15
Block Valve / Pump Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
481 / ... / 655 Name
Configurable name for recipe
482 / ... / 656 Component 1 percentage
Percentage of Component 1 to load for Recipe rr
485 / ... / 659 Comp 4 percent or ratio qty
Percent of Component 4 to load for Recipe rr or additive ratio quantity Multi-rate
[Sequential blending] Order to load components.

[In-line blending] High / low proportion component
Default
Actual
Recipe rr
Pump Control Parameters

Assign discrete output for pump control

[pump component]
8 / ...
Time between pump start and FCV opening
Time between FCV closing and pump stop
30
Alarms
Time allowed for a block valve to close after deenergizing the block valve control
output.
10
Enable alarm to output 1 (bit mask)
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Discrete output for alarm mask 1
Enable alarm to output 2 (bit mask)
379 Alarm output 2
Discrete output for alarm mask 2
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.8
Delivery Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 16
Delivery Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
Default
Maximum quantity that can be preset in a single batch
3000
Minimum quantity that can be preset
50
Use uncompensated or compensated quantity in computing delivery quantity
Gross
Display delivery quantity as uncompensated or compensated quantity
Gross
082 Stop key action
Select method for terminating a batch delivery with the STOP key
Low flow
083 Fall back qty
Quantity to flow at a fall back flow rate before attempting to increase flow rate to
highest flow rate
1000
108 Ramp clicks
Number of attempts to increase flow rate before maintaining fall back flow rate
30
Number of attempts to maintain flow rate before decreasing flow rate to a fall back
flow rate
30
The time between stopping delivery and deenergizing additive pump outputs
10
Primary component for blend ratio error detection and / or line flushing
341 #cmpt inputs
Specify the number of compartment size inputs
342 Start method
Define the method used to start a batch delivery.
Normal
Actual
Component X
[Sequential delivery only] Quantity to load at startup flow rate before increasing to
high flow rate
50
[sequential delivery only] Quantity to load at startup flow rate after restart from a
suspended delivery operation. Active only if the Low flow start quantity has been
delivered.
20
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 16
Delivery Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
Default
086 / 092 / 098 / 104 Low flow stop qty
[Sequential delivery] Quantity to load at the Flow rate 1 at the end of a delivery.
** OR **
[In-line delivery} Quantity to load at the component stop rate.
50
087 / 093 / 099 / 105 Line pack delay (s)
Time between component pump energization and opening the flow control valves
088 / 094 / 100 / 106 Pump stop delay (s)
Time between flow control valves closing and component pump deenergization
30
Time between opening the component block valve and opening the flow control
valve.
Actual
Recipes
Specify the number of recipes defined.
481 / ... / 655 Recipe name
Configurable alpha-numeric name of recipe.
Recipe XX
Percentage of component 1 used in blend.
100
485 / ... / 659 Comp 4 percent or ratio qty
Percentage of component 4 used in blend or additive ratio quantity for Multi Rate
[Sequential delivery] Sequence to load components.

[ In-line delivery] Specify high / low proportion components.
Recipe Selection Inputs
Must be set to 0 to enable the six nnn Recipe X input functions below.
361 Recipe 1 input
Assign discrete input for selection of recipe 1
362 Recipe 2 input
363 Recipe 3 input
364 Recipe 4 input
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 16
Delivery Parameters
Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
365 Recipe 5 input
366 Recipe 6 input
Actual
Recipe Selection Outputs

367 Recipe 1 output
Assign discrete output that is ON during batch delivery of recipe 1.
368 Recipe 2 output
369 Recipe 3 output
370 Recipe 4 output
371 Recipe 5 output
372 Recipe 6 output
Determine processing method for end of batch or transaction
Ba only
374 Level input
Assign discrete input for ESSO Japans intermediate level logic
375 Hatch input
Assign discrete input for ESSO Japans hatch sensor logic
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.9
Blending Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 17

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
Actual
Global Parameters
341 #cmpt inputs
Define the number of compartment size inputs
342 Start method
Determine the method for starting batch delivery (not implemented)
Normal
711 Ramp down %
Percent of desired flow rate to ramp to if unable to maintain blend do to low pressure
50
712 Rate reduction
Reduction if flow rate when high flow rate cannot be maintained
100
Quantity to load at low flow rate before ramping to high flow rate
50
714 Clean line qty
Quantity of program code 111 Primary component to load at end of batch
715 Low prop fac
[In-line blending] Flow rate to deliver low-proportion components set by program

code 486 / ... / 660 Sequence to load
Quantity of blend to load before beginning blend ratio adjustment
100
717 Alarm after qty
Quantity of blend to load before checking blend ratio for purpose of generating
Unable to maintain blend alarm
200
718 Adjustment qty
Quantity segment of blend used to correct the blend ratio
50
719 Comp % display
Quantity accumulation type for display of batch component percentages
Gross
Time between pressing START and beginning of first additive injection cycle
Method of computing blend ratio error for adjustment and alarms
Grspctbatch
723 Max dev %
Maximum allowed percent deviation in the blend ratio
724 Blend tol %
Maximum allowed percent tolerance in the blend
725 Max dev qty
Maximum allowed quantity units variation in the blend
20
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 17

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
726 Blend tol qty
Maximum allowed quantity tolerance in the blend
40
727 Blend sample qty
The delivered blend quantity segment used to calculate blend ratio
10
Actual

728 / 734 / 740 / 746 Flow adj fac
Factor for rate of adjustment of flow rate during an in-line blend
1.00
729 / 735 / 741 / 747 Ratio adj fac
Factor for rate of adjustment of blend ratio (for correction) during an in-line blend
1.00
730 / 736 / 742 / 748 Ramp %
[Sequential blending with digital flow control valve(s)]: Percentage of flow rate to
ramp up with one click before switching to flow rate maintenance mode.
85
731 CALMON analysis method
Logic to use for calibration monitoring analysis
Fuzzy
752 FPO basis
Factor applied to meter pulse inputs to generate factored pulse outputs
Raw
Number of bad analyses per CALMON reset count calibration monitoring
10
All analyses counters are zeroed out at this interval
50
756 / 761 / 766 / 771 FPO
The factored pulse output on the smart 4-ch meter pulse board
757 / 762 / 767 / 772 Number of blades
The number of magnetic blades on the meter for calibration purposes
758 / 763 / 768 / 773 Max max char dev
Maximum signature deviation computed during a calibration analyses
100
759 / 764 / 769 / 774 Max tot char devs
Sum signature deviation computed during a calibration analyses
400
760 / 765 / 770 / 775 Calibration status
Select calibrated or not calibrated - can be used to force recalibration
Not calibrated
Batch Profile Parameters

776 / 778 / 780 / 782 / 784 / 786 / 788 / 790 /
792 / 794 / 796 / 798 Low flow rate
Low flow rate for Recipe n - Batch Profile n
300
777 / 779 / 781 / 783 / 785 / 787 / 789 / 791 /

793 / 795 / 797 / 799 High flow rate
High flow rate for Recipe n - Batch Profile n
600
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.10
TABLE A - 18
Temperature Compensation Parameters Setup
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
318 / 324 / 330 / 336 Meter x temp input
Function
ENABLE AND ASSIGN RTD TEMPERATURE INPUTS
TO FLOW METER STREAM
[RTD meter stream]
Date:
Default
Actual
Global Parameters
353 RTD range
Specify range of RTD inputs on analog input board(s)
Standard
427 Temperaure units
Engineering units: determine how meter temp is computed and control labeling
Linear equation reference temperature:

Table 6C and 24C use 60.0 degrees F.
Table 54C uses 15.0 degrees C.
Entering a non-standard reference temperature causes correction to same.
15.0
431 Sample qty
Measured quantity units between temperature readings to obtain temperature

averages.
100
Individual RTD Configuration

319 / 325 / 331 / 337 Meter x offset (Ohms)
3-wire RTD interconnecting wire resistance (not recommended)
432 / 435 /438 / 441 Temperature option
Select method for calculation of CTL
Off
433 / 436 / 439 / 442 Alpha
Coefficient of thermal expansion:

"T for linear equation and API tables 6C and 54C
0.0005100
Fixed temperature used if RTD input fails.
15.0
Alarms
Low temperature setpoint for alarm trigger
-40.0
High temperature setpoint for alarm trigger
110.0
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 18

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Action in response to temperature alarm
Primary
Enable temperature failure alarm to output 1.

(Bit mask value = 512)
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Assign a discrete output to alarm output 1.
Enable temperature failure alarm to output 2.

379 Alarm output 2
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.11
TABLE A - 19
Pressure Compensation Parameters Setup
Pressure Compensation Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
320 / 326 / 332 / 338 Meter x pres input
Function
Enable and assign pressure analog input to flow meter stream
[pressure transmitter meter stream]
Date:
Default
Actual
Global Parameters
429 Pressure units
Engineering units
psi
Individual PT Configuration
464 / 468 / 472 / 476 Pressure @4 mA
Pressure at zero scale transmitter input.
0.00
465 / 469 / 473 / 477 Pressure @20 mA
Pressure at full scale transmitter input.
0.00
444 / 447 / 450 / 453 Pressure option
Select method for calculation of CP L
Off
445 / 448 / 451 / 454 F-factor X 1000000000
Compressibility factor times 109 in volume units per pressure units.
Alarms
Low pressure setpoint for alarm trigger.
0.00
High pressure setpoint for alarm trigger.
0.00
Note:
Action in response to pressure alarm is always Primary.
Enable pressure failure alarm to output 1.

C388607
287 Alarm output 1
Enable pressure failure alarm to output 2.

379 Alarm output 2
Assign a discrete output for alarm output 2.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.12
Density Compensation Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 20
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
321 / 327 / 333 / 339 Meter x dens input
Function
Enable and assign density analog input to flow meter stream
[density transmitter meter stream]
Date:
Default
Actual
Global Parameters
428 Density units
Engineering units for density measurements.
16/ft3
426 Buoyancy
Density adjustment for buoyancy in air for mass calculation
0.0000
Specify the number of digits following the decimal separator in density / gravity
values.
Individual DT Configuration
466 / 470 / 474 / 478 Density @4 mA
Density at zero scale transmitter input.
467 / 471 / 475 / 479 Density @20 mA
Density at full scale transmitter input.
Chose an available option or disable.
Off
Fixed density/gravity used when live input is not available.
Alarms
Low density/gravity setpoint for alarm trigger.
High density/gravity setpoint for alarm trigger.
Action in response to density alarm.
Primary
Enable density failure alarm to output 1.

16777215
287 Alarm output 1
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 20

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Enable density failure alarm to output 2.

379 Alarm output 2
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.13
Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 21
Pulse Per Unit Output Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Function
Date:
Default
ENABLE 1 or 2 PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUTS
Assign flow meters to pulse per unit output

[pulse per unit output flow meter(s)]
G per meter
Actual
Individual Pulse Per Unit Output Configuration

130 / 133 Factor
Output pulse = measured quantity / Factor
1.0
Pulse output ON time (milliseconds)
20
Outputs
Assign output 1 to a discrete output
Assign output 2 to a discrete output
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.14
Additive Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 22
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Function
Date:
Default
ENABLE ADDITIVE INJECTION
139 / 144 / 149 / 154 / 159 / 164

Control meters
Assign combined flow meters to additive injectors

[additives meter(s)]
G per meter
Actual
Global Parameters
044 Additive units
Engineering units for display and printing.
cc
Specify how additives are selected
External
137 Inject %
% of cycle at which injection begins
50
138 Clean line qty
Specity quantity of product to load without additives at end of batch.
Output energized during delivery of the quantity specified by program code

138 Clean line qty
Delay between load stop and additive pumps stop
10
Individual Additive Configuration

140 / 145 / 150 / 155 / 160 / 165
Ratio qty
Quantity of product measured per each additive ratio output
40
141 / 146 / 151 / 156 / 161 / 166

Injection method
Select injection method: Mech, Handshake, Meter or Control
Mech
142 / 147 / 152 / 157 / 162 / 167

Volume per pulse or K-factor
Measure additive volume (depends on injection method)
0.00
143 / 148 / 153 / 158 / 163 / 168

Additive per 1000
Additive units injected per 1000 units of product.
0.0000
869 / 870 / 871 / 872 / 873 / 874 Add x
Assign space in transaction storage record for additive total
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 22
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
949 / 950 / 951 / 952 / 953 / 954 Add x
Assign coordinates in transaction ticket for additive totals for transaction
895 / 896 / 897 / 898 / 899 / 900 Add x
Assign space in batch storage record for additive total
975 / 976 / 977 / 978 / 979 / 980 Add x
Assign coordinated in transaction ticket for additive totals for batch
Actual
Outputs
380 / 383 / 386 / 389 / 392 / 395
Ratio/valve outputs
Assign additive injection control to a discrete output
800 / 803 / 806 / 809 / 812 / 815

Pump output
ENABLE AND ASSIGN DISCRETE OUTPUT TO ADDITIVE PUMP
801 / 804 / 807 / 810 / 813 . 816

Block valve output
ENABLE AND ASSIGN DISCRETE OUTPUT TO ADDITIVE BLOCK VALVE
Energized during delivery of the quantity set by program code 138 Clean line qty
Inputs
382 / 385 / 388 / 391 / 394 / 397
Selection input
External input to select additive
381 / 384 / 387 / 390 / 393 / 396

Feedback/meter input
Verify and/or measure injected additive
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 22
Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
Actual
Expected # feedback pulses/cycle Mech method or maximum feedback on time

Handshake injection in seconds.
Alarms
Accumulated additive injection error count for triggering Additive x failure alarm
(Mech and Handshake)
Maximum number of counts that an additive feedback input can be ON before an

alarm is generated.
Volume of unauthorized additive flow at which an additive X failure alarm is raised

for the meter and control injection methods.
272 Prod/add -%
The low (minus) setpoint referenced to the value of program code 143 / 148 / 153 /
158 / 163 / 168 Additive per 1000 that triggers an additive failure alarm
273 Prod/add +%
The high (plus) setpoint referenced to the value of program code 143 / 148 / 153 / 158
/ 163 / 168 Additive per 1000 that triggers an additive failure alarm
Enable additive failure alarm to output 1
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Assign alarm output 1 to a discrete output
Enable additive failure alarm to outpt 2
379 Alarm output 2
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.15
LPG / Pressure Control Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 23
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
ENABLE BACK-PRESSURE CONTROL

AND
SELECT SOURCE OF PRESSURE MEASUREMENT FOR CONTROL
Off
Low pressure setpoint to maintain by closing the flow control valve to a lower fall
back flow rate setting
296 / 301 / 306 / 311 Close input
Assign discrete input for each flow control valve if pressure switch is used.
818 PT type
Select static pressure or differential pressure input type
Pm
819 Pe method
Select method of vapor pressure calculation
TP-15
446 / 449 / 452 / 455 Backup pressure
Component backup pressure in kPa, psi, etc.

Used for quantity computation correction if > 0.
0.0
Constant used for absolute / gauge pressure conversion
14.70
823 Pinch back qty
Define the batch startup gross quantity for which pressure control is disabled
026 Unit type
Select type of blender
Seq.(auto)
027 Valve type
Select type of flow control valve
Std. digital
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 23
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
824 T1
Temperature for low Pe
0.0
825 Pe at T1
Low pressure Pe at temperature T1
0.0
826 T2
Temperature for high Pe (2-point linearization)

OR
Temperature for mid Pe (3-point linearization)
0.0
827 Pe at T2
High pressure Pe at temperature T2 (2-point linearization)

OR
Mid pressure Pe at temperature T2 (3-point linearization)
0.0
828 T3
Temperature for high Pe (3-point linearization)
0.0
829 Pe at T3
High pressure Pe at temperature T3 (3-point linearization)
0.0
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.16
Dynamic Data Display Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 24
Dynamic Data Display Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Dynamic Data Display Configuration

Grs batch vol
002
Std batch vol
003
Mtr 1 grs total
004
Mtr 1 std total
005
Mtr 1 grs batch
006
Mtr 1 std batch
007
Mtr 1 grs unauth
017
Mtr 1 flw rate
008
Mtr 1 factor
011
Mtr 1 grs load
103
Mtr 1 pls cnt
012
Mtr 1 max flw rate
010
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Dynamic Data Display Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Dynamic Data Display Configuration

Mtr 1 curr temp
074
Cmp 1 ave temp
080
Cmp 1 ave vlv cls
075
Arm position
001
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Data Codes per Device
Device
Function
Description
Global Variables
001
Arm position
0, 1, or 2 indicates the parked, side 1, or side 2 position of the loading arm.
002
Grs batch qty
Sum of the accumulated quantitys accessible by data codes 072 / 078 / 084 / 090 Cmp x grs batch.
Gross quantity of the batch in whole numbers (0 to 999,999 quantity units).
003
Std batch qty
Sum of the accumulated quantitys accessible by data codes 073 / 079 / 085 / 091 Cmp x std batch.
Standard quantity of the batch in whole number (0 to 999,999 quantity units).
102
Preset quantity
Batch quantity to load.
121
Flow rate
Total (loading arm delivery) flow rate (0 to 99,999 quantity units per hour).
130
Power fail grs bch
Accumulated gross quantity of the batch delivered at power fail time (0 to 999,999 quantity units).
131
Power fail std bch
Accumulated standard quantity of the batch delivered at power fail time (0 to 999,999 quantity
units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Device
Function
Description
132
Batch temperature
The flow weighted average temperature of the product during the batch delivery.
133
Batch density
The flow weighted average density of the product during the batch delivery.
134
Batch pressure
The flow weighted average pressure of the product during the batch delivery.
223
Flush pulse count
Pulse count accumulation for flush action.
Meter
Flow Meters Variables
004
021
038
055
Mtr x grs total
Accumulated gross quantity total (non-reset) for meter x (0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
005
022
039
056
Mtr x std total
Accumulated standard quantity total (non-reset) for meter x (0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
006
023
040
057
Mtr x grs batch
Accumulated gross quantity for the current batch delivery (0 to 999,999 quantity units). Value is
rounded per program code 045 Round method.
007
024
041
058
Mtr x std batch
Accumulated standard quantity for the current batch delivery (0 to 999,999 quantity units). Value
is rounded per program code 045 Round method.
008
025
042
059
Mtr x flow rate
Current instantaneous flow rate for meter x (0 to 99,999 quantity units per hour).
009
026
043
060
Mtr x CCF
Combined correction factor for meter x.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Device
Function
Description
010
027
044
061
Mtr x max flw rate
The maximum flow rate for meter x.
011
028
045
062
Mtr x factor
The current meter factor for meter x.
012
029
046
063
Mtr x pls count
Total pulse accumulation = Mtr x pls flrt1 + Mtr x pls flrt2 + Mtr x pls flrt3 + Mtr x pls flrt4
013
030
047
064
Mtr x pls flrt1
Pulse accumulation at Mtr x flow rate 1 (0 at start of load)
014
031
048
065
Mtr x pls flrt2
015
032
049
066
Mtr x pls flrt3
016
033
050
067
Mtr x pls flrt4
017
034
051
068
Mtr x grs unauth
Accumulated unauthorized gross quantity for meter x.
018
035
052
069
Mtr x std unauth
Accumulated unauthorized standard quantity for meter x.
019
036
053
070
Mtr x grs start
Accumulated gross quantity at start of batch ( 0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
020
037
054
071
Mtr x std start
Accumulated standard quantity at start of batch (0 to 999,999,999 quantity units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Device
Function
Description
074
080
086
092
Mtr x curr temp
The current temperature (live or fixed) for meter stream x.
103
104
105
106
Mtr x grs load
Accumulated gross quantity for the batch (0.0 to 999,999.99). These values are displayed to the
hundredth of a quantity unit resolution for use in meter proving.
126
127
128
129
Mtr x Ctl
The internally calculated or fixed value of Ctl (correction factor for the affect of temperature on the
quantity of the liquid).
135
136
137
138
Mtr x curr pres
The current pressure (live or fixed) for meter stream x.
139
140
141
142
Mtr x Cpl
Internally calculated or fixed value of Cpl (correction factor for the effect of pressure on the
quantity of the liquid).
143
144
145
146
Mtr x curr dens
The current density (live or fixed) for meter stream x.
147
148
149
150
Mtr x std ld data
The delivery accumulted total volume data for meter x standard load.
219
220
221
222
Mtr x calib stat
Meter calibration status for up to 4 meters.
Component
Component Variables
072
078
084
090
Cmp x grs batch
Accumulated gross quantity of component x for the batch delivery. Value is rounded per program
code 045 Round method.
073
079
085
091
Cmp x std batch
Accumulated standard quantity of component x for the batch delivery. Value is rounded per
program code 045 Round method.
075
081
087
093
Cmp x ave temp
Flow weighted average temperature of component x for the batch delivery.
076
082
088
094
Cmp x ave vlv cls
Average flow control valve closure time when flowing component x.
077
083
089
095
Cmp x batch %
The percentage of component x in the current batch delivery. Quantitys are independent from the
selection of program code 722 Blend error method.
107
109
111
113
Cmp x ave dens
Flow weighted average density of component x for the batch delivery. Format dependent on
program code 046 Density/gravity scale.
108
110
112
114
Cmp x ave pres
Flow weighted average pressure of component x for the batch delivery.
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Device
Function
Description
122
123
124
125
Cmp x adjust %
Percentage of component x, used to adjust blend ratio. Values are dependent on the selection of
program code 722 Blend error method in the following manner.
Grspctbatch and Stdpctbatch use accumulated component quantity percentages of the batch for
adjustment and alarm purposes.
Grspctsmpl and Stdpctsmpl use instantanous component quantity percentages, computed with
quantitys specified by program code 727 Blend sample quantity, for adjustment and alarm
purposes.
Flrtsmpl uses one second samples of the component flow rate for component percentage
computations.
151
153
155
157
Cmp x grs total
Accumulated gross total quantity for component x
152
154
156
158
Cmp x std total
Accumulated standard total quantity for component x
Recipe
Function
Description
159
171
183
195
207
161
173
185
197
209
163
175
187
199
211
165
177
189
201
213
167
179
191
203
215
169
181
193
205
217
Rec x grs tot
Recipe x gross total quantity for delivery. Refer to program codes 480-661 for recipe parameters
for up to 30 recipes.
160
172
184
196
208
162
174
186
198
210
164
176
188
200
212
166
178
190
202
214
168
180
192
204
216
170
182
194
206
218
Rec x std tot
Recipe x standard total quantity for delivery. Refer to program codes 480-661 for recipe
parameters for up to 30 recipes.
Safety Circuit
224
230
225
231
226
227
Function
228
229
Circuit x safety state
Additive
096
097
098
099
Description
State of safety circuit x (up to 8 safety circuits).
Additive Variables
100
101
Add x total
Accumulated quantity of additive for transaction. (0 to 9,999,999 additive quantity units specified
by program code 044 Additive units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 24
Device
115
116
117
118
Function
119
120
Add x batch
Description
Accumulated quantity of additive for batch. (0 to 9,999,999 additive quantity units specified by
program code 044 Additive units).
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.17
Communications / Data Logging Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 25
Communications Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Data Port Configuration

663 / 668 Mode
Ch. A / B Data protocol selection
Not used
664 / 669 Data rate
Ch. A / B Baud selection
9600
665 / 670 Word size
Ch. A / Ch. B Bits in data word selection
666 / 671 Stop bits
Ch. A / Ch. B Stop bits selection
667 / 672 Parity
Ch. A / Ch. B Parity type selection
EVEN
Time-out in seconds for comms failure on channel A.
10
Time-out in seconds for comms failure on channel B.
10
Enable alarms to output 1 (bit mask value = 2))
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Assign alarm output 1 to discrete output
Enable alarms to output 2 (bit mask value = 2)
379 Alarm output 2
Data Logging
696 Batch summary
Configure printer output for standard Batch Summary report
Off
Configure printer output for standard Transaction Summary report
Off
698 Alarm log
Configure printer output for Alarm logging
Off
699 Power fail log
Configure printer output for Power Fail logging
Off
Configure printer output for Entry / Exit of Program Mode logging
Off
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 25
Communications Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
701 W&M switch open/closed
Configure printer output for OPEN / CLOSE W&M switch logging
Off
702 Program code value change log
Configure printer output for modification of program code value logging
Off
Configure printer output for configuration summary printing
Off
Configure printer output for program crash memory logging
Off
705 Totalizers
Enable / disable automatic printing every 24 hours OR manual printing
Off
Configure printer output for printing user defined Transaction Ticket
Off
Configure printer output for reprinting user defined Transaction Ticket
Off
708 Thruput
Enable / disable automatic printing every 24 hours of change in totalizers
Off
709 Sequence numbers
Enable / disable printing of report / log sequence numbers on each report / log on a
per printer basis.
Off
710 Cutoff hour
The hour at which a cutoff (end of day) processing run is to be run.
0 (midnight)
Actual
Alarms - Data Logging

Action in response to a Data logging memory full alarm
Info
269 Alarm /p mask 1
Enable alarms to output 1
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Assign alarm output 1 to discrete output
Enable alarms to output 2
379 Alarm output 2
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.18
Transaction Storage Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 26
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Transaction Storage - Global

042 Transaction #
Transaction sequence number (0000 to 9999)
9999
043 Batch #
Batch sequence number (0000 to 9999)
9999
Maximum allowed batches in each transaction (0 to 10000) 0 = unlimited
Prompt for passcode entry for each transaction (not implemented)
No
Number of memory bytes allocated for each stored transaction record.
Allocation of the start page and number of pages in the transaction file.
602
Number of memory bytes allocated for each stored batch record.
Allocation of the start page and number of pages in the batch file.
838 Tr tk format
Specify default transaction ticket
Lock
839 Time out tr
Specify whether or not a transaction should be timed out automatically
No
Transaction Record Storage Allocation

840 1 Addr
Record offset for storage Unit Address
841 2 Tr seq #
Record offset for storage of Transaction Sequence Number
842 3 Recipe #
Record offset for storage of Recipe Number
843 4 Recipe name
Record offset for storage of Recipe Name
844 5 Side
Record offset for storage of Swing-arm side
845 6 Prompt 1
Record offset for storage of Prompt 1
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
846 7 Prompt 2
847 8 Prompt 3
848 9 Prompt 4
849 10 Prompt 5
850 11 Data item 1
Record offset for storage of Data item 1
851 12 Data item 2
852 13 Data item 3
853 14 Data item 4
854 15 Data item 5
855 16 Start date
Record offset for storage of Transaction Start Date
856 17 End date
Record offset for storage of Transaction End Date
857 18 Gross
Record offset for storage of accumulated gross total for the tansaction
858 19 Std
Record offset for storage of accumulated std total for tjhe transaction
859 20 Temp
Record offset for storage of average temperature for the tansaction
860 21 Pres
Record offset for storage of average pressure for the transaction
861 22 Dens
Record offset for storage of average density for the transaction
862 23 Start gross
Record offset for storage of the accumulated gross total at the start of the transaction
863 24 Start std
Record offset for storage of the accumujlated std total at the start of the transaction
864 25 End gross
Record offset for storge of hte accumulated gross total at hte end of the transaction
865 26 End std
Reocord offset for storage of the accumulated std total at te end of th transaction
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
Record offset for storage of a bit map of the alarms that occured during the
transaction
867 28 Prim alarm
Record offset for storage of a Primary alarm that occurred during the transaction
868 29 Temp alarm
Record offset for storage of a Temperature alarm that occured during the transaction
869 30 Add 1
Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantity of additive 1 during the
transaction
870 31 Add 2
Record offset for storage of te accumulated quantity of additive 2 during the

transaction
871 32 Add 3
transaction
872 33 Add 4
transaction
873 34 Add 5
transaction
874 35 Add 6
transaction
875 36 Op mode
Record offset for storage of the operating mode during the transaction
876 37 Gross units
877 38 Std units
Actual
Batch Record Storage Allocation

880 1 Addr
Record offset for storage of the Unit Address
881 2 Ba seq #
Record offset for storage of the Batch Sequence Number
882 3 Tr seq #
Record offset for storage of the Transaction Sequence Number
883 4 Temp
Record offset for storage of the average temperature during the batch
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
884 5 Pres
Record offset for storage of the average pressure during the batch
885 6 Dens
Record offset for storage of the average density during the batch
886 7 Preset
Record offset for storage of the Preset value for the batch
887 8 Gross
Record offset for storage of the accumulated gross quantity for the batch
888 9 Std
Record offset for storage of hte accumulated standard quantity for the batch
889 10 Comp gross
Record offset for storage of the accumulated gross quantities of each component in
the batch
890 11 Comp std
Record offset for storage of the accumulated standard quantitys of each component in
the batch
891 12 Comp temp
Record offset for storage of the average temperature of each component in the batch
892 13 Comp dens
Record offset for storage of the average density of each component in the batch
893 14 Comp pres
Record offset for storage of the aveerage pressure of each component in the batch
894 15 Comp %
Record offset for storage of the percentage of each component in the batch
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 26

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
895 16 Add 1
Record offset for storage of the accumulated quantityn of additive 1 for the batch
896 17 Add 2
897 18 Add 3
898 19 Add 4
899 20 Add 5
900 21 Add 6
901 22 Op mode
Record offset for storage of the operation mode during the batch
902 23 CCF
Record offset for storage of the combined correction factor during the batch
Actual
Alarms
Action in response to a memory full condition for transaction storage or batch storage
memory.
Off
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.19
Transaction Ticket Parameters Setup
TABLE A - 27

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Ticket Coordinates for Transaction Storage Codes

920 1 Addr
Transaction ticket coordinates for Unit Address
921 2 Tr seq #
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Transaction Sequence Number
922 3 Recipe #
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Recipe Number
923 4 Recipe name
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Recipe Name
924 5 Side
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Swing-Arm Side
925 6 Prompt 1
Transaction ticket coordinates for Prompt 1
926 7 Prompt 2
927 8 Prompt 3
928 9 Prompt 4
Transaction ticker coordinated for Prompt 4
929 10 Prompt 5
930 11 Data item 1
Transaction ticket t coordinates for Data item 1
931 12 Data item 2
Transaction ticket coordinates for Data item 2
932 13 Data item 3
933 14 Data item 4
934 15 Data item 5
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 27

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
935 16 Start date
Transaction ticket coordinates for Start Transaction Date
936 17 End date
Transaction ticket coordinates for End Transaction Date
937 18 Gross
Transaction ticket coordinates for accumulated gross quantity for the transaction
938 19 Std
Transaction ticket coordinates for accumulated standard quantity for the transaction
939 20 Temp
Transaction ticket coordinates for average temperature for the transaction
940 21 Pres
Transaction ticket coordinates for average pressure for the transaction
941 22 Dens
Transaction ticket coordinates for average pressure for the transaction
942 23 Start gross
Transaction ticket coordinates for the gross totalizer reading at start of transaction
943 24 Start std
Transaction ticket coordinates for th std totalizer reading t start of transaction
944 25 End gross
Transaction ticket coordinates for the gross totalizer reading at end of transaction
945 26 End std
Transaction ticket coordinates for the std totalizer reading at end of transaction
Transaction ticket coordinates for the alarm bit map
947 28 Prim alarm
Transaction ticket coordinate for a Primary alarm
948 29 Temp alarm
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Temperature alarm
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 27

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
949 30 Add 1
Transaction ticket coordinates for the total Additive 1 quantity for the transaction
950 31 Add 2
951 32 Add 3
952 33 Add 4
953 34 Add 5
954 35 Add 6
955 36 Op mode
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Operation Mode during the transaction
956 37 Gross units
957 38 Std units
Actual
Ticket Coordinates for Batch Storage Codes

960 1 Addr
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Unit Address during batch
961 2 Ba seq #
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Batch Sequence Number
962 3 Tr seq #
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Transaction Sequence Number
963 4 Temp
Transaction ticket coordinates for the average temperature during the batch
964 5 Pres
Transaction ticket coordinates for the average pressure during the batch
965 6 Dens
Transaction ticket coordinates for the average density during the batch
966 7 Preset
Transaction ticket coordinates for the batch Preset quantity
967 8 Gross
Transaction ticket coordinates for the batch gross quantity
968 9 Std
Transaction ticket coordinates for the batch standard quantity
969 10 Comp gross
Transaction ticket coordinates for the component gross quantities for the batch
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 27

Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Date:
Function
Default
970 11 Comp std
Transaction ticket coordinates for the component standard quantities for the batch
971 12 Comp temp
Transaction ticket coordinates for the average temperatures of the components for the
batch
972 13 Comp dens
Transaction ticket coordinations for the average density of the components for the
batch
973 14 Comp pres
Transaction ticket coordinates for the average pressure of the components for the
batch
974 15 Comp %
Transaction ticket coordinates for the component percentages for the batch
975 16 Add 1
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Additive 1 quantity for the batch
976 17 Add 2
977 18 Add 3
978 19 Add 4
979 20 Add 5
980 21 Add 6
981 22 Op mode
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Operation Mode during the batch
982 23 CCF
Transaction ticket coordinates for the Combined Correction Factor during the batch
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A.20
TABLE A - 28
Alarm Parameters Setup
Alarm Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Date:
Function
Default
Actual
Safety Circuit Configuration

Time period to allow a secondary alarm to be active before it is reset automatically.
300
Setpoint for Flow rate too low meter x alarm trigger.
100
Time allowed at flow less than setpoint before triggering alarm.
10
Response to low flow alarm.
Primary
Setpoint for Flow rate too high meter x alarm trigger.
660
Time allowed at flow greater than setpoint before triggering alarm.
10
Response to high flow alarm.
Primary
Setpoint for Unable to close valve meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY)
2.0
Setpoint for Valve closed early meter x alarm trigger.
5.0
Response to underflow alarm.
Off
Setpoint for Timed-out - no flow detected meter x alarm trigger.
Response to no flow time-out alarm.
Primary
Setpoint for Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY)
10.0
Setpoint for Pulse security error meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY)
Pulse error accumulation before RESET counter is issued.
10000
Response to Data logging memory full alarm.
Info
Set time out in seconds for Comms failure channel A
10
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 28
Alarm Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Function
Date:
Default
Set time out in seconds for Comms failure channel B
10
Low setpoint for Temperature failure meter x alarm trigger.
-40.0
High setpoint for Temperature failure meter x alarm trigger.
110.0
Response to temperature failure alarm.
Primary
Low setpoint for Density failure component x alarm trigger.
High setpoint for Density failure component x alarm trigger.
Response to density failure alarm.
Primary
Low setpoint for Pressure failure meter x alarm trigger. (PRIMARY)
0.00
High setpoint for Pressure failure meter x alarm trigger.
0.00
Setpoint for Additive x failure alarm trigger. (PRIMARY)
Expected number of feedback pulses per additive ratio cycle.
Setpoint for Unable to close block valve x alarm trigger.
10
Actual
Safety Circuit Configuration

Assign discrete input to alarm
Response to TRUE input to Safety circuit 1
Secondary
Configurable message for Safety circuit 1
<as indicated>
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 28
Alarm Parameters
Location:
Program Code
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Primary
<as indicated>
Secondary
<as indicated>
Secondary
<as indicated>
Secondary
<as indicated>
265 Circuit 5 type
Enable / disable / define swing-arm side checking for this circuit.
Secondary
<as indicated>
266 Circuit 6 type
Secondary
<as indicated>
Actual
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 28
Alarm Parameters
Location:
Unit:
Program Code
Function
Date:
Default
267 Circuit 7 type
Secondary
<as indicated>
268 Circuit 8 type
Actual
Discrete Control Output for Alarms

Enable alarms to output 1 (bit mask).
16777215
287 Alarm output 1
Enable alarms to output 2 (bit mask).
379 Alarm output 2
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
TABLE A - 29
Analog Inputs
Program Code
Location:
Unit:
Function
Date:
Default
Actual
Analog Inputs Configuration

983 RTD Alpha
Set the alpha value for temperature calculations
3850
984 LLcnt
Set A/D value for Low channel Low calibration point for 4-20 mA input
985 LH cnt
Set A/D value for Low channel High calibration point for 4-20 mA input
986 HL cnt
Set A/D value for High channel Low calibration point for 4-20 mA input
987 HH cnt
Set A/D value for High channel High calibration point for 4-20 mA input
988 LL cnt
Set A/D value for Low channel Low calibration point for RTD input
989 LH cnt
Set A/D value for Low channel High calibration point for RTD input
990 HL cnt
Set A/D value for High channel Low calibration point for RTD input
991 HH cnt
Set A/D value for High channel High calibration point for RTD input
________________________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Appendix B
Configuration Record
Configuration Record for a

DanLoad 6000 Installation
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

The table on the following pages is intended to provide an easy method for documenting the current
configuration of a DanLoad 6000 Preset. The table contains a numerical sequential list of all
program codes. The table can be photocopied and the current value or selection for each parameter
can be manually entered.
Manually enter the Location, the Unit ID, and the Date.
Enter the Program Mode and scroll through or select the program codes of interest. Manually enter
the indicated value or selection of each program code in the Value / Selection column.
Configuration Record ___________________________________________ Appendix B - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Location:
Code
Unit ID:
Date:
Parameter
Value / Selection
USER 1
001
Passcode
002
User ID
003
USER 2
004
Passcode
005
User ID
006
USER 3
007
Passcode
008
User ID
009
USER 4
010
Passcode
011
User ID
012
USER 5
013
Passcode
014
User ID
015
USER 6
016
Passcode
017
User ID
018
UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>
023
"Side" Stream Blending
Appendix B - 2 _____________________________________________ Configuration Record
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
024
Parameter
Value / Selection
Sequential proportional
025
Operating mode
026
Unit type
027
Valve type
028
Language
029
Product Units
030
Number of data items
031
#1 Enter data item #1
032
033
034
035

036
Prompt time-out (s)
037
Check display
038
Date format
039
Date separator
040
Decimal separator
041
Display data rate

042
Transaction #
043
Batch #
044
Additive units
045
Round method
046
Density/gravity scale
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
047
Parameter
Value / Selection
Batches/transaction
VALVE PARAMETERS
048
Number of valves
049
Initial flow time (s)

METER PARAMETERS
050
Number of meters
METER 1 PARAMETERS
051
Meter ID
052
053
"Side" Stream Meter

METER 2 PARAMETERS
054
Meter ID
055
056
"Side" Stream Meter

METER 3 PARAMETERS
057
Meter ID
058
059
"Side" Stream Meter

METER 4 PARAMETERS
060
Meter ID
061
062
"Side" Stream Meter

METER PARAMETERS
063
Midgrade Primary blend stream meter

COMPONENT PARAMETERS
065
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection
COMPONENT 1
066
Component ID
067
Meter
068
Mass adjustment
COMPONENT 2
069
Component ID
070
Meter
071
Mass adjustment
COMPONENT 3
072
Component ID
073
Meter
074
Mass adjustment
COMPONENT 4
075
Component ID
076
Meter
077
Mass adjustment
DELIVERY PARAMETERS
078
Maximum preset qty
079
Minimum preset qty
080
Preset/delivery type
081
Delivery display type
082
Stop key action
083
Fall back qty

COMP 1 DELIVERY PARAMETERS
084
Low flow start qty
085
Low flow restart qty
086
Low flow stop qty
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
087
Line pack delay (s)
088
Pump stop delay (s)
089
Block valve delay (s)
Value / Selection

090
Low flow start qty
091
092
Low flow stop qty
093
Line pack delay (s)
094
Pump stop delay (s)
095

096
Low flow start qty
097
098
Low flow stop qty
099
Line pack delay (s)
100
Pump stop delay (s)
101

102
Low flow start qty
103
104
Low flow stop qty
105
Line pack delay (s)
106
Pump stop delay (s)
107

DELIVERY PARAMETERS (continued)
108
Ramp clicks
109
Maintenance clicks
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
110
Additive pump stop (s)
111
Primary component
Value / Selection
DIGITAL VALVE 1 PARAMETERS

112
Low flow % error
113
High flow % error
114
115
Open method
116
Low flow % error
117
High flow % error
118
119
Open method
120
Low flow % error
121
High flow % error
122
123
Open method
124
Low flow % error
125
High flow % error
126
127
Open method
PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUTS
128
Number of pulse per unit outputs

PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUT 1
129
Control meters
130
Factor
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
131
Parameter
Value / Selection
Pulse width (ms)

PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUT 2
132
Control meters
133
Factor
134
Pulse width (ms)

ADDITIVE PARAMETERS
135
Number of additives
136
Additive Selection method
137
Inject percentage
138
Clean line qty

ADDITIVE 1 PARAMETERS
139
Control meters
140
Ratio qty
141
Injection method
142
Volume/pulse or K-factor
143
Additive per 1000

144
Control meters
145
Ratio qty
146
Injection method
147
148
Additive per 1000

149
Control meters
150
Ratio qty
151
Injection method
152
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
153
Parameter
Value / Selection
Additive per 1000

154
Control meters
155
Ratio qty
156
Injection method
157
158
Additive per 1000

159
Control meters
160
Ratio qty
161
Injection method
162
163
Additive per 1000

164
Control meters
165
Ratio qty
166
Injection method
167
168
Additive per 1000

METER FACTORS
169
Number of factors/component
170
Meter factor method

COMPONENT 1 FACTORS
171
Nominal K-factor
172
Master meter factor
173
Stop rate
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection
174
Flow rate 1
175
Meter factor 1
176
Flow rate 2
177
Meter factor 2
178
Mlow rate 3
179
Meter factor 3
180
Flow rate 4
181
Meter factor 4
COMPONENT 2 FACTORS
182
Nominal K-factor
183
Master meter factor
184
Stop rate
185
Flow rate 1
186
Meter factor 1
187
Flow rate 2
188
Meter factor 2
189
Flow rate 3
190
Meter factor 3
191
Flow rate 4
Appendix B - 10 _____________________________________________Configuration Record
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
192
Parameter
Value / Selection
Meter factor 4
COMPONENT 3 FACTORS
193
Nominal K-factor
194
Master meter factor
195
Stop rate
196
Flow rate 1
197
Meter factor 1
198
Flow rate 2
199
Meter factor 2
200
Flow rate 3
201
Meter factor 3
202
Flow rate 4
203
Meter factor 4
COMPONENT 4 FACTORS
204
Nominal K-factor
205
Master meter factor
206
Stop rate
207
Flow rate 1
208
Meter factor 1
209
Flow rate 2
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
210
Parameter
Value / Selection
Meter factor 2
211
Flow rate 3
212
Meter factor 3
213
Flow rate 4
214
Meter factor 4
MF VALIDATION
215
Master MF %
216
Adjacent MF %
217
Gross units mnemonic
218
Std units mnemonic
219
Use restart qty

ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>
220
Secondary alarm reset (s)

221
Low flow alarm action
222
Minimum flow rate
223
Low flow time (s)
224
225
Maximum flow rate
226
High flow time (s)

227
Overrun limit qty
228
Underflow alarm action
229
Underflow limit qty
230
No flow t-o alarm action
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
231
No flow t-o time (s)
232
Unauth flow qty
Value / Selection

233
Error limit (pulses)
234
Reset count (pulses)
235
Data logging alarm action
236
Time-out ch. A (s)
237
Time-out ch. B (s)

238
Temp fail alarm action
239
Minimum temperature
240
Maximum temperature
241
Density fail alarm action
242
Minimum density/gravity
243
Maximum density/gravity
244
Minimum pressure
245
Maximum pressure
246
Additive error limit
247
Additive feedback count
248
Block valve time (s)

249
250
#1 Ground detector open
251
252
#2 Overspill detector open

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
253
254
#3 Permissive power failure
255
256
#4 Additive injection failure
Value / Selection

257
258
#5 Arm down side 1
259
260
#6 Arm down side 2

261
262
263
264

265
Circuit 5 type
266
Circuit 6 type
267
Circuit 7 type
268
Circuit 8 type
269
Alarm o/p 1 mask
270
Alarm o/p 2 mask

271
Unauth additive flow vol
272
Prod/add -%
273
Prod/add +%
274
Storage alarm action
275
Power fail alarm action
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection
276
277
Ramp down time (s)
278
Additive per 1000 error limit
279
End time (s)

I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>
280
Slot 1 board
281
Slot 2 board
282
Slot 3 board
283
Slot 4 board
284
Slot 5 board
285
Slot 6 board
286
Slot 7 board
287
Alarm output 1
COMPONENT 1 I/O
288
Pump control output

COMPONENT 2 I/O
289
Pump control output

COMPONENT 3 I/O
290
Pump control output

COMPONENT 4 I/O
291
Pump control output

VALVE 1 I/O
292
293
294
Stem switch 1 (normally closed)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection
295
Stem switch 2 (normally open)
296
Close input
VALVE 2 I/O
297
298
299
300
301
Close input
VALVE 3 I/O
302
303
304
305
306
Close input
VALVE 4 I/O
307
308
309
310
311
Close input
312
Side detect method
313
Pulse per unit output 1
314
Pulse per unit output 2
315
Trip 1 output
316
Trip 2 output
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
317
Parameter
Value / Selection
Trip 3 output
318
Meter 1 temp input
319
Meter 1 offset (Ohms)
320
Meter 1 pres input
321
Meter 1 dens input
322
Meter 1 flow input

324
Meter 2 temp input
325
326
Meter 2 pres input
327
Meter 2 dens input
328
Meter 2 flow input

330
Meter 3 temp input
331
332
Meter 3 pres input
333
Meter 3 dens input
334
Meter 3 flow input

336
Meter 4 temp input
337
338
Meter 4 pres input
339
Meter 4 dens input
340
Meter 4 flow input

341
#cpmt inputs
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
342
Start method
343
Auto/manual change-over
344
Primary alarm reset
Value / Selection

345
Safety circuit 1
346
Safety circuit 2
347
Safety circuit 3
348
Safety circuit 4
349
Safety circuit 5
350
Safety circuit 6
351
Safety circuit 7
352
Safety circuit 8
353
RTD range
354
Delay after outputs

355
Primary LCD type
356
Primary LCD minimum light
357
Primary LCD maximum light
358
Secondary LCD type
359
Secondary LCD minimum light
360
Secondary LCD maximum light

361
Recipe 1 input
362
Recipe 2 input
363
Recipe 3 input
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
364
Recipe 4 input
365
Recipe 5 input
366
Recipe 6 input
Value / Selection

367
Recipe 1 output
368
Recipe 2 output
369
Recipe 3 output
370
Recipe 4 output
371
Recipe 5 output
372
Recipe 6 output
373
End output method

374
Level input
375
Hatch input
376
Swing 1 input
377
Swing 2 input
378
Low flow input
379
Alarm output 2
ADDITIVE 1 I/O PARAMETERS
380
Ratio/valve output
381
382
Selection input
383
Ratio/valve output
384
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
385
Parameter
Value / Selection
Selection input
386
Ratio/valve output
387
388
Selection input
389
Ratio/valve output
390
391
Selection input
392
Ratio/valve output
393
394
Selection input
395
Ratio/valve output
396
397
Selection input
ADDITIVE I/O PARAMETERS
398
Clean line output
399
Flush output
COMPONENT 1 BLOCK VALVE
400
Block valve output
401
Block valve input

402
Block valve output
403
Block valve input

__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
404
Block valve output
405
Block valve input
Value / Selection

406
Block valve output
407
Block valve input

COMPONENT COMBINATIONS <PAGE 5>
408
Combination 1 (1XXX)
409
Combination 2 (X2XX)
410
Combination 3 (12XX)
411
Combination 4 (XX3X)
412
Combination 5 (1X3X)
413
Combination 6 (X23X)
414
Combination 7 (123X)
415
Combination 8 (XXX4)
416
Combination 9 (1XX4)
417
Combination 10 (X2X4)
418
Combination 11 (12X4)
419
Combination 12 (XX34)
420
Combination 13 (1X34)
421
Combination 14 (X234)
422
Combination 15 (1234)
END <PAGE 8>
423
End output
424
End input
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
425
Parameter
Value / Selection
Flush pulses
TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
426
Buoyancy
427
Temperature units
428
Density units
429
Pressure units
430
Reference temperature
431
Sample qty
COMP 1 TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS
432
Temperature option
433
Alpha
434
Backup temperature
435
Temperature option
436
Alpha
437
Backup temperature
438
Temperature option
439
Alpha
440
Backup temperature
441
Temperature option
442
Alpha
443
Backup temperature
COMP 1 PRESSURE PARAMETERS
444
Pressure option
445
F-factor X 1000000000
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
446
Parameter
Value / Selection
Backup pressure
447
Pressure option
448
F-factor X 1000000000
449
Backup pressure
450
Pressure option
451
F-factor X 1000000000
452
Backup pressure
453
Pressure option
454
F-factor X 1000000000
455
Backup pressure
COMP 1 DENSITY/GRAVITY
456
Density/gravity option
457
Backup density/gravity
458
459
460
461
462
463
METER 1
464
Pressure @4 mA
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
465
Pressure @20 mA
466
Density @4 mA
467
Density @20 mA
Value / Selection
METER 2
468
Pressure @4 mA
469
Pressure @20 mA
470
Density @4 mA
471
Density @20 mA
METER 3
472
Pressure @4 mA
473
Pressure @20 mA
474
Density @4 mA
475
Density @20 mA
METER 4
476
Pressure @4 mA
477
Pressure @20 mA
478
Density @4 mA
479
Density @20 mA
RECIPES
480
Number of recipes
RECIPE 1
481
Name
482
Component 1 %
483
Component 2 %
484
Component 3 %
485
Comp 4 % or ratio qty
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
486
Parameter
Value / Selection
Sequence or low proportion

RECIPE 2
487
Name
488
Component 1 %
489
Component 2 %
490
Component 3 %
491
492

RECIPE 3
493
Name
494
Component 1 %
495
Component 2 %
496
Component 3 %
497
498

RECIPE 4
499
Name
500
Component 1 %
501
Component 2 %
502
Component 3 %
503
504

RECIPE 5
505
Name
506
Component 1 %
507
Component 2 %
508
Component 3 %
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
509
510
Value / Selection
RECIPE 6
511
Name
512
Component 1 %
513
Component 2 %
514
Component 3 %
515
516

RECIPE 7
517
Name
518
Component 1 %
519
Component 2 %
520
Component 3 %
521
522

RECIPE 8
523
Name
524
Component 1 %
525
Component 2 %
526
Component 3 %
527
528

RECIPE 9
529
Name
530
Component 1 %
531
Component 2 %
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
532
Component 3 %
533
534
Value / Selection
RECIPE 10
535
Name
536
Component 1 %
537
Component 2 %
538
Component 3 %
539
540

RECIPE 11
541
Name
542
Component 1 %
543
Component 2 %
544
Component 3 %
545
546

RECIPE 12
547
Name
548
Component 1 %
549
Component 2 %
550
Component 3 %
551
552

RECIPE 13
553
Name
554
Component 1 %
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
555
Component 2 %
556
Component 3 %
557
558
Value / Selection
RECIPE 14
559
Name
560
Component 1 %
561
Component 2 %
562
Component 3 %
563
564

RECIPE 15
565
Name
566
Component 1 %
567
Component 2 %
568
Component 3 %
569
570

RECIPE 16
571
Name
572
Component 1 %
573
Component 2 %
574
Component 3 %
575
576

RECIPE 17
577
Name
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
578
Component 1 %
579
Component 2 %
580
Component 3 %
581
582
Value / Selection
RECIPE 18
583
Name
584
Component 1 %
585
Component 2 %
586
Component 3 %
587
588

RECIPE 19
589
Name
590
Component 1 %
591
Component 2 %
592
Component 3 %
593
594

RECIPE 20
595
Name
596
Component 1 %
597
Component 2 %
598
Component 3 %
599
600

RECIPE 21
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
601
Name
602
Component 1 %
603
Component 2 %
604
Component 3 %
605
606
Value / Selection
RECIPE 22
607
Name
608
Component 1 %
609
Component 2 %
610
Component 3 %
611
612

RECIPE 23
613
Name
614
Component 1 %
615
Component 2 %
616
Component 3 %
617
618

RECIPE 24
619
Name
620
Component 1 %
621
Component 2 %
622
Component 3 %
623
624
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection
RECIPE 25
625
Name
626
Component 1 %
627
Component 2 %
628
Component 3 %
629
630

RECIPE 26
631
Name
632
Component 1 %
633
Component 2 %
634
Component 3 %
635
636

RECIPE 27
637
Name
638
Component 1 %
639
Component 2 %
640
Component 3 %
641
642

RECIPE 28
643
Name
644
Component 1 %
645
Component 2 %
646
Component 3 %
647
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
648
Parameter
Value / Selection

RECIPE 29
649
Name
650
Component 1 %
651
Component 2 %
652
Component 3 %
653
654

RECIPE 30
655
Name
656
Component 1 %
657
Component 2 %
658
Component 3 %
659
660

ADDITIVE CALIBRATION
661
# add calib cycles

DATA COMMUNICATIONS
662
Address
Ch. A
663
Mode
664
Data rate
665
Word size
666
Stop bits
667
Parity
Ch. B
668
Mode
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
669
Data rate
670
Word size
671
Stop bits
672
Parity
673
Alarm in manual
Value / Selection
DYNAMIC DATA DISPLAY <PAGE 1>

679
Mode
680
Line 1 data code
681
Line 2 data code
682
Line 3 data code
683
Line 4 data code

684
Line 5 data code
685
Line 6 data code
686
Line 7 data code
687
Line 8 data code

688
Line 9 data code
689
Line 10 data code
690
Line 11 data code
691
Line 12 data code

692
Line 13 data code
693
Line 14 data code
694
Line 15 data code
695
Line 16 data code

DATA LOGGING <PAGE 1>
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
696
Batch summary
697
Transaction summary
698
Alarm log
699
Power fail log
700
Program mode entry/exit
701
W&M switch opened/closed
Value / Selection

702
Program value change log
703
Configuration summary data log
704
Crash memory summary
705
Totalizers
706
Transaction ticket
707
Transaction ticket reprint

708
Thruput
709
Sequence numbers
710
Cutoff hour
BLENDING <PAGE 1>
711
Ramp down %
712
Rate reduction
713
Low flow start qty
714
Clean line qty
715
Low prop fac

BLENDING <PAGE 2>
716
Correct after qty
717
Alarm after qty
718
Adjustment qty
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
719
Comp % display
720
Add calib delay (s)
Value / Selection
BLENDING <PAGE 3>

722
Blend error method
723
Max dev %
724
Blend tol %
725
Max dev vol
726
Blend tol vol
727
Blend sample qty

METER 1
728
Flow adj fac
729
Ratio adj fac
730
Ramp %
731
CALMON analysis method

METER 2
734
Flow adj fac
735
Ratio adj fac
736
Ramp %
737

METER 3
740
Flow adj fac
741
Ratio adj fac
742
Ramp %
743

METER 4
746
Flow adj fac
747
Ratio adj fac
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
748
Ramp %
749
Value / Selection
MPMC
752
FPO basis
753
CALMON error limit
754
CALMON reset count
755
Calib fail alarm action

METER 1
756
FPO
757
Number of blades
758
Max max char dev
759
Max tot char devs
760
Calibration sample
METER 2
761
FPO
762
Number of blades
763
Max max char dev
764
Max tot char devs
765
Calibration sample
METER 3
766
FPO
767
Number of blades
768
Max max char dev
769
Max tot char devs
770
Calibration sample
METER 4
771
FPO
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
772
Number of blades
773
Max max char dev
774
Max tot char devs
775
Calibration sample
Value / Selection
RECIPE 1
776
Low flow rate
777
High flow rate

RECIPE 2
778
Low flow rate
779
High flow rate

RECIPE 3
780
Low flow rate
781
High flow rate

RECIPE 4
782
Low flow rate
783
High flow rate

RECIPE 5
784
Low flow rate
785
High flow rate

RECIPE 6
786
Low flow rate
787
High flow rate

RECIPE 7
788
Low flow rate
789
High flow rate

RECIPE 8
790
Low flow rate
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
791
Parameter
Value / Selection
High flow rate

RECIPE 9
792
Low flow rate
793
High flow rate

RECIPE 10
794
Low flow rate
795
High flow rate

RECIPE 11-20
796
Low flow rate
797
High flow rate

RECIPE 21-30
798
Low flow rate
799
High flow rate

ADDITIVE 1
800
Pump output
801
Block valve output

ADDITIVE 2
803
Pump output
804
Block valve output

ADDITIVE 3
806
Pump output
807
Block valve output

ADDITIVE 4
809
Pump output
810
Block valve output

ADDITIVE 5
812
Pump output
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
813
Parameter
Value / Selection
Block valve output

ADDITIVE 6
815
Pump output
816
Block valve output

LPG/pressure
818
PT type
819
Pe method
820
Pinch back method
821
Pinch back pressure
822
Atmospheric pressure
823
Pinch back qty
824
T1
825
Pe1 at T1
826
T2
827
Pe2 at T2
828
T3
829
Pe at T3
SAFETY CIRCUITS
830
Circuit 1 type
831
Circuit 2 type
832
Circuit 3 type
833
Circuit 4 type
TRANSACTION / BATCH FILE CONFIGURATION <PAGE 1>
834
Transaction record length
835
Start page and # pages
836
Batch record length
837
Start page and # pages
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
838
Tr tk format
839
Time out tr
Value / Selection
TRANSACTION FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 2>

840
1 Addr
841
2 Tr seq #
842
3 Recipe #
843
4 Recipe name
844
5 Side
845
6 Prompt 1
846
7 Prompt 2
847
8 Prompt 3
848
9 Prompt 4
849
10 Prompt 5
850
11 Data item 1
851
12 Data item 2
852
13 Data item 3
853
14 Data item 4
854
15 Data item 5
855
16 Start date
856
17 End date
857
18 Gross
858
19 Std
859
20 Temp
860
21 Pres
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
861
22 Dens
862
23 Start gross
863
24 Start std
Value / Selection

864
25 End gross
865
26 End std
866
27 Alarm bit map
867
28 Prim alarm
868
29 Temp alarm
869
30 Add 1
870
31 Add 2
871
32 Add 3
872
33 Add 4
873
34 Add 5
874
35 Add 6
875
36 Op mode
TR FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 8>
876
37 Gross units
877
38 Std units
BATCH FILE OFFSETS <PAGE 9>
880
1 Addr
881
2 Ba seq #
882
3 Tr seq #
883
4 Temp
884
5 Pres
885
6 Dens
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection

886
7 Preset
887
8 Gross
888
9 Std
889
10 Comp gross
890
11 Comp std
891
12 Comp temp
892
13 Comp dens
893
14 Comp pres
894
15 Comp %
895
16 Add 1
896
17 Add 2
897
18 Add 3
898
19 Add 4
899
20 Add 5
900
21 Add 6
901
22 Op mode
902
23 CCF
TSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 1>
920
1 Addr
921
2 Tr seq #
922
3 Recipe #
923
4 Recipe name
924
5 Side
925
6 Prompt 1
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
Value / Selection

926
7 Prompt 2
927
8 Prompt 3
928
9 Prompt 4
929
10 Prompt 5
930
11 Data item 1
931
12 Data item 2
932
13 Data item 3
933
14 Data item 4
934
15 Data item 5
935
16 Start date
936
17 End date
937
18 Gross
938
19 Std
939
20 Temp
940
21 Pres
941
22 Dens
942
23 Start gross
943
24 Start std
944
25 End gross
945
26 End std
946
27 Alarm bit map
947
28 Prim alarm
948
29 Temp alarm
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Code
949
Parameter
Value / Selection
30 Add 1
950
31 Add 2
951
32 Add 3
952
33 Add 4
953
34 Add 5
954
35 Add 6
955
36 Op mode
956
37 Gross units
957
38 Std units
ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 8>
960
1 Addr
961
2 Ba seq #
962
3 Tr seq #
963
4 Temp
964
5 Pres
965
6 Dens
BSC PRINT ROW/COLUMN <PAGE 9>
966
7 Preset
967
8 Gross
968
9 Std
969
10 Comp gross
970
11 Comp std
971
12 Comp temp
972
13 Comp dens
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)
Code
Parameter
973
14 Comp pres
974
15 Comp %
975
16 Add 1
976
17 Add 2
977
18 Add 3
Value / Selection

978
19 Add 4
979
20 Add 5
980
21 Add 6
981
22 Op mode
982
23 CCF
ANALOG INPUTS (v2 CPU)
983
RTD Alpha
CPU 4-20 mA (v2 CPU)
984
LL cnt (4-20 mA input)
985
LH cnt (4-20 mA input)
986
HL cnt (4-20 mA input)
987
HH cnt (4-20 mA input)

CPU RTD (v2 CPU)
988
LL cnt (RTD input)
989
LH cnt (RTD input)
990
HL cnt (RTD input)
991
HH cnt (RTD input)
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________
Appendix C
LPG Loading
Configuration Checklist
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

LPG Loading Procedures and Sub-Procedures
INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
1) TEMPERATURE CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
2) PRESSURE CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
3) PRESSURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
B) PRESSURE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLE VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
D) VAPOR PRESSURE METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
LPG Loading Configuration Checklist ______________________________ Appendix C - 1
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Instructions
This appendix contains three main procedures (1-3) and six sub-procedures (A-F) for configuring
the Daniel DanLoad 6000 electronic preset for LPG loading. The three main procedures are:
- 1) Temperature correction,
- 2) Pressure correction, and
- 3) Pressure control.
Start with the page titled "LPG Loading Configuration Checklist" below. Follow the applicable main
procedures (following the sub-procedures as directed in the text) and check individual steps "X"
when complete or mark "N/A".
NOTE: The best way to configure the dynamic data display is to write down the data
codes you require as you encounter them in the procedures and sub-procedures and
configure the dynamic data display pages (program code 680, etc.) at the end.
The DanLoad 6000 should not be placed into operation until all applicable procedures have been
completed.
NOTE: Although up to four meters, components, etc. can be configured on the
DanLoad 6000, this appendix lists only the program codes and the data code for the
first two meters, components, etc. Those for other meters, components, etc. can be
found in Section 6.
Appendix C - 2 ______________________________ LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

LPG Loading Configuration Checklist
Configure K-factors, meter factors, flow rates, delivery parameters, safety circuits, recipes, etc. based
on the user's requirements.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))If temperature correction is required, i.e. standard quantity corrected for temperature, perform
procedure 1) TEMPERATURE CORRECTION.
+)),
.................................................................................................... .))-
If pressure correction is required, i.e. standard quantity corrected for pressure, perform procedure 2)
PRESSURE CORRECTION.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If flow control based on pressure is required, i.e. flow control valve "pinch back", perform procedure
3) PRESSURE CONTROL.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Discuss any outstanding questions concerning local safety practices or use of the equipment with the
user.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Verify field wiring using the DanLoad 6000's "Diagnostics"/"Inputs/Outputs" option in the program
mode menu.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display pages (program code 680, etc.) using the data codes specified
in the procedures and sub-procedures that you have followed.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Verify the DanLoad 6000's valve control, standard quantity computations and dynamic data display
values (press the "SELECT" key while in the loading display) by loading "small" batches.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

1) TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
Perform procedure F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS.

+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure a temperature correction option per component (program codes 432, 435, etc.). The
temperature correction option selected depends on the user's operational requirements. TP-16" is
typically used in the United States.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
When "Linear", "6C" or "54C" is selected, the component's alpha (program codes 433, 436, etc.),
which is its coefficient of thermal expansion per the configured temperature units, must be
configured.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Perform procedure C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLE VOLUME.

+)),
.....................................................................................................))Perform procedure E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE.

+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the CTL factor per meter (data
codes 126, 127, etc.) and the combined correction factor per meter (data codes 9, 26, etc.) are
displayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure the
dynamic data display pages at the end.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

2) PRESSURE CORRECTION
Perform procedure B) PRESSURE INPUTS.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the PT type (program code 818) is "Pm", i.e. static pressure transmitters, perform procedure D)
VAPOR PRESSURE METHOD since Pd = Pm - Pe must be computed for the pressure correction
computation.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure a pressure correction option per component (program codes 444, 447, etc.) based on the
user's requirement, industry standards or local standards. 11.2.2" is typically used in the United
States.
WARNING: Selection of an incorrect pressure correction option is potentially
dangerous.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))When "Const" is selected, the component's F-factor (program codes 445, 448, etc.), which is its
compressibility factor in volume units per pressure unit, must be configured.
WARNING: Entry of an incorrect pressure correction option or and incorrectly
scaled F-factor is potentially dangerous, especially if batch delivery is by standard
quantity (program code 80).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS. (The temperature is required in order to perform

pressure correction.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES. (The density is required in order to perform

pressure correction.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Perform procedure C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLING VOLUME.

+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Perform procedure E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE.

+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the CPL factor per meter (data
codes 139, 140, etc.) and the combined correction factor per meter (data codes 9, 26, etc.) are
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

3) PRESSURE CONTROL
Determine the pinch back method from the user's requirements. Configure the pinch back method
(program code 820).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))If the pinch back method is "Sw.", i.e. pressure switches are used, configure a close input per flow
control valve (program codes 296, 301, etc.).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Test the pressure switch per valve via inputs/outputs diagnostic.

+)),
.....................................................................................................))If the pinch back method is "Sw.", adjust the pressure switches per valve to be closed when there is
sufficient pressure to load and open otherwise.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the pinch back method is "Pm" or "Pd" perform procedure B) PRESSURE INPUTS.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))If the pinch back method is "Pm" configure the pinch back pressure (program code 821) to be the
static pressure below which pressure control adjustments will be made to the flow control valve.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))If the pinch back method is "Pd" configure the pinch back pressure (program code 821) to be the
differential pressure below which pressure control adjustments will be made to the flow control
valve.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the pinch back method is "Pd", i.e. valve control based on differential pressure, and the PT type
(program code 818) is "Pm", i.e. static pressure transmitters, perform procedure D) VAPOR
PRESSURE METHOD since Pd = Pm - Pe must be computed.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the unit type (program code 26) is "In-line", configure the ramp down percentage (program code
711) to a suitable percentage of the configured high flow rate. (There is one high flow rate per
recipe.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure the unable to ramp down alarm so that a failure of the flow rate to decrease can be
detected and acted on (program code 276 and 277).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
NOTE: If you experience pressure failure alarms right at the start of a batch, you
may want to consider setting the pinch back quantity (program code 823). See
Section 6.
***
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

A) TEMPERATURE INPUTS
NOTE: This procedure is for 100S RTD inputs ("live" temperatures) or backup
temperatures.
Configure an appropriate temperature failure alarm action (program code 238). The default value,
i.e. "Primary", is usually acceptable. However, if loading is to continue with backup temperatures
(program codes 434, 437, etc.) when the temperature goes out of range during a batch, set the
temperature failure alarm action to "Info" and enter backup temperatures (program code 434, 437,
etc.).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure appropriate minimum and maximum temperatures (program codes 239 and 240) for
temperature failure alarms, i.e. slightly below and above the temperatures that should be measured
during normal operation.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure an RTD input for each meter (program codes 318, 324, etc.). When 3-wire RTD's are
being used (not recommended) it may be necessary to compute a "resistance offset" (program code
319, 325, etc.) using a high-spec 100S resistor.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the current temperature per
meter (data codes 74, 80, etc.) and the average temperature per component (data code 75, 81, etc.)
are displayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure the
WARNING: Incorrect temperature configuration is potentially dangerous, especially
if batch delivery is by standard quantity (program code 80) or vapor pressure
computation for differential pressure is required.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

B) PRESSURE INPUTS
Configure appropriate minimum and maximum pressures (program codes 244 and 245, using
pressure units appropriate to the pressure correction option being used) for pressure failure alarms,
i.e. slightly below and above the pressures that should be measured even when there is no batch in
progress.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure a pressure input for each meter (program codes 320, 326, etc.).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure the pressure transmitter type, i.e. static or differential pressure (program code 818).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Calibrate the pressure inputs by configuring the pressures corresponding to 4 mA and 20 mA per
meter (program codes 464 and 465, 468 and 469, etc. using pressure units appropriate to the pressure
correction option being used) using the information marked on the pressure transmitter.
WARNING: Incorrect pressure transmitter calibration is potentially dangerous due
to product "flashing" and overruns if batch delivery is by standard quantity
(program code 80).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the current pressure per meter
(data codes 135, 136, etc.) and the average pressure per component (data code 108, 110, etc.) are
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

C) TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE SAMPLE QUANTITY
Configure a suitable sample quantity (program code 431) for temperature and/or pressure correction,
i.e. standard quantity computation. This should be sufficiently small to allow good average
temperatures and pressures to be computed, but should not be less than the quantity which flows in
one second of any component at its highest flow rate. This quantity does not affect temperature and
pressure sampling for alarm and "pressure maintenance" purposes.
WARNING: If the sample quantity (program code 431) is too large the standard
quanties computed by the DanLoad 6000 will not be correct.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

D) VAPOR PRESSURE METHOD
Configure the vapor pressure (Pe) method (program code 819) based on the user's requirements,
industry standards or local standards. TP-15" is typically used in the United States. The vapor
pressure is required in order to compute the differential pressure (Pm - Pe) which is used for pressure
correction (computation of standard quantity) and (optionally) for valve control (program code 820).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))If the vapor pressure method is "Const Pe" enter the fixed vapor pressure per component (program
codes 446, 449, etc.).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "2 point" enter two known temperature and vapor pressure pairs
(program codes 824 through 827).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "3 point" enter three known temperature and vapor pressure pairs
(program codes 824 through 829).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))If the vapor pressure method is "Hillburn" enter the known vapor pressure at 100F per component
(program codes 446, 449, etc.).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If the vapor pressure method is "TP-15" perform procedure F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES. (The

density scale (program code 46) should be 4 and relative densities 60F/60F and temperatures in
F are required.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))Configure the atmospheric pressure (program code 822). The "standard" atmospheric pressure for
the printed TP-16 tables is 14.7 psia. The actual atmospheric pressure allows the component's vapor
pressures to be computed most accurately.
WARNING: Component vapor pressures (Pe) are used to determine differential
pressure (Pm - Pe), which is used for pressure correction (standard quantities) and
valve pressure control. Incorrect configuration is potentially dangerous.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
__________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

E) PRESET/DELIVERY TYPE
Configure the preset/delivery type (program code 80) to be "Gross" or "Std" based on the user's
requirements.
WARNING: The gross quantity of LPG's changes depending on temperature and
pressure, more so than with gasolines. Users may wish to deliver standard quantity
or may have a policy of delivering gross quantities that take maximum expansion into
account.
WARNING: The gross quantity the volume actually occupied by the product at the
(average) measured temperature. The standard quantity, i.e. the temperature and
pressure corrected quantity, is "equivalent" to mass (weight), i.e. weight in pounds
= net volume in gallons x density in pounds per gallon.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the delivery display type (program code 81) to be "Gross" or "Std" based on the user's
requirements. (The determines whether the gross loaded quantity or the standard loaded quantity is
displayed during a batch.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

F) DENSITIES/GRAVITIES
Configure the density/gravity scale (program code 46) to allow densities/gravities to be formatted
correctly for display, printing, and calculation, i.e. 1 for kg/m3 (format 9999.9), 2 for API (format
999.99), 4 for kg/L or relative density (format 9.9999).
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If 4-20 mA density transmitters are to be used (not necessary if the density at standard conditions is
a constant), set the density/gravity option per component (program codes 456, 458, etc.) to "On"
(DanLoad 6000 v4.00 and below) or "DT" (DanLoad 6000 v4.06 and above), configure appropriate
minimum and maximum densities/gravities (program codes 242 and 243) for density failure alarms,
i.e. slightly below and above the densities that should be measured during normal operation,
configure the densities corresponding to 4 mA and 20 mA per meter (program codes 466 and 467,
470 and 471, etc.), and configure a density input per meter (program codes 321, 327, etc.)
NOTE: The DanLoad 6000 is not capable of correcting densities/gravities at ambient
conditions to densities/gravities at standard/reference conditions. Density
transmitters should be used only if the densitometer can perform the correction
external to the DanLoad 6000.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
If density transmitters are not to be used (or if a backup density is required for any other reason)
configure the backup density/gravity per component (program codes 457, 458, etc.). The
density/gravity at "standard conditions" for the required temperature and pressure correction options
should be entered, e.g. relative density 60F/60F for GPA TP-16 and API Table 11.2.2.
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
Configure the dynamic data display (program code 680, etc.) so that the current density/gravity per
meter (data codes 143, 144, etc.) and the average density/gravity per component (data code 107, 109,
etc.) are displayed. (You may wish simply to write down the data codes you require and configure
the dynamic data display pages at the end.)
+)),
.....................................................................................................))-
***
Appendix D
Spare Parts
Spare Parts - DanLoad 6000

Item
Quantity
Model No.
Part No.
6000-(--------)
Description
Model number from unit tag
Spare Printed Circuit Board Assemblies

1
(---1----)
3-6000-002
2-Ch. Meter Pulse Board CE-12604
(---2----)
3-6000-042
4-Ch. Meter Pulse Board
(----1---)
3-6000-005
AC I/O Board CE-12613
(-----1--)
3-6000-006
DC I/O Board CE-12616
(-------2)
3-6000-020
DUART (2) RS-485 Ports CE-12625-2
(-------1)
3-6000-009
DUART (1) RS-232 / (1) RS-485 Port

CE-12625-1
(----2---)
3-6000-010
Additive Injection Board CE-12628
3-6000-048
Enhanced I/O Board (3 HIGH & 3 LOW

status points)
3-6000-049
Enhanced I/O Board (All HIGH status

points)
10
(------2-)
3-6000-007
A/D 8-Channel Board CE-12619-2
11
(------1-)
3-6000-026
A/D 2 Channel Board CE-12725
12
(--1-----)
3-6000-027
115 Vac Power Supply CE-12575-1
13
(--2-----)
3-6000-031
230 Vac Power Supply CE-12575-2
14
(-1------)
3-6000-052
Keypad Assembly [English] CE-12680
15
(-3------)
3-6000-054
Keypad Assembly [French] CE-12680
16
(-2------)
3-6000-055
Keypad Assembly [Spanish] CE-12680
17
All
3-6000-038
Display CE-12578
18
All
3-6000-029
CPU Board CE-12581
19
All
3-6000-030
Keyboard CE-12584
20
All
3-6000-032
Motherboard CE-12590
Optional Assemblies
21
3-6000-017
I/O Card Extender BE-12647-1
22
3-6000-047
Power Supply Card Extender BE-12647-2
23
3-6000-050
Battery (CPU) Module 3.0V BE-11887
24
3-6000-070
Rib/Cable Key-Display BE-12685
25
3-6000-071
Rib/Cable Display-CPU BE-12683
Spare Parts - DanLoad 6000

Item
Quantity
26
27
Model No.
Part No.
Description
3-6000-073
Rib/Cable P/S-Display BE-12689
3-6000-013
P/S Board Meter Pulse Board AE-12637

[Included in part number 3-6000-002 (see
above)]
Optional Mechanical Parts

28
4-9213-510
Enclosure lid mounting bolts

socket head M10-1.5 X 50MM
29
4-9213-511
Enclosure mounting bolts

socket head M10-1.5 X 15MM
30
4-9213-512
Enclosure lid security mounting bolts

socket head M10-1.5 X 60MM w/hole
31
4-9200-013
Keypad wire seal screw
Manuals
32
3-9000-670
DanLoad 6000 Reference Manual
33
3-9000-674
DanLoad 6000 Communications

Specification
Optional Auxillary Equipment

34
1-6000-006
RAM Copy Eraser
35
1-6000-005
DanLoad 6000 Simulator
36
3-6000-123
2-Channel Pulse Simulator
Appendix E
Field Wiring Drawings
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Field Wiring,
Power Supply
CPU & DUART Board
Meter Pulse Bd (2-Ch)
AC I/O Board
DC I/O Board
Additive Injector Bd
8-Chan. ADC Board
2-Chan. ADC Board
Remote Display
P/S 6000R
Meter Pulse Bd (4-Ch)
Enhanced I/O Bd
CPU Version 2
Remote Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop & Display
RS-485 2-Wire, Model 6000
CE-12692
CE-12693
CE-12694
CE-12695
CE-12696
CE-12697
CE-12698
BE-12707
BE-12711
BE-12714
CE-15532
CE-19027
BE-19712
AE-19713
BE-19714
BE-19862
Appendix F
Other Drawings
Print Sharer Wiring (Dresselhaus)

Wiring for Model 1815 Valve
Outline and Dimension XP enclosure
Overview and Board Layout
Suggested Permissive Wiring
Suggested Permissive Wiring Swing Arm Apps
Program Code to Device Assignments
Device Linkages
Typical DanLoad 6000 Wiring Diagram
Surge Protect, V. 1 DUART, RS-485 Multipt
Surge Protect, V. 2 DUART, (2) RS-485
Surge Protect, V. 2 DUART, RS-485 Multipt
Surge Protect, V. 2 DUART, RS-485 & RS-232
Control Valve Seal Placement
Turbine Meter Seal Placement
DanLoad 6000 Preset Seal Placement
Typical Swing Arm / Ground Wiring
BE-12462
AE-12496
DE-12535
CE-12691
BE-12722
BE-12789
DE-18201
BE-18204
DE-19253
CE-19391
CE-19392
CE-19393
CE-19394
AK-31030
AK-31031
AK-31032
AK-31033
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.

RETURN POLICY FOR WARRANTY
AND NON-WARRANTY MATERIAL
Use the following procedure for returning equipment to the Daniel factory in the United States.
Step 1
Obtaining a RMA Number
A Return Material Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained prior to returning any
equipment for any reason.
To obtain a RMA number, call the Customer Service Department at 713-827-5033 between 8:00
a.m. and 5:00 p.m. (Central Standard Time), Monday through Friday, except holidays or email
daniel.support@emersonprocess.com.
No product returns will be accepted without a RMA number and will be returned at the
customers expense.
For warranty consideration, the product must be returned to Daniel within twelve (12) months
of the date of original shipment or within eighteen (18) months of the date of original shipment
of the product to destinations outside the United States. The Purchaser must prepay any
shipping charges.
In addition, the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any product shipped for return, and assumes
the risk of loss of the product during shipment.
The following information is required at the time the RMA is issued:
Customer name
Contact name
Billing address
Contact Phone # and email address
Daniel SO #, PO #, or Invoice #
Item(s) to be returned
Reason for return
End user and final destination address
Consignees complete name, address, contact name and phone number
A RMA number is required for each original order. (Example: Two fittings purchased on
two separate orders now being returned require two RMA numbers.)
For product returns from locations outside the United States, Daniel Customer Service
personnel will provide additional shipping requirements.
Step 2
Cleaning and Decontamination
Prior to shipment, thoroughly clean and decontaminate all equipment removing all foreign
substances. This includes all substances used for cleaning the equipment. The cleaning and
decontamination requirement applies to any part exposed to process fluids or cleaning substances.
Shipping equipment that has not been decontaminated may be in violation of U.S. Department of
Transportation (DOT) regulations. For your reference, the requirements for packaging and labeling
hazardous substances are listed in DOT regulations 49 CFR 172, 178, and 179.
If you suspect that a part has been contaminated, the part must be completely drained and flushed
to remove contaminants.
MAY CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY TO PERSONNEL

Contents may be under pressure or materials may be hazardous
Follow appropriate handling instructions for accessing pressurized equipment. Avoid contact
with hazardous materials or contaminated units and parts. Failure to do so may result in death
or serious injury.
Decontamination/Cleaning Statement
A blank Decontamination/Cleaning Statement is provided on the Returned Material Authorization
Repair Form for Used Equipment.
A Decontamination/Cleaning Statement is required for each returned part.

Fully complete each form and include a signature. If the decontamination statement is
incomplete, the customer may be charged for decontamination and cleaning.
If the equipment has been exposed to a known hazardous substance with any characteristic that can
be identified in the Code of Federal Regulations, 40 CFR 261.20 through 261.24, the chemical
abstracts number and hazardous waste number/hazard code must be stated in the space provided on
the form.
Two (2) copies of each Decontamination/Cleaning Statement must be provided:
One (1) copy must be attached to the outside of the package.
One (1) copy must be included inside the package.
Step 3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Provide a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) with the returned equipment for each substance that
has come in contact with the equipment being returned, including substances used for
decontamination and cleaning.
A MSDS sheet is required by law to be available to people exposed to specific hazardous
substances, with one exception: if the equipment has only been exposed to food-grade substances
or potable water, or other substances for which an MSDS is not applicable, the
Decontamination/Cleaning Statement form alone is acceptable.
Two (2) copies of each MSDS must be provided:
One (1) copy must be attached to the outside of the package.
One (1) copy must be provided inside the package.
Step 4
Packaging
Shipping a Device With Possible Contamination

To meet DOT requirements for identifying hazardous substances, ship only one device per package.
Shipping a Device Without Any Potential Contamination
Devices being returned may be shipped together in one package, if there is no potential of foreign
substance contamination.
Step 5
Shipping
Before returning used equipment:
Mark each package clearly with a RMA number.
Include a Decontamination/Cleaning Statement inside the package.
Attach a duplicate Decontamination/Cleaning statement to the outside of the package.
Include a MSDS for each substance that has come in contact with the equipment inside the
package.
Attach a duplicate MSDS to the outside of the package.
No product returns will be accepted without a RMA number and will be returned at the
customers expense.
For warranty consideration, the product must be returned to Daniel within twelve (12) months
of the date of original shipment or within eighteen (18) months of the date of original shipment
of the product to destinations outside the United States. The Purchaser must prepay any
shipping charges.
Ship all * mechanical equipment to the following address:

Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc.
Attn: Service Dept.
5650 Brittmoore Rd.
Houston, TX 77041
Ref: RMA#____________________
*Mechanical equipment includes: Orifice Fittings, Parts, Plates, Seal Rings, Turbine Meters,
Control Valves, Provers, Strainers, Meter Tubes, Ultrasonic Meters, Flow Conditioners, etc.
Ship all * electronic equipment to the following address:

Attn: Service Dept.
11100 Brittmoore Park Drive
Houston, TX 77041
Ref: RMA#____________________
*Electronic equipment includes: Gas Chromatographs, Petrocount Presets, Danload Preset,
Ultrasonic Meter Electronics (CPU boards, transducers, etc.), 2403 Totalizer, MRT 97 Indicator,
Preamps, Pick Up Coils, Prover Interface Boards, and the following Flow Computer Models: 2230,
2239, 2270, 2460, 2470, S100, 2100, and 3000.

Returned Material Authorization
Repair Form for Used Equipment
Including Decontamination/Cleaning Statement
1. Return Material Authorization (RMA) Number ____________________________________
2. Equipment to be returned:
Model Number _________________________ Serial Number _______________________
3. Reason for return: ___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Decontamination/Cleaning Fluids Process
A.
List each substance in which the equipment was exposed. Attach additional documents if necessary.
Common
Name
B.
CAS# if
available
Used for Hazardous

Waste (20 CFR 261)
[ ] Yes
[ ] No
[ ] Yes
[ ] No
[ ] Yes
[ ] No
[ ] Yes
[ ] No
[ ] Yes
[ ] No
[ ] Yes
[ ] No
EPA Waste Code

if used for hazardous waste
Circle any hazards and/or process fluid types that apply:

Infectious
Radioactive
Explosive
Pyrophoric
Poison Gas
Cyanides
Sulfides
Corrosive
Oxidizer
Flammable
Carcinogen
Peroxide
Reactive-Air
Reactive-Water
Reactive-Other
(list)
Poison
Other hazard category (list):
C.
Describe decontamination/cleaning process. Include MSDS description for substances used in decontamination and
cleaning processes. Attach additional documents if necessary.
Shipping Requirements
Failure to comply with this procedure will result in the shipment being refused.
4. Write the RMA number on the shipping package.
5. Inside the package include one copy of this document and all required Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS)
6. Outside of the package attach one copy of this document and all required Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS).
THIS EQUIPMENT, BEING RETURNED FOR REPAIR, HAS BEEN COMPLETELY
DECONTAMINATED AND CLEANED. ALL FOREIGN SUBSTANCES HAVE BEEN
DOCUMENTED ABOVE AND MSDS SHEETS ARE ATTACHED.
By:
(Signature)
Title:
(Print name)
Date:
Company:
Phone:
Fax:
The sales and service offices of Daniel Measurement and Control are located
throughout the United States and in major countries overseas.
Please contact Daniel Measurement Services at
11100 Brittmoore Park Drive, Houston, Texas 77041, or phone (713) 827-6314
for the location of the sales or service office nearest you.
Daniel Measurement Services offers both on-call and contract
maintenance service designed to provide single-source
responsibility for all Daniel products.
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., and Daniel Measurement Services, Inc.
Divisions of Emerson Process Management reserves the right to make changes to any of its products or services
at any time without prior notification in order to improve that product or service and to supply
the best product or service possible.
www.emersonprocess.com/daniel

3 9000 670 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3 9000 670 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3 9000 670 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DanLoad 6000

DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC.

Part Number: 3-9000-670

Supporting Software Version 6.00

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

DanLoad 6000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of DanLoad 6000 Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Initial Setup Procedure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Process I/O Signal Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Product Delivery and Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70

Temperature and Pressure Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

Mass Loading Using a Mass Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86

Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

Transaction Storage Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compartment Size Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164

Cutoff (End of Day Processing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Set Contrast / Backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166

Configuration Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175

Batch Delivery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Alarm Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

FLOW METER PROVING

General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Tank Prover Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00)

PROGRAM CODE DESCRIPTIONS

Program Code Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Program Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Meter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

Component Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Digital Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Pulse Per Unit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Additive Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112

Additive I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144

Component I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-148

Temperature / Pressure / Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158

Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186

Dynamic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190

Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202

DanLoad 6000 (v6.00) __________________________________________________________

Additive Pumps / Block Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-228

LPG / Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-230